basic information - ogan teknikogantek.com/photo/uploads/files/engine and turbine management... ·...

Heinzmann GmbH & Co. KG

Engine & Turbine Controls Am Haselbach 1 D-79677 Schönau / Germany

Phone: +49 7673 8208-0 Fax: +49 7673 8208-188

[email protected]

Copyright 2011 by Heinzmann GmbH & Co. KG. All rights reserved. This publication may not be reproduced by any means whatsoever or passed on to any third parties.

E-mail: www.heinzmann.com

V.A.T. No.: DE145551926

HEINZMANN

Magnetic Valve Control

(MVC)

DARDANOS

Basic Information for

Electronically Controlled Injection Systems

PPN – PNU – CR

Level 6

5740 Manual MV 09 001-e / 06-11

mailto:[email protected]

The appropriate manuals must be thoroughly studied before instal-lation, initial start-up and maintenance.

All instructions pertaining to the system and safety must be followed in full. Non-observance of the instructions may lead to injury to persons and/or material damage.

HEINZMANN shall not be held liable for any damage caused through non-observance of instructions.

Independent tests and inspections are of particular importance for all

applications in which a malfunction could result in injury to persons or material damage.

All examples and data, as well as all other information in this manual are there solely for the purpose of instruction and they may not be used for special application without the operator running independent tests and inspections beforehand.

HEINZMANN does not guarantee, neither expressly nor tacitly, that the examples, data or other information in this manual is free from er-ror, complies with industrial standards or fulfils the requirements of any special application.

To avoid any injury to persons and damage to systems, the following monitoring and protective systems must be provided:

Overspeed protection independent of the rpm controller

HEINZMANN shall not be held liable for any damage caused through missing or insufficiently rated overspeed protection.

thermal overload protection

The following must also be provided for alternator systems:

Overcurrent protection

Protection against faulty synchronisation for excessively-large fre-quency, voltage or phase difference

Directional contactor

The reasons for overspeeding may be:

Failure of positioning device, control unit or its auxiliary devices

Linkage sluggishness and jamming

The following must be observed before an installation:

Always disconnect the electrical mains supply before any interven-tions to the system.

Only use cable screening and mains supply connections that corre-spond with the European Union EMC Directive

Check the function of all installed protection and monitoring systems

Basic Information DARDANOS


Please observe the following for electronically controlled injection (MVC):

For common rail systems each injector line must be equipped with a separate mechanical flow-rate limiter

For unit pump (PLD) and pump-injector unit (PDE) systems, the fuel enable is first made possible by the solenoid valve’s control plunger motion. This means that in the event of the control plunger sticking, the fuel supply to the injection valve is stopped.

As soon as the positioning device receives power, it can actuate the controller output shaft automatically at any given time. The range of the controller shaft or control linkage must therefore be secured against unauthorised access.

HEINZMANN expressly rejects any implied guarantee pertaining to any marketability or suitability for a special purpose, including in the event that HEINZMANN was notified of such a special purpose or the manual contains a reference to such a special purpose. HEINZMANN shall not be held liable for any indirect and direct dam-age nor for any incidental and consequential damage that results from application of any of the examples, data or miscellaneous information as given in this manual. HEINZMANN shall not provide any guarantee for the design and planning of the overall technical system. This is a matter of the operator its planners and its specialist engineers. They are also responsible for checking whether the performances of our devices match the intended purpose. The operator is also responsible for a correct initial start-up of the overall system.

Table of contents

Table of contents

Page

1 Safety instructions and related symbols..........................Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.

1.1 Basic safety measures for normal operation............Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.

1.2 Basic safety measures for servicing and maintenanceFehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.

1.3 Before putting an installation back in operation after maintenance and repairsFehler! Textmarke nicht def

2 General ................................................................................................................................... 4

2.1 General system description.............................................................................................. 4

2.2 Further information ......................................................................................................... 5

2.3 Control systems ............................................................................................................... 6

2.3.1 PPN System (Pump-Pipe-Nozzle) ........................................................................... 6

2.3.2 PNU System (Pump-Nozzle-Unit)........................................................................... 7

2.3.3 CR system (Common rail) ....................................................................................... 8

2.4 pecification of MVC 01 - 10/20 ...................................................................................... 9

2.4.1 General..................................................................................................................... 9

2.4.2 Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................. 10

2.4.3 Communication...................................................................................................... 10

2.4.4 Functional Block Diagram of Inputs and Outputs ................................................. 11

2.4.5 Dimensional Drawing ............................................................................................ 12

2.5 Specification of control unit DARDANOS MVC03-8 ................................................. 13

2.5.1 General................................................................................................................... 13

2.5.2 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................. 14

2.5.3 Communication...................................................................................................... 15

2.5.4 Functional block diagram of inputs and outputs.................................................... 16

2.5.5 Dimensional drawing............................................................................................. 17

2.6 Specification of control unit DARDANOS MVC04-6 ................................................. 18

2.6.1 General................................................................................................................... 18

2.6.2 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................. 18

2.6.3 Board specification and pin assignment ................................................................ 20

2.6.4 Communication...................................................................................................... 21

2.6.5 Functional block diagram of inputs and outputs.................................................... 21

2.6.6 Dimensional drawing............................................................................................. 22

2.7 Terminal 15 ................................................................................................................... 23

2.8 Conventions................................................................................................................... 24

2.9 Parameter lists ............................................................................................................... 25

2.10 Level ............................................................................................................................ 27


fhartmann

Rechteck

fhartmann

Rechteck

fhartmann

Rechteck

Table of contents

3 Parameterization of HEINZMANN digital controls........................................................ 28

3.1 Possibilities of parameterization ................................................................................... 28

3.2 Saving Data ................................................................................................................... 29

3.3 DcDesk 2000 ................................................................................................................. 29

3.4 Injection parameters ...................................................................................................... 30

3.5 Parameter value ranges.................................................................................................. 30

3.6 Activation of functions .................................................................................................. 31

3.7 Parameterization characteristics .................................................................................... 32

3.8 Parameterization of maps .............................................................................................. 32

3.9 Examples of parameterization ....................................................................................... 33

3.10 Reset of control unit .................................................................................................... 34

4 Starting the engine .............................................................................................................. 35

5 Starting quantity limitation................................................................................................ 38

5.1 Fixed starting quantity limitation .................................................................................. 39

5.2 Variable starting quantity limitation.............................................................................. 40

5.3 Temperature dependent starting quantity limitation ..................................................... 42

5.4 Starting sequence with starting speed ramp .................................................................. 44

6 Speed sensing ....................................................................................................................... 46

6.1 Speed values .................................................................................................................. 46

6.2 Speed sensing ................................................................................................................ 47

6.3 Speed pickup monitoring............................................................................................... 47

6.3.1 Monitoring mode of pickups during engine start .................................................. 48

6.3.2 Failure monitoring of pickups when engine is running ......................................... 49

6.3.3 Failure monitoring of camshaft index adjuster during engine start ....................... 49

6.3.4 Failure monitoring of camshaft index adjuster when engine is running ............... 49

6.3.5 Monitoring of mounting direction ......................................................................... 49

6.3.6 Monitoring of excessive frequency ....................................................................... 50

6.4 Overspeed monitoring ................................................................................................... 50

6.5 Speed switching points .................................................................................................. 50

7 Determination of speed setpoints ....................................................................................... 52

7.1 Application-specific determination of speed setpoints ................................................. 53

7.1.1 General application................................................................................................ 53

7.1.2 Vehicle operation................................................................................................... 57

7.1.3 Locomotive operation ............................................................................................ 59

7.1.3.1 Digital notch switches.................................................................................... 60

7.1.3.2 Digital potentiometer ..................................................................................... 60

7.1.4 Generator operation ............................................................................................... 62

7.1.5 Marine application ................................................................................................. 64

7.1.5.1 Digital potentiometer ..................................................................................... 66

7.1.5.2 Temperature dependent idle speed................................................................. 67


Table of contents

7.2 Speed ramp .................................................................................................................... 68

7.2.1 Fixed speed ramp................................................................................................... 68

7.2.2 Sectional speed ramp ............................................................................................. 69

7.3 Droop............................................................................................................................. 71

8 Optimizing control circuit stability ................................................................................... 74

8.1 Adjustment of PID parameters ...................................................................................... 74

8.2 PID map......................................................................................................................... 75

8.2.1 Speed dependent correction of PID parameters..................................................... 76

8.2.2 Injection Quantity Dependent Correction of PID Parameters ............................... 77

8.2.3 Stability Map ......................................................................................................... 78

8.3 Temperature dependent correction of stability.............................................................. 79

8.4 Correction of PID Parameters for Static Operation....................................................... 80

8.5 Load jump regulation in generator systems (DT1 factor) ............................................. 81

8.6 Load shedding in generator systems.............................................................................. 83

9 Limiting functions ............................................................................................................... 84

9.1 Speed dependent injection quantity limitation .............................................................. 85

9.2 Reduction of speed dependent injection quantity limitation ......................................... 87

9.2.1 Coolant temperature dependent reduction ............................................................. 88

9.2.2 Charge air dependent reduction ............................................................................. 89

9.2.3 Fuel temperature dependent reduction................................................................... 89

9.2.4 Ambient pressure dependent reduction ................................................................. 89

9.3 Boost pressure dependent fuel limitation ...................................................................... 90

9.4 Forced limitation ........................................................................................................... 91

9.4.1 Fixed limit.............................................................................................................. 91

9.4.2 Variable limit ......................................................................................................... 92

10 Warning and emergency shutdown functions ................................................................ 93

10.1 General monitoring of sensor values........................................................................... 94

10.2 Oil temperature monitoring ......................................................................................... 95

10.3 Coolant temperature monitoring.................................................................................. 97

10.4 Charge air temperature monitoring ............................................................................. 97

10.5 Exhaust gas temperature monitoring ........................................................................... 98

10.6 Fuel temperature monitoring ....................................................................................... 99

10.7 Rail pressure monitoring ............................................................................................. 99

10.8 Turbocharger oil temperature monitoring ................................................................. 100

10.9 Fuel pressure monitoring........................................................................................... 101

10.10 Oil level monitoring ................................................................................................ 102

10.11 Transmission oil pressure monitoring ..................................................................... 103

10.12 Speed dependent oil pressure monitoring................................................................ 103

10.13 Speed dependent coolant pressure monitoring ........................................................ 105

10.14 Forced idle speed..................................................................................................... 107


Table of contents

11 Vehicle operation............................................................................................................. 108

11.1 Idle/maximum speed governor .................................................................................. 108

11.1.1 Fuel setpoint....................................................................................................... 109

11.1.2 Speed map.......................................................................................................... 109

11.1.3 Controlling idle and maximum speeds .............................................................. 109

11.1.4 On-load idle speed ............................................................................................. 111

11.1.5 Fuel Ramp.......................................................................................................... 111

12 Locomotive application................................................................................................... 112

12.1 Speed notches ............................................................................................................ 112

12.2 Generator excitation .................................................................................................. 115

12.2.1 Excitation control............................................................................................... 115

12.2.1.1 Fuel quantity offset .................................................................................... 116

12.2.1.2 Excitation ramp .......................................................................................... 117

12.2.1.3 Determination of excitation characteristics ............................................... 117

12.2.2 Excitation governing.......................................................................................... 119

12.2.2.1 Fuel quantity offset .................................................................................... 120

12.2.2.2 Ramps for fuel quantity setpoint ................................................................ 120

12.2.2.3 Adjustment of PID parameters................................................................... 120

12.2.2.4 Determination of excitation characteristic ................................................. 121

12.2.3 Power limitation................................................................................................. 121

12.2.3.1 Externally activated power limitation........................................................ 122

12.2.3.2 Temperature dependent power reduction................................................... 123

12.2.3.3 Boost pressure dependent power limitation ............................................... 123

12.2.3.4 Speed-dependent power limitation............................................................. 124

12.3 Low idle speed........................................................................................................... 124

12.4 Slide protection.......................................................................................................... 124

12.4.1 Reduction of excitation by digital slide signal .................................................. 125

12.4.2 Reduction of excitation by analogue slide signal .............................................. 126

12.4.3 Speed reduction by digital slide signal .............................................................. 126

12.4.4 Speed reduction by analogue slide signal.......................................................... 127

13 Generator operation........................................................................................................ 129

13.1 Synchronization......................................................................................................... 129

13.1.1 Digital synchronization...................................................................................... 130

13.1.2 Synchronization using the HEINZMANN synchronization unit SyG 02 ......... 131

13.2 Load control............................................................................................................... 132

13.2.1 Load control using the HEINZMANN load control unit LMG 10.................... 133

13.2.2 Load control by preset value.............................................................................. 134

13.2.2.1 Analogue setpoint adjustment.................................................................... 135

13.2.2.2 Digital setpoint adjustment ........................................................................ 136

13.2.3 Integrated power governor................................................................................. 137

13.2.3.1 Reduced power caused by knocking.......................................................... 138


Table of contents

13.3 Digital generator management THESEUS................................................................ 139

13.4 Automatic or manual operation ................................................................................. 140

14 Marine application .......................................................................................................... 142

14.1 Master-slave operation .............................................................................................. 142

15 Additional functions........................................................................................................ 145

15.1 Fuel temperature compensation................................................................................. 145

15.2 Engine data ................................................................................................................ 145

15.2.1 Fuel consumption............................................................................................... 145

15.2.2 Engine start counter ........................................................................................... 145

15.2.3 Engine operating hours counter ......................................................................... 146

15.3 Start request ............................................................................................................... 146

15.4 Alternator monitoring................................................................................................ 147

15.5 Cylinder equalization by means of exhaust gas temperature .................................... 147

16 Measuring methods for determining crankshaft angle ............................................... 148

16.1 Measuring accuracy and design of the pickup wheel................................................ 148

16.2 Measuring methods ................................................................................................... 149

16.3 Synchronization Gap ................................................................................................. 153

16.4 Synchronization by tooth gap.................................................................................... 153

16.5 Failure of camshaft index sensor............................................................................... 154

16.6 Verification of sensor positions................................................................................. 155

16.7 Verification of preferred sensor direction ................................................................. 155

17 Control of the magnetic valves....................................................................................... 156

17.1 Configuration of ignition sequence ........................................................................... 156

17.2 Actuation of control magnets .................................................................................... 157

17.3 BIP detection and measurement of fly time .............................................................. 159

17.4 Measurement of rise time .......................................................................................... 161

17.4.1 Checking actuation by click test ........................................................................ 161

17.4.2 Single cylinder skipping .................................................................................... 162

17.5 Detection of control valve errors............................................................................... 163

18 Injection control of cam driven systems........................................................................ 167

18.1 Delivery begin ........................................................................................................... 167

18.1.1 Delivery begin map for engine start .................................................................. 170

18.1.2 Correction of delivery begin.............................................................................. 170

18.1.2.1 Absolute maximum values for delivery begin correction.......................... 171

18.1.2.2 Delivery begin correction by means of coolant temperature ..................... 171

18.1.2.3 Delivery begin correction by means of charge air temperature ................. 173

18.1.2.4 Delivery begin correction by means of fuel temperature........................... 173

18.1.2.5 Delivery begin correction by means of ambient pressure.......................... 173

18.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders .............................................. 173


Table of contents

18.2 Delivery period.......................................................................................................... 176

18.2.1 Default characteristic for delivery period .......................................................... 180

18.2.2 Correction of delivery period for single cylinders............................................. 181

19 Injection control of common rail systems ..................................................................... 184

19.1 Delivery begin ........................................................................................................... 184

19.1.1 Delivery begin map for engine start .................................................................. 187

19.1.2 Correction of delivery begin.............................................................................. 188

19.1.2.1 Absolute maximum values for delivery begin correction.......................... 188

19.1.2.2 Delivery begin correction by means of coolant temperature ..................... 190

19.1.2.3 Delivery begin correction by means of charge air temperature ................. 190

19.1.2.4 Delivery begin correction by means of fuel temperature........................... 190

19.1.2.5 Delivery begin correction by means of ambient pressure.......................... 190

19.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders .............................................. 191

19.2 Delivery period.......................................................................................................... 194

19.2.1 Default characteristic for delivery period .......................................................... 197

19.2.2 Correction of delivery period for single cylinders............................................. 198

19.3 Pre-injection .............................................................................................................. 200

19.3.1 Delivery begin values of pre-injection .............................................................. 204

19.3.2 Delivery time of pre-injection ........................................................................... 206

19.4 Pre-pre-injection ........................................................................................................ 207

19.4.1 Delivery begin values of pre-pre-injection ........................................................ 210

19.4.2 Delivery time of pre-pre-injection ..................................................................... 212

19.5 Post-injection............................................................................................................. 214

19.5.1 Delivery begin of post-injection ........................................................................ 217

19.5.2 Delivery duration of post-injection.................................................................... 219

19.6 Post-post-injection..................................................................................................... 221

19.6.1 Delivery begin of post-post-injection ................................................................ 223

19.6.2 Delivery duration of post-post-injection............................................................ 226

20 Rail pressure control with common rail systems ......................................................... 229

20.1 Configuration of rail and rail pressure sensors.......................................................... 230

20.1.1 One rail, one high-pressure pump, one high-pressure sensor............................ 230

20.1.2 One rail, one high-pressure pump, two high-pressure sensors .......................... 230

20.1.3 One rail, two high-pressure pumps, one high-pressure sensor .......................... 231

20.1.4 One rail, two high-pressure pumps, two high-pressure sensors ........................ 231

20.1.5 Two rails, two high-pressure pumps, two high-pressure sensors ...................... 231

20.2 Determination of rail pressure setpoint ..................................................................... 232

20.3 Correction of rail pressure setpoint ........................................................................... 234

20.3.1 Rail pressure setpoint correction by means of coolant temperature .................. 235

20.3.2 Rail pressure setpoint correction by means or charge air temperature.............. 235

20.3.3 Rail pressure setpoint correction by means of fuel temperature........................ 235

20.3.4 Rail pressure setpoint correction by means of ambient pressure....................... 237


Table of contents

20.4 Rail pressure control by means of interphase transformer high-pressure pump ....... 237

20.4.1 Current regulation for pressure control valve high-pressure pumps ................. 238

20.4.2 Engine start ........................................................................................................ 239

20.4.3 Error recognition for pressure control valve high-pressure pumps ................... 240

20.5 Rail pressure control by means of high-pressure injection ....................................... 242

20.5.1 Engine start ........................................................................................................ 244

20.5.2 Actuation of the control magnets of high-pressure injectors............................. 244

20.5.3 Detection of errors in control magnets for high-pressure injectors ................... 245

21 Sensors.............................................................................................................................. 247

21.1 Sensor overview ........................................................................................................ 247

21.2 Derived sensors ......................................................................................................... 248

21.2.1 Relative boost pressure ...................................................................................... 248

21.2.2 Altitude over mean sea level.............................................................................. 249

21.3 Configuration of sensors............................................................................................ 249

21.4 Assigning inputs to sensors and setpoint adjusters ................................................... 250

21.5 Measuring ranges of sensors ..................................................................................... 251

21.6 Modifying reactions to sensor errors......................................................................... 252

22 Switching functions ......................................................................................................... 255

22.1 Complete overview of all switching functions.......................................................... 255

22.1.1 Engine stop ........................................................................................................ 257

22.2 Assignment of digital inputs...................................................................................... 258

22.2.1 HZM-CAN periphery module ........................................................................... 259

22.3 Assignment of communication modules ................................................................... 259

22.4 Value of a switching function.................................................................................... 260

23 Inputs and outputs .......................................................................................................... 262

23.1 Configuration of the channels for selectable inputs and outputs............................... 262

23.2 DARDANOS MVC01-20.......................................................................................... 262

23.2.1 Digital Inputs ..................................................................................................... 262

23.2.2 Analogue Inputs................................................................................................. 263

23.2.2.1 Units of the Analogue Inputs ..................................................................... 263

23.2.2.2 Calibration of the Analogue Inputs............................................................ 264

23.2.2.3 Filtering of Analogue Inputs ...................................................................... 266

23.2.2.4 Error Detection for Analogue Inputs ......................................................... 267

23.2.2.5 Overview of the Parameters Associated with Analogue Inputs................. 268

23.2.3 PWM Input ........................................................................................................ 269

23.2.3.1 Error Detection at the PWM Input............................................................. 270

23.2.4 Digital Outputs................................................................................................... 271

23.2.5 PWM Outputs .................................................................................................... 272

23.2.5.1 Assignment of Output Parameters to PWM Outputs ................................. 272

23.2.5.2 Value Range of Output Parameters............................................................ 273


Table of contents

23.2.5.3 Value Range of PWM Outputs .................................................................. 274

23.2.6 Analogue Outputs .............................................................................................. 275

23.2.6.1 Assignment of Output Parameters to Analogue Outputs ........................... 275

23.2.6.2 Value Range of Output Parameters............................................................ 276

23.2.6.3 Value Range of Analogue Outputs ............................................................ 277

23.3 DARDANOS MVC03-8............................................................................................ 278

23.3.1 Digital inputs ..................................................................................................... 278

23.3.2 Analogue inputs ................................................................................................. 279

23.3.3 PWM inputs ....................................................................................................... 280

23.3.4 Digital and PWM outputs .................................................................................. 280

23.3.5 Frequency output ............................................................................................... 282

23.3.5.1 Error monitoring at frequency output ........................................................ 282

23.4 DARDANOS MVC04-6............................................................................................ 283

23.4.1 Digital inputs ..................................................................................................... 283

23.4.2 Analogue inputs ................................................................................................. 284

23.4.3 Digital and PWM outputs .................................................................................. 285

24 Parameterizing the control’s inputs and outputs ......................................................... 288

24.1 Digital inputs ............................................................................................................. 288

24.2 Analogue inputs......................................................................................................... 288

24.2.1 Calibration of analogue inputs........................................................................... 288

24.2.2 Linearization of temperature inputs................................................................... 288

24.2.3 Filtering of analogue inputs ............................................................................... 291

24.2.4 Error detection for analogue inputs ................................................................... 291

24.2.5 Overview of the parameters associated with analogue inputs ........................... 294

24.3 PWM inputs............................................................................................................... 294

24.3.1 Error detection at PWM inputs .......................................................................... 295

24.4 PWM outputs............................................................................................................. 295

24.4.1 PWM output frequency...................................................................................... 296

24.4.2 Assignment of output parameters to PWM outputs........................................... 296

24.4.3 Value Range of output parameters..................................................................... 297

24.4.4 Value range of PWM outputs ............................................................................ 298

24.4.5 Error monitoring of PWM outputs..................................................................... 298

24.5 Digital outputs ........................................................................................................... 301

24.5.1 Simple allocation ............................................................................................... 301

24.5.2 Multiple allocation............................................................................................. 302

24.5.2.1 Logical operators........................................................................................ 302

24.5.2.2 Blinking signals.......................................................................................... 303

24.5.2.3 Blinking and continuous light .................................................................... 303

24.5.3 Error monitoring of digital outputs.................................................................... 304


Table of contents

25 Pin assignment ................................................................................................................. 306

25.1 Pin assignment for MVC01-20.................................................................................. 306

25.2 Pin assignment for MVC03-8.................................................................................... 312

25.3 Pin assignment for MVC04-6.................................................................................... 316

26 Bus protocols.................................................................................................................... 320

26.1 CAN protocol HZM-CAN......................................................................................... 320

26.1.1 Configuration of the HEINZMANN CAN Bus................................................. 321

26.1.2 Monitoring the CAN communication ................................................................ 322

26.1.3 Generator control THESEUS............................................................................. 325

26.1.4 Periphery module............................................................................................... 325

26.1.4.1 Command transmission.............................................................................. 325

26.1.4.2 Actuator...................................................................................................... 326

26.1.4.3 Sensors ....................................................................................................... 326

26.1.4.4 Digital inputs.............................................................................................. 326

26.1.4.5 Digital outputs............................................................................................ 326

26.1.4.6 Analogue outputs ....................................................................................... 327

26.1.4.7 PWM outputs ............................................................................................. 327

26.1.5 Customer module............................................................................................... 328

26.2 CAN protocol CANopen ........................................................................................... 328

26.3 CAN protocol DeviceNet .......................................................................................... 328

26.4 CAN protocol SAE J1939 ......................................................................................... 329

27 Data management............................................................................................................ 330

27.1 Serial number of control unit..................................................................................... 330

27.2 Identification of control............................................................................................. 330

27.3 Identification number of PC-programme / handheld programmer............................ 330

28 Error Handling................................................................................................................ 331

28.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 331

28.2 Seven Segment Display............................................................................................. 333

28.3 Configuration errors .................................................................................................. 335

28.4 Error memories .......................................................................................................... 337

28.5 Error parameter list.................................................................................................... 338

28.5.1 Speed sensors..................................................................................................... 340

28.5.2 Camshaft index sensor ....................................................................................... 341

28.5.3 Overspeed .......................................................................................................... 342

28.5.4 Setpoint adjusters and sensors ........................................................................... 343

28.5.5 Injection ............................................................................................................. 345

28.5.6 Synchronization ................................................................................................. 346

28.5.7 Injector supply voltage ...................................................................................... 348

28.5.8 Integrated power governor................................................................................. 348

28.5.9 Injectors ............................................................................................................. 349


Table of contents


28.5.10 CAN bus .......................................................................................................... 350

28.5.11 CAN communication ....................................................................................... 351

28.5.12 Internal temperature measurement................................................................... 352

28.5.13 Supply voltage ................................................................................................. 352

28.5.14 Data memory.................................................................................................... 354

28.5.15 Engine-specific errors ...................................................................................... 355

28.5.16 Configuration ................................................................................................... 355

28.5.17 Internal computing error .................................................................................. 356

28.5.18 Digital and PWM outputs ................................................................................ 357

28.5.19 Common rail high-pressure pumps outputs ..................................................... 359

28.5.20 Frequency output ............................................................................................. 360

28.6 Bootloader ................................................................................................................. 361

28.6.1 Bootloader start tests.......................................................................................... 361

28.6.2 Bootloader status indication at DARDANOS MVC03-8 und MVC04-6 ......... 362

28.6.3 Bootloader status indication at DARDANOS MVC01-20................................ 363

28.6.4 Bootloader Communication at DARDANOS MVC01-20 ................................ 364

28.6.5 Bootloader communication with DcDesk 2000................................................. 365

29 Parameter description .................................................................................................... 369

29.1 Synoptical table ......................................................................................................... 369

29.2 List 1: Parameters ...................................................................................................... 372

29.3 List 2: Measuring values ........................................................................................... 419

30.1 List 3: Functions ........................................................................................................ 459

30.2 List 4: Characteristics and maps................................................................................ 493

31 Index ................................................................................................................................. 510

1 Safety Instructions and Related Symbols


This publication offers wherever necessary practical safety instructions to indicate inevitable

residual risks when operating the engine. These residual risks imply dangers to

- Personnel

- Product and machine

- The environment

The primary aim of the safety instructions is to prevent personal injury!

The signal words used in this publication are specifically designed to direct your attention to possi-

ble damage extent!

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation the consequence of which could

be fatal or severe injuries if it is not prevented.

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which could lead to fatal in-

jury or severe injuries if it is not prevented.

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which could lead to minor in-

juries if it is not prevented.

NOTICE indicates possible material damage.

Safety instructions are not only denoted by a signal word but also by haz-

ard warning triangles. Hazard warning triangles can contain different

symbols to illustrate the danger. However, the symbol used is no substitute

for the actual text of the safety instructions. The text must therefore al-

ways be read in full!

This symbol does not refer to any safety instructions but offers important

notes for better understanding the functions that are being discussed.

They should by all means be observed and practiced.

Basic Information DARDANOS 1


1.1 Basic Safety Measures for Normal Operation

The installation may be operated only by authorized persons who have been duly

trained and who are fully acquainted with the operating instructions so that they are

capable of working in accordance with them.

Before turning the installation on please verify and make sure that

- only authorized persons are present within the working range of the engine;

- nobody will be in danger of suffering injuries by starting the engine.

Before starting the engine always check the installation for visible damages and make

sure it is not put into operation unless it is in perfect condition. On detecting any faults

please inform your superior immediately!

Before starting the engine remove any unnecessary material and/or objects from the

working range of the installation/engine.

Before starting the engine check and make sure that all safety devices are working properly!

1.2 Basic Safety Measures for Servicing and Maintenance

Before performing any maintenance or repair work make sure the working area of the

engine has been closed to unauthorized persons. Put on a sign warning that mainte-

nance or repair work is being done.

Before performing any maintenance or repair work switch off the master switch of the

power supply and secure it by a padlock! The key must be kept by the person perform-

ing the maintenance and repair works.

Before performing any maintenance and repair work make sure that all parts of engine

to be touched have cooled down to ambient temperature and are dead!

Refasten loose connections!

Replace at once any damaged lines and/or cables!

Keep the cabinet always closed. Access should be permitted only to authorized per-

sons having a key or tools.

Never use a water hose to clean cabinets or other casings of electric equipment!

2 Basic Information DARDANOS



1.3 Before Putting an Installation into Service after Maintenance and Repair

Works

Check on all slackened screw connections to have been tightened again!

Make sure the control linkage has been reattached and all cables have been reconnected.

Make sure all safety devices of the installation are in perfect order and are working properly!

2 General


2 General

2.1 General system description

The HEINZMANN digital controls of the DARDANOS series are designed as universal speed controls for diesel engines with electronically controlled injection systems. In addi-tion to their basic purpose of controlling speed, these controls are capable of performing a multitude of other tasks and functions.

The types of applicable injection systems are: Pump-Nozzle-Unit (PNU), Pump-Pipe-Nozzle (PPN) and Common Rail (CR) using commercially available magnetic valves (so-lenoid valves).

The version DARDANOS MVC01-20 is capable of controlling engines with max. 20 cyl-inders, while DARDANOS MVC03-8 is conceived for engines with max. 8 cylinders and DARDANOS MVC04-6 for engines with max. 6 cylinders.

For common rail applications, the control of a cylinder can be subdivided in up to 5 injec-tions, in chronological order

pre-pre-injection,

pre-injection,

main injection,

post-injection and

post-post-injection.

The control system consists of the control unit, the control solenoids, the sensors and the connection cables.

The control unit contains the control electronics. At the core of the control unit is a very fast and powerful 32 bit microprocessor. The controller programme with which the micro-processor operates is permanently stored in a FLASH-EPROM.

Actual engine speed as well as crankshaft and camshaft positions are sensed by up to three magnetic speed pickups on the gear rims of the crankshaft and of the camshaft. To deter-mine the exact positions of the crankshaft and of the individual cylinders, various sensing methods are provided using different locations of the angle sensors.

Engine speed is set by one or more setpoint adjusters. These setpoints may be analogue or digital and can be preset directly or via CAN bus. Further digital inputs permit to switch on functions or to change over to other functions.

Various sensors are provided to transmit to the control any data needed to adjust the en-gine's operating state. As an example, it is possible to have several temperature and pres-sure signals transmitted from the engine.

2 General


Fuel quantity and injection begin are being controlled by activating and de-activating the control solenoids of the injection pumps or nozzles. The control solenoids can be supplied by HEINZMANN or by the manufacturers of the injection systems.

The control unit generates analogue and digital signals which are used to indicate the en-gine's operating states but can also serve other purposes and functions. Communication with other units is established via a serial interface and CAN bus protocols.

Through a second CAN interface the system communicates with other control systems as well as with diagnostics and monitoring systems. The combination of electronic regulation, governing and monitoring provided by the above components permits to create an engine management system which allows further optimization of the system as a whole.

2.2 Further information

This publication contains but a brief presentation of the different injection systems and a basic description of the individual adjustment parameters and characteristics. Error han-dling will be discussed in detail.

Besides that detailed descriptions of the functionality of speed control in general, the speci-fications and connections of the control electronics, sensors, setpoint adjusters and control solenoids are given.

A description of the functioning mode of the communication programme DcDesk 2000 is available in the manual

Programming HEINZMANN Digital Controls, manual No. DG 95 110-e

and in the online help of the programme.

The electronically controlled injection system is shipped tailored to customer requirements and has been configured at the factory as far as possible. To properly execute an order therefore it is absolutely necessary that the customer completes and returns to HEINZMANN the form

Ordering Information for Electronically Controlled Injection SystemsDARDANOS.

2 General

2.3 Control systems

The HEINZMANN system DARDANOS is capable of controlling injection systems of various types, such as Pump-Pipe-Nozzle (PPN), Pump-Nozzle-Unit (PNU) and Common Rail (CR) equipped with commercially available magnetic valves.

For common rail systems, the design provides additional control of one or two high-pressure pumps for regulating injection pressure.

Depending on the configuration of the control unit, it is possible to use solenoids that are driven either by 24, 48, 58 or 90 V. The control unit DARDANOS MVC01-20 allows to drive a maximum of 20 solenoids, DARDANOS MVC03-8 a maximum of 8 and DAR-DANOS MVC04-6 a maximum of 6 solenoids. Each divided into two banks holding half the solenoids each. During operation, the solenoids of one bank may be selected only one after another, i.e., selection is not allowed to overlap. There will, however, be no problem in simultaneously selecting one valve of bank A and of another of bank B.

The grouping of solenoids in two banks makes it possible to keep up emergency operation with half the number of solenoids / cylinders in case of failure of one bank.

2.3.1 PPN System (Pump-Pipe-Nozzle)

Solenoid

Pump

PipeNozzle

Figure 1: PPN system

In contrast to conventional Diesel injection systems using individual pumps, in the PPN system fuel quantity control through control rack and helical slot has been replaced by a control solenoid determining delivery begin and delivery end. When energized, the con-trol solenoid closes a waste valve and opens it again when de-energized, thus determin-ing the quantity of fuel injected. The operational principle is illustrated by the following diagram.


2 General

Injection pipe

Injection nozzle

Injection pump

Camshaft

Throttle

Fuel tank

Fuel filter

Fuel pump

Figure 2: Operating principle of PPN system

2.3.2 PNU System (Pump-Nozzle-Unit)

In the PNU system, pump and nozzle have been combined into a single unit. The pump is driven by an overhead camshaft and valve lifters or, as shown in the below figure, by additional rockers and push rods. It operates in practically the same way as the PPN sys-tems.

Pump- Nozzle-Unit

Solenoid

Figure 3: PNU system


2 General

2.3.3 CR system (Common rail)

In the CR system, fuel is fed into an accumulator (pressure tank) by a high-pressure pump. The fuel manifold (common rail) and the fuel pipes to the injection nozzles (in-jectors) serve as an accumulator. The injectors are equipped with solenoid valves ena-bling injection when energized.

The high-pressure pump is governed by the control unit with the pressure being set in-dependently of engine speed and engine load.

The great advantage of the common rail system is that it allows injection pressure to be freely chosen and constantly available regardless of the cam position. Due to this, the system is ideally predestined for pre-injection and post-injection and will allow to ad-just the engine's operating performance to any given conditions.

High-Pressure Pump

Filter and Feed Pump

Injectors

Pressure Sensor

Fuel Rail (Common Rail)

Pressure Relief Valve

Figure 4: Common rail system


2 General


2.4 pecification of MVC 01 - 10/20

2.4.1 General

Rated voltage 24 V DC

Minimum voltage 18 V DC

Maximum voltage 32 V DC

Output voltage for solenoids 24 V DC

or optionally 48 V DC or 90 V DC

Current consumption maximum 0.5 A / cylinder

Storage temperature -55 °C to +105 °C

Ambient temperature -40 °C to +80 °C

Air humidity up to 98 % at 55 °C, condensing

Contamination resistant against substances usually

present in engine environment

Vibration 2 mm maximum at 10 to 20 Hz,

0,24 m/s maximum at 21 to 64 Hz

9 g maximum at 64 to 2000 Hz

Shock 30 g, 11 ms- half sine

Protection grade IP 65

Isolation resistance > 1 MOhm at 48 V DC

Weight ca. 8,5 kg

CE EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4

2 General


2.4.2 Inputs and Outputs

All inputs and outputs are reverse polarity protected and short-circuit-proof against bat-

tery plus and minus.

3 Speed inputs for Hall sensors with

fi = 25 ... 8000 Hz,

Uref = 12 V AC, Iref = 40 mA

1 Frequency input for inductive sensors with

fi = 25..8000 Hz

5 Temperature inputs various types PTC or NTC possible

Standard : Pt1000

Ui = 0..5 V, Ri = 1 k

4 Analogue inputs

Voltage inputs: Ui = 0..5 V, Ri = 47.5 k,

Uref = 5 V ± 35 mV, Iref < 15 mA

Current inputs: Ii = 0..25 mA, Ri = 200 ,

Uref = Ubat, Iref < 30 mA

11 Digital inputs, pull down U0 < 2 V, U1 > 6,5 V, Rpu = 5 k

2 Analogue outputs

Voltage output: Ui = 0 ... 5 V, Imax < 20 mA

Current output: I = 0 ... 37 mA

6 Digital outputs

high-side switching: Isource < 3 A

20 Control magnet drivers Ihold max. < 6 A, Iboost max. < 25 A,

24 V DC, 48 V DC or 90 V DC,

current controlled

2.4.3 Communication

1 Serial communication ISO 9141

2 CAN-communications ISO/DIS 11898, standard/extended

identifier, Baud rate up to 1 MBit/s

2 General

2.4.4 Functional Block Diagram of Inputs and Outputs

+ _

System

FlashEPROM

RAMVariables

2 x CAN

ISO9141

Resetdeactivates

Resetdeactivates

Mic

roco

ntr

olle

r M

otor

ola

683

32

24 V DC Supply

Digital inputs 1..9

Frequency input(available also on engine side)

Analogue input 1(Voltage/Current)

Digital outputs 3,4

Analogue outputs 1,2

Dialogue/Diagnosis

System Communications

Speed pickup 1,2Pickup camshaft index

Analogue inputs 2..4(Voltage/Current)

Temperature inputs 1..5

Digital inputs 10,11

Plant Engine

Reset

MVC 01-10/20

Digital outputs 1,2

Reset

activated

Reset

activated

PWM outputs 1,2

Digital outputs 5,6

Solenoid valves 1...20

DC

DC

Programme/Parameters

5V-MonitoringWatchdog

Fig. 1: Functional Block Diagram of Inputs and Outputs for DARDANOS MVC01-20


2 General

2.4.5 Dimensional Drawing

Fig. 2: Dimensional Drawing of Control Unit MVC01-20


2 General


2.5 Specification of control unit DARDANOS MVC03-8

2.5.1 General


Min. voltage 12 V DC

Max. voltage 32 V DC


or optionally 58 V DC

Current consumption max. 1.5 A / cylinder

Storage temperature -55°C to +120°C

Ambient temperature -40°C to +80°C

-40°C to +120°C with intercooler

Air humidity up to 95% at 55°C




0.24 m/s maximum at 24 to 64 Hz



Protection grade IP 69K (with counter plug)


Weight approx. 10 kg

EMI EMI directives: 89/336/EEC, 95/54/EEC

Construction machines EN13309

Earth moving machinery ISO13766

Road vehicles, resistance to electrical disturbances: ISO 11452-2, -5

Road vehicles, impulses: ISO 7637-2, ISO 7637-3

EC: EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4

2 General


2.5.2 Inputs and outputs

All inputs and outputs are reverse polarity protected and short-circuit-proof against bat-tery plus and minus.

3 speed inputs for Hall sensors with

fi = 25..8000 Hz,

Uref = 12 V, Iref = 40 mA

2 frequency inputs for inductive sensors with

fi = 10..10000 Hz

4 temperature inputs PT1000/NTC Ui = 0..5V, Ri = 1,2 k

1 temperature input NTC Ui = 0..5 V, Ri = 22,1 k

11 analogue inputs

1 voltage input Ui = 0.. 36 V, Ri = 72 k


1 voltage / current input Ii = 0..25 mA fg = 15 Hz, Ri = 200


or Ui = 0..5 V, Ri = 100 k

1 current input Ii = 0..25 mA fg = 15 Hz, Ri = 200 , Uref = U bat, Iref < 100 mA

8 voltage inputs Ui = 0..5 V, Uref = 5 V 125 mV,

Iref < 20 mA, Ri = 100 k

1 terminal 15 U0 < 3.5 V, U1 > 6 V Rpd = 4.7 k

2 digital inputs variable switching threshold, Rpu = 9,1

k

Rpd = 22,1 k

3 digital inputs, pull down variable switching threshold, Rpd = 4.7

k

4 digital inputs, pull down U0 < 1.5 V, U1 > 6 V, Rpd = 4.7 k

1 frequency output fi = 25..10000 Hz, Isource < 500 mA

5 digital outputs high-side switching: Isource < 2,5 A, fi = 50..300 Hz

4 digital outputs high-side switching: Isource < 2,5 A, fi = 50..500 Hz

1 digital output high-side switching: Isource < 12 A

3 digital outputs low-side switching: Isink < 500 mA

2 General


2 high-pressure pumps Isource < 2,5 A, fi = 50..300 Hz

8 solenoids Ihold, max < 14 A, Iboost, max < 28 A,

48V DC or 58 V DC,

current controlled

2.5.3 Communication

1 DcDesk 2000 for diagnosis RS 232 up to 57600 baud

1 CAN communication ISO/DIS 11898, standard/extended identifier, max. baud rate 1 MBit/s

1 CAN communication ISO/DIS 11898, standard/extended identifier, max. baud rate 1 MBit/s electrically isolated

2 General

2.5.4 Functional block diagram of inputs and outputs

+ - DC

Mic

roco

ntro

ller M

PC 5

65

DC

Installation side EngineMVC 03 - 8

+ -Power supply

Digital input 2..7

Elektronics supply

Frequency output

Analogue input 9

Analogue input 10

Analogue input 11

Analogue input 1..2

Digital output 1..6, 10..12

Temperature input 1

System

Diagnosis DcDesk 2000

CAN-BUS 1..2

LSB-BUS EEPROM Watchdog

Analogue input 3..8

Temperature input 2..5

Speed input 1..2Camshaft index

Digital input 1,8..9

Frequency input 1..2

Digital output 7..9, 13

High pressure pump 1..2

Solenoid valve 1..8

DC

DC

Terminal 15

Figure 5: Functional block diagram of inputs and outputs for DARDANOS MVC03-8


2 General

2.5.5 Dimensional drawing

Figure

6: Dimensional drawing of MVC03-8


2 General


2.6 Specification of control unit DARDANOS MVC04-6

2.6.1 General


Min. voltage 12 V DC

Max. voltage 32 V DC


or optionally 58 V DC

Current consumption max. 1 A / cylinder

Storage temperature -55°C to +120°C

Ambient temperature -40°C to +80°C

Air humidity up to 95% at 55°C




0.24 m/s maximum at 24 to 64 Hz



Protection grade IP 66


Weight approx. 2.8 kg

EMI EMI directives: 89/336/EEC, 95/54/EEC

Road vehicles, resistance to electrical disturbances ISO 11452-2, -5

Road vehicles, impulses ISO 7637-2, ISO 7637-3

EC: EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4

2.6.2 Inputs and outputs

All inputs and outputs are reverse polarity protected and short-circuit-proof against bat-tery plus and minus.

3 speed inputs for Hall sensors with

fi = 25..8000 Hz,

Uref = 12 V, Iref = 40 mA

5 temperature inputs (TI1 – TI5) PT1000/NTC Ui = 0..5V, Ri = 1,2 k

2 General


11 analogue inputs

1 voltage input Ui = 0.. 36 V, Ri = 72 k


10 voltage inputs Ui = 0..5 V, Uref = 5 V 125 mV,

Iref < 40 mA, Ri = 100 k

1 terminal 15 U0 < 3.5 V, U1 > 6 V Rpd = 4.7 k

17 digital inputs, pull down U0 < 1.5 V, U1 > 6 V, Rpd = 4.7 k

(DI1 - DI17

1 digital output (DOE)

high-side switching Isource < 0.5 A

low-side switching Isink < 0.5 A

4 digital power outputs (DO1 – DO4)

low-side switching Isink < 2 A

4 digital outputs (DO5 – DO8)

low-side switching Isink < 500 mA, status monitoring on/off

2 high-pressure pumps Isource < 2.5 A, current monitoring

fi = 50 ... 300 Hz

6 solenoids (INJ1 – INJ6) Ihold, max < 12 A, Iboost, max < 20 A,

48V DC or 58 V DC,

Boost current controlled, Hold1, Hold2

1 (2) reference voltage Uref = 5 V ± 2%

(sensor supply REF1) Iref < 120 mA

4 (8) reference voltage Uref = 5 V ± 0.5%

(sensor supply REF2 – REF5) Iref < 50 mA

3 speed reference Uspeed ref = 12 V ± 0.5%

2 General


2.6.3 Board specification and pin assignment

Function PIN Number Current

Voltage supply PS2 1 2 A

Ground PS2GND 1 2 A

Voltage supply; power output PS1 2 12 A

Ground; power output PGND 2

Reference (5 V) REF 8 50 mA

Reference (5 V) REF1 2 120 mA

Serial power (Ubat) SER_PS 1 100 mA

Reference (12 V) Speed_PS, Index_PS, Vehicle_PS 3 50 mA

Speed pick-up Speed, Index, Vehicle 3

Input digital DI1 … DI17 17

Terminal 15 KL15 1

Temperature input TI1 … TI5 5

Output analogue (voltage) AI1 … AI10 10

Input analogue (0 … 36 V) AI11 1

Injector output A INJ1 & INJA … INJ3 & INJA 6 (25 A peak)

Injector output B INJ4 & INJA … INJ6 & INJA 6 (25 A peak)

Output low side (0.5 A) DOL5 … DOL8 4 0.7 A

Output high side (2 A) DOH1 … DOH4 4 2 A

Error output DOE 1 0.7 mA

High pressure pump HPR 4 2 A

CAN-BUS interface CAN 4

HZM- interface HZM 2

Ground GND 17

Shield SHLD 13

Total 120

2 General

2.6.4 Communication

1 DcDesk 2000 for diagnosis HZM interface, max. 57600 baud

1 serial communication ISO9141, max. 57600 baud

2 CAN communications ISO/DIS 11898, standard/extended identifier, max. baud rate 1 MBit/s

(Terminator 120 required)

2.6.5 Functional block diagram of inputs and outputs

+ - supplyPower

Digital input 1..9

Analogue input 1..4

Analogue input 10..11

ISO 9141

CAN-Bus 1,2

Digital output 5..8,10

Diagnosis DcDesk 2000

High pressure pump 1..2

Solenoid valve 1..6

Digital output 1..4

Digital input 10..17

Digital output 9

System

EEPROM Watchdog

Temperature input 1..4

Analogue input 5..10

MVC 04-6

+ -Electronics supply

Terminal 15

Mic

roco

ntr

olle

r M

PC

56

5

DC

DC

DC

DC Speed input 2 /vehicle speed input

Speed input 1Camshaft index

Figure 7: Functional block diagram of inputs and outputs for DARDANOS MVC04-6


2 General

2.6.6 Dimensional drawing

Figure 8: Dimensional drawing of MVC04-6


2 General

2.7 Terminal 15

The controls DARDANOS MVC03-8 and DARDANOS MVC04-6 are equipped with a so-called "terminal 15" functionality. (In automotive electrics the terminal number repre-sents an aid to simplify wiring. In Germany, terminal names are standardized according to DIN 72552).

The control DARDANOS MVC01-20 does not provide “terminal 15”.

"Terminal 15" is a switched plus used to switch on the control device. Even when power components and electronic components are powered, the control unit cannot be switched on without this contact.

If terminal 15 is extracted, the control unit is not de-activated automatically but enters a so-called tracking circuit, which stops the engine immediately and then goes on to complete other tasks, such as the saving of the operating hours count. Only after these tasks have been completed the control unit switches itself off automatically.

The state of terminal 15 is indicated by parameter 3790 IgnitionOn. When this value is equal to zero and the control unit is not switched off yet, it is in tracking circuit.

It is recommended at all costs to use terminal 15 to switch off the control unit. A direct switching-off of the power components and the electronic components prevents completion of the tracking circuit and therefore should be used only as emergency shutdown in exceptional cases.

Note


2 General

2.8 Conventions

Throughout this manual the following typographic conventions have been adopted:

100 Gain Parameter names are italicized. There is no difference made between the four lists.

100 Gain An arrow preceding a parameter name is to signal that this parameter is explained in detail in some other section. A

short description of the parameter is provided in 29 Parameter description. In this chapter you will also find references to the pages containing a detailed discussion of the respective parameter.

<100> In diagrams, numbers enclosed by pointed brackets are used to indicate that the position thus specified corre-sponds to a parameter number.

3001 ErrPickUp1[0,1] For parameters indicating an error state, the error number

is indicated in square brackets (also see 28 Error Han-dling).

[500..501] There are certain parameters for which the limits of their respective value ranges cannot be specified explicitly in

the chapter 29 Parameter description, but have to be communicated to the control as values of specific parame-ters. For any such parameters with variable value ranges, the parameter numbers defining their specific range limits are enclosed in square brackets.

Italicized text introduced by the word Note contains im-portant information on the functions being discussed. Note

7.3 Droop An arrow followed by italicized text refers to a chapter where the respective function is described in more detail.


2 General


2.9 Parameter lists

In developing the HEINZMANN digital controls, top priority was given to provide a com-bination of universal applicability and high-grade functionality. As several adjustable pa-rameters had to be provided for each individual function, some system was needed to con-veniently organize the great number of parameters that would inevitably result from the numerous functions to be implemented. For the sake of clarity and easy access, the pa-rameters have therefore been grouped into four lists.

1. Parameters Parameters used for adjusting the control and the engine (parameter numbers 1..1999, 10000..11999, 20000..21999)

2. Measurements Parameters for indicating the actual states of the control and the engine (parameter numbers 2000..3999, 12000..13999, 22000..23999)

3. Functions Parameters used for activating and switching functions over (parameter numbers 4000..5999, 14000..15999, 24000..25999)

4. Curves Parameters used for parameterization of characteristics and maps (parameter numbers 6000..9999, 16000..19999, 26000..29999)

Each parameter has been assigned a number and an identifier (abbreviated parameter name). The parameter number also indicates which list the parameter belongs to. Within these lists, the parameters are arranged by groups to facilitate identification and reference for more detailed information.

The present manual contains explanations of all functions that can be performed by the DARDANOS control units. For specific applications, however, part of these functions will be of no relevance and may be ignored. In such cases, the parameters associated with these functions will also be omitted. The varying hardware requirements of specific devices mean that some functions could not be integrated due to the number or required inputs and outputs. Some of the described functions are implemented in the firmware only on request. All such exceptions are indicated in the text.

Furthermore, customer specific applications may contain new or extended functions which will be documented in separate brochures.

The following overview is repeated in section 29 Parameter description where each sin-gle parameter will be included.

2 General


Parameter Measurements Functions Curves No. Designation No. Designation No. Designation No. Designation

1 Number of teeth/speed 2000 Speed pickup/ Speed

4000Speed pickup/ Speed

6000

100 Stability/droop idle/maximum speed

2100 Stability/droop idle/maximum speed

4100Stability/droop idle/maximum speed

6100 Stability map

200 Ramp/start

2200 4200 Ramp 6200 Stability map (correction values)

300 Injection

2300 Injection 4300 Injection 6300

400 CAN bus

2400 CAN bus 4400 CAN bus 6400 Boost pressure depend-ent fuel limitation

500 Oil pressure, boost pres-sure, temperatures

2500 4500Oil pressure, boost pres-sure, temperatures

6500 Oil pressure monitoring, coolant pressure moni-toring

600 Excitation Control 2600 Excitation Control 4600 Excitation Control 6600 Excitation control

700 Limitations 2700 Limitations 4700 Limitations 6700 Speed-dependent fuel limitation 1

800 Digital switch functions 2800 Digital switch functions 4800Configuration of digital input/output channels

6800 Speed-dependent fuel limitation 2

900 Setpoint adjusters, sen-sors

2900 Setpoint adjusters, sen-sors

4900Setpoint adjusters, sen-sors

6900 Notches, speed depend-ent load Limitation

1000 Error handling 3000 Current errors 5000 Error handling 1200 Generator 3200 Generator 5200 Generator 1350 Locomotive 3350 Locomotive 5350 Locomotive

1500 Analogue inputs 3500 Analogue inputs 5500Configuration of ana-logue input channels

1600 PWM outputs 3600 Internal measurements feedback digital outputs

1800 Status

3800 Status 5800 7800 Temperature sensors

1900 Magnetic valves 3900 Status magnetic valves 5900Magnetic valves

7900 Temperature sensors

8800 Digital outputs 16000 Delivery begin 13000 Current errors 17000 Delivery period

11100 PWM outputs Digital outputs

15100PWM outputs Digital outputs

11250 Current outputs 15250 Current outputs

17500 Correction of cylinder-specific delivery begin and period

18000 Effective rail pressure setpoint

20000 Rail pressure 22000 Rail pressure 24000 Rail pressure 26000

Pre-pre-injection Pre-injection Post-Injection Post-post-injection

20100 Rail pressure regulator 22100 Rail pressure regulator 24100 Rail pressure regulator 20200 Current regulator 22200 Current regulator 24200 Current regulator

20300

Pre-pre-injection Pre-injection Post-Injection Post-post-injection

22300

Pre-pre-injection Pre-injection Post-injection Post-post-injection

24300

Pre-pre-injection Pre-injection Post-injection Post-post-injection

20800 Communication switch functions

24800Communication switch functions

23000 Current errors 23700 Bit collections

21750 CANopen 23750 CANopen 25750 CANopen 21850 DeviceNet 23850 DeviceNet 25850 DeviceNet 21900 SAE J1939 23900 SAE J1939 25900 SAE J1939

21950 HZM-CAN Customer module

25950HZM-CAN Customer module

29000 CANopen 29400 DeviceNet 29600 SAE J1939


29900 Bit collections

Table 1: Overview of parameter grouping

2 General


2.10 Level

As it is the digital control's primary function to control the operational behaviour of the engine with regard to speed, power, etc., parameterizing should remain entrusted exclu-sively to the engine manufacturer. However, to let also the end customer participate in the advantages of the digital control, the parameters of the HEINZMANN digital control have been classified according to seven levels.

Level 1: Level for the end customer

On this level, it is possible to have the basic operational values (e.g., set values and cur-rent values of speed and injection quantity) and errors displayed. This level, however, does not allow any manipulation of control data or engine data.

Level 2: Level for the device manufacturer

The device manufacturer can set speeds within the permissible ranges. Besides, the con-trol's dynamic parameters and the dynamics map may be modified and power output re-duced.

Level 3: Level for servicing

Except for the most significant engine specific parameters, such as engine output and boundaries of various characteristic diagrams, all types of modifications are permitted on this level.

Level 4: Level for the engine manufacturer

On this level, all parameters are accessible that are needed to adjust the engine's opera-tional performance.

Level 5: Level for manufacturers of engines with specific software

This level includes parameters that are required for customer specific software modifi-cations or expansions.

Level 6: Level for the control unit manufacturer

On this level, the control functions may be manipulated directly. Therefore, access re-mains reserved to HEINZMANN.

Level 7: Level for development

This level remains reserved to the HEINZMANN development department.

As can be seen from this survey, every superior level is a proper superset of the level be-

low. For each individual parameter the respective level is listed in the section 29 Parameter description. The maximum level is determined by the diagnostics device used (PC or handheld programmer) and cannot be changed. However, the option of reducing the currently valid level by means of a special menu item of the PC-programme or via parame-

ter 1800 Level is provided, thus allowing to reduce the number of visible parameters and functions at any given time.

3 Parameterization of HEINZMANN digital controls



The following chapters describe the functions of HEINZMANN digital controls and their adjustment. Certain functions will work only in combination with others or can be affected by

other functions (e.g, 5.2 Variable starting quantity limitation with 5.4 Starting sequence with starting speed ramp). When parameterizing or optimizing any such function, it will fre-quently be advisable to de-activate other functions so that the effect of the specific function can be examined by itself. How these functions are to be adjusted will be described in the respective chapters.

3.1 Possibilities of parameterization

There are various ways to set the parameters for HEINZMANN digital controls. For test-

ing and initial commissioning HEINZMANN recommend to use the PC software 3.3 DcDesk 2000 as a tool for diagnostics and parameterization. DcDesk 2000 should be used for servicing too, but the handheld programmers PG 02 and HP 03 may be used also. The remote connection programme DcDesk 2000/Saturn is another important aid for servicing.

The below list gives an overview of all available options of parameterization:

Parameterization by HEINZMANN

During final inspection at the factory, the functionality of the control is checked by means of a test programme. If customer specific operational data is available, the test programme is executed using those data. When mounted on the engine, only the dy-namic values and, if necessary, the fuel quantity limitations and the sensors remain to be calibrated.

Parameterization with a handheld programmer

Depending on the level, parameterization can be completely conducted using the hand-held programmers PG 2 or HP 03. These handy devices are particularly suited for main-tenance and servicing.

Parameterization using DcDesk 2000 or DcDesk 2000/Saturn

The PC programme DcDesk 2000 allows to continuously display several parameters and have them accessible for modification. Besides, the PC programme is capable of graphically displaying limitation curves, characteristics, etc., and of adjusting them eas-ily and quickly. The control data can be stored by the PC or downloaded from the PC to the control. A further advantage of the PC programme is its ability to visualize in high-resolution measured values (such as speed, injection quantity) as functions of time or as functions of each other (e.g., injection quantity versus speed).

Downloading data sets

Once all parameters have been set for a specific engine type and its application, the data set can be stored within the handheld programmer or on the PC. For future applications of the same type, any such data sets can be downloaded to the new controls.



Check-out parameterization

This type of parameterization is performed by the engine manufacturer during the final bench tests of the engine. During these tests, the control unit is adjusted to the require-ments of the engine’s applicative context. With a command line call from DcDesk 2000 both the control’s software and a delivery data record during trailer may be pro-grammed without operator intervention.

3.2 Saving Data

On principle, the above mentioned communication programmes and -devices will modify parameters only in the volatile memory of the control unit. Although the control unit will immediately operate using the new values these modifications will get lost as soon as the voltage supply is switched off. In order to permanently save the parameter adjustments in the control unit a storing command must be given. To execute this command, DcDesk 2000 uses the function key F6, whereas the handheld programmers use the key or menu item "Save Parameter", and it is this operation that is meant whenever it is required in this manual that the parameters be saved.

3.3 DcDesk 2000

The HEINZMANN PC programme DcDesk 2000 serves for adjustment and transmission of operating data for all digital HEINZMANN systems, and, in particular, for the systems described in this manual.

The connection between PC and control unit can be established using a serial interface or the CAN bus with the HEINZMANN-CAN protocol. The remote communication variant allows access via internet, intranet or a direct modem connection.

Designed as a Windows programme, it offers all numerical and graphical features required for testing, initial commissioning and servicing, and helps with preparing the respective documentations.

DcDesk 2000 also allows to produce hardcopy printouts of its screens and of its data re-cords. The data is recorded in a standard text format for further processing and for incorpo-ration into reports, etc.

The data set of any connected control unit can be processed, and, at the same time, the re-sponses to parameter changes can be observed. Even without a control unit connected, it will be possible to process a parameter set and evaluate the recorded data. Any parameter set generated that way can later on be downloaded to the control unit.

Any adjustment can be made by directly accessing the respective parameter numbers. Spe-cial windows simplify the adjustment of specific functions, in particular the configuration of the system and the parameter setting of characteristics and maps.

Actual measurement data is displayed numerically and/or graphically. In a separate win-dow, up to ten freely selectable measuring values can be displayed simultaneously as func-



tions of time. There is a further window that permits to have nine measurements repre-sented in dependence of a tenth. All of these records can be logged to be evaluated later on and eventually printed out.

Any of the characteristics and maps available within the control unit can be displayed two- or three-dimensionally in separate windows. By this, the profile and shape of any specific characteristic or map can immediately be viewed. The actual point within the characteristic or map at which the system is currently operating will be displayed online. To make an ad-justment it is not necessary to know the precise interrelation between the parameter num-bers and the points of the characteristic or map since a special input section has been pro-vided offering assistance with regard to the peculiarities of parameterizing characteristics and maps. This feature will prove very helpful to avoid erroneous inputs.

For the DARDANOS system, a special window is provided for visualizing injection timing and injection period.

DcDesk 2000 is being continuously updated and enhanced by additional functions. The lat-est version is available for download from the HEINZMANN homepage www.heinzmann.com.

HEINZMANN recommend the use of DcDesk 2000 for testing and initial commissioning. Similarly, when servicing the system, DcDesk 2000 will prove a decisive advantage for di-agnosis and trouble shooting.

3.4 Injection parameters

Any parameters relating to injection are always referred to crankshaft angle regardless of

whether the angle sensors are located on the crankshaft or on the camshaft ( 16 Measuring methods for determining crankshaft angle).

For these parameters, a distinction is made between absolute and relative values. Current delivery period 2300 DeliveryPeriod specified by °crank will, for example, represent an absolute value whereas relative values such as current delivery begin 2310 DeliveryBegin are related to degrees crankshaft before TDC of the respective cylinder. The unit used in this case is °BTDC (Before Top Dead Center).

3.5 Parameter value ranges

To each parameter a certain range of values is associated. Since there is a multitude of pa-

rameters and functions, there also exist a great number of value ranges. In chapter 29 Parameter description, the value ranges are listed for each individual parameter. Besides, the parameter value ranges are indicated also by DcDesk 2000 and by the handheld pro-

grammer ( 3.1 Possibilities of parameterization).

For speed parameters, however, a common value range is provided. As a standard, it cov-ers the range from 0 to 4000 rpm and allows to run engines up to maximum speeds of

approx. 3500 - 3600 rpm (There must be some reserve for 6.4 Overspeed monitoring).

http://www.heinzmann.com/



Throughout this manual, the standard value ranges will be 0..4000 rpm for speed parame-ters and 0..500 mm3/str for injection quantity parameters. Note that selection of any other value range will imply changes of the range limits. These changes and how to effect them

will be explained in chapter 29 Parameter description which should be carefully fol-lowed.

For certain parameters the value ranges cannot be explicitly specified in advance, but must be communicated to the control by the user. This applies to all parameters indicating physical measurements such as readings from pressure or temperature sensors.

Some parameters have a value range that is capable of two states only, viz. 0 and 1. This type of parameter is used to activate or switch over particular functions or to indicate error conditions or states of external switches, etc. Parameters with this value range are confined

to lists 2 (measurements) and 3 (functions) ( 29 Parameter description).

Regardless of whether the respective switching function is high-active or low-active, the setting "1" will always signify that the function is active, and "0" that it is inactive.

The parameter names of change-over switches as well as those of parameters provided for selection between two functions always include an „Or" (e.g., 2812 SwitchDroop2Or1). The function preceding Or in the parameter name will be active when the value of the pa-rameter is 1 (in the above example, Droop 2) whilst the function after Or will be active when the value of the parameter is 0 (in the example, Droop 1).

3.6 Activation of functions

As regards activation of functions, the following alternatives are provided:

permanently active:

These functions cannot be turned off (e.g., 6.4 Overspeed monitoring).

Parameter

Parameters contained in list 3 ( 30.1 List 3: Functions) enable functions that on being

selected by the user will remain permanently active (e.g., 9.1 Speed dependent injec-tion quantity limitation).

Switch functions

By means of external switches ( 22 Switching functions) the control can be instructed to adopt certain requested operational states that are subject to frequent changes during

operation (e.g., change-over 7.3 Droop). The states of the external switches can be viewed by the parameters that have been assigned the numbers from 2800 on upward.

The digital controls of the DARDANOS series are equipped with several inputs that can be configured at the user's option. The number of functions that can be activated by external switches is, however, considerably larger than the num-ber of inputs. Therefore, depending on the device version and on customer de-

Note


mands, the digital inputs can be assigned to different functions. In the follow-ing chapters, it is presumed that with regard to any function that is to be acti-vated or switched over by external switches, the respective switch has been ac-cordingly implemented and/or activated via a communication module.

3.7 Parameterization characteristics

Parameterization of characteristics is done by one and the same procedure. The number of pairs of variates, however, will be different for each function. A pair of variates consists of one x-value and one y-value both with the same index. Intermediary values between adja-cent pairs of variates will be interpolated by the control.

When parameterizing a characteristic, the following instructions must be observed:

The characteristics must always begin with the pair of values indexed 0.

The x-values must be sorted in ascending order.

Each x-value may occur only once.

For unused pairs at the end of the characteristic, the x-variate must be set to the smallest possible value.

Parameterization of any characteristic does not require all pairs of variates to be assigned a value. It will suffice to assign values only to as many parameters (beginning with index 0) as will be needed. Similarly, it will not be necessary that the distances between the base points are the same.

When the current x-value of any characteristic is below the first supporting point, the value of the characteristic will be set to the y-value of the first supporting point (base point), and when it is beyond the last supporting point, the y-value of this supporting point will be used. In other words, the first and last of the y-values will be retained in case the current x-value is outside the characteristic's domain. DcDesk 2000’s graphic display shows this.

3.8 Parameterization of maps

Parameterization of characteristics will always follow the same procedure. The number of base points, however, will be different for different functions. A supporting point consists of one x-value and one y-value and the associated z-value. Intermediary values between adjacent pairs of variates will be interpolated by the control.

When parameterizing a map, the following instructions must be observed:

The x- and y-values must always begin with index 0.

The x- and y-values must be arranged by ascending order.

Each x- and y-value may occur only once.




For unused base points at the end of the map, the x- and y-variates must each be as-signed their respective smallest possible values.

Parameterization of any map does not require all pairs of variates to be assigned a value. It will suffice to assign values only to as many parameters (beginning with index 0 for the x- and y-values) as will be needed. Similarly, it will not be necessary that the distances be-tween the base points be the same.

As an illustration of how parameter indexes are assigned to a map, the following example shows a map table with a domain of 5 times 5 base points:

x-values

y-values x index 0 x index 1 x index 2 x index 3 x index 4

y index 0 z index 0 z index 1 z index 2 z index 3 z index 4





Table 2: Map structure

If the current values in direction of the x- and/or y-axes are outside the domain of the map as defined by the base points, the respective border value of the map will be used instead. DcDesk 2000’s graphic display shows this.

If it should prove necessary to restrict dependence to only one direction this can be achieved by setting the base points for the other direction to their minimum value. In other words, if there is functional dependence only in direction of the y-axis, all x index values are to be set to minimum value. The base points for z will then be those of the series with x-index 0.

HEINZMANN recommend to use 3.3 DcDesk 2000 for parameterizing maps and char-acteristics as this programme will takes care of all particulars to be paid attention to and will simplify parameterization considerably. Thus, the above table is included in DcDesk 2000 in identical form and offers easy access to any of the base points. Furthermore, the characteristics and maps can be represented graphically by the programme.

3.9 Examples of parameterization

For the majority of functions, an example has been provided of how parameterization is to be conducted. These examples will include all the parameters needed for the function be-ing discussed. The values, however, will be different ones for different engines and appli-cations and must be understood to be adduced merely as examples. When adjusting any function, it will, therefore, be necessary to use reasonable values suiting the engine and the application.


3.10 Reset of control unit

A reset is tantamount to powering down the control and restarting it. This can be achieved by shortly turning off the power supply or else by a specific command from DcDesk 2000 or from the handheld programmer HP 03.

A reset will clear any data that has not been saved in the control's permanent memory. It is, therefore, imperative that before executing a reset all data be trans-

ferred to the control's permanent memory if this data is to be preserved ( Note 3.2 Saving Data).

Certain functions of the control unit require a reset for activation. These are mostly func-tions that serve the purpose to put the control into some other operating state, or parame-ters that for safety reasons cannot be modified during operation. The parameters and func-tions belonging to this category will be explained in detail in the respective chapters.

Since during each reset the control is de-energized for a short time, a reset may be executed only when the engine is not running!

Warning


4 Starting the engine



On first commissioning the control on the engine, the following instructions should be strictly

followed. This is the only way to ensure that the engine can be started without any problems.

These instructions, however, can give only some brief information on how to commission the

governor. For more detailed information, please refer to the respective chapters or manuals.

The instructions cover all parameters that must be adjusted to start the engine. It should be

noted, however, that the parameter values used in these instructions are adduced only by way

of example. For actual operation they must be replaced by appropriate values suiting the en-

gine and the specific application.

1. Adjust distance of speed pickup

The distance between the pickups and the top of the teeth or the sensing pin should be

approx. 0.5 to 2.0 mm. For more detailed information see the publication "Control Systems

for Electronically Controlled Injection Systems" no. MV 99 002-e

With Hall sensors, the sensor's preferred direction must be observed.

2. Check cabling

- 22 Switching functions and 24.1 Digital inputs.

On actuating any switch, the respective indication parameter should reflect the change. If several switches are provided this check must be conducted for all of them.

- 21 Sensors and 24.2 Analogue inputs

On first commissioning the engine, it is only the setpoint adjusters that are needed since the functions operating by signals from the analogue inputs (such as boost pressure de-pendent quantity limitation, speed dependent oil pressure monitoring, etc.) must not yet be activated. Nevertheless, all analogue inputs should be checked.

With common rail applications, first commissioning will in addition require control of rail pressure.

Example: Let us assume setpoint adjuster 1 is connected to analogue input 1. When al-

tering the set value, parameter 3511 AnalogIn1_Value is expected to change

accordingly. If there is no change, the cabling of the setpoint adjuster must be

at fault. Together with 3511 AnalogIn1_Value, the parameter 3510 AnalogIn1

and the specific setpoint adjuster parameter 2900 Setpoint1Extern are also

bound to change from 0 to 100 % when the setpoint adjuster is turned from

minimum to maximum position. If this is not the case, the input needs to be

normalized ( 24.2.1 Calibration of analogue inputs).

- Click Test to check the cabling to the magnetic valves (see 17.4.1 Checking actuation

by click test)



3. Parameterizing the most significant parameters

- Begin by programming the minimum and maximum speeds and overspeeds

( 7 Determination of speed setpoints)

Number Parameter Value Unit

10 SpeedMin1 700 rpm

12 SpeedMax1 2100 rpm

21 SpeedOver 2500 rpm

- Preset the PID values ( 8.1 Adjustment of PID parameters):


100 Gain 15 % 101 Stability 10 % 102 Derivative 0 %

- Parameterize the absolute injection quantity limitation:


711 FuelLimitMaxAbsolute 220 mm3/str

- Parameterize starting quantity (type 1) ( 5.1 Fixed starting quantity limitation):


250 StartType 1 251 LimitsDelay 3 s 255 StartSpeed1 10 rpm

256 StartSpeed2 400 rpm

260 StartFuel1 160 mm3/str

- Save the values to the control device and restart with a 3.10 Reset of control unit.

4. Check speed pickup and determine starter speed

Caution! Before starting the engine, take great care to ensure separate overspeed protection.

- Operate starter and check the measured speed as indicated by 2000 Speed. At this point,

the parameter should indicate cranking speed.

- Check starter speed, i.e. the minimum speed at which the governor recognizes that the

engine has started (256 StartSpeed2). This speed must be above cranking speed.



5. Start the engine and adjust control circuit stability ( 8.1 Adjustment of PID parameters)

- Start the engine and run it up to rated speed using the setpoint adjuster.

- Optimize the PID values.

Increase Gain (P-factor) 100 Gain until the engine becomes unstable, then reduce it un-

til stability is restored.

Increase Stability (I-factor) 101 Stability until the engine becomes unstable, then reduce

it until Stability is restored.

Increase Derivative (D-factor) 102 Derivative until the engine becomes unstable, then

reduce it until stability is restored.

With this adjustment, disturb engine speed shortly and observe the transient response.

6. Perform this checking procedure for the entire speed range

If for minimum and maximum speeds this checking procedure results in values differing

from the programmed ones, the setpoint adjuster needs to be calibrated ( 24.2.1

Calibration of analogue inputs). The parameter 2031 SpeedSetp will indicate whether the

value has been set correctly.

7. Perform speed and/or quantity dependent correction of the PID parameters for the entire

speed range ( 8 Optimizing control circuit stability).

8. Adjust the remaining functions, such as speed ramps, speed dependent quantity limitation,

etc.

9. Save the data thus determined by storing it in the control ( 3.2 Saving Data).

5 Starting quantity limitation



To start properly, naturally aspirated diesel engines and engines with low pressure charging need to be fed an excess quantity of fuel; in other words, for start-up a larger amount of fuel must be injected than for full load.

Diesel engines fitted with more powerful turbochargers will operate during start-up by a re-duced starting fuel quantity to prevent smoke bursts.

The HEINZMANN DARDANOS digital controls comply with these requirements by de-activating any other of the control's limiting functions during start-up. To do so, three options are available that can be selected by the parameter 250 StartType as follows:

250 StartType = 1: fixed starting fuel limitation

250 StartType = 2: variable starting fuel limitation

250 StartType = 3: temperature dependent starting fuel limitation

The different phases of the starting procedure and of the speed control are indicated by the parameter 3830 Phase:

0: waiting for engine start 1: starting phase 1 2: starting phase 2 3: starting phase 3 4: speed control enabled, limiting functions disabled 5: speed control enabled, limiting functions enabled 6: speed control enabled, lower limit enabled 7: speed control enabled, upper limit enabled

8: click test active (see 17.4.1 Checking actuation by click test).

Each engine start is counted in 2250 EngineStartCounter. Operating hours of the running en-gine are recorded in 3871 OperatingHourMeter and 3872 OperatingSecondMeter.

The current engine states are indicated by the following parameters:

2007 SynchronToGap synchronous to tooth gap of measuring wheel

3800 EmergencyAlarm fatal error

3802 EngineStopRequest a request for stopping the engine is being applied, the running engine stops, engine start is not possible

3803 EngineStopped engine stopped

3804 EngineStarting engine is being started

3805 EngineRunning engine is running

3806 EngineInjectReleased injection enabled

Injection will be enabled if there is no engine stop request and no fatal error and only after

performing synchronization with the tooth gap of the sensing gear ( 16.4 Synchronization by



tooth gap). With common rail systems, in addition there must be a certain minimum injection

pressure ( 20 Rail pressure control with common rail systems) to start the engine.

5.1 Fixed starting quantity limitation

On reaching speed as set by 255 StartSpeed1, the control recognizes that the engine is be-

ing cranked and will try to determine the exact crankshaft and camshaft positions ( 16 Measuring methods for determining crankshaft angle). After successful synchronization, the starting quantity as set by 260 StartFuel1 is enabled, and set speed is raised from 0 rpm to minimum speed 10 SpeedMin1.

TIME [s]

SPEED[rpm]

TIME [s]

QUANTITY[mm³/stroke]

En

gin

esp

eed

ran

ge

30 4 5,6,7

Maximum speed

Speed setpoint 1

Minimum speed

Starting speed 2

Starting speed 1

Starting quantity 1

Phase

<12>

<2031>

<10>

<256>

<255>

<260>

<3830>

Delay time <251>

Starting quantity adjustment active Limiting functions active

Current speed

Set speed

Figure 9:Fixed starting quantity limitation

On reaching speed as set by 256 StartSpeed2, the control recognizes that the engine is run-ning. At this point, there is a change-over to the externally applied speed setpoint 2031 SpeedSetp. Starting quantity limitation 260 StartFuel1 is, however, maintained for the du-


ration set by 251 LimitsDelay. After that, the control passes over to using the governor's normal limiting functions.

The successive stages of the speed setpointduring start-up can be viewed by the parameter

2031 SpeedSetp (see Figure 9). Below starting speed 1, the setpoint is set to 0. During cranking (with the speed ranging between starting speeds 1 and 2), control is to idle speed. It is only after the engine is running (i.e., at speeds higher then starting speed 2) that the actually preset setpoint will be active.

Parameterizing Example:

The engine is supposed to start using a pre-defined maximum fixed starting quantity of 160 mm3/str. Furthermore, on reaching a speed of 10 rpm the engine is to be recognized as be-ing cranked, and at 400 rpm as being running. Once the engine has started off, starting quantity limitation is supposed to be active for 5 more seconds.


250 StartType 1 251 LimitsDelay 5 s 255 StartSpeed1 10 rpm

256 StartSpeed2 400 rpm 260 StartFuel1 160 mm3/str

5.2 Variable starting quantity limitation

Variable starting fuel limitation is mainly used with diesel engines of little or medium power output. In these cases, two starting fuel quantities are provided. The first quantity 260 StartFuel1 is set to the value by which the warm engine will start properly, whilst the second 261 StartFuel2 is set to the value the cold engine is sure to start with even at ex-tremely low temperatures.

In case a temperature sensor is provided, it is recommended to use 5.3 Temperature dependent starting quantity limitation.

Note


ing cranked and will try to determine the exact crankshaft and camshaft positions ( 16 Measuring methods for determining crankshaft angle). After successful synchronization, the starting quantity as set by 260 StartFuel1 is enabled, and set speed is raised from 0 rpm to minimum speed 10 SpeedMin1.

If within the time defined by 265 StartDuration1 the engine should not start off with start-ing fuel set to 260 StartFuel1, the control will increase the fuel quantity to 261 StartFuel2 for the time defined in 266 StartDuration2. This fuel quantity is sustained until the engine starts off or cranking is aborted.



On reaching speed as set by 256 StartSpeed2, the control recognizes that the engine is run-ning. At this point, there is a change-over to the externally applied speed setpoint 2031 SpeedSetp. The fuel quantity, however, with which the engine had started off is sustained as a fuel quantity limitation for the time interval set by 251 LimitsDelay. After that, the control passes over to using the governor's normal limiting functions.


SPEED[rpm]

TIME [s]

TIME [s]

1 2 3 4 5,6,70

Maximum speed

Speed setpoint 1

Minimum speed

Starting speed 2

Starting speed 1

Starting

Starting quantity 1

Phase

Start duration 1

Start duration 2

Delay time

<12>

<2031>

<10>

<256>

<255>

<260>

<3830>

<265>

<266>

<251>

Current speed

Set speed

quantity 2<261>

QU[mm³

En

gin

esp

eed

ran

ge


ANTITY/stroke]

Figure 10: Variable starting quantity limitation



The engine is supposed to start using the initially pre-defined maximum starting quantity of 120 mm3/str. At speeds of 10 rpm and higher the engine is to be recognized as being cranked, and at a speed of 400 rpm as being running. If after 3 seconds the engine has not yet started running the starting quantity limitation is to be raised until after another 7 sec-onds a maximum starting amount of 220 mm3/str is enabled. In case the engine still does not start off, fuel limitation is to remain set to this value. Once the engine has started off, starting quantity limitation is supposed to be active for 5 more seconds.


250 StartType 2 251 LimitsDelay 5 s 255 StartSpeed1 10 rpm 256 StartSpeed2 400 rpm 260 StartFuel1 120 mm3/str 261 StartFuel2 200 mm3/str 265 StartDuration1 3 s 266 StartDuration2 7 s

5.3 Temperature dependent starting quantity limitation

START QUANTITY[mm /stroke]3

TEMPERATURE [°C]Starting temperaturewith cold engine

<271>

Starting temperaturewith warm engine

<270>

Start quantity 2<261>

Start quantity 1<260>

Figure 11: Temperature dependent starting fuel

With this mode of starting quantity adjustment, starting quantity is adjusted in dependence of temperature. By means of a temperature sensor engine temperature is determined via

coolant temperature ( 2907 CoolantTemp) and used by the control to determine the most adequate starting quantity for this temperature. Apart from this, the cranking procedure is the same as with fixed starting quantity adjustment except for fixed starting quantity being derived from current engine temperature.



As long as the cold engine's temperature is below 271 StartTempCold the starting fuel quantity 261 StartFuel2 is released. With engine temperature rising, starting quantity is re-duced until with the temperature at 270 StartTempWarm the starting quantity 260 Start-Fuel1 is attained.


TIME [s]

SPEED[rpm]

TIME [s]

QUANTITY[mm³/stroke]

Maximum speed

Speed setpoint 1

Minimum speed

Starting speed 2

Starting speed 1

<12>

<2031>

<10>

<256>

<255>

Current speed

Set speed

30 4 5,6,7

Starting quantity 2

Phase

<261>

<3830>

<251>

Starting quantity 1<260>

Range of temperature dependentstarting fuel quantity adjustment

Delay time

En

gin

esp

eed

ran

ge


Figure 12: Temperature dependent starting quantity limitation


On attaining 255 StartSpeed1 the control will, as before, recognize that the engine is being cranked, and on reaching 256 StartSpeed2 that the engine is running. At this point, there is a change-over to the externally applied speed setpoint 2031 SpeedSetp. The fuel quantity, however, with which the engine had started off is sustained as a fuel quantity limitation for the time interval set by 251 LimitsDelay. After that, the control passes over to using the normal limiting functions.


The engine is to start at an engine temperature of -10 °C with temperature dependent maxi-mum starting injection quantity of 210 mm3/str. If engine temperature is higher during start-up, the starting injection quantity is to be reduced accordingly. If, however, engine temperature has already risen above 40°C, starting fuel quantity is no longer to be reduced, but to be held at the value of 150 mm3/str. Furthermore, on reaching a speed of 10 rpm the engine is to be recognized as being cranked, and at 400 rpm as being running. Once the engine has started off, starting quantity limitation is supposed to be active for 5 more sec-onds.


250 StartType 3 251 LimitsDelay 5 s 255 StartSpeed1 10 rpm 256 StartSpeed2 400 rpm 260 StartFuel1 150 mm3/str 261 StartFuel2 210 mm3/str 270 StartTempWarm 40 °C 271 StartTempCold -10 °C

5.4 Starting sequence with starting speed ramp

Once the engine has started, it may be desirable to have it ramp up slowly to its ultimate speed value. This helps to protect the engine from premature wear and to avoid overshoot-ing. This function is activated by the parameter 4240 StartSpeedRampOn.


ing cranked and will try to determine the exact crankshaft and camshaft positions ( 16 Measuring methods for determining crankshaft angle). After successful synchronization, the speed setpoint is raised from 0 rpm to speed 257 StartSpeed3. This speed must have been parameterized to range between minimum speed 10 SpeedMin1 and the speed 256 StartSpeed2 at which the engine is recognized to be running. If engine start-off is detected the speed setpoint is increased by the ramping rate as pre-defined by 240 StartSpeedRam-pUp until the externally applied speed setpoint is attained. Actual speed will follow these changes of set speed.

The starting is independent of the normal 7.2 Speed ramp. It is only used to start the en-gine, and its priority is superior to that of the normal speed ramp. If both the starting speed




ramp and the normal speed ramp are enabled, the normal set speed ramp will remain inac-tive until after engine start the set speed has been reached via the starting speed ramp.

Maximum speed<12>

Speed setpoint 1<2031>

Minimum speed<10>

Starting speed 3<257>



Set speed

Eng

ine

spee

d ra

nge

Range forstarting speed 3<257>

Actual speed

TIME [s]

SPEED[rpm]

Figure 13: Starting behaviour with starting speed ramp enabled


In addition to any of the preceding examples, the speed setpoint is to ramp up after start-off from 600 rpm to the externally applied setpoint by a ramping rate of 100 rpmps (rpm per second). To achieve this, the following parameters must be additionally programmed:


240 StartSpeedRampUp 100 rpmps 257 StartSpeed3 600 rpm 4240 StartSpeedRampOn 1

6 Speed sensing

6 Speed sensing

6.1 Speed values

The following parameters are provided to indicate actual speeds:

2000 Speed current engine speed.

2001 SpeedPickUp1 speed as read by speed pickup 1

2002 SpeedPickUp2 speed as read by speed pickup 2

2003 SpeedPickUp1Value speed as read by speed pickup 1 unfiltered.

2004 SpeedPickUp2Value speed as read by speed pickup 2 unfiltered.

2005 ActivePickUp indication of active pickup

2009 SpeedCamIndex speed measured by the camshaft index sensor

Depending on which speed pickup is active, actual speed 2000 Speed will coincide with ei-ther 2001 SpeedPickUp1 or 2002 SpeedPickUp2. If a special emergency tooth wheel on

the camshaft is used (see 16.2 Measuring methods) current speed may also be measured by the camshaft adjuster 2009 SpeedCamIndex.

This speed value is used by other functions like speed control, fuel limitations, etc. The un-filtered speed serves only for information. The unfiltered speed of pickup 2 can be deter-mined accurately only if this pickup is working as active pickup, i.e. when pickup 1 is out of order. The filtered speed is determined correctly in all cases.

The pickup active at the moment is also the one responsible for registering angular position and therefore for injection.

All speeds refer to engine speed (i.e. crankshaft speed), even if the speed pickups are

mounted on the camshaft ( 16 Measuring methods for determining crankshaft angle).

Speed is being filtered by a special procedure to eliminate engine speed varia-tions due to the coefficient of cyclic variation.

Note


6 Speed sensing

6.2 Speed sensing

For safe operation, an independent second speed pickup can be connected to the HEINZMANN control to take over sensing engine speed in case the first pickup should fail. Speed pickup 1 is always the one to be used under normal operation whereas the sec-ond serves as a backup speed probe only. The pickup on the emergency camshaft wheel similarly serves as redundant safety pickup.

With electronically controlled injection systems, sensing of speeds and angles is done us-ing special sensing gears. The design of the sensing gears (measuring wheels) and the way speed pickups are mounted on the sensing gears must be coordinated with HEINZMANN

( 16 Measuring methods for determining crankshaft angle).

When parametrizing, in parameter 1 TeethPickUp1 and parameter 2 TeethPickUp2, the number of teeth the respective pickup sees during one complete revolution of the engine is to be entered.

The measurement frequency resulting from teeth number and maximum speed / overspeed may not exceed 8000 Hz. The control device monitors this and sends out a configuration

error message ( 28.3 Configuration errors) in case of error. In addition, 3004 ErrOver-Speed[0,1] is activated in order to prevent that the engine can be started.



1 TeethPickUp1 60

2 TeethPickUp2 60

Activation:

4002 PickUp2On 1

The second speed pickup must be activated separately. These parameters

will be active only after the data is memorized in the control unit (

Note

3.2

Saving Data) followed by a 3.10 Reset of control unit.

6.3 Speed pickup monitoring

For either speed pickup on the crankshaft, identical monitoring functions for wrong mount-ing direction, fault and excessive signal frequency have been implemented independently. The camshaft index adjustor is monitored for fault and wrong mounting direction. With the exception of the mounting direction the monitoring functions are always active and cannot be switched off.


6 Speed sensing

Failure of a speed pickup is indicated by these parameters:

3001 ErrPickUp1 speed pickup 1 at fault

3002 ErrPickUp2 speed pickup 2 at fault

3003 ErrPickUpIndex camshaft index adjuster at fault

A pickup error can be cleared only when the engine has stopped. If speed pickup 1 is at fault and the engine is operating by speed pickup 2 any attempt at clearing the error would result in switching back to pickup 1. Before it is again recognized to be at fault, this will take a short time during which speed cannot be controlled and may lead to undesirable speed and load variations.

Note

If an emergency camshaft wheel is mounted, the camshaft index adjuster may be used as a replacement when one pickup or both pickups are at fault. If a camshaft wheel with a sin-gle mark is used, the registered speed is only indicated. For control functions and as a start-ing value for injection it is not precise enough, since only one value is measured each two crankshaft revolutions.

If a redundant pickup is used, either pickup 2 or the camshaft index adjuster on the emer-gency camshaft wheel, in case of error the determination of speed and angular position is continued with the correctly working pickup. If only one speed pickup is connected, an emergency engine shutdown will immediately be executed in case of its failure.

The active pickup, i.e. the one currently used by the control, is indicated in the following parameter:

2005 ActivePickUp = 0 pickup 1 relevant

2005 ActivePickUp = 1 pickup 2 relevant

2005 ActivePickUp = 2 camshaft index adjuster relevant

6.3.1 Monitoring mode of pickups during engine start

If on starting the engine one of the speed pickups is sensing some speed above the start-ing speed 255 StartSpeed1 the other pickup must detect a speed greater than zero within 0.5 seconds. Otherwise, this pickup will be assumed to be at fault. When commissioning the engine, care should be taken to preset 255 StartSpeed1 in such a way that both speed pickups will be able supply a reliable signal for this speed. This monitoring mode re-quires implementation of two speed pickups.

In addition, both pickups are monitored by the camshaft index adjuster. If the camshaft adjuster delivers the information that a camshaft revolution has already been registered, during the same time the pickups must report a correspondent signal. If not, they are at fault.


Should both speed pickups and the index adjuster be faulty before the engine is started, the control unit will not be able to detect any fault. In this case it will not be possible to

6 Speed sensing

start the engine since no speed is being sensed and synchronization is therefore not pos-sible.

6.3.2 Failure monitoring of pickups when engine is running

Pickup monitoring with running engine starts when starting speed 256 StartSpeed2 is exceeded and ends when speed falls below the same value. The pickups are no longer monitored when an engine stop signal (3810 EngineStopRequest = 1) is set.

Failure of a speed pickup is reported if for a certain time period depending on the num-ber of teeth and on the current speed there is no measuring pulse received from the pickup.

6.3.3 Failure monitoring of camshaft index adjuster during engine start

The failure of the camshaft index adjuster during engine start is recognized when the pickups register the third gap on the crankshaft measuring wheel but no signal is trans-mitted by the camshaft index adjuster. This means that speed can be measured but the crankshaft position cannot be determined with accuracy. In such an event, the control unit uses the first gap found for initialization, in the hope that this is the right one. In the engine doesn’t start, the injection is wrong by exactly 360°. In this case, abort engine start and try again.

Since a common rail system builds up sufficient fuel pressure for injection even in this wrong position and an injection in this position is not desired, engine start with missing camshaft index sensor may be inhibited – in this case the control should not enable in-jection. This mode is selected by the parameters:

4008 TryToFindGapOn = 0 no cranking attempt when index sensor is miss-ing

4008 TryToFindGapOn = 1 cranking attempt with missing index sensor is allowed

6.3.4 Failure monitoring of camshaft index adjuster when engine is running

When the index sensor fails while the engine is running, only an error message is output and the engine continues to run, except when the index adjuster on the emergency cam-shaft wheel is used for speed control due to a previous fault of a pickup. In this case the engine must be switched off.

6.3.5 Monitoring of mounting direction

The pickups must be mounted in a specific direction to register the correct signal edge. Pickup mounting direction is therefore monitored during engine start if parameter 4015 CheckPickUpDirection = 1. In like manner, the mounting direction of the camshaft in-dex adjuster is monitored if 4016 CheckIndexDirection is set.


6 Speed sensing


6.3.6 Monitoring of excessive frequency

Both pickups on the crankshaft measuring wheel are monitored for excessive signal fre-quency. When the signal frequency is too high, the respective pickup is turned off, in order to avoid disturbing the system with false impulses. Speed control is continued with the measuring values of the redundant pickup.

6.4 Overspeed monitoring

Overspeed is set with parameter 21 SpeedOver. This value will be valid for speed pickup 1 as well as for speed pickup 2 even though their speed signals are monitored independently of each other.

Regardless of which speed pickup is currently active, exceeding overspeed will always trigger a fatal error and cause an emergency engine shutdown.

An overspeed error of the camshaft index adjuster is also considered a fatal error in all sys-

tems with emergency camshaft wheel (see 16 Measuring methods for determining crankshaft angle). In systems with a synchronizing pulse on the camshaft an accurate speed measurement is not possible and for these systems therefore an overspeed error leads only to an error message without engine shutdown.

Parameter 3004 ErrOverSpeed is charged with the information coming from the triggering pickup. To restart the engine, it will be necessary to clear the error and to execute a reset or to turn the supply voltage off.

Overspeed monitoring cannot be disabled.

6.5 Speed switching points

HEINZMANN digital controls offer the possibility of signalling via digital outputs that certain speeds have been attained.

For this purpose three speed switching points are provided which can be parameterized:

90 SpeedSwitch speed switching point 1

91 SpeedSwitch2 speed switching point 2

92 SpeedSwitch3 speed switching point 3

If the respective speed is exceeded a signal is triggered.

2090 SpeedSwitchActive 1 = switching point speed 1 is reached

2091 SpeedSwitch2Active 1 = switching point speed 2 is reached

2092 SpeedSwitch3Active 1 = switching point speed 3 is reached

The signal is deactivated if speed is lower than 90% of switching point speed.

These signals can be assigned to digital outputs ( 24.5 Digital outputs) and evaluated by an external control, e.g. the starter may be de-activated when cranking speed is reached or

6 Speed sensing


synchronization activated when generator frequency is reached. The digital control itself does not require these signals.

Dual systems in marine applications use 90 SpeedSwitch to signal that cou-

pling speed has been reached ( 14.1 Master-slave operation).

Note

7 Determination of speed setpoints


HEINZMANN digital controls may be configured for a wide variety of different applica-tions. Any such configuration will make specific functions available for the respective appli-cation, but will also require that determination of the speed setpoints be conducted in a suit-able manner. Presently, the following applications are provided:

Application Mode

0 General application

1 Vehicle application

2 Locomotive application

3 Generator application

4 Marine application

Table 3: Applications

The application number has to be entered in the parameter 1810 OperationMode. If this pa-rameter is not provided, the parameter 3810 OperationMode will display the permanently preset application mode of the firmware version actually used.

Once the application specific speed setpoint has been determined, it may additionally be de-layed by a speed ramp and modified by droop. The following chapters will begin by explain-ing application-specific determination of speed setpoints and then deal with application-independent speed setpoint functions such as speed ramps, droop and temperature dependent raising of idle speed.

Before reading the chapter dealing with setpoint determination for the particular application, it is recommended to work through the chapter on general applica-tion as this chapter describes the influences that can affect setpoint determination and may therefore be of importance for the various applications.

Note



7.1 Application-specific determination of speed setpoints

7.1.1 General application

For general application, the parameter 1810 OperationMode must be set to "0" resp. the parameter 3810 OperationMode must display "0".

Setpoints may be pre-defined by means of analogue setpoint adjusters (potentiometers,

foot throttle, current signal, etc., see 21 Sensors or external switches for fixed speed

values 22 Switching functions. Switching functions that have not been assigned an ex-ternal switch will always enter into determination of speed setpoints with value "0" or "no" respectively. The following switching functionsare provided for general determi-nation of speed setpoints:

Indication parameter Meaning

2810 SwitchEngineStop 1 = engine stop

2811 SwitchIdleSpeed 1 = idle speed active

2812 SwitchDroop2Or1

0 = droop 1 active 1 = droop 2 active

2814 SwitchSpeedRange2Or1 0 = speed range 1 active

1 = speed range 2 active

2815 SwitchSpeedFix1 1 = fixed speed 1 active


2827 SwitchSetpoint2Or1

0 = setpoint 1 active 1 = setpoint 2 active

Table 4: Speed setpoint switching functions 1

To facilitate commissioning, it is possible to directly pre-define a setpoint by means of a PC or handheld programmer without having to modify the inputs that have already been parameterized. This function is activated by the parameter 4020 SpeedSetpPCOn, and the setpoint is adjusted by means of the parameter 20 SpeedSetpPC. This function is non-latching, i.e., it will

not store that value. Following a

Note

3.10 Reset of control unit, the original value will be active again.

As the control may see several signals coming in at the same time, the signal sources have been assigned different priorities with respect to the determination of setpoints. For applications in general, the determination of the speed setpoint 2031 SpeedSetp is illustrated by the below diagram.



Engine stop?

yes

1

yes no

Setpoint= 0

Setpointfrom PC?

Idling speed?

Fixedspeed 1?

Setpoint= Idling speed

Setpoint= Fix 1

Setpoint= Fix 2

Setpointselection

2

Setpointadjuster 1

Setpointadjuster 2

< >2033

Ramp?

Droop?

Setpointramp

< >2032

Droop

Rangelimitation

no

yes

yes

yes

yes

no

no

no

no

Setpointfrom PC

Fixedspeed 2?

noyes

< >2031

Speedgovernor

Figure 14: Speed setpoint determination for general purposes



Strictly speaking, the function "Engine stop" (zero speed) does not represent a setpoint adjustment; it is, however, assigned higher priority than any of the other functions. The parameter 4810 StopImpulsOrSwitch permits to decide by way of configuration whether the stop command is to be in effect for the period the command is being applied via the switch or whether a pulse will suffice to activate the command until the engine comes to a standstill.

4810 StopImpulseOrSwitch = 0 engine stop is active only as long as the stop command is coming in

4810 StopImpulseOrSwitch = 1 engine stop is activated by a single switching pulse until the engine stops

The parameter 3802 EngineStopRequest serves to indicate that the engine is being stopped by some internal or external stop command. External engine stop is executed by means of the switch 2810 EngineStop while for an internal engine stop the shutdown command is issued by the control itself (e.g., in case of overspeed). The parameter 3803 EngineStopped is provided to indicate that the engine has stopped.

Setpoint adjustment by analogue adjusters(2900 Setpoint1Extern and 2901 Setpoint2-Extern) is possible only if there is no setpoint coming in from the PC and if none of the switches for fixed speed values has been actuated. Otherwise, the control will operate according to the speed setpoint selected among 20 SpeedSetpPC, 10 SpeedMin1, 17 SpeedFix1 and 18 SpeedFix2.

In other words, though setpoint adjustment by the PC hat topmost priority it is used only during commissioning. Therefore, it is the switching function for idle speed that has highest priority in normal operation and is followed by the switching function for fixed speed 1 which, in turn, ranks before fixed speed 2 and the setpoint adjusters.

The setpoint 2033 SpeedSetpSelect thus determined can be delayed by activated ramp

functions ( 7.2 Speed ramp) before droop is applied. The intermediary value attained after ramping can be read from the parameter 2032 SpeedSetpRamp. The final setpoint by which the control will operate can be viewed by the parameter 2031 SpeedSetp.

The parameter 2031 SpeedSetp is equal to zero when the engine is at a standstill or is to be shut down. On starting the engine, control is first by idle speed. The actual setpoint will be active only when the engine has

started off and is running (

Note

5 Starting quantity limitation).

To adjust to the engine's operating conditions, two different speed rangesmay be pre-set, e.g., one for driving and one for stationary operation. For driving operation the speed range is normally defined with regard to the requirements of the prime mover, and for stationary operation with regard to those of the working machine.

These speed ranges are parameterized by means of the following parameters. These limit values apply to all speed setpoint adjustments except for droop.



10 SpeedMin1 minimum speed for range 1

12 SpeedMax1 maximum speed for range 1

11 SpeedMin2 minimum speed for range 2

13 SpeedMax2 maximum speed for range 2


Speed range is assumed to be from 700 rpm to 2,100 rpm for driving operation, and from 1000 rpm to 1,800 rpm for stationary operation. Besides, there are fixed speeds to be provided for stationary operation at 1,200 rpm and at 1,500 rpm.


10 SpeedMin1 700 rpm 11 SpeedMin2 1000 rpm 12 SpeedMax1 2100 rpm 13 SpeedMax2 1800 rpm 17 SpeedFix1 1200 rpm 18 SpeedFix2 1500 rpm

The speed range switch as defined by the selector switch function 2814 Switch-SpeedRange2Or1 serves to select the speed range by which the control is supposed to operate.

2814 SwitchSpeedRange2Or1 = 0 Control is operating by speed range 1

2814 SwitchSpeedRange2Or1 = 1 Control is operating by speed range 2

If no selector switch is provided (814 FunctSpeedRange2Or1= 0 and Comm-SpeedRange2Or1 = 0 or both parameters not available) the control will always operate using speed range 1.

When the speed range is changed while the engine is running it may happen that the old set value – and the current speed along with it – lies out of range of the new speed range.. In such a case, the engine runs up to the new setpoint inside the new speed range

using the speed ramp ( 7.2 Speed ramp), if the latter is active.

Note

Minimum and maximum speeds can be increased by 7.3 Droop.

For variable operating conditions, it is in general possible to make use of two different setpoint adjusters. The selector switch defined by the switching function 2827 Switch-Setpoint2Or1 is provided to select by which setpoint adjuster the control is going to op-erate.

2827 SwitchSetpoint2Or1 = 0 control is operating with setpoint adjuster 1

2827 SwitchSetpoint2Or1 = 1 control is operating with setpoint adjuster 2



If no selector switch is provided (827 FunctSetpoint2Or1= 0 and 20827 CommSet-point2Or1 = 0 or both parameters not available) the control will always operate using setpoint adjuster 1.

The setpoint values of the setpoint adjusters are indicated by the parameters

2900 Setpoint1Extern setpoint adjuster 1

2901 Setpoint2Extern setpoint adjuster 2

7.1.2 Vehicle operation

For vehicle operation the value of the parameter 1810 OperationMode must have been set to "1" resp. the parameter 3810 OperationMode must display "1".

For particular vehicle applications, it may be desirable to freeze the current speed set-point via a switch and to continue operation using this setpoint (variable fixed speed). The assignment of the switches for storing the two setpoints is made by means of the parameters 2829 SwitchFreezeSetp1 and 2830 SwitchFreezeSetp2.

2829 SwitchFreezeSetp1 = 1 value of setpoint 1 has been frozen


The setpoint coming in when the function is activated will be frozen. As long as the function is active, the current setpoint will be compared with the stored setpoint. If the set value coming from the setpoint adjuster exceeds the frozen value, operation will continue using the current value of the setpoint adjuster; otherwise the frozen value is used. The frozen setpoint, however, will be abandoned only when the switch is opened.

The speed setpoint resulting from this method of speed setpoint determination can be read from the parameter 2033 SpeedSetpSelect.

Vehicle operation provides the additional option of having the control unit configured

as an 11.1 Idle/maximum speed governor. In this operating mode, the determination of speed setpoints will define only idle and maximum speeds and possibly required in-termediary speeds.



Engine stop?yes no

yes no

yes no

yes no

yes no

1

no

yes no

Setpoint= 0

Setpointfrom PC?

Setpointfrom PC

Idle speed?

Fixedspeed 1?

Setpoint= Idling

Setpoint= Fix 1

Setpoint= Fix 2

Setpointselection

2

< >2033

Ramp?

Droop?

Setpointramp

< >2032

Droop

< >2031

Speedgovernor

Setpointfrozen?

Setp 1 frozen.

value

yes no

>yes no

Setpointadjuster 1

just likeSetpoint

adjuster 1

Rangelimitation

Frozenvalue

Fixedspeed 2?

Figure 15: Determination of speed setpoints for vehicle operation



7.1.3 Locomotive operation

Engine stop?yes no

yes no

yes no

yes no

yes no

2

yes no

yes no

Setpoint= 0

Setpointfrom PC?

Setpointfrom PC

Idle speed?

Fixed speed 1?

Fixedspeed 2?

Setpoint= Idling speed

Setpoint= Fix 1

Setpoint= Fix 2

Setpointselection

1

< >2033

Ramp?

Droop?

Setpointramp

Fahrstufen

< >2032

Droop

< >2031

Speedgovernor

Setpointmode

Setpoint adjuster 1

(analogue)

Setpoint 2(analogue)

Speed notchswitches

Digitalpot

1

0 2

Rangelimitation

Figure 16: Determination of speed setpoints for locomotive operation



For locomotive operation the value of the parameter 1810 OperationMode must have been set to "2" resp. the parameter 3810 OperationMode must display "2".

In locomotive operation, setpoint 1 can be determined either via the analogue setpoint adjuster 1 or via digital speed notch switches or via up/down keys serving as a digital potentiometer. Selection of setpoint adjuster 1 is made by software using the parameter

5350 LocoSetpoint1Mode = 0 digital speed notch switches

5350 LocoSetpoint1Mode = 1 setpoint adjuster

5350 LocoSetpoint1Mode = 2 digital potentiometer.

It is also possible to switch over to setpoint 2 using the switch 2827 SwitchSetp2Or1. Setpoint 2, however, will always be a setpoint adjuster.

7.1.3.1 Digital notch switches

For operation by speed notch switches the parameter 5350 LocoSetpoint1Mode must

be set to 0. The chapter 12.1 Speed notches contains a description of how to deter-mine the actual speed notch (velocity stage) 3350 Notch by means of the speed notch switches.

The speeds pertaining to the different running notches must be entered in the pa-rameters 6900 through 6915 LocoSpeedLevel(x) with the index indicating the respec-tive speed notch.


Using setpoint 1, the speeds for a locomotive are to be set from 500 rpm to 1200 rpm by means of 3 notch switches.


5350 LocoSetpoint1Mode 0

6900 LocoSpeedLevel(0) 500 rpm 6901 LocoSpeedLevel(1) 600 rpm 6902 LocoSpeedLevel(2) 700 rpm 6903 LocoSpeedLevel(3) 800 rpm 6904 LocoSpeedLevel(4) 900 rpm 6905 LocoSpeedLevel(5) 1000 rpm 6906 LocoSpeedLevel(6) 1100 rpm 6907 LocoSpeedLevel(7) 1200 rpm

7.1.3.2 Digital potentiometer

Setpoint 1 can also be implemented as a digital potentiometer so that setpoint ad-justment can be made by push-buttons (Speed Up/Speed Down). To do so, the pa-rameter 5350 LocoSetpoint1Mode must be set to the value "2". In contrast to genera-tor operation, the digital potentiometer will not be additive in locomotive operation, i.e., it will be the only operative setpoint adjuster.



The states of the switching functions of the digital potentiometer can be viewed by the parameters

2825 SwitchSpeedInc = 0 no increase of the speed setpoint

2825 SwitchSpeedInc = 1 increase of the speed setpoint

2826 SwitchSpeedDec = 0 no decrease of the speed setpoint

2826 SwitchSpeedDec = 1 decrease of the speed setpoint

There will be no changes of the setpoint unless the two parameters read different val-ues, i.e., if only one of the two functions is active. The ramping rate for the digital potentiometer is set by means of the parameter 1210 DigitalPotSpeedRamp. If the signals for changing the setpoint consist of pulses, these pulses must have a duration of at least 10 ms in order to be detected by the control circuit. The control electronics will respond to pulses for changing the setpoint only when the engine is running.

Setpoint changes will be possible until either maximum or minimum speed is at-tained. Furthermore, speed will be increased only if fuel quantity has not yet attained maximum limitation, and likewise decreased only, when fuel quantity has not yet at-tained minimum limitation. With the engine standing, the accumulated offset will be cleared.

When there is a change-over to the digital potentiometer (de-activation of fixed speed or change-over from setpoint 2 to setpoint 1) the currently set speed is used as an initial value for adjustment by the digital potentiometer. This avoids unwanted setpoint skips.


Speed is to be adjusted using the digital potentiometer. Speed change is supposed to be 25 rpmps throughout.


1210 DigitalPotSpeedRamp 25 rpmps 5350 LocoSetpoint1Mode 2



7.1.4 Generator operation

Enginestop?

yes no

yes no

yes no

yes no

yes no

1

yes no

yes no

Setpoint= 0

Setpointfrom PC?

Setpointfrom PC

Idlingspeed?

Fixedspeed 1?

Setpoint= Idlingspeed

Setpoint= Fix 1

Setpoint= Fix 2

Setpointselection

2

Setpointadjuster 1

Setpointadjuster

2

< >2033

Ramp?

Droop?

Setpointramps

SyG 02

< >2032

Droop

< >2031

Speedcontrol

+

Synchro-nization?

Analoguepot

manual automaticLoadcontrol?

LMG 03Digitalpot

analogue digital

automatic/manual ?

Digitalpot

automatcal manual

no no

Rangelimitationg

Fixedspeed 2?

Figure 17: Determination of speed setpoints for generator sets



For generator operation the value of the parameter 1810 OperationMode must have been set to "3" resp. the parameter 3810 OperationMode must display "3".

For parallel generator operation, various devices are required to perform synchroniza-tion and real load sharing in isolated parallel operation or real load control when paral-

leled to the mains ( 13 Generator operation). All of these devices will affect the speed setpoint. For this reason, a setpoint value for synchronizing and another setpoint value for load control are added to the delayed setpoint value as determined by the speed set-ting. This signed offset is indicated by 2042 GenSetOffset.

In most cases, generator operation will not require variable speed setting as the engine is run at rated speed only. Starting from this condition, synchronization and load control can then be conducted.

For configuring speed setting it is therefore recommended to assign rated speed to fixed speed 1 and to preset this switching function inverted with respect to engine stop.


10 SpeedMin1 700 rpm 17 SpeedFix1 1500 rpm 810 FunctEngineStop 1 815 FunctSpeedFix1 -1

Due to the priorities of setpoint determination fixed speed 1 will always be active when

there is no engine stop ( 7.1.1 General application).

During cranking the engine, however, speed will automatically set to minimum speed

( 5 Starting quantity limitation). If after engine start rated speed is to be run up to via a

7.2 Speed ramp it will suffice to parameterize and activate this ramp.


230 SpeedRampUp 50 rpmps 231 SpeedRampDown 50 rpmps 4230 SpeedRampOn 1

When the engine is supposed to run at idle speed for a certain time to warm up after start-up or to cool down before being stopped it will be necessary to use a specific switching function for changing over between idle speed and fixed speed besides the switching function for engine stop. The following example illustrates this change-over, but it is equally possible to use two separate inputs for the two switching functions. In this case, idle speed will have priority when both are simultaneously active.




10 SpeedMin1 700 rpm 17 SpeedFix1 1500 rpm 810 FunctEngineStop 1 811 FunctIdleSpeed -2 815 FunctSpeedFix1 2

Even when the engine is running at rated speed only, the minimum and maximum speeds must have been set to reasonable values since by synchronization and load con-trol a speed offset will be generated and added to rated speed.

As an orientation, minimum and maximum speeds should differ from rated speed by at least 5 % as in the following example:


10 SpeedMin1 1425 rpm 12 SpeedMax1 1575 rpm 17 SpeedFix1 1500 rpm

7.1.5 Marine application

For marine operation the value of the parameter 1810 OperationMode must have been set to "4" resp. the parameter 3810 OperationMode must display "4".

In marine operation, the speed setpoint is usually set by the bridge (remote operation) using a 4..20 mA current signal. This signal is sent to an analogue input and assigned to

setpoint 1 by the parameter 900 AssignIn_Setp1Ext ( 21.4 Assigning inputs to sensors and setpoint adjusters). Adjustment by setpoint 2 is provided for manual or emergency operation to be conducted from the enginge room (local operation). The setpoint selec-tor switch is defined by the switching function:

2827 SwitchSetpoint2Or1 = 0 setpoint 1 active

2827 SwitchSetpoint2Or1 = 1 setpoint 2 active

Setpoint 1 is always analogue and is indicated by the parameter 2900 Setpoint1Extern. Setpoint 2 can be configured alternatively as an analogue setpoint adjuster (indicated by parameter 2901 Setpoint2Extern) or as a digital potentiometer. The type of setpoint ad-juster 2 is selected by means of the parameter

5250 ShipSetp2DigiOrAna = 0 setpoint 2 = setpoint adjuster

5250 ShipSetp2DigiOrAna = 1 setpoint 2 = digital potentiometer.



Enginestop?

yes no

yes

yes

yes

yes

1

yes

Setpoint= 0

Setpointfrom PC?

Setpointfrom PC

Idlingspeed?

Fixedspeed 1?

Setpoint=Idlingspeed

Setpoint= Fix 1

Setpoint= Fix 2

Setpointselection

2

< >2033

Ramp?

Droop?

Setpointramp

Digitalpot

< >2032

Droop

< >2031

Speedgovernor

analog digitalanalogdigital

(by software)

Setpoint 2(Engine room)

Setpoint 1(Bridge)

Rangelimitation

no

no

no

no

no

no

yes

Fixedspeed 2?

Figure 18: Determination of setpoints for marine operation



7.1.5.1 Digital potentiometer

If setpoint 2 has been configured as a digital potentiometer, setpoint adjustment is made by push-buttons (Speed Up/Speed Down). In contrast to generator operation, the digital potentiometer will not be additive in marine operation, i.e., it will operate as the sole setpoint adjuster. If, e.g., the switch for fixed speed 1 is set, this speed will be directly run up to without any offset, and the digital potentiometer will be in-active.

The digital potentiometer is defined by the two switching functions 2825 Switch-SpeedInc and 2826 SwitchSpeedDec:

2825 SwitchSpeedInc = 0 no increase of speed setpoint

2825 SwitchSpeedInc = 1 increase of speed setpoint


2826 SwitchSpeedDec = 1 decrease of the speed setpoint

There will be changes of the setpoint only if the two parameters read different val-ues, i.e., if only one of the two functions is active. The ramping rate for the digital potentiometer is set by means of the parameter 1210 DigitalPotSpeedRamp. If the signals for changing the setpoint consist of pulses, these pulses must have a duration of at least 10 ms in order to be detected by the control circuit. The control electronics will respond to pulses for changing the setpoint only when the engine is running.

Setpoint changes will be possible until either maximum or minimum speed is at-tained. Furthermore, speed will be increased only if fuel quantity has not yet attained maximum limitation, and likewise decreased only, when fuel quantity has not yet at-tained minimum limitation. The current offset value of the digital pot can be viewed by the parameter 2041 DigitalPotOffset. With the engine standing, the accumulated offset will be cleared.

When there is a change-over to the digital potentiometer (de-activation of fixed speed or change-over from setpoint 1 to setpoint 2) the currently set speed is used as an initial value for the adjustment by the digital potentiometer.

If in marine operation there is a failure of speed adjustment by setpoint 1 the digital potentiometer is automatically activated to ensure that speed changes will still be possible for emergency operation. Additional information is to be found in the chap-

ter 21.6 Modifying reactions to sensor errors.



7.1.5.2 Temperature dependent idle speed

When the engine is cold idle speed can be increased in dependence of temperature.

Engine temperature ( 2907 CoolantTemp) is sensed by a temperature sensor. If en-gine temperature falls below 62 SpeedMinTempHigh, idle speed is increased linearly until, with the engine at temperature 61 SpeedMinTempLow, it reaches the value 60 SpeedMinAtTempLow.

Temperature dependent raising of idle speed will also be in effect during engine start if idle speed is pre-defined as speed setpoint. This does not depend on the selected start type.

Temperature dependent idle speed is activated by the parameter 4060 SpeedMin-TempOn = 1.



10 SpeedMin1 700 rpm

60 SpeedMinAtTempLow 950 rpm

61 SpeedMinTempLow -20 °C

62 SpeedMinTempHigh 10 °C

Activation:

4060 SpeedMinTempOn 1

[°C]

IDLING SPEED

Idling speed forcold engine

Idling speed

<60>

<10>

Cold engine<61>

Warm engine<62>

TEMPERATURE

Figure 19: Temperature dependent idle speed



7.2 Speed ramp

For prime movers of ships, locomotives and certain types of vehicles, it will be frequently desirable to have the speed not change abruptly when the set value is altered, but to make it attain the new setpoint smoothly.

To achieve this, the control provides ramps to retard acceleration. The delay rate of in-creasing or decreasing the set value can be adjusted separately in either direction. Further-more, it is possible to decide on the type of speed ramp by means of the parameter

4232 SectionalOrFixedRamp = 0 fixed speed ramp

4232 SectionalOrFixedRamp = 1 sectional speed ramp

The ramp functions are activated by the parameter 4230 SpeedRampOn.

7.2.1 Fixed speed ramp

With the fixed speed ramp, the rate by which the setpoint is delayed will be the same for the entire speed range. The ramp rates for ramping upward and downward can be sepa-rately set by means of the parameters

230 SpeedRampUp ramping rate for upward ramp

231 SpeedRampDown ramping rate for downward ramp

The unit of these parameters is again given by speed increase or -speed decrease per second. Both ramps are enabled through the parameter 4230 SpeedRampOn. For the fixed speed ramp, the parameter 4232 SectionalOrFixedRamp must in addition have been set to "0". If ramping is desired in one direction only, the maximum value (4000 rpmps) is to be entered for the other direction.

The speed setpoint as delayed by the ramp can be viewed by the parameter 2032 Speed-SetpRamp. The parameter 2033 SpeedSetpSelect represents the speed setpoint that the ramp is supposed to ramp to.


Speed is supposed to rise from 1,000 rpm to 1,500 rpm in the course of 20 sec-onds. This is equivalent to increasing speed by 500 rpm within 20 seconds or by 25 rpm per second. Deceleration is to work without a ramp.


230 SpeedRampUp 25 rpmps 231 SpeedRampDown 4000 rpmps

Activation:

4230 SpeedRampOn 1 4232 SectionalOrFixedRamp 0



7.2.2 Sectional speed ramp

For certain applications, such as asynchronous generators or ship maneuvering opera-tion, it is desirable that the ramping rate be not the same over the entire speed range. To achieve this, the control offers the option to split the full speed range up into 3 sections and to set different ramping rates for each respective section. This also implies that the ramping rate will depend on the current setpoint value 2031 SpeedSetp.

The switch points where the ramping rate is to change are determined by these parame-ters

236 SpeedSwitchToRamp2 Rate change from section 1 to section 2

237 SpeedSwitchToRamp3 Rate change from section 2 to section 3

The various ramping rates by which the setpoint is to be delayed within the respective sections are set by means of the following parameters:

230 SpeedRampUp ramp rate for ramping up in section 1

231 SpeedRampDown ramp rate for ramping down in section 1

232 SpeedRampUp2 ramp rate for ramping up in section 2

233 SpeedRampDown2 ramp rate for ramping down in section 2

234 SpeedRampUp3 ramp rate for ramping up in section 3

235 SpeedRampDown3 ramp rate for ramping down in section 3

The unit of these parameters is again given by speed increase or -speed decrease per second. The ramps are enabled via the parameter 4230 SpeedRampOn, selection of the sectional speed ramp is made by setting 4232 SectionalOrFixedRamp = 1.

When only two ramp sections are to be used then switch point 2, i.e. parameter 237 SpeedSwitchToRamp3 must be set to maximum speed value.

The speed setpoint as delayed by the ramp can be viewed by the parameter 2032 Speed-SetpRamp. The parameter 2033 SpeedSetpSelect represents the speed setpoint that the ramp is supposed to ramp to.



SPEED[rpm]

TIME [s]

Maximum speed<12>

Switch point 2<237>

Switch point 1 <236>

Mimimum speed<10>

Range 3 forramp rates<234>,<235>



Figure 20: Speed profile of sectional speed ramp


The upward ramping rate between minimum speed and 800 rpm is supposed to be 100 rpmps, and speed reduction to be performed as fast as possible. The upward ramping rate between 800 rpm and 1200 rpm is to be 50 rpmps, the downward ramping rate 40 rpmps. Between 1200 rpm and maximum speed both the upward and downward rates shall be 20 rpmps.


230 SpeedRampUp 100 rpmps 231 SpeedRampDown 4000 rpmps 232 SpeedRampUp2 50 rpmps 233 SpeedRampDown2 40 rpmps 234 SpeedRampUp3 20 rpmps 235 SpeedRampDown3 20 rpmps 236 SpeedSwitchToRamp2 800 rpm 237 SpeedSwitchToRamp3 1200 rpm

Activation:

4230 SpeedRampOn 1 4232 SectionalOrFixedRamp 1



7.3 Droop

The droop (also called proportional band)of an engine is defined as the permanent speed drop when the engine takes on load. It is desirable that droop and, hence, speed drop be zero (isochronous operation). For certain applications, however, droop will be required, e.g. for

vehicle operation

isolated and mains parallel operation of generator sets, when no accessory units by HEINZMANN are being used

special load sharing modes, e.g.,. parallel operation with mechanical governors

The settings explained in the following section refer to variable speed operation. For vehi-

cle operation by 11.1 Idle/maximum speed governor, droop can independently be ad-justed for idle and maximum speed control.

In isochronous operation without droop, any fuel quantity may be set with a pre-defined fixed speed setpoint. When using droop, however, there is a close interrelation between speed and fuel quantity. In this case, the pre-defined speed setpoint corresponds to that for full load. Depending on current load, droop is used to calculate an offset which after being added to the given speed setpoint will yield the actual speed setpoint for the control unit.

Activation of droop is achieved by setting the parameter 4120 DroopOn = 1. To accom-modate droop to the current operating state of the controlled engine, the possibility of choosing between two droops has been provided. A switching function 2812 Switch-Droop2Or1 is provided to select the droop by which the control is supposed to operate. The respective selection is indicated by:

2812 SwitchDroop2Or1 = 0 control is operating by droop 1 (120 Droop1)

2812 SwitchDroop2Or1 = 1 control is operating by droop 2 (125 Droop2)

If measured power is available in 2918 MeasuredPower and 4121 DroopLoadOrFuel is active, droop is calculated on load-basis. 1232 RatedPower shows the value for 100 % load. If measured power is not available or the sensor is down, droop is calculated on the basis of the actuator reference values for zero load and full load – these should therefore always be parameterized even if they are not used during normal operation.



100

Rated speed

Zero load speed

Full load quantity

Droop

Figure 21: Droop

The following section only explains the adjustment of droop 1, since the adjustment of droop 2 is identical. Frequently only one switch position with droop is used, while the other is assigned a value of 0%.

The following relation holds:

%1000

V

VP n

nnX

n0 Speed at zero-load

nV Reference speed at full-load

XP Droop in %

Example:

full-load speed: 1500 rpm

zero-load speed: 1560 rp,

%4%100*1500

15001560

Droop

Any adjustment of droop refers to the reference speed as set by 123 Droop1SpeedRef (or 128 Droop2SpeedRef respectively for droop 2). Thus, e.g., for a ref-erence speed of 123 Droop1SpeedRef = 1500 rpm, a droop of 120 Droop1 = 4 % will yield a speed change of 60 rpm.



This speed change, however, will apply only to the working range between full-load and zero-load. As reference values the measurements of 2918 MeasuredPower with 1232 Rat-edPower for full-load and 0 % (resp. 0 kW) for zero-load are used. If no load measurement data are available, the reference points of fuel quantities 122 Droop1RefHighand 121 Droop1RefLow are used. For correct adjustment therefore the full-load fuel quantity 122 Droop1RefHigh and the zero-load fuel quantity 121 Droop1RefLow (resp. respectively 127 Droop2RefHigh and 126 Droop2RefLow for droop 2) must be known for the respective reference speed.

The droop offset will be the same over the entire speed range. Using the values of the above example, the offset for idle speed 700 rpm will also be 60 rpm between zero load and full load. The relative droop, however, as relating to the current speed setpoint will change within the speed range. In the example, it will be 8.6 % at 700 rpm, 4 % at refer-ence speed 500 rpm and, accordingly, 2.9% at maximum speed 2100 rpm, each time calcu-lated from the fixed offset of 60 rpm.

The current relative droop as relating to the current speed setpoint is indicated by the pa-rameter 2120 DroopPresent. The speed offset as calculated from droop can be viewed by the parameter 2040 DroopOffset. This offset is added to the speed setpoint value after the ramp 2032 SpeedSetpRamp thus yielding the speed setpoint 2031 SpeedSetp for the control unit.



10 SpeedMin1 700 rpm 12 SpeedMax1 2100 rpm 120 Droop1 4 %

121 Droop1RefLow 10 mm3/str 122 Droop1RefHigh 230 mm3/st 123 Droop1SpeedRef 1500 rpm

Indication at minimum speed and zero-load quantity:

2031 SpeedSetp 760 rpm 2032 SpeedSetpRamp 700 rpm (independent of quantity) 2033 SpeedSetpSelect 700 rpm (independent of quantity) 2040 DroopOffset 60 rpm 2120 DroopPresent 8,6 % 2812 SwitchDroop2Or1 0

Activation:

4120 DroopOn 1

Since droop is added to the set speed the value range of minimum and maxi-mum speed will be valid only for the full-load reference points when using droop. Below these fuel quantities, droop will increase minimum and maxi-mum speeds.

Note


8 Optimizing control circuit stability


Once the engine is running, the first step should always be to optimize control circuit stabil-

ity. With diesel engines operating permanently at constant speeds (e.g., genset operation), a

basic adjustment of the PID parameters will do. For other applications, it may prove neces-

sary to correct the PID parameters in dependence of speed or injection quantity. This may

particularly be required for engines with large ranges of speed variation. The following chap-

ters cover the adjustment of the PID parameters as well as the speed and quantity dependent

correction of the PID values.

8.1 Adjustment of PID parameters

Adjustment of the PID parameters will always be the first step to be taken. The values de-fined at this stage will serve as a basis for all subsequent corrections. During adjustment, any other functions affecting control circuit stability must be de-activated.

When optimizing the PID parameters, the initial values are to be set as follows:


100 Gain 15 % 101 Stability 10 % 102 Derivative 0 %

Caution! Before starting the engine, take care to ensure separate overspeed protection!

With these values set, the engine is started and run up to the working point for which the adjustment is to be made. As a rule, this working point will be at rated speed and off-load. For optimization of the PID parameters, proceed by the following steps:

Increase the P-factor 100 Gain until the engine tends to become unstable. Then, de-

crease the P-factor again until the speed oscillations disappear or are reduced to a

moderate level.

Increase the I-factor 101 Stability until the engine passes over to long-waved speed

oscillations.

Increase the D-factor 102 Derivative until the speed oscillations disappear. If the os-

cillations cannot be eliminated by the D-factor, the I-factor will have to be reduced.

With these values set, disturb engine speed for a short moment (e.g., by shortly operating the engine stop switch) and observe the transient response. Continue to modify the PID pa-rameters until the transient response is satisfactory.

The fuel setpoint value as determined by the control circuit is indicated by the parameter

2110 FuelSetpSpeedGov. This value is limited by the 9 Limiting functions to yield the fuel setpoint 2350 FuelQuantity.




8.2 PID map

As speed goes up, the engine's kinetic energy is equally bound to increase. With regard to the governor, this implies that its characteristic dynamics values (PID) may also have to be increased. When the engine takes on load, the remaining free engine acceleration is re-duced which in turn may admit of another increase of the dynamic parameters.

Normally, the PID parameters are set at rated speed and off-load. As a consequence, it may be desirable to reduce the PID values for minimum speed and to increase the PID values

for load. The PID parameters as set for rated speed and off-load ( 8.1 Adjustment of PID parameters) will serve as a basis for correction. Setting the correction value to 100 % the will leave the PID parameters unaltered. Starting from this value, correction can be made in upward direction (maximum 400 %, which will be equivalent to increasing the PID pa-rameters four times) as well as in downward direction (though 0 % is the minimum possi-ble value, values below 10 % should never be entered).

The values for the stability mapare stored under the following parameter numbers:

6100 PIDMap:n(x) speed values for stability map

6150 PIDMap:f(x) fuel quantity values for stability map

6200 PIDMap:Corr(x) correction values for stability map.

In gensets, if a measured power value can be made available in 2918 MeasuredPower it is advisable to use the speed- and load-dependent PID map

6100 PIDMap:n(x) speed values for stability map

6350 PIDMap:P(x) load values for stability map

6200 PIDMap:Corr(x) correction values for stability map.

In case of general activation of the map with 4100 PIDMapOn = 1, the map type is se-lected by

4101 PIDMapPowOrFuel = 0 dependent on speed and fuel quantity

4101 PIDMapPowOrFuel = 1 dependent on rotational speed and load.

10 base points each are available for correction. which implies that there exists a maximum number of 100 correction values. A base point consists of a speed value and a fuel quan-tity/. load value and of the respective correction value. For adjacent correction values the intermediary values are interpolated by the control. If PID correction is performed in de-pendence of either speed or fuel quantity/load alone, any unused values must be set to zero

( 3.8 Parameterization of maps).

If the current working point of the engine lies outside the map as specified by the mapping parameters, the control will calculate the value which is located on the border of the map and take this as the associated correction value.



The actual correction value which is being used to correct the PID parameters with regard to the current working point can be viewed by the parameter 2100 PID_CorrFactor. The stability map is activated by means of the parameter 4100 PIDMapOn.

In the below examples, correction of PID parameters will be explained using two correc-tion values for each case and correspondingly four values for the characteristic map

The HEINZMANN PC programme 3.3 DcDesk 2000 provides an easy and comfortable way of adjusting the map as it allows to have the map displayed three-dimensionally and to view the adjustment values listed in tables.

8.2.1 Speed dependent correction of PID parameters

PID CORRECTIONVALUES

SPEED

Setting of PID values(Correction value = 100)

Correction ofthe values

Maximum speed<6101>

Minimum speed<6100>

Correction value<6200>

PID value withoutcorrection

<6201>

Figure 22: Speed dependent correction

The PID values are entered for maximum speed, and on commissioning the engine they are accordingly adjusted at zero load. For minimum speed, a downward correction is entered and suitably adjusted on the engine.



6100 PIDMap:n(0) 700 rpm 6101 PIDMap:n(1) 2100 rpm 6102 PIDMap:n(2) 0 rpm : : :

6109 PIDMap:n(9) 0 rpm

6150 PIDMap:Q(0) 0 mm3/str : : :

6159 PIDMap:Q(9) 0 mm3/str

6200 PIDMap:Corr(0) 60 % 6201 PIDMap:Corr(1) 100 %

Note


Activation:

4100 PIDMapOn 1

8.2.2 Injection Quantity Dependent Correction of PID Parameters

PID CORRECTION VALUES

NTITY


INJECTION QUA

Adjustment of PID values(Correction value = 100)

Correctionof the values

Correction value

<6200>PID value without correction

<6201>

Full load<6151>

Zero-load<6150>

Figure 23: Injection-dependent correction

Input of the values and adjustment with the engine running is done off-load. For full-load, an upward correction is provided.



6100 PIDMap:n(0) 0 rpm : : :


6150 PIDMap:Q(0) 60 mm3/str 6151 PIDMap:Q(1) 230 mm3/str 6152 PIDMap:Q(2) 0 mm3/str : : :

6159 PIDMap:Q(9) 0 mm3/str

6200 PIDMap:Corr(0) 100 % 6210 PIDMap:Corr(10) 150 %

Activation:

4100 PIDMapOn 1


8.2.3 Stability Map

By setting the PID parameters of the stability map, the parameters will be subject to modification in dependence on both speed and injection quantity. This may be required, e.g., for engines with large ranges of speed variation.


(-)

(+)

(-) 1

2

SPEED<6100> <6101>

50><6200>

<6201>

3

4In

jectio

n Qua

ntity

(Loa

d)

<61

<6151>

<6210>

<6211>PID VALUES 1 setting the PID values at maxi-

mum speed and off- load

2 (-) correction value at mini-

mum speed and off-load

3 (+) correction at maximum

speed and full-load

4 (-) correction at minimum

speed and full-load

Figure 24: Stability map

The basic setting is done at rated speed and off-load (point 1). Then the first correction (point 2) is made at minimum speed and off-load. The next correction (point 3) is car-ried out at rated speed and full load, and finally the last correction (point 4) is made at minimum speed and with the respective load.



6100 PIDMap:n(0) 700 rpm 6101 PIDMap:n(1) 2100 rpm 6102 PIDMap:n(2) 0 rpm : : :


6150 PIDMap:f(0) 60 mm3/str 6151 PIDMap:f(1) 230 mm3/str 6152 PIDMap:f(2) 0 mm3/str : : :

6159 PIDMap:f(9) 0 mm3/str 6200 PIDMap:Corr(0) 60 % (point 2) 6201 PIDMap:Corr(1) 100 % (point 1) 6210 PIDMap:Corr(10) 90 % (point 4) 6211 PIDMap:Corr(11) 150 % (point 3)

Activation:

4100 PIDMapOn 1


8.3 Temperature dependent correction of stability

While the engine is still cold, it may show a tendency towards speed oscillations in spite of the stability map. In this event, the stability map can be corrected in dependence of tem-perature. Depending on the engine, the map is corrected in upward or downward direction.

PID CORRECTIONVALUE

TEMPERATURE


Correction ofthe values

HLow temperature<161>

igh temperature<162>


PID value without correctionequivalent to 100 %

Figure 25: Temperature dependent correction of stability

Engine temperature ( 2907 CoolantTemp) is sensed by a temperature sensor. If engine temperature falls below the high value for the cold engine 162 PID_CorrTempHigh the en-tire characteristic map is corrected by the value calculated by the control in accordance with the above figure. If engine temperature falls below the low value for the cold engine 161 PID_CorrTempLow the characteristic map is corrected by the value given by 160 PID_ColdCorr.

This function is enabled by setting the parameter 4160 PIDTempOn = 1.



160 PID_ColdCorr 60 % 161 PID_CorrTempLow -20 °C

162 PID_CorrTempHigh 10 °C

Activation:

4160 PIDTempOn 1


8.4 Correction of PID Parameters for Static Operation

When running engines with small load flywheel effects, load changes may result in con-siderable speed drops or speed rises. This is caused mainly by the fact that the control's P-factor (gain) required for the engine to run smoothly in steady-state operation is rather small. As a countermeasure, the HEINZMANN digital controls offer the option to adjust the PID values for dynamic operation and to reduce them for static (steady-state) opera-tion. By this, it can be ensured that the engine runs properly after having attained steady-state operation and that the governor still remains capable of reacting quickly to load changes.

If the speed deviation between actual and set speed is within the range of 111 Static-CorrRange the PID parameters will be corrected by the value given by 110 StaticCorrFac-tor. Outside twice this range, the normal parameters will be valid. If speed deviation is somewhere in between, there will be interpolation to ensure smooth transition. This func-tion is enabled by the parameter 4110 StaticCorrOn = 1.

The value of 110 StaticCorrFactor should be set to 40-70 %.


PI

SPEED DEVIATION

D CORRECTION VALUE

PID values without correctioncorresponding to 100 %


StaticCorrRange 2 StaticCorrRange

Correction

of the values

*

Figure 26: Correction for static operation



110 StaticCorrFactor 50 % 111 StaticCorrRange 20 rpm

Activation:

4110 StaticCorrOn 1



8.5 Load jump regulation in generator systems (DT1 factor)

In additions to the factors P, I and D it is possible to pre-set a DT1 factor for the speed control circuit which allows to correct load jumps faster and better. To this purpose either a load jump detector or a speed jump detector is required.

For load jump detection, information on current load must be available in 2918 Measured-Power. If current load is not measured, a load jump can alternatively be identified by a speed jump. Added load causes speed overshooting and dropped load causes speed under-shooting. The function to use (load jump detection or speed jump detection) can be se-lected separately.

The reaction to load jumps must be observed at the engine, in order to derive the threshold values and the DT1 factor. Time is the reduction of the speed overshooting/undershooting and the shortening of control time. The control circuit takes the DT1-factor into account only if the respective function is active.

It doesn’t make sense to activate both functions at the same time, for this can result in an undesired amplification of speed deviation in the opposite direction. But it may be useful to test both variants in order to be identify the variant that is better suited. Depending on the load measurement unit used, it is possible that load jump recognition from load change takes longer than from speed change – and this is a matter where quick reaction is of cru-

cial importance. The DT1-factor can be activated in addition to rapid power cut-off ( 8.6 Load shedding in generator systems).

Load and speed jump monitoring by principle becomes active only above the speed thresh-old 28 DT1SpeedThreshold, which should be set far enough below rated speed to enable the registering of speed undershooting. Both the speed setpoint 2031 SpeedSetp and actual speed 2000 Speed must be above this threshold.

To prevent a false interpretation of speed setpoint jumps, an additional maximum admissi-ble speed setpoint difference should be set in 29 DT1SpeedSpDiffThresh. This condition becomes active only if load jump recognition by speed jump is active. Only if the speed setpoint changes by less than 29 DT1SpeedSpDiffThresh the speed jump is reacted on in the sense of a load jump. It does not make sense to enter the value 0 since especially in generator systems the speed setpoint is changed continually for adjustment to the load.

Load gradient (load change rate) 2029 LoadGradientDT1 is determined on the basis of 2918 MeasuredPower through the filter 35 PowerGradDT1Filter and speed gradient (speed change rate) 2028 SpeedGradientDT1 is calculated from 2000 Speed through the filter 33 SpeedGradDT1Filter.

A load jump is recognized and indicated in 2122 LoadJumpActive if the value of the load gradient 2029 LoadGradientDT1 is higher than 34 LoadGradDT1Thresh. A speed jump is recognized and indicated in 2121 SpeedJumpActive if the value of the speed gradient 2028 SpeedGradientDT1 exceeds 32 SpeedGradDT1Thresh.


To the load gradient the amplification factor 104 LoadDT1 is added and transmitted as ad-ditive factor to the PID control circuit if the function has been activated with 4029 LoadGradientDT1On = 1. To the speed gradient the DT1-factor 103 SpeedDT1 is added and transmitted to the PID control circuit as new factor, if the function has been activated with 4028 SpeedGradientDT1On = 1.

The load jump or the resulting Speed jump are regarded as compensated when the Speed 2000 Speed stays within the range +/- 30 DT1SpeedDiffMax around the current Speed set-point for the duration of 31 DT1SpeedDiffTime.

Parameterizing Example 1:

It is wished that the DT1 factor shall become effective above 1350 rpm. Interven-tion shall occur when load gradient rises or falls by more than 10%. Filtering of load gradient shall occur on basis of 2918 MeasuredPower with a time constant of 0.12 s. DTI factor shall be 25%. The load jump shall be considered corrected when deviation from set speed and measured speed is less than 10 rpm for 3 s.


28 DT1SpeedThreshold 1350 rpm 30 DT1SpeedDiffMax 10 rpm 31 DT1SpeedDiffTime 3 s 34 LoadGradDT1Thresh 10 %/s 35 LoadGradDT1Filter 0,12 s 104 LoadDT1 25 %

2029 LoadGradientDT1 150 %/s 2122 LoadJumpActive 0/1 2918 MeasuredPower 70 %

Activation:

4029 LoadGradientDT1On 1

Parameterizing Example 2:

It is wished that the DT1 factor becomes effective above 1350 rpm, but only if set speed has not changed by more than 25 rpm. Intervention shall occur when load gradient rises or falls by more than 20 rpmps. Speed filtering for calculation of speed gradient shall use a time constant of 0.12 s. DTI factor shall be 30%. The load jump shall be considered corrected when deviation from set speed and meas-ured speed is less than 10 rpm for 3 s.


28 DT1SpeedThreshold 1350 rpm 29 DT1SpeedSpDiffThresh 25 rpm 30 DT1SpeedDiffMax 10 rpm 31 DT1SpeedDiffTime 3 s 32 SpeedGradDT1Thresh 20 rpmps




33 SpeedGradDT1Filter 0,12 s 103 SpeedDT1 30 % 2000 Speed 1495 rpm 2028 SpeedGradientDT1 300 rpmps 2121 SpeedJumpActive 0/1

Activation:

4028 SpeedGradientDT1On 1

8.6 Load shedding in generator systems

Opening the generator contactor under load (e.g. during power failure) may lead to great speed overshoots. In order to react quickly in such cases and to minimize the overshoot, the opening of the contactor can be used to reduce the speed control immediately to zero-load fuel quantity. To do so, the generator contactor must be connected to the switch func-tion 2846 SwitchGenBreaker. Zero-load fuel quantity is set in 352 FuelAtZeroLoad. In ad-dition, the control unit continually determines the effective value of minimal fuel quantity, which can be lower than the value of the parameter.

9 Limiting functions


For optimum engine performance, it is necessary that the control provide various limitations

of fuel injection quantity. The following figure gives an overview of the most significant lim-

iting functions.

INJECTION QUANTITY[mm /str]3

SPEED [rpm]500 1000 1500 2000 2500

30

60

90

120

150

180

210

240

270

300

Boost dependentquantity limitation

Speed dependentquantity limitation Maximum injection

quantity value(absolute limitation)

Load limitation

Minimum speed

Maximum speed

Figure 27: Important limiting functions

If different limiting functions are operable the one yielding the smallest injection quantity

value will override all others. The currently valid injection quantity is indicated by parameter

2350 FuelQuantity. In addition, unlimited fuel quantity is transmitted by parameter 2361 Fu-

elQuantityUnlimit.

The parameter 711 FuelLimitMaxAbsolute can be used to define a fixed maximum injection

limit. This limit value will always be active.

During start-up, the speed and boost pressure dependent fuel limitations are dis-

abled ( 5 Starting quantity limitation). Note

The parameters 2700 through 2720 are provided to indicate the maximum injection quantity

admissible under the current operating conditions (speed, boost pressure) and to display

which limiting function is presently active. These parameters are listed and described in the

below table.



Indication parameters Meaning

2701 FuelLimitMax currently admissible maximum injection quantity

2702 FuelLimitStart currently admissible maximum starting injec-tion quantity

2703 FuelLimitSpeed currently valid speed dependent limit value for injection

2704 FuelLimitBoost currently valid boost dependent limit value for injection

2705 FuelLimitForced momentarily valid injection limit as resulting from externally activated forced limitation

2706 FuelRedCoolantTemp fuel limitation due to coolant temperature

2707 FuelRedChargeAirTemp fuel limitation due to charge air temperature

2708 FuelRedFuelTemp fuel limitation due to fuel temperature

2709 FuelRedAmbientPress fuel limitation due to ambient pressure

2923 FuelLimitExtern externally forced limitation

2710 FuelLimitMinActive 1 = for lower limit

2711 FuelLimitMaxActive 1 = for upper limit

2712 StartLimitActive 1 = for starting quantity limitation

2713 SpeedLimitActive 1 = for speed dependent limitation

2714 BoostLimitActive 1 = for boost pressure dependent limitation

2715 ForcedLimitActive 1 = for external forced limitation

2716 CoolantTempRedActive 1 = fuel limitation due to coolant temperature is active

2717 ChAirTempRedActive 1 = fuel limitation due to charge air tempera-ture is active

2718 FuelTempRedActive 1 = fuel limitation due to fuel temperature is active

2719 AmbPressTempRedActive 1 = fuel limitation due to ambient pressure is active

2720 FuelLimitExtActive 1 = for forced limitation is active

Table 5: Limiting functions

9.1 Speed dependent injection quantity limitation

The speed dependent full-load limiting characteristic determines the maximum admissible amount of fuel (injection quantity, i.e. torque) the engine may be supplied at the respective speed.



300

270

240

210

180

150

120

90

60

30

500 1000 1500 2000 2500

Figure 28: Speed dependent injection quantity limitation

For adaptation to engine operating conditions, two different speed dependent limiting func-tions can be provided as alternatives, e.g., one for driving operation and one for stationary operation. For driving operation, limitation is normally defined with regard to the require-ments of the prime mover, for stationary operation, however, with regard to the working machine.

A switching function 2817 SwitchSpeedLimit2Or1 serving as a selector switch between the two speed dependent limiting functions is provided to select the limiting function by which the control is supposed to operate. The currently active function is indicated by:

2817 SwitchSpeedLimit2Or1 = 0 limiting function 1 is active.

2817 SwitchSpeedLimit2Or1 = 1 limiting function 2 is active.

The values defining the full-load characteristics are stored at the following parameter posi-tions:

6700 to 6729 SpeedLimit1:n(x) speed values for full-load curve 1

6750 to 6779 SpeedLimit1:f(x) injection quantities for full-load curve 1.

6800 to 6829 SpeedLimit2:n(x) speed values for full-load curve 2

6850 to 6879 SpeedLimit2:f(x) injection quantities for full-load curve 2.

Parameterization is to be performed as described in 3.7 Parameterization characteris-tics. There are up to 30 pairs of programmable values available. The characteristics are en-abled by setting the parameter 4700 SpeedLimitOn = 1.




Parameterization is to be made for a full-load characteristic consisting of 6 pairs:

Number Parameter Value Unit Number Parameter Value Unit 6700 SpeedLimit1:n(0) 500 rpm 6750 SpeedLimit1:f(0) 180 mm3/str 6701 SpeedLimit1:n(1) 700 rpm 6751 SpeedLimit1:f(1) 210 mm3/str 6702 SpeedLimit1:n(2) 1100 rpm 6752 SpeedLimit1:f(2) 240 mm3/st

6703 SpeedLimit1:n(3) 1500 rpm 6753 SpeedLimit1:f(3) 258 mm3/st


6705 SpeedLimit1:n(5) 2500 rpm 6755 SpeedLimit1:f(5) 225 mm3/st 6706 SpeedLimit1:n(6) 0 rpm 6756 SpeedLimit1:f(6) 0 mm3/st : : : : : :


Activation:

4700 SpeedLimitOn 1

For speeds below the first of the parameterized speed values, the control will limit injec-tion quantity to the first of the programmed fuel values. Thus in the above example, injec-tion quantity is limited to 180 mm3/str for the range from 0 to 500 rpm. Likewise, for speeds beyond the last of the programmed speed values (in the above example 2500 rpm) injection quantity will remain limited to the last programmed fuel value (in the above ex-ample 225 mm3/str).

If the latter is not desirable, an additional pair of values should be programmed with the in-jection quantity value set to 0 mm3/str. This will be a counterpart to the absolute limit line

as known from other governors (dashed line in Figure 28).

Number Parameter Value Unit Number Parameter Value Unit 6706 SpeedLimit1:n(6) 2510 rpm 6756 SpeedLimit1:f(6) 0 mm3/st

The parameter

2713 SpeedLimitActive = 0 forced limitation currently disabled

2713 SpeedLimitActive = 1 forced limitation currently enabled

permits to check upon whether or not forced limitation of injection quantity is currently in effect. The actual limiting value is indicated by the parameter 2703 FuelLimitSpeed. This value contains the resulting limitation and takes into account possible limitations due to

ambient conditions ( 9.2 Reduction of speed dependent injection quantity limitation).

9.2 Reduction of speed dependent injection quantity limitation

To protect the engine from damage, the full-load characteristic may reduced due to chang-ing ambient conditions. Such reduction may be effected in dependence of coolant tempera-ture, charge air temperature, fuel temperature or ambient pressure. Each of these speed re-ductions may be activated either separately or in combination with others.



Among the temperature-dependent speed reductions only the one having the greatest effect is used, i.e. the one resulting in the smallest limit. The reduction dependent on ambient pressure acts as an additional reduction independent of these functions.

If and which speed reductions are active may be seen in parameter numbers 2716 to 2719.

2716 CoolantTempRedActive 1 = fuel limitation due to fuel temperature is active

2717 ChAirTempRedActive 1 = fuel limitation due to charge air temperature is active

2718 FuelTempRedActive 1 = fuel limitation due to fuel temperature is active

2719 AmbPressTempRedActive 1 = fuel limitation due to ambient pressure is active

9.2.1 Coolant temperature dependent reduction

Coolant temperature ( 2907 CoolantTemp) is sensed by a temperature sensor. If tem-perature is too high, the full-load characteristic may be reduced. A characteristic with 8 base points is provided for this purpose.

REDUCTION

12

TEMPERATURE [°C]

Lowered by12 %

Low temperatureof hot engine

High temperatureof hot engine

[%]

Figure 29: Temperature dependent reduction of the full-load characteristic

The values defining the characteristic are stored at the following parameter positions:

7100 to 7107 CoolTempReduce:T(x) coolant temperature values of reduction

7110 to 7117 CoolTempReduce:F(x) percentage of reduction

On the basis of coolant temperature a factor is derived from this characteristic, which is used to reduce the value of speed-dependent limitation. The value resulting from limita-tion and reduction is indicated in parameter 2706 FuelRedCoolantTemp. If fuel limita-tion is based on this value, this is indicated by parameter 2716 CoolantTempRedActive.

This function is activated by parameter 4706 FuelRedCoolTempOn.





7100 CoolTempReduce:T(0) 90.0 °C

7101 CoolTempReduce:T(1) 110.0 °C 7110 CoolTempReduce:F(0) 0.0 %

7111 CoolTempReduce:F(1) 12.0 %

Activation:

4706 FuelRedCoolTempOn 1

9.2.2 Charge air dependent reduction

Charge air temperature ( 2908 ChargeAirTemp) is sensed by the charge air tempera-ture sensor. If temperature is too high, the full-load characteristic may be reduced. A characteristic with 8 base points is provided for this purpose.


7120 to 7127 ChAirTempReduce:T(x) charge air temperature values of reduction

7130 to 7137 ChAirTempReduce:T(x) percentage of reduction

With this characteristic, a factor is derived on the basis of charge air temperature, which is used to reduce the value of speed-dependent limitation. The value resulting from limi-tation and reduction is indicated in parameter 2707 FuelRedChargeAirTemp. If fuel limitation is based on this value, this is indicated by parameter 2717 ChAirTempRedAc-tive.

This function is activated by parameter 4707 FuelRedChAirTempOn.

9.2.3 Fuel temperature dependent reduction

Fuel temperature ( 2910 FuelTemp) is sensed by a temperature sensor. If temperature is too high, the full-load characteristic may be reduced. A characteristic with 8 base points is provided for this purpose.


7140 to 7147 FuelTempReduce:T(x) fuel temperature values of reduction

7150 to 7157 FuelTempReduce:F(x) percentage of reduction

On the basis of fuel temperature a factor is derived from this characteristic, which is used to reduce the value of speed-dependent limitation. The value resulting from limita-tion and reduction is indicated in parameter 2708 FuelRedFuelTemp. If fuel limitation is based on this value, this is indicated by parameter 2718 FuelTempRedActive.

This function is activated by parameter 4708 FuelRedFuelTempOn.

9.2.4 Ambient pressure dependent reduction

Ambient pressure ( 2906 AmbientPressure) is measured by an ambient pressure sen-sor. When ambient pressure is too low, the full-load characteristic can be reduced in de-pendenco of speed and ambient pressure. A map with 8x8 base points is provided for this purpose.



The values for the map are stored at the following parameter positions:

7000 to 7007 AmbPressRedMap:n(x) speed values of reduction

7010 to 7017 AmbPressRedMap:p(x) ambient pressure values of reduction

7020 to 7083 AmbPressRedMap:F(x) percentage of reduction

On the basis of speed and ambient pressure a factor is derived from this map, which is then used to reduce the value of speed-dependent limitation. The value resulting from limitation and reduction is indicated in parameter 2709 FuelRedAmbientPress. If fuel limitation is based on this value, this is indicated by parameter 2719 AmbPressRedAc-tive.

This function is activated by parameter 4709 FuelRedAmbPressOn.

9.3 Boost pressure dependent fuel limitation

The boost pressure dependent limit characteristic determines the maximum admissible amount of fuel (injection quantity and hence torque) the engine may be supplied for a spe-

cific boost pressure and a specific speed. Current relative boost pressure ( 2940 Boost-

PressureRelative) is determined by a boost pressure sensor (see also 21.2.1 Relative boost pressure) and the respective maximum admissible injection quantity is calculated based on the map.


6400 to 6407 BoostLimit:n(x) speed values for boost pressure map

6410 to 6417 BoostLimit:p_rel(x) boost pressure values for boost pressure map

6420 to 6483 BoostLimit:f(x) injection quantity values for boost pressure map

A map with 8x8 base points is provided for setting the parameters of boost pressure de-pendent limitation of injection quantity. The map is activated with the parameter 4710 BoostLimitOn = 1.

The parameter

2714 BoostLimitActive = 0 injection quantity limitation currently disabled

2714 BoostLimitActive = 1 injection quantity limitation currently enabled

permits to check upon whether or not this limitation is currently in effect. The current lim-iting value is indicated by the parameter 2704 FuelLimitBoost.



Drehzahl Ladedruck Boost pressure

Injection Quantity

Speed

Figure 30: Boost pressure dependent fuel limitation

9.4 Forced limitation

Regardless of speed and boost pressure dependent limitation, actuator travel can be re-stricted to a externally pre-set value. Two possibilities are provided to this purpose. Either a fixed value is set for use as a limiting value in specific conditions, or a variable limiting value is used.

9.4.1 Fixed limit

In parameter 715 FuelLimitForced a constant maximum injection quantity is defined. This function is enabled by activating the switching function 2813 SwitchForcedLimit.

Again, the rule holds that the least limitation value enabled will override any other limi-tation. The parameter

2715 ForcedLimitActive = 0 forced limitation currently not enabled

2715 ForcedLimitActive = 1 forced limitation currently enabled

therefore shows whether the fixed value indicated in 2705 FuelLimitForced is currently responsible for the resulting fuel limitation.




SPEED [rpm]

300

270

240

210

180

150

120

90

60

30

500 1000 1500 2000 2500

Full-load characteristic

INJECTION QUANTITY[mm³/stroke]

Figure 31: Power limitation


On closing the switch assigned to digital input 4 injection quantity is to be limited to 230 mm3/str maximum.


715 FuelLimitForced 230 mm3/str 813 FunctForcedLimit 4

9.4.2 Variable limit

The variable limitation pre-set is derived from sensor 2923 FuelLimitExtern. This value may be connected directly to an analogue or PWM input, as usually the case for sen-sors, or received via communication modules. For example, the telegram TSC1 of SAE J1939-CAN communication may be used to transmit this limit.

The value 2720 FuelLimitExtActive = 1 indicates that the externally pre-set limit is cur-rently responsible for the actual fuel limitation.

Especially in case of connection to an analogue input, it must be ensured that 2923 FuelLimitExtern reaches maximum value when this limit is not active.

Note

10 Warning and emergency shutdown functions


For most 21 Sensors it is easy to parameterize monitoring of the sensor value. If a pre-set

threshold is surpassed by excess or by default, a warning message is generated or the engine

is stopped. The resulting warning or emergency shutdown can be transmitted to a digital out-

put.

The variable assignment of digital outputs is dealt with in chapter 24.5 Digital outputs.

Note

Monitoring of sensor values is usually done on the basis of fixed threshold values and can be

adjusted to upper and lower thresholds according to specific requirements. For specific cases

of monitoring, e.g., oil pressure, characteristics for determining threshold values are provided.

The following table contains an overview of the sensors that may be monitored.

Sensor Error parameter Meaning

2905 OilPressure 3010 ErrOilPressure Oil pressure

2907 CoolantTemp 3012 ErrCoolantTemp Coolant temperature

2908 ChargeAirTemp 3013 ErrChargeAirTemp Charge air temperature

2909 OilTemp 3014 ErrOilTemp Oil temperature

2910 FuelTemp 3015 ErrFuelTemp Fuel temperature

2911 ExhaustTemp 3016 ErrExhaustTemp Exhaust gas temperature

2912 RailPressure1 3017 ErrRailPress1 Rail pressure 1

2913 RailPressure2 3018 ErrRailPress2 Rail pressure 2

2916 CoolantPressure 3021 ErrCoolantPressure Coolant pressure

Turbocharger oil tem-perature

2920 TurboOilTemp 3025 ErrTurboOilTemp

2921 FuelPressure 3026 ErrFuelPress Fuel pressure

2922 OilLevel 3027 ErrOilLevel Oil level

Transmission oil pres-sure

2924 TransmissionOilPress 3029 ErrTransOilPressure

Table 6: Monitorable sensors



10.1 General monitoring of sensor values

Sensor value monitoring must always be activated with a parameter. Basically, two thresh-old values are provided for monitoring of the sensor value. Both threshold values may be used independently from each other for as upper or lower limit for monitoring. In the same way, a warning message or emergency shutdown may be assigned to a threshold independ-ently from each other.

For each threshold there is a delay time, so that the warning message or the emergency shutdown is not triggered immediately when a threshold is surpassed. Warnings are cleared with a hysteresis, in case of an emergency shutdown the error message must be

cleared by cancelling the error ( 28 Error Handling).

These resources make it possible for example to monitor a value with a warning threshold and an emergency shutdown threshold. In addition, a range monitoring is possible, by con-figuring one threshold as lower and the other as upper limit for the range.

The parameters for sensor value monitoring are stored under numbers 500 to 599, the re-spective functions in the range from 4500 to 4599. The warning or emergency shutdown

message is indicated in the respective error parameter of the sensor ( Table 7) with the following error messages:

Error Meaning

Threshold 1 surpassed in excess or by default 5 - The sensor value is higher or lower that the threshold value 1 and the respective

delay time has expired. Warning message or emergency shutdown, depending on the configuration of

monitoring.

Threshold 2 surpassed in excess or by default 6 - The sensor value is higher or lower that the threshold value 2 and the respective


monitoring.

Warning 14 - At least one error in this group has triggered off a warning. only indicated

Emergency shutdown 15 - At least one error in this group has triggered off an emergency shutdown. The engine is stopped / cannot be started.

Table 7: Possible sensor errors



Since sensor monitoring usually follows the same scheme, the setting of parameters will be described using the example of oil temperature monitoring. For all other sensor value monitoring only the relevant parameters will be indicated.

Sensor value monitoring that depart from the general scheme will be dealt with in separate chapters.

10.2 Oil temperature monitoring

Oil temperature monitoring is activated with parameter 4560 OilTempSupviseOn.

The first threshold value to be monitored must be entered in parameter 561 OilTem-pLimit1. The configuration whether oil temperature is to be monitored for being higher or lower than this threshold is set with parameter 4561 OilTLim1RiseOrFall, whereby 4561 OilTLim1RiseOrFall = 1 means that monitoring relates to values higher than the threshold and 4561 OilTLim1RiseOrFall = 0 to values lower than the threshold. If current oil tem-perature 2909 OilTemp is higher/lower than this threshold for an interval longer than the delay time 562 OilTempDelay1, the error message 3014 ErrOilTemp[5] is output. If this threshold was configured as a warning threshold by setting parameter 4562 OilT-Lim1EcyOrWarn = 0, the additional error message 3014 ErrOilTemp[14] is generated. This warning is reset with hysteresis 560 OilTempHysteresis.

If this threshold was configured as a emergency shutdown threshold by setting parameter 4562 OilTLim1EcyOrWarn = 1, the additional error message 3014 ErrOilTemp[15] is gen-erated and the engine is stopped. Such an emergency shutdown message may be reset only

by cancelling the error ( 28 Error Handling).

The second threshold value to be monitored must be entered in parameter 563 OilTem-pLimit2. The configuration whether oil temperature is to be monitored for being higher or lower than this threshold is set with parameter 4563 OilTLim2RiseOrFall, whereby 4563 OilTLim2RiseOrFall = 1 means that monitoring relates to values higher than the threshold and 4561 OilTLim2RiseOrFall = 0 to values lower than the threshold. If current oil tem-perature 2909 OilTemp is higher/lower than this threshold for an interval longer than the delay time 564 OilTempDelay2, the error message 3014 ErrOilTemp[6] is output. If this threshold was configured as a warning threshold in parameter 4564 OilTLim2EcyOrWarn = 0, the additional error message 3014 ErrOilTemp[14] is generated. This warning is reset with hysteresis 560 OilTempHysteresis.

If this threshold was configured as a emergency shutdown threshold by setting parameter 4564 OilTLim2EcyOrWarn = 1, the additional error message 3014 ErrOilTemp[15] is gen-erated and the engine is stopped. Such an emergency shutdown message may be reset only

by cancelling the error ( 28 Error Handling).

The assignment of an error message to the second monitoring threshold 3014 Er-

rOilTemp[6] may be combined with an automatic request of 10.14 Forced idle speed. Note



The following list gives an overview of the relevant parameters.

560 OilTempHysteresis Hysteresis for error reset

561 OilTempLimit1 threshold 1

562 OilTempDelay1 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 1

563 OilTempLimit2 threshold 2

564 OilTempDelay2 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 2

2909 OilTemp current oil temperature

3014 ErrOilTemp error parameter of sensor

4560 OilTempSupviseOn activation of monitoring

4561 OilTLim1RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 1 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4562 OilTLim1EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 1 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

4563 OilTLim2RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 2 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4564 OilTLim2EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 2 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)



560 OilTempHysteresis 5.0 °C

561 OilTempLimit1 85.0 °C

562 OilTempDelay1 10.0 s

563 OilTempLimi2 95.0 °C

564 OilTempDelay2 2.0 s

Indication:

2909 OilTemp 87.8 °C 3014 ErrOilTemp 0x4010

Activation:

4560 OilTempSupviseOn 1

4561 OilTLim1RiseOrFall 0

4562 OilTLim1EcyOrWarn 1

4563 OilTLim2RiseOrFall 1

4564 OilTLim2EcyOrWarn 1



10.3 Coolant temperature monitoring

The parameters for coolant temperature monitoring are located at the following numbers:

550 CoolTempHysteresis hysteresis for error reset

551 CoolTempLimit1 threshold 1

552 CoolTempDelay1 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 1

553 CoolTempLimit2 threshold 2

554 CoolTempDelay2 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 2

2907 CoolantTemp current coolant temperature

3012 ErrCoolTemp error parameter of sensor

4550 CoolantTempSupviseOn activation of monitoring

4551 CoolTLim1RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 1 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4552 CoolTLim1EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 1 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

4553 CoolTLim2RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 2 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4554 CoolTLim2EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 2 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

The assignment of an error message to the second monitoring threshold 3012 Er-

rOilTemp[6] may be combined with an automatic request of 10.14 Forced idle speed. Note

10.4 Charge air temperature monitoring

The setting values for charge air temperature monitoring are stored at the following pa-rameter positions:

555 ChAirTempHysteresis hysteresis for error reset

556 ChAirTempLimit1 threshold 1

557 ChAirTempDelay1 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 1

558 ChAirTempLimit2 threshold 2



559 ChAirTempDelay2 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 2

2908 ChargeAirTemp current charge air temperature

3013 ErrChargeAirTemp error parameter of sensor

4555 ChAirTempSupviseOn activation of monitoring

4556 ChAirTLim1RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 1 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4557 ChAirTLim1EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 1 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

4558 ChAirTLim2RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 2 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4559 ChAirTLim2EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 2 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

10.5 Exhaust gas temperature monitoring

Exhaust gas temperature monitoring is set by means of the following parameters:

570 ExhaustTempHysteres hysteresis for error reset

571 ExhaustTempLimit1 threshold 1

572 ExhaustTempDelay1 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 1

573 ExhaustTempLimit2 threshold 2

574 ExhaustTempDelay2 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 2

2911 ExhaustTemp current exhaust gas temperature

3016 ErrExhaustTemp error parameter of sensor

4570 ExhTempSupviseOn activation of monitoring

4571 ExhTLim1RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 1 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4572 ExhTLim1EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 1 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

4573 ExhTLim2RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 2 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4574 ExhTLim2EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 2 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)



10.6 Fuel temperature monitoring

The parameters for fuel temperature monitoring are located at the following numbers:

565 FuelTempHysteresis hysteresis for error reset

566 FuelTempLimit1 threshold 1

567 FuelTempDelay1 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 1

568 FuelTempLimit2 threshold 2

569 FuelTempDelay2 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 2

2910 FuelTemp current fuel temperature

3015 ErrFuelTemp error parameter of sensor

4565 FuelTempSupviseOn activation of monitoring

4566 FuelTLim1RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 1 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4567 FuelTLim1EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 1 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

4568 FuelTLim2RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 2 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4569 FuelTLim2EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 2 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

10.7 Rail pressure monitoring

To determine rail pressure, two sensors are available ( 20.1 Configuration of rail and rail pressure sensors). Both sensor values may be monitored independently from each other.

The values for monitoring of rail pressure 1 are stored at the following parameter posi-tions:

520 RailPress1Hysteresis hysteresis for error reset

521 RailPress1Limit1 threshold 1

522 RailPress1Delay1 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 1



2912 RailPressure1 current rail pressure 1



3017 ErrRailPress1 error parameter of sensor

4520 RailPress1SupviseOn activation of monitoring

4521 RailP1Lim1RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 1 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4522 RailP1Lim1EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 1 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)



The values for monitoring of rail pressure 2 are stored at the following parameter posi-tions:

525 RailPress2Hysteresis hysteresis for error reset





2913 RailPressure2 current rail pressure 2

3018 ErrRailPress2 error parameter of sensor

4525 RailPress2SupviseOn activation of monitoring





10.8 Turbocharger oil temperature monitoring

The setting values for turbocharger oil temperature monitoring are stored at the following parameter positions:

575 TurboOilTempHysteres hysteresis for error reset



576 TurboOilTempLimit1 threshold 1

577 TurboOilTempDelay1 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 1

578 TurboOilTempLimit2 threshold 2

579 TurboOilTempDelay2 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 2

2920 TurboOilTemp current turbocharger oil temperature

3025 ErrTurboOilTemp error parameter of sensor

4575 TurbOilTempSupviseOn activation of monitoring

4576 TuOilTLim1RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 1 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4577 TuOilTLim1EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 1 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

4578 TuOilTLim2RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 2 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4579 TuOilTLim2EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 2 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

10.9 Fuel pressure monitoring

The settings for monitoring of fuel pressure are stored at the following parameter posi-tions:

580 FuelPressHysteresis hysteresis for error reset

581 FuelPressLimit1 threshold 1

582 FuelPressDelay1 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 1

583 FuelPressLimit2 threshold 2

584 FuelPressDelay2 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 2

2921 FuelPressure current fuel pressure

3026 ErrFuelPress error parameter of sensor

4580 FuelPressSupviseOn activation of monitoring

4581 FuelPrLim1RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 1 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4582 FuelPrLim1EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 1 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)



4583 FuelPrLim2RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 2 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4584 FuelPrLim2EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 2 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

10.10 Oil level monitoring

Oil level monitoring is set by means of the following parameters:

585 OilLevelHysteresis hysteresis for error reset

586 OilLevelLimit1 threshold 1

587 OilLevelDelay1 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 1

588 OilLevelLimit2 threshold 2

589 OilLevelDelay2 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 2

2922 OilLevel current oil level

3027 ErrOilLevel error parameter of sensor

4585 OilLevelSupviseOn activation of monitoring

4586 OilLevLim1RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 1 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4587 OilLevLim1EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 1 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

4588 OilLevLim2RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 2 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4589 OilLevLim2EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 2 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)



10.11 Transmission oil pressure monitoring

The parameters for transmission oil pressure monitoring are located at the following num-bers:

590 TrOilPressHysteresis hysteresis for error reset

591 TrOilPressLimit1 threshold 1

592 TrOilPressDelay1 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 1

593 TrOilPressLimit2 threshold 2

594 TrOilPressDelay2 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 2

2924 TransmissionOilPress current transmission oil pressure

3029 ErrTransOilPressure error parameter of sensor

4590 TrOilPressSupviseOn activation of monitoring

4591 TrOilPLim1RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 1 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4592 TrOilPLim1EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 1 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

4593 TrOilPLim2RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 2 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4594 TrOilPLim2EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 2 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

10.12 Speed dependent oil pressure monitoring

With rising speed the engine will need higher oil pressure. For monitoring oil pressure, two

characteristics are provided. Actual oil pressure ( 2905 OilPressure) is determined by a pressure sensor.

After starting the engine, a certain time will have elapsed before oil pressure builds up. This can be taken account of by delaying the beginning of oil pressure monitoring after engine start by means of the parameter 500 OilPressStartDelay.

If oil pressure remains below the oil pressure warning characteristic for a period longer than defined in 501 OilPressWarnDelay, a warning message will be output by parameter 3010 ErrOilPressure[5,14]. This oil pressure warning is automatically cleared as soon as oil pressure returns to a value above the oil pressure warning characteristic.

If oil pressure remains below the emergency stop characteristic for a period longer than set in 502 OilPressEcyDelay, an emergency shutdown will be executed and indicated by the parameter 3010 ErrOilPressure[6,15].



Once the engine has stopped, the errors are cleared with a time delay of approximately one second to enable the engine to be restarted. If after restarting the engine oil pressure should again be outside its normal working range, another warning is output if necessary or an-other emergency shutdown is executed.

The messages issued by the control are displayed by the following parameters:

3010 ErrOilPressure[5,14] 0 = oil pressure above warning characteristic 1 = oil pressure below warning characteristic

3010 ErrOilPressure[6,15] 0 = oil pressure above emergency stop characteristic 1 = oil pressure below emergency stop characteristic engine shutdown has been executed.

The values for the oil pressure characteristics are stored at these parameter positions

6500 to 6509 OilPressWarn:n(x): speed values for oil pressure warning curve

6520 to 6529 OilPressWarn:p(x): oil pressure values for oil pressure warning curve

6550 to 6559 OilPressEcy:n(x): speed values for oil pressure emergency stop curve

6570 to 6579 OilPressEcy:p(x): oil pressure values for oil pressure emergency stop curve.

Figure 32: Oil pressure characteristics

Parameterization is to be performed as described in 3.7 Parameterization characteris-tics. To parameterize the characteristics, 10 pairs of values are available for each.

The characteristics are activated by setting the following parameters:

4500 OilPressWarnCurveOn = 1 for the oil pressure warning characteristic



4501 OilPressEcyCurveOn = 1 for the oil pressure emergency stop characteristic.


An oil pressure warning characteristic and an oil pressure emergency stop charac-teristic are to be parameterized using 3 pairs of values for each. No monitoring is provided below minimum speed of 700 rpm. This is achieved by setting the first values of both characteristics to 0 bar. For values beyond the last parameterized speed value (in this example index 3) the oil pressure value associated with this last value shall be retained. Oil pressure monitoring is supposed to become active after a time delay of 45 seconds. When pressure has been below the oil warning characteristic for more than 3 seconds a warning is to be issued. If pressure re-mains below the oil pressure emergency stop characteristic for more than 1 sec-ond, an emergency shutdown is to be executed.

Number Parameter Value Unit 500 OilPressStartDelay 45.0 s

501 OilPressWarnDelay 3.0 s 502 OilPressEcyDelay 1.0 s 503 OilPressHysteresis 0.0 bar

Number Parameter Value Unit Number Parameter Value Unit 6500 OilPressWarn:n(0) 699 rpm 6520 OilPressWarn:p(0) 0 bar 6501 OilPressWarn:n(1) 700 rpm 6521 OilPressWarn:p(1) 1.8 bar 6502 OilPressWarn:n(2) 1200 rpm 6522 OilPressWarn:p(2) 3.3 bar

6503 OilPressWarn:n(3) 2100 rpm 6523 OilPressWarn:p(3) 4.5 bar

6504 OilPressWarn:n(4) 0 rpm 6524 OilPressWarn:p(4) 0 bar 6550 OilPressEcy:n(0) 699 rpm 6570 OilPressEcy:p(0) 0 bar 6551 OilPressEcy:n(1) 700 rpm 6571 OilPressEcy:p(1) 1.5 bar 6552 OilPressEcy:n(2) 1000 rpm 6572 OilPressEcy:p(2) 2.5 bar

6553 OilPressEcy:n(3) 2100 rpm 6573 OilPressEcy:p(3) 4.0 bar

6554 OilPressEcy:n(4) 0 rpm 6574 OilPressEcy:p(4) 0 bar

Activation:

4500 OilPressWarnCurveOn 1 4501 OilPressEcyCurveOn 1

10.13 Speed dependent coolant pressure monitoring

With rising speed the water-cooled engine will need higher coolant pressure. For monitor-

ing oil pressure, two characteristics are provided. Actual coolant pressure ( 2916 Cool-antPressure) is checked by a pressure sensor.

This function is activated by parameter 4505 CoolPressSupviseOn.

After starting the engine, a certain time will have to elapse for coolant pressure to build up. This can be taken account of by delaying the beginning of coolant pressure monitoring af-ter engine start by means of the parameter 505 CoolPressStartDelay.



Coolant pressure monitoring conforms to the procedure outlined for 10.1 General moni-

toring of sensor values (see also detailed description in 10.2 Oil temperature monitor-ing), with the difference that the thresholds are determined in dependence of speed by

means of characteristics. Parameterization is to be performed as described in 3.7 Parameterization characteristics. To parameterize the characteristics, 10 pairs of values are available for each.

The following list gives an overview of the relevant parameters.

505 CoolPressStartDelay delay time for monitoring after engine start

506 CoolPressDelay1 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 1

507 CoolPressDelay2 delay time for message that value is higher/ lower than threshold 2

508 CoolPressHysteresis hysteresis for error reset

2916 CoolantPressure current coolant pressure

3021 ErrCoolantPressure error parameter of sensor

4505 CoolPressSupviseOn activation of monitoring

4506 CoolPLim1RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 1 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4507 CoolPLim1EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 1 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

4508 CoolPLim2RiseOrFall configuration whether threshold 2 is monitored for excess (=1) or default (=0)

4509 CoolPLim2EcyOrWarn configuration whether threshold 2 triggers off emer-gency shutdown (=1) or warning (=0)

6530 to 6539 CoolPressLimit1:n(x): speed values for characteristic 1

6540 to 6549 CoolPressLimit1:p(x): coolant pressure values for characteristic 1

6580 to 6589 CoolPressLimit2:n(x): speed values for characteristic 2

6590 to 6599 CoolPressLimit2:p(x): coolant pressure values for characteristic 2

The assignment of an error message to the second monitoring threshold 3021 Err-

CoolantPressure[6] may be combined with an automatic request of 10.14 Forced idle speed. Note




Figure 33: Coolant pressure characteristics

10.14 Forced idle speed

Specific monitoring functions ( 10.2 Oil temperature monitoring, 10.3 Coolant tem-

perature monitoring, 10.13 Speed dependent coolant pressure monitoring) may be set to trigger off forced idle speed. Whenever an error message resulting for monitoring is out-put, the engine will automatically be brought to idle speed, independently of any other speed setpoint. The engine stays in idle speed regimen as long as the error message re-mains active. After the error is cleared, the normal speed setpoint becomes active again.

The trigger for forced idle speed is always an error message of the second threshold (see 10.1 General monitoring of sensor values, error no. 6).

Forced idle speed is used mainly for 12 Locomotive application. If during forced idle

speed the conditions for low idle speed are satisfied ( 12.3 Low idle speed), the lowest possible idle speed will be used in this case too.

The following parameters activate forced idle speed:

5360 CoolantTmpWarnIdleOn activation of forced idle speed resulting from coolant temperature monitoring

5361 OilTempWarnIdleOn activation of forced idle speed resulting from oil temperature monitoring

5362 CoolPressWarnIdleOn activation of forced idle speed resulting from coolant pressure monitoring

11 Vehicle operation



HEINZMANN digital controls may be used as idle/maximum speed controls in the operative

mode vehicle application (see 7.1.2 Vehicle operation), i.e., it is possible to switch between

the operation modes of variable speed control and idle/maximum speed control (e.g., for ap-

plications with stationary and driving operation).

11.1 Idle/maximum speed governor

The control unit may be operated by standard as an idle/maximum speed control. This mode is selected by the parameters:


1810/3810 OperationMode 1

Activation:

4130 IMGovernorOn 1

This parameter 4130 IMGovernorOn (IM = Idle/Maximum) applies when only idle/maximum speed control is required or when idle/maximum speed operation at fixed intermediary speeds via external switches (fixed speeds or idle speed) is envisaged.

If, however, change-over between operation as an idle/maximum speed control and vari-able speed control with variable speed setting (e.g., by foot throttle) is desired the switch-ing function 2831 SwitchIMOrAllSpeed is to be used:

2831 SwitchIMOrAllSpeed = 0 variable speed control

2831 SwitchIMOrAllSpeed = 1 idle/maximum speed control

The control unit will operate in idle/maximum speed control mode only if there is no need for intermediary speeds. The parameter 2141 IMOrAllSpeedGov is provided to check in which mode the control is currently operating:

2141 IMOrAllSpeedGov = 0 variable speed control

2141 IMOrAllSpeedGov = 1 idle/maximum speed control.

At idle and at maximum speeds the control unit's performance is the same as that of the variable speed control. Between idle speed and absolute maximum speed (maximum speed limit line), the fuel setpoint is determined by the active setpoint adjuster (2900 Set-point1Extern and and 2901 Setpoint2Extern respectively).


11.1.1 Fuel setpoint

The fuel setpoint is determined by 2900 Setpoint1Extern or 2901 Setpoint1Extern re-spectively, depending on the position of 2827 SwitchSetpoint2Or1.

In addition, there is the option to freeze the fuel setpoint via a switch and to continue operation using the frozen setpoint. This is indicated by the parameter


2830 SwitchFreezeSetp2 = 1 value of setpoint 2 has been frozen.

The setpoint coming in when the function is activated will be frozen. As long as the function is active, the current setpoint will be compared with the stored setpoint. If the set value coming from the setpoint adjuster exceeds the frozen value, operation will continue using the current value of the setpoint adjuster; otherwise the frozen value is used. The frozen setpoint, however, will be abandoned only when the switch is opened.

The chosen fuel setpoint is indicated by 2132 IMFuelSetpExtern. This value may be used directly as fuel setpoint or else the fuel setpoint is derived from a fuel setpoint and speed-dependent map – the speed map. In any case, the resulting fuel setpoint for the idle/maximum governor is indicated by parameter 2131 IMFuelSetp.

11.1.2 Speed map

The drive map allows to interpret the accelerator pedal position at different speeds so as to achieve optimal injection quantity for the required torque.

The value coming from the setpoint adjuster used for the speed map is indicated by 2133 IMFuelSetpExtern. The resulting fuel setpoint is indicated by parameter 2131 IM-FuelSetp. The drive map is activated by parameter 4132 IMDriveMapOn.


8100 IMDriveMap:n(x) speed values for speed map

8110 IMDriveMap:Setp(x) setpoints for drive map

8120 IMDriveMap:f(x) fuel values for speed map

The drive map can be adjusted with up to 10 speed values and setpoints. Intermediary

values between adjacent pairs of variates will be interpolated by the control ( 3.8 Parameterization of maps).

11.1.3 Controlling idle and maximum speeds


For the idle/maximum speed control, idle speed is determined by the parameters 10

SpeedMin1 and 11 SpeedMin2 ( 7 Determination of speed setpoints). With low tem-

peratures, this value can be raised by 7.1.5.2 Temperature dependent idle speed. Likewise, maximum speed is given by the parameters 12 SpeedMax1 and 13 Speed-Max2, respectively.



Speed [rpm]Idling speed

<10,11>

Setpoint <2131>

Droop <141>

Droop<140>

Maximum speed <12,13>

Reference point atfull load <143>

speed dependentquantity limitation

Injection quantity[mm³/str]

Reference point atzero load <142>

Raising of idling speed<150>

Figure 34: Idle/maximum speed governor

When in idle/maximum speed control mode, the speed control will be on-line all the time using either idle speed or maximum speed as a target speed. Which speed the con-trol unit is operating at can be read from the parameter 2140 GoverningAtMaxOrIdle:

2140 GovernorAtMaxOrIdle = 0 idle speed control

2140 GovernorAtMaxOrIdle = 1 maximum speed control.

Independently of 7.3 Droop for the variable speed control, there exists a separate droop for the idle/maximum speed control. Droop for idle speed control is defined by 140 IMIdleDroop and for maximum speed limitation by 141 IMMaximumDroop. The reference point for zero-load and full-load is to be entered via the parameter 142 IM-DroopRefLow and that for full-load via 143 IMDroopRefHigh.

The speed reference point is in each case given by the minimum speed resp. maximum speed respectively:

140 IMIdleDroop droop for idle speed control

141 IMMaximumDroop droop for maximum speed limit

142 IMDroopRefLow reference point for zero-load

143 IMDroopRefHigh reference point for full-load



11.1.4 On-load idle speed

When the control is operating in idle/maximum speed control mode, in the majority of cases it will not be desirable to keep idle speed constant. Instead, with the setpoints be-ing set to higher values idle speed is expected to increase, too. This can be achieved through the parameter 150 IMSpeedIncrease, which indicates the relative increase of idle speed for 100 % fuel quantity.


NumberParameter Value Unit

150 IMSpeedIncrease 100 rpm

11.1.5 Fuel Ramp

When operating in idle/maximum speed control mode, it may be necessary to delay in-crease injection quantity, e.g., in order to reduce free acceleration. This can be achieved by activating a fuel ramp.

The rate of the delay can be adjusted for setpoint increase and setpoint decrease inde-pendently of one another.

130 IMRampUp for upward ramps

131 IMRampDown for downward ramps

The unit for these parameters is speed increase/decrease per second. Both ramps are en-abled by the parameter 4131 IMFuelRampOn. If ramping is to be selected for one direc-tion only, the maximum value must be entered for the other direction.

The fuel quantity setpoint as delayed by the ramp can be read from the parameter 2131 IMFuelSetp. The parameter 2132 IMFuelSetpSelect represents the fuel quantity setpoint the ramp is to arrive at.



130 IMRampUp 400.0 mm³/str/s

131 IMRampDown 700.0 mm³/str/s

Activation:

4131 IMFuelRampOn 1

This fuel ramp may be used only when the control is operating in idle/maximum speed

control mode. For variable speed control mode, a 7.2 Speed ramp is provided to achieve smooth speed changes for this mode of operation, too.




For locomotive applications several special functions are provided. Part of them relate to de-

termination of speed setpoints ( 7.1.3 Locomotive operation), others to manipulation of gen-

erator excitation with diesel-electric applications. Furthermore, 10.14 Forced idle speed, as it is normally used in locomotive applications on exceeding or dropping below certain sensor values can be implemented as well as slide protection functions.

If any of the special locomotive functions are to be used, the operation mode Locomotive Ap-plication must be set to 1810/3810 OperationMode = 2.

12.1 Speed notches

Up to four switching functions are available to configure the speed notch switches. With these four switches 16 speed notches (velocity stages) can be determined. If 8 speed notches are used, the switching functions 2820 SwitchNotch2 through 2822 SwitchNotch0 will be utilized, if only 4 speed notches are needed, the switching functions 2821 Switch-Notch1 and 2822 SwitchNotch0 will be used.

The states of the speed notch switches can be read from these parameters:

2819 SwitchNotch3 speed notch switch 3




The four available speed notch switches allow to set exactly the 16 binary values of 0…15. The following table shows how these binary values can be determined.

Using only three speed notch switches 2820 SwitchNotch2..2822 SwitchNotch0 will yield the binary values 0..7 (first eight rows of above table), using but two speed notch switches 2821 SwitchNotch1 and 2822 SwitchNotch0 the binary values 0..3 (first four rows of above table).

In locomotive application, the speed notches may either be directly the same as the binary value resulting from the switching functions (see first column of above table), or it may be necessary to determine the speed notch indirectly from another table via the binary value. Whether or not direct assignment can be made, will depend on whether it is possible to re-alize the above binary table with the speed notch switches that are available. Possibly, some of the signals must be inverted before assigning them to the respective speed notch

switch ( 22.2 Assignment of digital inputs). If this is not feasible - particularly with retro-fit applications - there is a further possibility to determine the speed notches by means of a second table.

In this case, for each binary value the respective speed notch must be entered in the array 6880 LocoNotchAssign. The assignment array consists of 16 components 6880 LocoNot-


chAssign(0) to 6895 LocoNotchAssign(15) whose indexes are equal to the binary values. In each component the associated speed notch must be entered.


Binary value 2819

SwitchNotch3

2820

SwitchNotch2

2821

SwitchNotch1

2822

SwitchNotch0

0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 1

2 0 0 1 0

3 0 0 1 1

4 0 1 0 0

5 0 1 0 1

6 0 1 1 0

7 0 1 1 1

8 1 0 0 0

9 1 0 0 1

10 1 0 1 0

11 1 0 1 1

12 1 1 0 0

13 1 1 0 1

14 1 1 1 0

15 1 1 1 1

Table 8: Speed notches from switch notches

If a specific binary value is intended to lead to an engine stop, instead of the speed notch the value 255 should be entered. This engine stop is equivalent to any other engine stop re-

quest for any other reason ( 2810 SwitchEngineStop or emergency shutdown error 28 Error Handling). If there is no speed notch associated with a specific binary value 0 will have to be entered. Should one of these combinations occur during operation, then the last value determined will be retained as speed notch value.

The speed notches are always numbered from 0 to 15. But since in the table LocoNotchAssign the value 0 means that no speed notch can be assigned, in this specific table (and only here) the speed notches must be entered in the range from 1 to 16.

Note



The selection of whether the speed notches are to correspond directly to the binary value as derived from the switching functions or whether they are to be determined via another ta-ble must be communicated to the control by 5353 NotchAssignOrBinary.

5353 NotchAssignOrBinary = 0 speed notch = binary value

5353 NotchAssignOrBinary = 1 speed notch = LocoNotchAssign (binary value)

In either case the result is indicated by 3350 Notch.


Based on four switching functions the speed notches 0..7 are defined according to the table below (the speed notch value is to be stored in the parameters increased by one). The combination of 0-0-0-1 is supposed to trigger an engine stop. The other seven binary combination do not occur or will not change the speed notch. Hence they are assigned the value 0.

Notch 2819

SwitchNotch3

2820

SwitchNotch2

2821

SwitchNotch1

2822

SwitchNotch0 Binary value

Stop 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 8 2 0 0 1 0 2 3 1 0 1 0 10 4 0 1 1 1 7 5 1 1 1 1 15 6 0 1 1 0 6 7 1 1 1 0 14

Table 9: Extended notch table


5350 LocoSetpoint1Mode 0

5353 NotchAssignOrBinary 1 6880 LocoNotchAssign(0) 1 6881 LocoNotchAssign(1) 255 6882 LocoNotchAssign(2) 3 6883 LocoNotchAssign(3) 0 6884 LocoNotchAssign(4) 0 6885 LocoNotchAssign(5) 0 6886 LocoNotchAssign(6) 7 6887 LocoNotchAssign(7) 5

6888 LocoNotchAssign(8) 2










12.2 Generator excitation

In diesel-electric locomotive operation the digital control can influence generator excita-tion in dependence of current speed and fuel quantity. For this purpose, an excitation signal (correction value) is determined and output via an analogue output.

The excitation signal can be determined either by means of two characteristics and a cor-rection factor or by a closed loop fuel quantity circuit. The first method is called excitation control, the latter excitation governing.

Generally, determination of the excitation signal is enabled with 4600 ExcitationContro-lOn = 1. Selection of excitation control or excitation governing is made by

4601 ExcitGovOrControl = 0 excitation control

4601 ExcitGovOrControl = 1 excitation governing.

Selection is made during the phase of parameterization. Hence it cannot be modified while the engine is running. This will also explain why certain parameters that are required for both methods have been assigned identical addresses (parameter numbers).

Calculation of an excitation signal can be conducted only when the engine is neither at a standstill nor being stopped. In addition, the switching function 2840 SwitchExcitationOn has been provided. It allows to enable or disable the excitation signal by external interven-tion.

2840 SwitchExcitationOn = 1 excitation signal enabled

2840 SwitchExcitationOn = 0 excitation signal disabled

If the associated parameter 840 FunctExcitationOn has not been assigned a digital output

( 22 Switching functions) the signal will always be enabled when the engine is running and cannot be affected by external intervention.

In the course of time, parameter names for generator excitation in locomotive operation have been modified to read "Excitation..." instead of "Power...". This does not imply, however, any changes with respect to their meaning.

12.2.1 Excitation control

The excitation signal 2600 ExcitationSetpoint is a function of current speed 2000 Speed, of current fuel quantity 2350 FuelQuantity and of the amplification factor 600 Ex-citCntrlFactor. This means that for each speed there is a specific excitation signal value. If there is any difference between actual and programmed fuel quantity, there will be a reaction by varying the excitation signal via a P-controller.

Note


For parameterizing the characteristic, there are up to 16 triples of values available for each. This implies that on using speed notches each speed notch can be assigned its own value. This is not obligatory, though.

One triple of values consists of a speed value, a fuel value and an excitation value, all with the same index. Intermediary values between two adjacent triples of values will be computed by the control. The characteristics are evaluated based on current speed 2000

Speed ( 3.7 Parameterization characteristics).

The values of the characteristics are stored at the following parameter positions:

6600 to 6615 ExcitControl:n(x) : speed values for power characteristic and exci-tation signal characteristic

6620 to 6635 ExcitControl:f(x) : fuel quantity setpoint

6640 to 6655 ExcitControl:E(x) : excitation signal characteristic

The control will calculate the correction value with the following formula:


(speed) valuesignal excitation+%100

factor weighting(speed)) valuefuel-fuel(current = valuecorrection

This means that the speed dependent fuel quantity derived from characteristic 6620 Ex-citControl:f(x) is subtracted from the current fuel quantity (EMS) 2350 FuelQuantity and the difference is multiplied by the weighting factor 600 ExcitCntrlFactor. Adding the speed dependent excitation signal value 6640..6655 ExcitControl:E(x) will yield the excitation control correction value 2600 ExcitationSetpoint.

Hence when current fuel quantity coincides with the fuel quantity characteristic it is ex-clusively the excitation signal characteristic that will have an effect.

When current fuel quantity, however, does not coincide with the characteristic it is pos-sible to choose whether the excitation signal is to be increased or decreased by modify-ing the weighting factor. With a negative weighting factor, a value smaller than the ex-citation signal value will be output whenever the current injection quantity is above the injection quantity characteristic value, whereas with a positive weighting factor a value larger than the excitation signal value will be output in the same case (generator de-excitation or generator excitation).

12.2.1.1 Fuel quantity offset

The value derived from the fuel quantity characteristic can be modified by 636 Ex-citFuelOffset. This allows parallel shifting of the fuel quantity characteristic as might be necessary when calibration of one engine is to be transferred to another engine in case the profile of the characteristic is basically identical for both. If no such shifting is required the offset parameter must be set to 0.



12.2.1.2 Excitation ramp

Running up to the calculated excitation signal can be delayed by ramps. The ramp is to be adjusted and activated by means of the following parameters:

610 ExcitCntrlRampUp upward ramp rate

611 ExcitCntrlRampDown downward ramp rate

4610 ExcitControlRampOn activation of the ramps

12.2.1.3 Determination of excitation characteristics

For plotting the two characteristics, 600 ExcitCntrlFactor must be set to 0%. This means that it is exclusively the signal characteristic that will be relevant. Further-more, it must be ensured that no fuel quantity limitation whatsoever is active, i.e., that all of the fuel quantity limitation functions are disabled.

Then, the speed points for which certain power outputs have been defined should be run up to. At each speed supporting point the excitation signal is to be adjusted manually until the desired power output is obtained. The resulting fuel quantity can then be read from 2350 FuelQuantity.

Measuring and indicating current power output will require using an ex-ternal device.

The most convenient way of defining the speed setpoints as well as of adjusting the excitation signal is by using the PC. To do so, the parameters 4020 SpeedSetpPCOn and 4635 ExcitationSetpPCOn are to be set to 1. Speed setting is made using the pa-rameter 20 SpeedSetpPC, input of the excitation signal is achieved using the parame-ter 635 ExcitationSetpPC.

First, the supporting points for speed will have to be entered as x-values in the char-

acteristic 6600..6615 ExcitControl:n(x) ( 3.7 Parameterization characteristics). Next, the excitation signal value associated with each speed supporting point is to be entered in the characteristic 6640..6655 ExcitControl:E(x). The fuel quantity 2350 FuelQuantity thus established is then to be entered in 6620..6635 ExcitControl:f(x) under the same index as the speed value.

Once the characteristics have been plotted, power control via fuel quantity can be enabled by setting the factor 600 ExcitCntrlFactor. The greater this factor is chosen the greater an amplification of the control circuit will result. The values are deter-mined by running up to all speeds on-load; at each point control should be as fast as possible without becoming unstable.

20 SpeedSetpPC setpoint adjustment via PC

600 ExcitCntrlFactor weighting factor

635 ExcitationSetpPC adjustment of excitation signal by PC

Note


4020 SpeedSetpPCOn activate speed adjustment via PC

4635 ExcitationSetpPCOn activate adjustment of excitation signal via PC

6600..6615 ExcitControl:n(x) speed values for the characteristics

6620..6635 ExcitControl:f(x) fuel quantity values for the fuel setpoint char-acteristic

6640..6656 ExcitControl:E(x) excitation signal values for the excitation char-acteristic


500

EXCITATION SIGNAL [%]

SPEED [rpm] 1000 1500 2000 2500

INJECTION QUANTITY [mm³/str]

0200400600800

100012001400160018002000

SPEED [rpm]

0102030405060708090

100

Figure 35: Excitation control


With diesel-electric locomotive operation, generator excitation is supposed to be controlled in such a way that in steady state operation the diesel engine follows a characteristic within the range of optimum consumption.

If the driving system is operating in accordance with the fuel quantity setpoint characteristic it is the value of the excitation characteristic that will be output. If above the fuel quantity setpoint characteristic, the signal is reduced to some lower


value which implies that generator excitation is also reduced until the system is working again in accordance with the characteristic.

Let us suppose, e.g., that with a speed of 1,900 rpm actual actuator travel amounts to 70 %, and that for this speed the value of the fuel quantity setpoint characteris-tic is 60 %. Now, instead of the excitation characteristic value of 50 % an excita-tion signal of 37.5 % is to be output in order to reduce actuator travel to 60 %.

Since the weighting factor 600 ExcitCntrlFactor has been set to 0%, this charac-teristic will not take account of load. By entering in the above formula the desired influence of load upon the excitation signal, the weighting factor can be derived from it:


% 50 + % 100

factor weighting % 10 = % 37.5

This yields a weighting factor of –125% by which the entire excitation character-istic will be shifted in parallel.


600 ExcitCntrlFactor -125 %

Activation:

4600 ExcitationControlOn 1 4601 ExcitGovOrControl 0

12.2.2 Excitation governing

With excitation governing, 2600 ExcitationSetpoint constitutes the output signal of a fuel control circuit into which a desired fuel quantity value (reference value) and an ac-tual fuel quantity value will enter. In contrast to excitation control, there exists no ad-justable interrelation between speed and excitation signal basing on some characteristic.

The reference value for the excitation control circuit is derived from a single excitation

characteristic ( 3.7 Parameterization characteristics) where in dependence on speed the fuel quantities are stored that corresponds to the required generator output.

6600..6615 ExcitControl:n(x) speed values for excitation characteristic

6620..6635 ExcitControl:f(x) fuel values for the excitation characteristic

Starting from current speed 2000 Speed the characteristic is evaluated, and the fuel quantity setpoint thus determined is indicated by 2602 ExcitFuelSetpoint, after it has been acted upon by any offsets, ramps or limitations.

The actual values of the excitation control circuit corresponds to the current, possibly limited fuel quantity setpoint 2350 FuelQuantity as derived from the speed control cir-cuit.


The output value of the excitation control circuit is 2600 ExcitationSetpoint. This value can in addition be filtered by setting 633 ExcitationSetpFilter to a value not equal to 0.

12.2.2.1 Fuel quantity offset

The fuel quantity setpoint value derived from the power characteristic can be modi-fied by 636 ExcitFuelOffset. This will allow parallel shifting of the fuel quantity characteristic as might be necessary when calibration of one engine is to be trans-ferred to another engine in case the profile of the characteristic is basically identical for both. If no such shifting is required the offset parameter must be set to 0.

12.2.2.2 Ramps for fuel quantity setpoint

The fuel quantity setpoint value as derived from the characteristic and possibly lim-ited can be delayed by ramps. The ramp is to be adjusted and activated by means of the following parameters:

640 ExcitGovFuelRampUp upward ramp for fuel quantity setpoint

641 ExcitGovFuelRampDown downward ramp for fuel quantity setpoint

4640 ExcitGovFuelRampOn activation of both ramps

12.2.2.3 Adjustment of PID parameters

The setpoint value of the fuel quantity 2602 ExcitFuelSetpoint and the actual value 2350 FuelQuantity enter into a control circuit whose PID parameters are to be en-tered in

630 ExcitGovGain

631 ExcitGovStability

632 ExcitGovDerivative

The result is 2600 ExcitationSetpoint. While determining the control circuit parame-ters, all limiting functions should be de-activated.

To accommodate the control circuit to different operating conditions the values of 630 ExcitGovGain and 631 ExcitGovStability can be corrected in dependence on in-jection quantity. For unstable working points (e.g., due to non-linear interrelations between actuator travel and injection quantity or between excitation signal and gen-erator output, or, with two cycle diesel engines, when operating within the turbo-charger's range of transition from mechanical to exhaust gas drive) some decrease may be necessary whereas full load may under certain circumstances require an in-

crease. The correction factor is to be entered in the following characteristics ( 3.7 Parameterization characteristics).

6660 to 6675 ExcitGovPI:f(x) injection values for PI correction

6680 to 6695 ExcitGovPI:Corr(x) correction values for P and I



Correction of the PI values is activated by means of 4630 ExcitGovPICurveOn. The currently determined correction value is indicated by 2630 ExcitPI_CorrFactor.

12.2.2.4 Determination of excitation characteristic

When plotting the excitation characteristic, it should be ensured that during this ad-justment phase none of the fuel quantity limitations is active, i.e., all fuel quantity limiting functions must be disabled.

Then, the speed points for which certain outputs have been defined should be run up to one after another. At each speed supporting point the excitation signal is to be ad-justed manually until the desired power output is obtained. The resulting fuel quan-tity can then be read from 2350 FuelQuantity.

Note

Measuring and indicating current power output will require using an exter-nal device.

The most convenient way of defining the speed setpoints as well as of adjusting the excitation signal is by using the PC. To do so, the parameters 4020 SpeedSetpPCOn and 4635 ExcitationSetpPCOn are to be set to 1. Speed setting is made using the pa-rameter 20 SpeedSetpPC, input of the excitation signal is achieved using the parame-ter 635 ExcitationSetpPC.

First, the supporting points for speed will have to be entered as x-values in the char-

acteristic 6600..6615 ExcitControl:n(x) ( 3.7 Parameterization characteristics). The fuel quantity thus established is then to be entered in 6620..6635 ExcitCon-trol:f(x) under the same index as the speed value.

20 SpeedSetpPC setpoint adjustment via PC

635 ExcitationSetpPC adjustment of excitation signal by PC

4020 SpeedSetpPCOn activate speed adjustment via PC

4635 ExcitationlSetpPCOn activate adjustment of excitation signal via PC

6600..6615 ExcitControl:n(x) speed values for excitation characteristic

6620..6635 ExcitControl:f(x) fuel quantity values for excitation characteris-tic

12.2.3 Power limitation

The excitation signal 2600 ExcitationSetpoint that is either determined by excitation control or excitation governing can be limited by various factors.

In the case of excitation control, it is the excitation signal 2600 ExcitationSetpoint itself that will be subject to limitation. The currently applied limit is indicated by 2601 Excit-ControlLimit.



Indicated value Reason Reference

2640 ExcitLimitMaxActive One of the following power limitations is active:

2641 ExcitFuelLimActive Speed or boost pressure dependent fuel quantity limitation

9.1 Speed dependent injec-

tion quantity limitation

9.3 Boost pressure depend-

ent fuel limitation

2642 ExcitForceLim1Active Power limitation selected by switching function

12.2.3.1 Externally acti-

vated power limitation 2643 ExcitForceLim2Active

2644 ExcitSlideLimActive Power limitation by ac-tive slide protection


12.4 Slide protection

2645 ExcitTempLimActive Temperature-dependent power reduction

12.2.3.2 Temperature de-

pendent power reduction

2646 ExcitBoostLimActive Boost pressure dependent power limitation

12.2.3.3 Boost pressure

dependent power limitation

2647 ExcitSpeedLimActive Speed-dependent power Limitation

12.2.3.4 Speed-dependent

power limitation

Table 10: Excitation signal limitation

With excitation governing, the excitation signal is indirectly limited by limiting the fuel quantity setpoint for the control circuit.

The parameter 2640 ExcitLimitMaxActive is used to indicate whether any limitation is active. The values of 2641 ExcitFuelLimActive through 2647 ExcitSpeedLimActive offer more detailed information about the causes of limitation. The different causes are de-scribed below.

12.2.3.1 Externally activated power limitation

Activation of the switch functions 2823 SwitchExcitLimit1and 2824 SwitchEx-citLimit2 respectively offers the possibility of limiting the excitation signal to two previously defined maximum values.

When using excitation control, the excitation signal 2600 ExcitationSetpoint itself will be limited to 605 ExcitLimitForced1 or 606 ExcitLimitForced2 respectively.

When using excitation governing, however, the fuel quantity setpoint is limited to 637 ExcitFuelLimForced1 or 638 ExcitFuelLimForced2 respectively, and the excita-tion signal is affected via the control circuit.

The parameters 2642 ExcitForceLim1Active and 2643 ExcitForceLim2Active respec-tively indicate whether limitation is due to externally activated power limitation.



12.2.3.2 Temperature dependent power reduction

In the event that engine temperature 2907 CoolantTemp exceeds the value of 651 ExcitLimitTempLow the entire excitation characteristic is lowered in dependence of temperature. The lowering value is linearly interpolated between reduction by 0 % at 651 ExcitLimitTempLow and reduction by 650 ExcitLimitTempDec at 652 Ex-citLimitTempHigh. If current temperature exceeds the value of 652 ExcitLimitTem-pHigh, there will be continuous reduction by the value of 650 ExcitLimitTempDec.

This function is operative only with excitation governing and is to be activated by the parameter 4650 ExcitTempLimitOn. The actual maximum value of the fuel quan-tity setpoint thus obtained is indicated by 2650 ExcitFuelLimitTemp. Whether this value has caused limitation can be seen from 2645 ExcitTempLimActive.

On exceeding a coolant temperature limit independent of this function, it is also pos-

sible to activate forced idle speed ( 10.14 Forced idle speed).

12.2.3.3 Boost pressure dependent power limitation

This function is provided to take into account that atmospheric pressure is reduced when operating in high altitudes. By lowering the excitation signal generator output is reduced and automatically also diesel injection quantity. In diesel-electric opera-tion this function should be preferred to boost pressure dependent fuel quantity limi-

tation ( 9.3 Boost pressure dependent fuel limitation) where injection quantity is re-duced without reduction of load. This may lead to speed drops and engine overload.

By means of a boost pressure sensor the current boost pressure 2904 BoostPressure is measured and then a characteristic is used to determine the associated maximum fuel quantity. The values of the characteristics are stored at the following parameter positions:

6380 to 6389 ExcitBoostLimit:p(x) boost pressure values for limitation curve

6390 to 6399 ExcitBoostLimit:f(x) fuel quantity values for limitation curve

For parameterizing the boost pressure dependent limit characteristic, up to 10 pairs of values are available. Each pair of values consists of one boost pressure value and one actuator position, both with the same index. Intermediary values between adja-

cent pairs of variates will be interpolated by the control ( 3.7 Parameterization characteristics).

This function is operative only with excitation governing and is to be activated by the parameter 4655 ExcitBoostLimitOn. The actual maximum value of the fuel quan-tity setpoint thus obtained is indicated by 2655 ExcitFuelLimitBoost. The parameter 2646 ExcitBoostLimActive will indicate whether there is limitation caused by this value.


12.2.3.4 Speed-dependent power limitation

Based on current speed the related maximum excitation signal is determined via a characteristic.

The values of the characteristics are stored at the following parameter positions:

6966 to 6981 ExcitSpeedLim:n(x) speed values for limitation curve

6982 to 6997 ExcitSpeedLim:E(x) excitation values for limitation curve

For parameterizing the boost pressure dependent limit characteristic, there are up to 16 pairs of values available. Each pair of values consists of one speed value and one excitation value, both with the same index. Intermediary values between adjacent

pairs of variates will be interpolated by the control ( 3.7 Parameterization charac-teristics).

This function is operative only with excitation governing and is to be activated by the parameter 4656 ExcitSpeedLimitOn. The resulting actual maximum value for ex-citation is indicated by 2656 ExcitationLimitSpeed. The parameter 2647 ExcitS-peedLimActive will indicate whether there exists limitation caused by this value.

12.3 Low idle speed

The function "Low Idle Speed" is offered to save fuel. It allows to set idle speed to a spe-cific level if no excitation signal has been requested for a pre-set minimum time.

The lowest possible idle speed is indicated in 24 SpeedMinAbsolute. If after activation of signal 2841 SwitchLowIdleOn no excitation signal is triggered for the duration of 242 SpeedMinAbsDelay (2600 ExcitationSetpoint = 0), the speed setpoint is progressively low-ered with ramp value 241 SpeedMinAbsRampDown towards 24 SpeedMinAbsolute. As soon as the switching function is disabled or the excitation signal is triggered again, the engine returns to the previous operating mode using the normal ramp.

If pre-set temperatures are exceeded, it is possible to protect the engine by letting it run at

forced idle speed ( 10.14 Forced idle speed). If conditions for low idle speed are given, in this case too the lowest possible idle speed will be used.

12.4 Slide protection

When skidding wheels are detected the control will continuously reduce the excitation sig-nal until the wheels have a firm grip again. A separate electronic device is required to de-tect sliding of the wheels and to transmit a specific signal to the control. If modification of the excitation signal is insufficient or impossible the speed setpoint can be modified in-stead.




12.4.1 Reduction of excitation by digital slide signal

The switch function 2818 SwitchSlide is used to inform the control about the currently valid status of slide protection:

2818 SwitchSlide = 0 no slide signal coming in

2818 SwitchSlide = 1 slide signal received

The same switch can also initiate influencing the speed setpoint ( 12.4.3 Speed reduc-tion by digital slide signal). When the control recognizes the slide signal for the first time, the current excitation signal 2600 ExcitationSetpoint is frozen and reduced by 620 ExcitSlideDec. This new excitation signal is held for the time defined by 621 ExcitSlid-eDuration. If there is still a slide signal coming in after that, the excitation signal will be reduced once again. Reduction will be repeated until the slide signals cease to come in, i.e., until the wheels are gripping again.

SLIDE SIGNAL <2818>

EXCITATION SIGNAL [%]

Correction value <2600>

Excitation decrease <620>

Excitation ramp

Waiting time <621>

t [s]

0

1

t [s]

Excitation decrease <620>

Waiting time <621>

Figure 36: Slide protection



After that the currently calculated excitation signal is activated again and run up to via the power ramp in case this ramp has been activated.

This digital slide protection function is to be activated by the parameter 4620 DigSlide-ExcitCntrlOn. The parameter 2644 ExcitSlideLimActive will indicate whether power limitation is active due to slide protection.

12.4.2 Reduction of excitation by analogue slide signal

Instead of a digital slide protection signal and a fixed reduction of the excitation value

during a predefined period of time ( 12.4.1 Reduction of excitation by digital slide sig-nal) there exists also the possibility of having the reduction value defined by the evalu-

ating electronics directly via a sensor input, viz. 2914 SlideExcitReduction ( 21.1 Sensor overview).

Whenever 2914 SlideExcitReduction yields a value not equal to zero for the first time, the current excitation signal 2600 ExcitationSetpoint will be frozen. Up to the time when 2914 SlideExcitReduction returns to zero, its actual value is subtracted from the frozen value. The new excitation signal 2600 ExcitationSetpoint will result from the smaller value obtained by the reduction as just described and from the excitation signal value depending on current speed and fuel quantity. This means that the calculations via excitation control / excitation governing will continue but will only be applied if they define an excitation signal value even smaller than the one determined by the reduced value.

This slide protection function can be activated by 4621 AnaSlideExcitCntrlOn. Again 2644 ExcitSlideLimActive will indicate whether power limitation is active due to slide protection.

Special care should be taken when determining the reference values at the analogue input for 2914 SlideExcitReduction so that a value greater than zero will be measured only if any slide protection measure is supposed to take effect.

12.4.3 Speed reduction by digital slide signal

The same switch function 2818 SwitchSlide that initiates affection of the excitation sig-

nal ( 12.4.1 Reduction of excitation by digital slide signal) serves to inform the control about the state of slide protection that is currently active.

2818 SwitchSlide = 0 no slide signal coming in

2818 SwitchSlide = 1 slide signal received

Note



SLIDING SIGNAL<2818>

SPEED [rpm]

speed setpoint<2031>

speed decrease <1350>

speed ramp

speed decrease <1350>

Figure 37: Slide protection

Whenever the control recognizes the slide signal, set speed will be reduced by 1350 DigSlideSpeedDec. This new excitation signal is held for the time defined by 1355 DigSlideDuration. If after that there is still a slide signal coming in, the set value will be reduced once again. Reduction will be repeated until the slide signals cease to come in, i.e., until the wheels are gripping again. After that, the previous setpoint is restored and

is slowly run up to via the 7.2 Speed ramp if a speed ramp is being used.

This slide protection function is activated with parameter 5351 DigSlideSpeedSetpOn.

12.4.4 Speed reduction by analogue slide signal

Instead of a digital slide protection signal and a fixed reduction of the excitation value

for a predefined period of time ( 12.4.3 Speed reduction by digital slide signal) there exists also the possibility of having the reduction value defined by the evaluating elec-

tronics directly via a sensor input, viz. 2915 SlideSpeedReduction ( 21.1 Sensor over-view).

Whenever 2915 SlideSpeedReduction yields a value not equal zero for the first time, the current excitation signal will be frozen. Up to the time when 2915 SlideSpeedReduction



returns to zero again, its value is subtracted from the frozen value and care is taken that the resulting speed setpoint will never drop below 1356 AnaSlideSpeedMin.

This slide protection function can be activated by 5352 AnaSlideExcitCntrlOn.

Special care should be taken when determining the reference values at the analogue input for 2915 SlideSpedReduction so that a value greater than zero will be measured only if any slide protection measure is supposed to take effect.

Note

13 Generator operation


For parallel generator operation, various devices are required to perform synchronization, real

load sharing in isolated parallel operation or real load control when paralleled to the mains.

All of these devices will affect speed setpoint. It is for this reason that a setpoint offset for

synchronization and a setpoint offset for load control are added to the setpoint value as deter-

mined from the pre-defined setpoint (refer to determination of speed setpoints 7.1.4

Generator operation).

If no additional load control device is provided then droop (proportional band) can be used

instead though with certain restrictions in case of isolated parallel operation. In mains parallel

operation droop can be employed for setting the desired load. In isolated parallel operation

droop is made use of to obtain homogeneous load sharing.

To use the specific generator functions the parameter 1810 / 3810 OperationMode to be set to

3.

The following descriptions of synchronizing and power control are valid for closed loop (automatic) operation only. For manual operation and for the condi-

tios of switching over between automatic and manual operation refer to 13.4 Automatic or manual operation.

13.1 Synchronization

Synchronization can be performed analogously using the HEINZMANN synchronization unit or digitally by presetting synchronization values. Selection is made by the parameter

5210 SyncAnalogOrDigital = 0 Digital synchronization

5210 SyncAnalogOrDigital = 1 Synchronization using the synchronization unit

The following switch functions serve to inform the control unit that synchronization is en-abled:

2834 SwitchSyncEnable = 0 Synchronization not enabled

2834 SwitchSyncEnable = 1 Synchronization enabled

Note

Note

If no external switch is assigned to the switching function, the function syn-chronization will always be active. When assigning digital inputs to the switch-ing functions for enabling synchronization and load control the same input can be assigned inverted which will allow to easily change over between the two operating modes.

The setpoint change resulting from synchronization and load control is indicated by the pa-rameter 2042 GenSetOffset.



13.1.1 Digital synchronization

With digital synchronization two switching functions are provided for determining whether the setpoint is to be increased or decreased. The states of the switching func-tions can be read from the parameters

2825 SwitchSpeedInc = 0 no increase of speed setpoint

2825 SwitchSpeedInc = 1 increase of speed setpoint


2826 SwitchSpeedDec = 1 decrease of the speed setpoint.

There will be changes of the setpoint only if the two parameters read different values, i.e., if only one of the two functions is active. The scope of the change can be defined by means of the parameter 1210 DigitalPotSpeedRamp with speed change per second as a unit. Setpoint changes can be conducted until either maximum or minimum speed is attained. If the signals for changing the setpoint consist of pulses, these pulses must have a duration of at least 10 ms in order to be detected by the control circuit. The con-trol electronics will respond to pulses for changing the setpoint only when the engine is running.

The setpoint change by the digital potentiometer is added as an offset to the value of 2033 SpeedSetpSelect as resulting from the preceding setpoint determination after the ramp. This modification of the speed setpoint is executed with the given step size and direction until either maximum (or minimum) speed is attained or the states of both functions are identical (0 or 1). The offset remains in effect even if there is a change-over to some other setpoint value or if an adjustment of the analogue potentiometer oc-curs. The minimum or maximum speeds, however, can never be exceeded (except for droop). The offset can be read from the parameter 2041 DigitalPotOffset. With the en-gine standing, the accumulated offset will be cleared.

If an offset is applied to the analogue setpoint, minimum or maximum speed will be at-tained before the potentiometer is turned to its end position. When the potentiometer is further turned into its stop position, the offset will be decreased again. In other words, if there has been a digital modification of the setpoint and the potentiometer is then turned on full-scale, the resulting offset will have disappeared.



1210 DigitalPotSpeedRamp 5 rpmps

1810/3810 OperationMode 3

5210 SyncAnalogOrDigital 0

Indication:

2825 SwitchSpeedInc 0/1 2826 SwitchSpeedDec 0/1



If fuel quantity reaches at the high fuel quantity limit (2711 FuelLimitMax-Active = 1) there will be no further increase of speed. This will prevent in-creasing the set speed when the engine is operating in overload blocking mode (i.e., when the engine is operating at its power range limit and if there is an additional speed drop due to load).

Similarly, the speed setpoint cannot be reduced if fuel quantity has reached the low fuel quantity limit (2710 FuelLimitMinActive = 1).

13.1.2 Synchronization using the HEINZMANN synchronization unit SyG 02

With analogue synchronization, the control unit will receive the actual output value of the HEINZMANN synchronization unit SyG 02 as an analogue input. This is provided by setting the parameter 5210 SyncAnalogOrDigital to "1". In order to use the switching function 2834 SwitchSyncEnable this function must be active. Furthermore, when using the switching function 2836 SwitchAutoOrManual it must have been set to automatic

operation (

Note

Note

13.4 Automatic or manual operation).

Prior to adjusting the synchronization unit, the voltages of the generators should be set to equal values. Besides, reactive load distribution has to be ensured, e.g., by paralleling the generator brushes. If necessary, the gen-erator manufacturers will provide information on this subject.

To adapt the setpoint input to the synchronization unit the following steps must be taken:

Before switching on for the first time, it must be checked whether the volt-

age across the mains breaker is approximately 0 Volts at all three phases.

This is to ensure that there is no phase rotation at the mains breaker.

Caution: high voltage! Danger!High

Voltage

With bridges between the terminals 14 and 15 and the terminals 17 and 18 of the synchronization unit the generator set is to be started and voltage to be applied to the synchronization unit. The parameter 1220 SynchronFactor is to be set to 0 %, and then the engine to synchronous speed,. e.g., 50 Hz.

Since the control value from the synchronization unit can completely cover the ana-logue input range of 0..5V, the reference values should be set to the minimum and

maximum values ( 24.2.1 Calibration of analogue inputs, 24.2.4 Error detection for analogue inputs).

The signal coming in from the synchronization unit is read out via the parameter 2903 SyncInput and then entered in the parameter 1221 SyncInput as a reference value. Reference should be about 50 %.



As soon as frequencies, phase positions and voltages of both generators are equal the relay of the synchronization unit will operate after a delay time that can be ad-justed from 0.5 to 5 seconds. With the terminals 17 and 18 bridged, there will be no action of the relay to actuate the generator contactor so this bridge will have to re-main connected while adjustments are being made.

Synchronization is then activated by removing the bridge between terminals 14 and 15. To optimize the dynamic behaviour of synchronization the amplification of the synchronization signal may be modified by means of the parameter 1220 Synchron-Factor starting with 2%.

The value range of the amplification factor is defined as follows: Given a signal dif-ference of 10% between 2903 SyncInput and 1221 SynchronReference and an ampli-fication factor 1220 SynchronFactor of 10%, a speed change of +10 rpm will be achieved.

When synchronization is operating satisfactorily, the bridge between terminals 17 and 18 is to be removed to enable closing of the generator contactor.

For further information on the synchronization unit, please refer to the manual Synchronization Unit SyG 02 no. E 82 001-e.

Note

13.2 Load control

Load control can be performed analogously using the HEINZMANN Load Control Unit or an external setpoint potentiometer or – on request – with an integrated power governor. Selection is made by the parameter

5233 PowerGovernorOrLMG = 1 integrated power governor

5233 PowerGovernorOrLMG = 0 HEINZMANN Load Control Unit or potentiometer

5230 LoadControlOrPot = 0 External potentiometer

5230 LoadControlOrPot = 1 HEINZMANN load control unit

Parameter 5233 PowerGovernorOrLMG is available only if the integrated load control is implemented in the firmware. Otherwise only parameter 5230 LoadControlOrPot is valid for the selection. Note

The following switch functions, normally connected to generator contactor or mains breaker, serve to inform the control unit that load control is enabled:

2835 SwitchLoadEnable = 0 Load control not enabled

2835 SwitchLoadEnable = 1 Load control enabled.

If no external switch is assigned to the switching function, the load control function will always be active. When assigning digital inputs to the switching

132 Basic Information DARDANOS Note


functions for enabling synchronization and load control the same input can be assigned inverted which will allow to easily change over between the two op-erating modes.

The setpoint change resulting from synchronization and load control is indicated by the pa-rameter 2042 GenSetOffset.

13.2.1 Load control using the HEINZMANN load control unit LMG 10

Load control by means of the HEINZMANN load control unit LMG 10 is based on evaluation of the output signal that is coming from the load control unit and has been connected to one of the control unit's analogue inputs. This signal can be generated also by the generator management system THESEUS. In this case the following statements apply similarly, except that THESEUS has operates in the direction opposite to that of the load control unit, therefore the amplification factor must be entered in positive.

To connect the load control unit 5233 PowerGovernorOrLMG must be set to 0 and 5230 LoadControlOrPot must be set to 1. Besides, when using the switching function 2835 SwitchLoadEnable this function must have been activated. Furthermore, when us-ing the switching function 2836 SwitchAutoOrManual it must have been set to auto-

matic operation ( 13.4 Automatic or manual operation). To adapt the setpoint input to the load control unit the following procedure must be followed:

The load control unit must have been completely connected, the engine must be run-ning, and operating voltage must be applied.

The generator breaker must be open so that there is no power output from the gen-erator.

Since the control value from the load control unit can completely cover the analogue input range of 0..5V the reference and error limit values for the respective analogue

input should be set to the minimum and maximum values ( 24.2.1 Calibration of

analogue inputs, 24.2.4 Error detection for analogue inputs).

The parameter 1230 LoadControlFactor is to be set to 0.

The signal from the load control unit is read out via the parameter 2902 LoadCtrlIn-putand entered in parameter 1231 LoadControlReference as a reference value. Ref-erence should be about 30 %.

With the generator on load the setting is conducted at full load. To optimize the dy-namic behaviour of the power control, the amplification of the power setpoint signal sent to the governor may be modified by means of the parameter 1230 LoadCon-trolFactor starting with -2%.

The value range of the amplification factor is defined as follows: A signal differ-ence of 10% between 2902 LoadControlInput and 1231 LoadControlReference and an amplification factor 1230 LoadControlFactor of –10% will yield a speed change of +10 rpm.



The working direction of the HEINZMANN Load Control Unit LMG 10 is inverted, i.e., decreasing the control value will increase speed and vice versa. Therefore, the values to be entered for 1230 LoadControlFactor must be negative ones when using the LMG 10. Note

If the HEINZMANN Load Control Unit or the 13.3 Digital generator

management THESEUS is used, 7.3 Droop will be automatically de-activated by the control unit as this operating mode does not permit the use of droop. For more detailed information on the Load Control Unit, please refer to the manual Load Control Unit LMG 10-1 no. E 02 001-e.

13.2.2 Load control by preset value

The power output to be produced by the engine in generator operation may also be di-rectly set by a setpoint within the range of 0..100%. This mode requires the parameter 5230 LoadControlOrPot to be set to "0". In this case, there is actually no power control but fuel quantity is set according to the given power setpoint assuming output to be line-arly depending on fuel quantity.

In pure mains parallel operation , there will be no problem in using droop. Since in this case actual speed must not change when the generator set is coupled to the mains altera-tion of the setpoint can be used to change fuel quantity and by this engine load. Droop is required to set a stable load point for the engine, for without droop the engine would slowly tend either to minimum fuel quantity or maximum fuel quantity as resulting from

the 9 Limiting functions, because without droop there exists no well-defined relation between speed and fuel quantity. Hence is would be impossible to obtain a stable point.

This is why for this application case a droop of normally 4 % is preset which allows to obtain stable adjustment of load. With droop below 4 %, there exists a certain risk of load variations since no stable load point can be found.

In island parallel operation, droop can be used to achieve that all installations that have been coupled together across the busbar take over the same percentage of load. This mode of operation, however, has the disadvantage that due to droop load sharing will result in speed changes, i.e., depending on load different speeds will be attained.

If this is not desirable and load distribution at identical speeds is required (so-called isochronous operation), load sharing has to be performed by means of an additional

control device , e.g., by employing 13.2.1 Load control using the HEINZMANN load

control unit or by using the 13.3 Digital generator management THESEUS.

In island parallel operation with droop all sets have been coupled across a busbar. This implies that all sets are working at identical actual speeds. Since a well-defined relation between speed and load is given by droop all sets will produce the same percentage of power output provided droop has been correctly set.



For correct adjustment of droop, the reference speeds 123 Droop1SpeedRef and 128 Droop2SpeedRef respectively as well as the droops 120 Droop1 and 125 Droop2 re-spectively must be identical for all sets.

Zero-load fuel quantity 121 Droop1RefLow and full-load fuel quantity 122 Droop1RefHigh (or 126 Droop2RefLow and 127 Droop2RefHigh respectively) are to be determined and parameterized separately for each engine.

Fuel reference values must be parameterized for correct functioning even if

droop is calculated from measured power ( Note

7.3 Droop).

13.2.2.1 Analogue setpoint adjustment

To activate this function, the parameter 5230 LoadControlOrPot is to be set to "0".

Furthermore, 7.3 Droop must have been activated as it is absolutely necessary for correct operation.

Presetting power output is achieved by means of the input for the load setpoint 2902 LoadCtrlInput. Using preset power output current load is adjusted via the fuel quan-tity reference values for droop 121 Droop1RefLow and 122 Droop1RefHigh or re-spectively 126 Droop2RefLow and 127 Droop2RefHigh for droop 2. In other words, with 2902 LoadCtrlInput set to 0 % fuel quantity will correspond to 121 Droop1RefLow, and similarly with 2902 LoadCtrlInput = 100 % fuel quantity will correspond to 122 Droop1RefHigh. Intermediary values will be accordingly interpo-lated.



120 Droop1 4 %

121 Droop1RefLow 10 mm³/str

122 Droop1RefHigh 230 mm³/str

123 Droop1SpeedRef 1500 rpm

2040 DroopOffset 0..60 rpm

2042 GenSetOffset -60..0 rpm

2902 LoadCtrlInput 0..100 %

4120 DroopOn 1 5230 LoadControlOrPot 0

In this example, the engine is running at rated speed 1500 rpm and 4% droop. Fuel reference value for zero load is 10 mm³/str and 230 mm³/str for full load. Now, the desired output can be adjusted within the range from 0% to 100% by means of the load setpoint.

Due to droop, there is a speed setpoint offset of 60 rpm at zero load (4% of 1500 rpm) and of 0 rpm at full load as indicated by the parameter 2040 DroopOffset.



The load setpoint generates an opposite offset in order to return in combination with droop to the total setpoint value of 1500 rpm. This means, the 0 % load set-point will correspond to an offset of –60 rpm and 100% load setpoint to an offset of 0 rpm.

Speed[rpm]

Injection quantity[mm³/str]

Full-load quantity

Zero-load quantity

Loa

d se

tpo

int

Rated speed(1500 rpm)

Figure 38: Load control by preset value

Given a load setpoint of 2902 LoadCtrlInput = 40%, this will result in calculating a speed offset of –36 rpm. Fuel quantity will now continue to be altered via droop until droop arrives at the fuel quantity of 40 % and with this calculates an offset of +36 rpm which yields a speed setpoint of 1500 rpm - 36 rpm + 36 rpm = 1500 rpm.

So, by load adjustment a speed setpoint offset is formed which corresponds to the droop offset as mirrored with respect to rated speed thus yielding eventually a to-tal offset of 0 rpm.

13.2.2.2 Digital setpoint adjustment

If synchronization and load control are performed exclusively via digital potentiome-ters it is recommended to configure load control for power adjustment by setpoint definition with 5230 LoadControlOrPot = 0 but to leave the load setpoint 5230

LoadCtrlInput unassigned by setting 902 AssignIn_LoadCtrlInp = 0 ( 21.4 Assigning inputs to sensors and setpoint adjusters). Due to this, the load setpoint will always yield 2902 LoadCtrlInput = 0 % which will result in an exactly opposite droop offset at zero load. This will cause the engine to run exactly at rated speed af-ter start-up. Afterwards, synchronization can be performed via the digital potenti-ometer and load accordingly controlled.



This will, however, presuppose droop to have been accurately parameterized. Since in this case neither the switch 2836 SwitchAutoOrManual will be needed nor activa-tion by 2834 SwitchSyncEnable and 2835 SwitchLoadEnable required, they may not have been configured.

13.2.3 Integrated power governor

If both a setpoint and and an actual power signal are available, the control unit can take over load control if the integrated power governor has been implemented in the firm-ware by request. In this case the internal, higher-ranking power governor calculates a speed setpoint offset for the speed governor or, for mains operation, even the fuel set-point for the engine, bypassing the speed control circuit.

To activate the integrated power governor 5233 PowerGovernorOrLMG must be set to 1.

The power setpoint is transmitted in 2919 PowerSetpoint. For testing and commission-ing, instead of this value a pre-set PC value 1243 PowerSetpointPC may be used if 5243 PowerSetpPCOn is set to 1. This function cannot be saved, i.e. after a reset of the con-trol device the external value 2919 PowerSetpoint is active again.

If required, the setpoint can be approached by ramp, with 1241 PowerSetpRampUp de-noting increasing adjustment speed and 1242 PowerSetpRampDown decreasing adjust-ment speed. Both ramp directions are activated together with 5241 PowerSetpRampOn. If ramping is to be in one direction only, the other parameter must be set to its maxi-mum value.

The resulting effective power setpoint is indicated in 3233 PowerSetpEffective angezeigt. In addition, measured power 2918 MeasuredPower is indicated in relation to rated power 1232 RatedPower in 3232 RelativePower.

Power control is effective only when the engine is running (3830 Phase > 4), when the values for measured power and power setpoint are available without errors (3023 Err-MeasuredPower = 0 and 3024 ErrPowerSetpoint = 0), when there is no engine stop re-quest (3802 EngineStopRequest = 0) and the contactor is closed (2835 SwitchLoadE-nable = 1).

3234 GovernorPowerOrSpeed = 1 indicates whether the power governor is active or not. Otherwise only speed is controlled. The error situation arising when power control fails while the contactor is closed, because measured power or power setpoint register a sensor error should be provided for by always parametrizing the droop mode.

Settings for the power control circuit are made in:

1233 PowerGovGain proportional factor of power governor



1234 PowerGovStability integral factor of power governor

1235 PowerGovDerivative derivative factor of power governor

The P-factor and I-factor can be subjected to power-dependent variation by activating a characteristic with 5235 PIDCurvePowerOn = 1.

6300 PIDCrvPowGov:P power supporting points

6310 PIDCrvPowGov:Corr correction factors

3235 PowerPIDCorrFactor current correction factor for P and I

5234 FuelOrSpeedOffsMode allows to decide wether power governor output acts as modification of the speed setpoint or directly on fuel quantity. Fuel offset is used in mains operation and speed setpoint offset in island operation. If a system is to work in both operational modes the modification of the speed setpoint must be parametrized.

5234 FuelOrSpeedOffsMode = 0 speed setpoint offset

5234 FuelOrSpeedOffsMode = 1 fuel offset

2042 GenSetOffset current speed setpoint offset

2111 FuelGenSetOffset current fuel offset

If fuel offset is enabled, 2835 SwitchLoadEnable should be connected with the mais breaker, if speed setpoint offset is used it should be connected with the generator con-tactor. When the integrated power governor works with fuel offset in mains operation, this is indicated by 3200 GenCtrlMainsOrIsland = 1.

The results of power control can be monitored for deviations if in 1239 MaxPowerDif-ference a maximum admissible deviation for the duration of 1240 MaxPowerDiffMax-Time is set and the function has been enabled with 5239 SupvisePowerDiffOn. Devia-tions from the set values are indicated in 3048 ErrPowerGovernor[0].

13.2.3.1 Reduced power caused by knocking

The switch function 2818 SwitchKnock is used to inform the control about the pres-ence of knocking.

2818 SwitchKnock = 0 no knocking

2818 SwitchKnock = 1 engine knocks

When the power governor recognizes the knock signal for the first time, the current power setpoint 3233 PowerSetpEffective is frozen and reduced by 1245 KnockPow-erReduction. This new power setpoint is mantained for the duration of 1246 Knock-Duration. If after that there is still a knock signal coming in, the power setpoint will be reduced further. The reduction continues until the knock signal ends.

After that the currently pre-set power setpoint is activated again and run up to via the power ramp if this ramp has been activated.



This engine protection function is enabled by means of the parameter 5245 Knock-ControlOn. 3245 KnockPowerRedActive shows whether a power reduction is active.

13.3 Digital generator management THESEUS

THESEUS digital generator management is an accessory device for generator operation that is capable of executing all synchronization and power control functions. This HEINZ-MANN device has been designed for optimum cooperation with HEINZMANN speed

governors. The preferred type of connection is via the CAN bus. Chapter 26.1 CAN pro-tocol HZM-CAN offers a description of how to configure the CAN bus system for this pur-pose. But it is also possible to connect THESEUS to the speed governor using an analogue

input. This value is used in the same way as for the load control unit and is described in 13.2.1 Load control using the HEINZMANN load control unit.

For operation with THESEUS, droop will be de-activated automatically, yet for the even-

tuality of a change-over to manual operation ( 13.4 Automatic or manual operation) droop should always be parameterized. Any further adjustment for synchronization and load control will performed on the part of THESEUS.

Operation using THESEUS offers the possibility of disabling synchronization and load control in case of failure or of changing over to manual operation by means of a digital po-tentiometer. For this purpose, the switching function

2836 SwitchAutoOrManual = 0 Manual operation by digital potentiometer

2836 SwitchAutoOrManual = 1 Automatic operation

is available. If this switching function is not parameterized, no external change-over to manual operation will be possible. When THESEUS has been switched over to manual op-eration, the control unit will be switched over to manual operation as well. There will also be manual operation in case CAN communication with THESEUS is no longer available. Operation mode can be checked by the parameter 3201 GenCtrlAutoOrManual.

In manual operation, the control signals received from THESEUS unit will not be evalu-ated, and it is only the switch inputs for the digital potentiometer that will be active. The

inputs and parameters used in this case are the same as for 13.1.1 Digital synchroniza-tion. In case manual operation is also to be used for load control, this will in addition re-quire to activate droop. On switching over to manual operation, the current offset values will be taken over for the digital potentiometer to avoid speed and load jumps. When switching back to automatic operation this will not always be possible since the offset val-ues of the digital potentiometer are cleared and the signals from THESEUS have to be used

(see also 13.4 Automatic or manual operation).

Note

For further information about the adjustment and operation of THESEUS, please refer to the manual Basic Information THESEUS, ord. no. DG 01 015-e



13.4 Automatic or manual operation

Generator operation offers the additional option to disable synchronization and load con-trol in case of failure and to switch over to manual operation using a digital potentiometer. For this purpose, the switching function

2836 SwitchAutoOrManual = 0 Manual operation by digital potentiometer

2836 SwitchAutoOrManual = 1 Automatic operation

is available. If the switching function has not been parameterized ( 22 Switching func-tions) the system behaves always as in automatic operation.

In manual operation, the control signals received via the analogue inputs or from the THE-

SEUS unit ( 13.3 Digital generator management THESEUS) will not be evaluated, and it is only the switch inputs for the digital potentiometer that will be active. The inputs and

parameters used in this case are the same as for 13.1.1 Digital synchronization. The switch functions 2834 SwitchSyncEnable and 2835 SwitchLoadEnable for enabling syn-chronization and power control, however, will be ignored.

In case manual operation is also to be used for load control, this will in addition require to activate droop. This is achieved by assigning the same digital input which is used to change over to manual operation to the switch for changing over between droop 1 and

droop 2 812 FunctDroop2Or1 ( 22.2 Assignment of digital inputs).

On switching over to manual operation, the current offset values will be taken over for the digital potentiometer to avoid speed and load jumps. When switching back to automatic operation this will not always be possible since when using, e.g., the synchronization and load measuring devices the offset values of the digital potentiometer will be cleared and the input signals used.

Whether the control unit is operating in automatic or manual mode can be read from the parameter 3201 GenCtrlAutoOrManual.

If the engine is started by manual operation it will run by set speed plus droop. On switching over to automatic operation droop will be deactivated thus clear-ing also the offset resulting from droop. The engine will then be running at pre-set speed. When returning to manual operation droop will be activated, but in such a way as to retain the currently set speed, and on switching back again to automatic operation the set speed will no longer undergo alteration. This is motivated by the wish to avoid load jumps when switching over under load af-ter attaining a stabilized state. In automatic operation, the set will be running in isochronous mode, i.e., there will be no speed change across load. There-fore, this speed must be sustained on switching over to manual operation, as in manual operation the actual set speed can be altered by droop and by this pos-sibly cause a speed or load jump when switching back to automatic operation.

By using the

Note

7.2 Speed ramp ramp any such speed jump and hence load jump can be retarded by a ramp.





Synchronization is to be enabled with switch input 4 opened and load with switch input 4 closed. Switch input 5 serves for changing between automatic and manual operation. In addition, droop of 4 % is to be provided for manual operation.


120 Droop1 4 %

125 Droop2 0 %

812 FunctDroop2Or1 5

834 FunctSyncEnable -4 835 FunctLoadEnable 4 836 FunctAutoOrManual 5

4120 DroopOn 1

Indication when synchronizing in manual mode:

2812 SwitchDroop2Or1 0

2834 SwitchSyncEnable 1 2835 SwitchLoadEnable 0 2836 SwitchAutoOrManual 0 3201 GenCtrlAutoOrManual 0

Indication when load controlling in automatic mode:

2812 SwitchDroop2Or1 1

2834 SwitchSyncEnable 0 2835 SwitchLoadEnable 1 2836 SwitchAutoOrManual 1 3201 GenCtrlAutoOrManual 1




14.1 Master-slave operation

For ships with two engines on a single shaft the option Double-Engine-System is available on request.

The switch function 2841 SwitchMasterOrSlave tells both control devices which engine is master and which is slave. It is convenient to use a single switch and to connect it to both

control devices. In one device the digital input is assigned positive, in the other negative ( 22.2 Assignment of digital inputs). In this way, both get the same information, but in in-verted form.

The switch functions 2843 SwitchClutch, 2842 SwitchLoadTransfer and, if required, 2844 SwitchAsymLoadEnable must be connected to both control devices, for the selection mas-ter/slave is dynamic. The effective elaboration in the control device depends on the as-signed engine type.

The two control units are connected with the HZM-CAN-Bus ( 26.1 CAN protocol HZM-CAN). The bus transmits the fuel setpoint for the slave. Besides, the two control units con-tinually exchange information about the operative state of the engines. This allow a quick reaction when errors require both engines to go in droop.

Parameter 3250 TwinEnginePhase shows the different phases of engaging, load pick-up and disengaged.

0: engine runs by itself, not engaged, has not reached engagement speed yet

1: engagement speed reached, engine waits for engagement

master stays in this phase

slave proceeds to phase 2 after engagement

2: engaged slave, ramp running after clutch is closed

3: engaged slave, load pick-up active

4: engaged slave, load pick-up deactivated, ramp to minimum load

5: engaged slave, disengagement load reached, engine waits for disengaging

As soon as engagement speed 90 SpeedSwitch is reached, the value of 3251 CloseClutch-Possible switches from 0 to 1 and engaging becomes possible. If the value changes from 1 to 0, disengaging is possible because the slave engine has reached the disengagement load 1252 SlaveLoadForDeClutch. If parameter number 3251 is assigned to a digital output and therefore to a lamp, the lamp is off when the engine starts and lights up when engagement speed is reached; it stays on as long as load pick-up is required and goes out when load pick-up is over and disengaging load has been reached.

The disengagement request by switch function 2843 SwitchClutch = 1 is accepted by the slave engine only if 3251 CloseClutchPossible has been enabled from 0 to 1 – or differ-ently put, when 3250 TwinEnginePhase = 1.



After engaging, the slave runs up to load 1252 SlaveLoadForDeClutch, until load pick-up is requested by 2842 SwitchLoadTransfer = 1. From then on, the slave runs along the ramps 1253 SlaveLoadRampUp or 1254 SlaveLoadRampDown to the position pre-set by the master.

2842 SwitchLoadTransfer = 0 ends the load pick-up. The slave goes automatically to the disengagement load 1252 SlaveLoadForDeClutch and signals it with 3251 CloseClutch-Possible = 0.

The disengagement request operated by switch function 2843 SwitchClutch = 0 is accepted by the slave engine only if the disengagement load has been reached and 3251 Close-ClutchPossible has been disabled from 1 to 0 – or differently put, when 3250 TwinEngi-nePhase = 5.

3252 PositionerOrGovernor indicates whether the respective control unit is an active speed governor or the slave is in positioning mode.

3252 PositionerOrGovernor = 0 speed governor

3252 PositionerOrGovernor = 1 slave in positioning mode

The transmission of the setpoint from master to slave is in form of load value. To this pur-pose it is necessary to define the respective actuator positioning values for zero-load and full-load on both control units.

1250 FuelAtZeroLoad fuel reference value at zero load

1251 FuelAtFullLoad fuel reference value at full load

The resulting own load setpoint is indicated in 3253 MyLoadSetpoint, the load setpoint of the other engine in 3254 OtherLoadSetpoint. The slave derives its own fuel setpoint from the received load setpoint and the to actuator positions and indicates it in 3255 SlaveFuel-Setpoint.

The fuel setpoint can be limited both in master and slave. This is indicated by the follow-ing parameters:

2711 FuelLimitMaxActive fuel for this engine is limited

2716 AsymLoadLimitActive slave limit for asymmetrical load is active

3256 Slave&MasterLimited fuel for both engines is limited

While fuel limitation in the master, i.e. in the speed governor, may be either speed-dependent or boost pressure dependent, in the slave it is determined exclusively by the asymmetrical load value received as sensor value 2917 AsymmetricLoad. The value of 2917 AsymmetricLoad is used continually, except when the switch function 2844 Swit-chAsymLoadEnable is connected but not active. The current limiting value is indicated by the parameter 2706 FuelLimitAsymLoad.

For the CAN connection between the two control units the following parameters must be

set ( 26.1.1 Configuration of the HEINZMANN CAN Bus).


400 CanStartTimeOutDelay delay after switching on the control until messages are expected from the other engine

401 CanMyNodeNumber node number of this engine

402 CanDCNodeNumber node number of the other engine

The node numbers of the two control devices must be parameterized crosswise.

2405 CanOnline indicates whether the CAN connection is established. If one of the CAN errors 3070 ErrCanBus or 3071 ErrCanComm is indicated, menaning that the connection is disturbed, 3049 ErrTwinEngine is output and both engines go into single operation with

droop ( 7.3 Droop). The droop parameters for this situation are:

129 TwinEcyDroop droop

130 TwinEcyDroopRefLow fuel value for zero load

131 TwinEcyDroopRefHigh fuel value for full-load

132 TwinEcyDroopSpeedRef nominal speed

These droop parameters are used whenever errors occur in twin-engine systems. They do not depend on droop being generally enabled and on how the droop values are set in pa-rameters 120 ff and 125 ff. The parameters 129 TwinEcyDroop and 132 TwinEcyDroop-SpeedRef must be identical in both control units.

The function twin-engine system is enabled by setting 5251 TwinEngineEnable to 1.


15 Additional functions


15.1 Fuel temperature compensation

Current injection quantity may be corrected in dependence of fuel temperature. To this purpose, the limited injection quantity 2360 FuelQuantityLimited derived from the control is corrected in dependence of fuel temperature and used as current injection quantity 2350 FuelQuantity.

The correction procedure can be outlined as follows: On the basis of current speed and in-jection quantity the maximum value of the correction is determined with a map. This value represents the maximum possible correction at a specific point of operation. From a fuel temperature characteristic a percentage is derived, which is then used to derive the current correction value from the maximal possible correction value.

The following parameters apply to fuel temperature correction:

2750 FuelTempCorrOffset current correction value

2751 FuelTempCorrMap current maximum value of correction

4750 FuelTempCorrOn activation of correction

7500 FuelCorr:n speed base points for maximum value map

7508 FuelCorr:f fuel base points for maximum value map

7516 FuelCorr:df maximum value of correction

7580 FuelCorr:T fuel temperature base points for correction fac-tor characteristic

7590 FuelCorrFact:x correction factor values for correction factor characteristic

15.2 Engine data

15.2.1 Fuel consumption

Current injection quantity is indicated in parameter 2350 FuelQuantity in cubic milli-meters per stroke (mm3/str). On the basis of this value, the control calculates current fuel consumption in litres per hour (l/h) and indicates it in 2380 FuelConsumption.

15.2.2 Engine start counter

Every successful engine start is counted by 2250 EngineStartCounter. The counter does

not distinguish engine starts achieved by means of 15.3 Start request or by an external cranking procedure. An engine start is considered successful if parameter 3805 En-gineRunning is set.




The engine start counter can be reset only by means of the special function "Clear oper-

ating data" in 3.3 DcDesk 2000.

This function is not implemented in DARDANOS MVC01-20

15.2.3 Engine operating hours counter

Operating hours of the running engine are recorded in 3871 OperatingHourMeter and 3872 OperatingSecondMeter. An engine is considered running when parameter 3805 EngineRunning is set.

The engine operating hours counter is used for 28.4 Error memories, in order to save each error with the time of its first and last occurrence.

The engine operating hours counter can be reset only by means of the special function

"Clear operating data" in 3.3 DcDesk 2000.

This function is not implemented in DARDANOS MVC01-20

15.3 Start request

The control is able to start the engine automatically. To this purpose a start request must be transmitted to the control with the switching function 2849 SwitchStartEngine while the engine is still. If this occurs, parameter 3808 EngineStarter is set. This parameter must be

connected to a starter via one of the 24.5 Digital outputs.

The control DARDANOS MVC03-8 features a special digital output which allows direct

connection to the starter ( 23.3.4 Digital and PWM outputs). If the controls DARDANOS MVC01-20 or MVC 04-6 are used, the starter must be driven by a relay.

On reaching speed as set by 256 StartSpeed2, the control recognizes that the engine is run-

ning. This is also indicated by parameter 3805 EngineRunning (also see 5 Starting quan-tity limitation).

At this moment, parameter 3808 EngineStarter is set back and the starter correspondingly de-activated. The starter is addressed at most for the time 280 StarterCrankTimeMax and as long as switching function 2849 SwitchStartEngine is active. If the engine does not start within this time, the starter is de-activated. After the delay 281 StarterInterlockTime a fur-ther cranking attempt is undertaken. The maximum number of cranking attempts is set in 282 StarterCrankAttempts.

Should the engine not have started after the max. number of cranking attempts, error mes-sage 3091 ErrEngine[1] is output and the starting request is terminated. A repetition of

Note

Note



cranking attempts is possible by setting the starting request again with 2849 Switch-StartEngine.

15.4 Alternator monitoring

It may be monitored whether the alternator is charging the battery. To this purpose, signal D+ / terminal 61 of the alternator must be connected to the switching function 2847 Swit-chAlternator.

If this signal is not set within 290 AlternatorStartDelay after engine start, the error mes-sage 3091 ErrEngine[0] is output.

15.5 Cylinder equalization by means of exhaust gas temperature

On request, equalization of single cylinders by means of exhaust gas temperature may be implemented. Exhaust gas temperature is here used as an indicator for cylinder power. Equalization of cylinder temperatures aims at equalizing cylinder power output.

To this purpose, the exhaust gas temperature of each cylinder must be reported to the con-

trol via a communication module ( 21.3 Configuration of sensors).

Exhaust gas temperatures are indicated by the parameters following 2960 ExhaustTemp-Cyl1. From the temperature values of all cylinders the average temperature 12570 Ex-haustTempAverage is derived. Cylinder injection time is varied with an I control until the temperature of the cylinder corresponds to the average. The I factor of the control must be entered in parameter 10550 ExhTempCorrStability.

The maximum admissible correction may be determined with parameter 10551 Exhaust-TempCorrMax. Current correction values are indicated in the parameters starting from 12550 ExhTempCorrCyl1. This value is added to the injection period for main injection and indicated as total injection period for the cylinder from parameter 3960 DeliveryPe-riod1 onward.

Since it is not intended to change actual injection quantity by cylinder equalization, the av-erage value of all corrections shall always add up to zero. This may lead to the situation where the correction value of a cylinder is no longer modified, although it has not reached the maximum correction value yet.

This function is activated with parameter 14550 ExhaustTempCorrOn.

16 Measuring methods for determining crankshaft angle



It is the position of the piston that is decisive for the correct injection timing for each cylinder.

In order to determine the exact position of the crankshaft and hence of the individual cylinder

piston, several different measuring methods based on different mounting locations are pro-

vided.

In general, it is a sensing gear (pickup wheel) with synchronization gap that is needed as a

basis for the complete injection timing control. If the sensing wheel is mounted on the crank-

shaft, an additional sensing pin is required on the camshaft to determine whether the engine is

in the working stroke.

A list of all the data HEINZMANN needs to tailor the system to the requirements of any spe-

cific engine is to be found in the publication Ordering Information for Electronically Con-

trolled Injection Systems ( 2.2 Further information) and the list should be completed with

utmost care.

16.1 Measuring accuracy and design of the pickup wheel

As accuracy of crankshaft angle determination is crucial for injection accuracy, informa-tion on the angle should be updated for every 6 degrees crankshaft. This means that at least 60 teeth will be required when the sensor is mounted to the crankshaft, and 120 teeth when mounted to the camshaft. By preference, the teeth should be twice these numbers to obtain an accuracy of 3 degrees crankshaft.

For determining angular position a special measuring wheel with rectangular tooth profile should be used if possible.

Preferably, Hall sensors should be used as angle sensors. In contrast to inductive sensors, they offer the advantage of supplying very accurate signals independently of speed. With inductive sensors, the amplitude of the signal varies with speed which will result in speed dependent phase shifts between measuring tooth and sensing signal that are bound to ad-versely affect sensing accuracy.

The pickup wheel must be made of magnetic material. The top width of the tooth should be 3 mm minimum, the width and depth of the gap at least 4 mm. The sensing wheel should have a width of at least 10 mm. Tooth width and gap width should be identical, if possible.

When mounting the pickup wheel, attention should be paid to its radial and axial runout. Significant runout can lead to loss of synchonization. For this reason runout of mount pickup wheel in radial and axial directions should be as little as possible and not exceed 0.5 mm.

The distance between speed pickup and sensing wheel must range between .5 and 2 mm. When mounting the speed pickup, attention should be paid to the fact that the HEINZMANN Hall sensors have a preferred direction of magnetization. This preferred direction is engraved on the pickup and must correspond to the pickup's sense of rotation. If on mounting the pickup it should have been twisted by 90°, it will supply no signal at



all, and though with a twist of 180° some signal might be generated, its edge would be very inaccurate. The correct direction of magnetization for the Hall sensors can be checked.

Figure 39: Construction of the measuring wheel

HEINZMANN recommend to use a pickup wheel with rectangular tooth pro-file and 90 teeth mounted on the crankshaft. It is also recommended to utilize Hall sensors from HEINZMANN as these sensors have been specifically de-veloped for determination of angular position.

For further information on pickup wheels, sensor mounting and specification of HEINZMANN Hall sensors, please refer to the brochure Control Systems for Electroni-

cally Controlled Injection Systems ( 2.2 Further information).

16.2 Measuring methods

To determine speed and angular position up to two speed inputs and one measuring pin in-put (phase sensor) will be provided.

The speed sensors can be mounted to either the crankshaft or the camshaft. Crankshaft mounting should be preferred since there will be a greater number of teeth the sensor sees during one revolution thus enhancing accuracy of angular measurement.

Note



The following figure offers an overview of the various measuring methods that can be ap-plied:

Measuring Method 1 Measuring Method 2 Measuring Method 3

Figure 40: Measuring methods

The standard measuring method (measuring method 1) uses one speed sensor on the crank-shaft with a tooth gap and a measuring pin on the camshaft serving as a phase sensor. As a safety backup, a second crankshaft sensor can be provided.

With measuring method 2, both sensors are mounted on the camshaft, so there will be no longer any need of the phase sensor. But as the number of teeth to be sensed per revolution will mostly be smaller on the camshaft and as the camshaft is rotating at only half the speed of the crankshaft measuring accuracy will in most cases be impaired.

On request, an additional measurement method 3 can be implemented. In this method, the number of teeth on the camshaft wheel corresponds to the number of engine cylinders plus a synchronizing tooth. This allow emergency operation in case of crankshaft sensor failure. The synchronizing tooth in this measurement method has the function of the measuring pin in the standard measurement method. The distance of the synchronizing tooth to the next adjacent tooth amounts to 15° for engines with up to 6 cylinders, otherwise to 12°. The camshaft sensor wheel must rotate in such a direction that the sensor first measures the short distance (i.e. 15° in a 6 cylinder engine) and then the longer distance (45° in a 6 cyl-inder engine).



HEINZMANN recommend using measuring method 1.

The configuration of the mounting place for the speed pickups is done with the following parameters:

Note

4001 PickUp1AtCamOrCrank = 0 pickup 1 on crankshaft

4001 PickUp1AtCamOrCrank = 1 pickup 1 on camshaft

4003 PickUp2AtCamOrCrank = 0 pickup 2 on crankshaft

4003 PickUp2AtCamOrCrank = 1 pickup 2 on camshaft

For the speed adjusters, parameter 4000 MeasWheelBoreOrTeeth allows to select whether the measuring wheel has teeth or bores.

4000 MeasWheelBoreOrTeeth = 0 measuring wheel with teeth

4000 MeasWheelBoreOrTeeth = 1 measuring wheel with bores

The position of the tooth gap and of the sensing pin must be accurately determined as these values are crucial for the angular accuracy of timing control. As a reference point the igni-tion TDC of the cylinder that is selected first (cylinder A1, TDC being equivalent to crank-shaft angle 0°) is to be used.

All distances are specified by degrees crankshaft before TDC of cylinder A1 (even when referring to tooth gaps or sensing pins on the camshaft).

Note

The distance (by degrees crankshaft) between angle sensor 1 and angle sensor 2 may be chosen at option, and so may the distance between the angle sensors and the synchroniza-tion gap. Likewise, there is no restriction to selecting the distance between the measuring pin and the ignition TDC for the phase sensor on the camshaft.

Provisions should be made, however, to prevent simultaneity of any angle sen-sor detecting the gap and of the phase sensor sensing the measuring pin. Therefore, the angular distance between the angle sensor and the phase sensor

should amount to at least 20° crankshaft. HEINZMANN recommend to pro-vide a distance of 180° between the angle and phase sensors.

Note



Figure 41: Distance to measuring gap / pin

To determine the distance, the crankshaft is rotated into a position where cylinder A1 is exactly at TDC (ignition TDC). With the engine in this position, the distance between the centre of the sensor and the beginning of the first tooth (or bore) after the gap is measured by degrees crankshaft starting from the sensor in direction of engine rotation. In like man-ner, the phase sensor distance is to be determined.

The values found are to be entered in the following parameters:

3 SensorToGapPickUp1 distance from pickup 1 to gap

4 SensorToGapPickUp2 distance from pickup 2 to gap

5 SensorToCamIndex distance from index adjuster to gap

The parameterized distance may be checked with the measuring value 2010 GapToCamIn-

dex while the engine is running (see also 16.6 Verification of sensor positions).

The phase sensor on the camshaft must be activated separately with the parameter 4005 CamIndexOn. In addition, parameter 4006 CamIndexBoreOrTeeth allows to select whether

Ignition TDC of cylinder A1 Ignition TDC of cylinder A1

Rotational direction of engine Rotational direction of engine

Distance Distance sensor – gap sensor - gap

Sensor Sensor

Ignition TDC of cylinder A1

Rotational direction of engine

Distance

sensor – sensing pin

Sensor



the camshaft wheel consists of a tooth (4006 CamIndexBoreOrTeeth = 0) or a bore (4006 CamIndexBoreOrTeeth = 1).

16.3 Synchronization Gap

The pickup wheel is of crucial importance for injection timing control. In order to obtain precise information on the position of the crankshaft the pickup wheel has a synchroniza-tion gap which is checked by the control unit with every revolution and used to synchro-nize to.

The synchronization gap can have the size of one or two missing teeth.

HEINZMANN recommend using a pickup wheel with a gap of one tooth. Sys-tems with two missing teeth are possible on request.

16.4 Synchronization by tooth gap

Once the engine is recognized to be running, the control electronics will try to detect the tooth gap on the sensing gear. The control unit is able to recognize the synchronization gap at very low frequencies. The parameter 2007 SynchronToGap is provided to indicate whether the tooth gap has been detected, and the parameter 2006 PMMErrorCode to give detailed information about the synchronization process. Indication is by hexadecimal num-bers with the two high digits indicating a status and the two low digits indicating the cur-rent tooth. The first tooth after the gap has number 00Hex, the gap itself number FFHex. The following status values can occur:

00Hex - Synchronization with gap successful

E0Hex - gap detected, but tooth expected - gap detected, but wrong position - too little teeth until gap were detected

80Hex - tooth detected, but gap expected - too many teeth without gap were detected

C0Hex - frequency too low for gap detection - too much time between two teeth

With the engine standing, the value C0xxHex is displayed, and after successful synchroniza-tion the value 00FFHex. The latter is an equivalent of parameter 2007 SynchronToGap = 1. If the gap is not be in the right place, a value like, e.g., 8036Hex will be displayed indicating that the gap was detected at tooth no. 36Hex = 54. This is also indicated by error 3019 Err-Synchronization[2].

It is only after detecting the gap that injection will be released (3806 EngineReleased = 1,

see 5 Starting quantity limitation). Common rail systems will besides require that there

be a certain injection pressure available before injection can be enabled ( 20 Rail pres-sure control with common rail systems).

Note


If loss of synchronization occurs during engine operation, the parameter 2007 Synchron-ToGap is set to 0, injection is inhibited and the system will attempt to resynchronize. If this attempt is successful the engine will continue to operate, otherwise it is shut down.

To detect the gap, the currently measured time between two teeth is compared by the con-trol electronics with the time measured last. If current time exceeds last measured time by a certain factor, this will indicate the position where the gap is to be found. This factor can be preset via the parameter 6 GapRatio whose value ranges, however, are different for dif-ferent numbers of gaps.

[0 ÷ 1.99] Value range for single gap

[0 ÷ 3.98] Value range for twin gap

It is only values above 1.2 and slightly below maximum value that are reasonable. By stan-dard, the value is preset to 1.25.

Whenever synchronization is not successful within 10 seconds after a speed was detected, the error 3036 ErrSynchronization[3] is generated.

16.5 Failure of camshaft index sensor

In case of failure of the camshaft index sensor, the camshaft position cannot be determined accurately during engine start. In such an event, the control unit uses the first gap found for initialization, in the hope that this is the right one. In the engine doesn’t start, the injection is wrong by exactly 360°. In this case, abort engine start and try again.

Failure of camshaft index sensor is indicated by parameter 3003 ErrPickupIndex[0].

Since a common rail system builds up sufficient fuel pressure for injection even in this wrong position and an injection in this position is not desired, engine start with missing camshaft index sensor may be inhibited – in this case the control should not enable injec-tion. This mode is selected by the parameters:

4008 TryToFindGapOn = 0 no cranking attempt when index sensor is missing

4008 TryToFindGapOn = 1 cranking attempt with missing index sensor is al-lowed

When the index sensor fails while the engine is running, only an error message is output and the engine continues to run.

When an emergency camshaft wheel for measuring method 2 ( 16.2 Measuring methods) is used, it will be additionally checked whether the correct number of teeth are registered between two synchronization teeth. If this is not the case, error message 3036 ErrSynchro-nization[4] is generated.



16.6 Verification of sensor positions

The digital control is able to determine the distance between synchronizing gap and cam-shaft index. The measured angle is shown in parameter 2010 GapToCamIndex. The angle is measured from the synchronizing gap to the camshaft index. If therefore the index were 20° before the gap, a value of 700° would be indicated.

The value of parameter 2010 GapToCamIndex should correspond to the following values when the engine is running:

2010 GapToCamIndex = 3 SensorToGapPickUp1 – 5 SensorToCamIndex

or

2010 GapToCamIndex = 4 SensorToGapPickUp2 – 5 SensorToCamIndex

whereby the sensor distance of the respectively active pickup must be used. When the en-gine is not running, the distance setpoint is indicated with the formula above. This indica-tion value allows to verify whether the parameter settings correspond to the effective situa-tion of the engine.

A verification of absolute sensor positions is possible only when an external signal is avail-able to serve as a clue for TDC (e.g., cylinder pressure). An oscilloscope can then register this signal and the speed signal and therefore determine the position of the sensor.

There is the possibility to monitor the distance between synchronizing gap and camshaft index and to generate an error if this distance is excessive. To this purpose, the monitoring function must be enabled in parameter 4007 CheckGapToIndexDist and the value of ad-missible variation must be entered in parameter 7 GapToCamIndexMax. Monitoring is ac-tive only during engine start, since the distance does not change. If the admissible distance is exceeded, error 3036 ErrSynchronization[1] is set.

It must be taken into account that the distance can be measured with accuracy only if the speed is constant. During dynamic operation the measuring value may differ from the ac-tual distance. The maximum admissible value should therefore not be too small.

16.7 Verification of preferred sensor direction

Hall sensors have a preferred direction, i.e. the sensors should be mounted in the indicated direction, which is also inscribed on the sensor. Correct direction of mounting can be veri-fied by enabling the function with parameter 4015 CheckPickUpDirection for speed pick-ups and with 4016 CheckIndexDirection for the camshaft index adjuster. Whenever the wrong direction is detected during engine start, the error 3001 ErrPickUp1[4], 3002 ErrPickUp2[4] or 3003 ErrPickUpIndex[4] is output.

Monitoring of the preferred direction is possible only if the Hall sensor is able to approxi-mately reproduce the tooth form.


17 Control of the magnetic valves


The digital control DARDANOS MVC01-20 is capable of driving up to 20 magnetic valves (or injectors or cylinders), DARDANOS MVC03-8 up to 8 and DARDANOS MVC04-6 up to 6.

Both control devices are equipped with two independent magnetic valve amplifiers, control-ling half of the valves each. In case of failure of one amplifier, this allows emergency opera-tion with half the cylinders.

A valve on amplifier bank A and another one on amplifier bank B may be addressed at the same time, while two valve on the same bank cannot be addressed simultaneously. When op-erating with (multiple) pre-injection and post-injection, with long activation times and ex-treme correction values for delivery begin and delivery period, injection overlapping may occur even with correct valve subdivision. Therefore, the activation times will continuously be checked upon by the control circuit whether energizing a cylinder might possibly begin before energizing the previous cylinder on the same bank has terminated. In the event of such overlapping, this is signalled by the parameter 3035 ErrInjection [1,2], injection is inhibited and the engine stopped. In this case, all injection parameters such as delivery begin, delivery period, correction of delivery begin and duration, pre-injection and post-injection, etc., will have to be checked. Restarting the engine will be possible only after the error has been cleared.

17.1 Configuration of ignition sequence

The digital controls DARDANOS MVC01-20, DARDANOS MVC03-8 and DARDANOS MVC04-6 support the most varied ignition sequences and cylinder numbers. The configu-ration of cylinder number and ignition sequence is done with parameter 9 EngineConfigu-ration. The following table provides an overview for example:

Setting Number of cylin-ders

Ignition sequence

0 4 1-3-4-2

1 6 1-5-3-6-2-4

2 8 1-4-2-6-8-5-7-3

3 8 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8

4 8 1-7-5-3-8-2-4-6

Table 11: Configuration of ignition sequence

The assignment of cylinders to the two magnetic valve amplifiers is such that the cylinders are controlled alternatively from amplifier A and amplifier B. The control sequence is MVA1 - MVB1 - MVA2 - MVB2 - MVA3 - MVB3 - …, of course only for the configured number of cylinders. For configuration 1 in the above table, the assignation therefore is as follows: MVA1 - MVB1 - MVA2 - MVB2 - MVA3 - MVB3.



The table may be extended for other engines and ignition sequences, or customised.

Whenever a digital control does not support a specific engine configuration, configuration

error 1010 is generated (see 28.3 Configuration errors) and the digital control is initial-ized with setting 0. This may happen, for instance, if DARDANOS MVC04-6, which is able to lead a maximum of 6 valves, is configured for a 8 cylinder engine.

Parameter 9 EngineConfiguration becomes active only after a 3.2 Saving

Data and a 3.10 Reset of control unit. Note

17.2 Actuation of control magnets

The control units are capable of driving various types of control magnets with different characteristics. For common rail systems rapid valves are required to effect the short actua-tion times for pre-, main and post-injection. For this reason the control units DARDANOS MVC03-8 and MVC04-6 can be configured for magnets with 48V or 58V. The parameter

5960 HighVoltage58VOr48V= 0 magnet actuation with 48V

5960 HighVoltage58VOr48V= 1 magnet actuation with 58V

allows to select actuation voltage.

Depending on version the control unit DARDANOS MVC01-20 can be configured for magnets with just 24 V, or optionally 24 V and 48 V or optionally 24 V and 90 V.

In only 24 V versions of control unit MVC01-20 parameter 5960 does not exist at all!

In the both extended versions it is named and used as follows:

5960 InjVoltage48VOr24V= 0 magnet actuation with 24 V




Actuation voltage is independent from the voltage supply of electronic components, i.e. the ac-tuation voltage remains even in case of voltage drops of the battery (e.g. during engine start).

Actuation voltage may be set only to the value indicated by the magnet / injec-tor manufacturer.

Note

The current actuation voltage is indicated in measuring value 3610 InjectorSupply. In addi-tion, it is monitored whether values are within a specified range. If measured actuation voltage differs by +/- 10 V from voltage setpoint, this is indicated by error 3037 ErrInjec-



torSupply [5,6]. This error is only a warning, for the control unit continues to try to ad-dress the injectors.

Since there are considerable differences among the available magnets, quite a number of parameters are provided to adapt to the specific properties of the magnets. These are the parameters that are required for adjusting the energizing profile:

1950 BoostTime duration of energizing by boost current

1951 MeasWindowTime duration of freewheeling phase

1952 FlyTimeDefault standard value for fly time

1953 FlyTimeFilter filter constant for measured fly time

1960 BoostCurrent boost current

1961 HoldCurrent hold current

1962 BipThreshold threshold for BIP recognition

The figure below offers an general outline of the current path when a magnet is energized:

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2

BIP

Hold current

Boost time

Rising time

Flying time

Energizing time

Boost current

Time [ms]

Cu

rren

t [A

]

Measuring window

Figure 42: Energizing control magnets

Energizing of the control magnets subdivides into three sections. First, current as set by 1960 BoostCurrentBankA is applied to the magnets for the duration of 1950 BoostTime. The high current there will be maximum acceleration of the magnetic valves. This first phase is followed by the freewheeling phase which is active for the time set in 1951 MeasWindowTime. During this interval the instant of impact will occur which the digital

control can detect by means of specific magnets ( 17.3 BIP detection and measurement of




fly time). During this phase, there is a decrease of current which will then be set to the value of 1961 HoldCurrent. Hold current is lower than boost current since the magnetic valve must only be held in its position. The hold current phase is upheld until the delivery period has elapsed.

1952 FlyTimeDefault is used only for initialization. During operation, rise time and fly time are measured. This is indicated by the following parameters:

3920 RiseTime1 rise time of cylinder 1

: :

3940 FlyTime1 fly time of cylinder 1

17.3 BIP detection and measurement of fly time

To determine injection begin as accurately as possible, the DARDANOS system has the capability of recognizing the instant of impact of each single magnetic valve. This on con-dition that magnetic valves are used that make this possible.

This instant is regarded as delivery begin and will be termed BIP (Begin of Injection Point) in the following text. The time between energizing begin and instant of impact is called fly time. BIP however is rather a clue than an accurate definition of injection begin. Therefore it might be required to set negative injection durations in the delivery period

map ( 18.2 Delivery period or 19.2 Delivery period), since it is possible for a certain amount of fuel to be injected before BIP.

Due to mechanical tolerances, BIP may vary considerably for different valves. As a com-pensation for these tolerances, the measured BIP will be used as a lead for the subsequent injection of the same cylinder.

These are the parameters that are used to detect BIP detection and to determine flying time:

1950 BoostTime duration of energizing by boost current

1951 MeasWindowTime duration of freewheeling phase

1952 FlyTimeDefault default fly time value (for engine start and in case BIP detection is not active)

1953 FlyTimeFilter filter constant for measuring fly time

1962 BipThreshold threshold for BIP detection

5950 BipCorrectionOn activation of BIP detection and fly time measure-ment

5951 BipSupervisingOn monitoring of BIP detection

3940 FlyTime1 current fly time cylinder 1



To detect a BIP, the current change speed is evaluated. This evaluation is done only after the end of the boost phase, when no current is added and the system is in its freewheeling phase. The measurement window (duration of measurement) is defined by parameter 1951 MeasWindowTime. The measurement window should not be long enough for the system to be in hold current control at the end of measuring. The maximum length of the measuring window is 400 µs.

The magnet's point of impact is characterized by a strong current change. In case of a very

definite BIP (as in Figure 43) the current change is so strong that the direction of the current is inverted, i.e. the current increases for a short instant.

The moment when the current changes direction and therefore no current modification oc-curs is defined as the point of impact. In this case the current modification is 0 A/ms. To be able to recognize a BIP safely, the threshold for detection therefore should not be set to ex-actly 0 A/ms, in order to be able to identify a less definite BIP.

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2

-70

-50

-30

-10

10

30

50

70

Time [ms]

Cu

rren

t [A

]

Cu

rren

t g

rad

ien

t [A

/ms

]

Flying time

Current gradient

BIP threshold

Figure 43: BIP detection

The threshold for BIP detection must be entered in parameter 1962 BipThreshold. Atten-tion must be paid to the fact that this value must be seen as inverted to the actual current modification. If the value of 3.0 A/ms is entered, this corresponds to the instant when cur-rent modification has exceeded the value of –3.0 A/ms.

The valuation of BIP can occur only if the magnet’s energizing duration is greater that the sum of boost time and measuring time, i.e. longer than fly time. For shorter injection times the preceding measuring value is therefore kept.



The control unit is able to energize two magnets at the same time. Since the BIP detection can be carried out for only one magnet at the time, BIP detection is done alternatively on bank A and B. The BIP of a cylinder therefore is checked on each second injection.

Since BIP may change slightly from one injection to the next (of the same cylinder) there is the possibility to filter the measured value for fly time. To this purpose the filter constant can be entered in the parameter 1953 FlyTimeFilter. This value corresponds to a low-pass filtering across the number of registered injections. A value of 1 corresponds to no filter-ing.

In certain cases, it will not be possible to achieve unambiguity of BIP detection. This is the case especially for common rail systems, since here often magnets are used that produce no definite change of current path or the BIP may even be as early in the boost phase. On the other hand, the fly time tolerances will be considerably reduced due to actuation the con-trol with higher voltage, which will allow to do without corrections of fly time. Another critical aspect is the length of the cables between control unit and control valves as BIP de-tection cannot be safeguarded when cables are too long.

In all these cases, BIP detection should be disabled with the parameter 5950 BipCorrectio-nOn = 0. Fly time will then be as defined by the parameter 1952 FlyTimeDefault for all cylinders. This value corresponds to the time interval between energizing begin until injec-tion begin. This value is also used when monitoring of BIP detection is suppressed by dis-abling 5951 BipSupervisingOn because the measured fly time cannot be used without monitoring.

17.4 Measurement of rise time

The rise time reflects the time required by the current to reach the pre-set boost current

value. It is therefore practically possible to determine the current rise speed ( Figure 42). Current must reach boost current level with boost time, otherwise the error 3050ff ErrCyl-inderX [8] is set. This can result either from a parameter error (boost time set too short) or a magnetic valve error. The error ErrCylinderX [8] therefore covers the range between no current (3050ff ErrCylinderX [0]) and overcurrent (3050ff ErrCylinderX[1,2,3]), i.e. when current is flowing but does not reach boost current.

The error message 3050ff ErrCylinderX[7] is used to monitor the control and measure-ment procedure, for a feedback by means of control time measurement must always be present. In such a case it is likely that all cylinders report an amplifier bank error because the amplifier is faulty. No cylinder belonging to this band is addressed.

17.4.1 Checking actuation by click test

Firing order and correctness of cabling can be checked by means of the click test. In do-ing so, all magnetic valves are addressed shortly (ca. 10 ms) in the order cylinder 1, cyl-inder 2 and so on with an interval of 1.5 seconds, until the click test is stopped manually


or until speed is recognized and the click test stops automatically. Energizing is done

with the set current profile ( 17.2 Actuation of control magnets).

The click test can be started and stopped with 3.3 DcDesk 2000. It can be activated only when the engine is still, and no emergency shutdown error may have happened. Furthermore, rail pressure must be below 20005 CR_PressMaxAtClickT for common rail systems to prevent fuel from being injected by the click test. DcDesk 2000 will automatically check whether activation of the click test is permissible and a running click test is immediately aborted as soon as the necessary conditions are no longer satis-fied.

Activation of the click test is indicated by the parameter 3902 ClickTestActive and 3830 Phase = 8.

17.4.2 Single cylinder skipping

In normal operation, all magnetic valves will be energized thus enabling injection for all available cylinders. For testing purposes, however, (e.g. for measuring cylinder pres-sure) injection can be de-activated for single cylinders. Cylinder skipping is enabled with parameter 5900 CylinderMaskOn, the cylinders to skip must be entered in parame-ter 1900 CylinderMaskBank.

These parameters are structured by bits with bit 0 corresponding to cylinder 1 and 7 to cylinder 8. For a currently active cylinder the respective bit must be set. This can also be done by simply adding the hexadecimal values of the below table for the cylinders that are to be active:

Cyl 8 Cyl 7 Cyl 6 Cyl 5 Cyl 4 Cyl 3 Cyl 2 Cyl 1

80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01

Table 12: Cylinder skipping


In an 8 cylinder engine, the cylinders 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 are to be de-activated. Hence, the values of the other cylinders must be added

Cylindermask = 40Hex + 20Hex + 10Hex + 04Hex + 01Hex = 75Hex


1900 CylinderMask 75 Hex 5900 CylinderMaskOn 1

The PC programme 3.3 DcDesk 2000 allows to set cylinder skipping much more comfortably in a special window.

Note



17.5 Detection of control valve errors

As regards possible errors of the control magnets, two categories can be distinguished. One category comprises errors due to BIP detection and rise time measurement (errors 4 to 8 in

Table 13), the other errors caused by faulty cabling and erroneous activation (errors 0 to

3 in Table 13). The errors are indicated by the following parameters:

3050 ErrCylinder1 error of cylinder 1

: :

3058 ErrCylinder8 error of cylinder 8

The following table provides an overview of possible errors:

Error Meaning

Current < (ca.) 1 A 0 - During the whole time the main injection was addressed, current never ex-

ceeded ca. 1 A. This means that no current reached the valve (broken cable). only error message

Check cabling and injector.

Overcurrent low-side transistor 1 - The hardware has recognized an overcurrent on the low-side transistor and

turned off the power supply. only error message


Overcurrent high-side on PWM transistor 2 - The hardware has recognized an overcurrent on the high-side PWM transistor

and switched off the power supply. only error message


Overcurrent high-side on FREEWHEEL transistor 3 - The hardware has recognized an overcurrent on the high-side freewheel transis-

tor and switched off the power supply. only error message


No fly time was registered 4 - No fly time was registered only error message


Check parameters of fly time measurement.

Fly time too short 5 - The registered fly time lies outside the admissible range. - Monitored only if the function 5951 BipSupervisingOn is active.




Error Meaning

only error message



6 Flytime too long - The registered fly time lies outside the admissible range. - Monitored only if the function 5951 BipSupervisingOn is active. only error message



7 No rise time was registered - No rise time was registered. only error message


Check parameters of magnetic valve power supply..

8 Rise time too long - Current has not reached pre-set boost current during boost phase. only error message



Table 13: Possible control magnet errors

When such an error occurs, it is attempted to continue to energize the valve where the error has occurred to keep the engine running as long as possible. Depending on the error there-fore it may be that a cylinder or even all cylinders of an amplifier bank have failed and the engine continues to run on the remaining functioning cylinders.

Since in case of short circuit the overcurrent error is recognized within a few microseconds and the hardware switches off the power, there is no danger of damaging hardware of mag-netic valve and therefore attempts at energizing are kept up.

When a short circuit happens, it may be that all injectors of a bank report an error. The short circuit low-side to mass can be recognized only by analysing the interval of time be-tween energizing begin and the moment when boost current is reached (rise time). On the basis of the combination of these specific errors the error cause may be determined. For this reason, in addition to the single errors common errors are generated and indicated in the error parameter 3035 ErrInjection.


The following table provides an overview:

Error Meaning

Cylinder error 0 - More than 1920 CylinderFaultEcy cylinders report an error. - Monitored only if function 5920 CylinderFaultEcyOn is active Emergency shutdown.

Overlapping of injection at amplifier A 1 - At amplifier A, the injection for the current cylinder starts before the end of

injection of cylinder before. Emergency shutdown.

Check injection begin and injection time.

Check pre- and post-injection.

Overlapping of injection at amplifier B 2 - At amplifier B, the injection for the current cylinder starts before the end of




Short circuit high-side to earth at amplifier A 3 - All injectors of amplifier A register overcurrent high-side PWM Error message, further control attempts are made


Short circuit high-side to earth at amplifier B 4 - All injectors of amplifier B register overcurrent high-side PWM Error message, further control attempts are made Check cabling and injector.

Short circuit high-side to supply voltage at bank A 5 - All injectors on bank A register overcurrent high-side free wheel Error message, further control attempts are made


Short circuit high-side to supply voltage at bank B 6 - All injectors on bank A register overcurrent high-side free wheel Error message, further control attempts are made


Short circuit low-side to earth at amplifier A 7 - At least one injector of amplifier A registers a rise time which is too great or not

measurable. Error message, further control attempts are made





Error Meaning

8 Short circuit low-side to earth at amplifier B - At least one injector of amplifier B registers a rise time which is too great or not



9 Short circuit low-side to supply voltage at bank A - One injector on bank A registers overcurrent low-side - All other injectors on this bank register: overcurrent high-side free wheel Error message, further control attempts are made


10 Short circuit low-side to supply voltage at bank B - One injector on bank B registers overcurrent low-side - All other injectors on this bank register: overcurrent high-side free wheel Error message, further control attempts are made


Table 14: Possible injection errors

Normally, the control unit will try to maintain engine operation in spite of any of these er-rors. When a cylinder is faulty, the speed governor automatically reacts by increasing in-jection times. To prevent overload however, the system offers the additional option of stopping the engine when a certain number of cylinders is at fault. For this purpose, the following parameters are provided:

1920 CylinderFaultEcyNo minimum number of faulty cylinders

5920 CylinderFaultEcyOn activation of emergency shutdown

When at least as many cylinders as defined by 1920 CylinderFaultEcyNo are at fault and the function is active, the engine will be shut down. The error is indicated in 3035 ErrIn-jection [0].

The injection system must be equipped with a device to prevent continued in-jection in case of any defect of the magnets, valves or injectors (e.g., separate mechanical flow limiters for every injector pipe). Note

18 Injection control of cam driven systems



The HEINZMANN system DARDANOS is available in a version capable of controlling in-

jection systems such as the 2.3.1 PPN System (Pump-Pipe-Nozzle) or the 2.3.2 PNU Sys-

tem (Pump-Nozzle-Unit) with commercially available magnetic valves.

Delivery begin may be varied by means of a map in dependence of speed and load. Determi-

nation of delivery period for main injection, however, requires a pump map, which will have

to be provided by the manufacturer of the injection system. From the pump map, injection

period is derived in dependence of injection begin, speed and injection quantity.

Besides, the system provides the possibility of correcting delivery begin and delivery period

separately for each individual cylinder.

The PC program 3.3 DcDesk 2000 offers many utilities to simplify map parame-terizing. Among other things, all injections may be visualized graphically with the values relating to each delivery begin and duration. This window allows to pa-rameterize injectios easily.

18.1 Delivery begin

To optimize engine performance delivery begin can be varied. For this purpose, a map with a domain of 15 x 15 base points (supporting points) and another one with a domain of 5 x 5 base points for engine start are provided. They allow to adapt delivery begin to the current working point in dependence of speed and load. The current map is selected with switch function 2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1. Depending on the specific requirements, it will thus be possible to achieve optimum engine performance with regard to fuel consumption or emissions.

An overview for delivery begin determination is provided in Figure 44.

The delivery begin map is activated with parameter 4310 DeliveryBeginMapOn. When the map is not active, injection operates independently of speed and load, with a constant de-livery begin as defined by parameter 310 DeliveryBeginSetp. This function is primarily in-tended to facilitate adjustment of delivery begin map on the engine test bench. This is done by running the engine up to a specific load and speed point and by subsequently varying delivery begin until optimum performance is attained. The procedure must be repeated for all base points. Any base points that cannot be run up to by the specific engine must be set to reasonable extrapolated values.

The current delivery begin derived from the maps 2311 DelBegBaseMap may be adapted

to ambient conditions 18.1.2 Correction of delivery begin by means of 2312 DelBegOff-set.

Note



DB

: M

ap

fo

r e

ng

ine

sta

rt

DB

: M

ap

2

DB

: M

ap

1

X

Z

Y

X:

160

00

Y:

160

15

Z:

160

30

200

0 S

pe

ed

235

0 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

200

0 S

pe

ed

235

0 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

235

0 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

200

0 S

pe

ed

X

Z

Y

X:

162

55

Y:

162

70

Z:

162

85

X

Z

Y

X:

165

10

Y:

165

15

Z:

165

20

2311

Del

Be

gB

aseM

ap1 0

284

8 S

wit

chD

elM

aps2

Or1

1 0

&3

805

En

gin

eRu

nn

ing

431

5 B

ase

Ma

pF

orS

tart

On

+

231

2 D

elB

egO

ffse

t

1 0

431

0 D

eliv

ery

Beg

inM

apO

n

310

Del

ive

ryB

egin

Se

tp2

310

De

liver

yB

egin

Figure 44: Sequence of operations for determiningdelivery begin



The resulting delivery begin is indicated by parameter 2310 DeliveryBegin. This value will equal either the current value as deduced from the map or the value as set for constant de-livery begin in 310 DeliveryBeginSetp. It is valid for all cylinders and represents the initial

value for 18.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders.

Delivery begin is specified by degrees crankshaft before TDC (unit: °BTDC) and can be set within a range from –20° to +50° with –20° signifying 20° crank after TDC and +50° signifying 50° before TDC.

The parameters relating to delivery begin have the following numbers:

310 DeliveryBeginSetp delivery begin with de-activated map

2310 DeliveryBegin current delivery begin

2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1 common selection of delivery begin maps

4310 DeliveryBeginMapOn general activation of delivery begin maps

16000 DelBegin1:n(x) speed base points of delivery begin map 1

16015 DelBegin1:f(x) quantity base points of delivery begin map 1

16030 DelBeginMap1:DB(x) delivery begin values of delivery begin map 1




1 Delivery begin at minimum

speed and off-load

2 Delivery begin at maximum

speed and off-load

3 Delivery begin at minimum

speed and full-load

4 Delivery begin at maximum

speed and full-load

Figure 45: Delivery begin map


Delivery begin is to be parameterized as variable in dependence of speed and load using two speed base points and two quantity base points each:

Speed [rpm]

Inje

ctio

n qu

antit

y (L

oad)

1

2

3

4

Note




16000 DelBegin1:n(0) 800 rpm 16001 DelBegin1:n(1) 2000 rpm 16002 DelBegin1:n(2) 0 : : : :

16014 DelBegin1:n(14) 0 rpm 16015 DelBegin1:f(0) 0 mm3/str 16016 DelBegin1:f(1) 500 mm3/str 16017 DelBegin1:f(2) 0 mm3/str : : : :

16029 DelBegin1:f(14) 0 mm3/str 16030 DelBeginMap1:DB(0) 10 °BTDC point 1 16031 DelBeginMap1:DB(1) 15 °BTDC point 2 16045 DelBeginMap1:DB(15) 12 °BTDC point 3 16046 DelBeginMap1:DB(16) 20 °BTDC point 4

Activation:

4310 DeliveryBeginMapOn 1

18.1.1 Delivery begin map for engine start

A separate delivery begin map may be used to optimize engine start. The delivery begin map described above in this case will be used only for ordinary engine operation.

The engine start delivery begin map is used only if the delivery begin maps have been generally activated with parameter 4310 DeliveryBeginMapOn.

The parameters for the engine start delivery begin map are:

4315 DBBaseMapForStartOn activation of delivery begin map for engine start

16510 DBStart:n(x) speed base points of engine start delivery begin map

16515 DBStart:f(x) quantity base points of engine start delivery begin map

16520 DBStartMap:DB(x) delivery begin values of engine start delivery begin map

The engine start delivery begin map will be operative as long as parameter 3813 En-gineRunning = 0, i.e. as long as the engine is in its starting-up phase.

18.1.2 Correction of delivery begin

Delivery begin can be corrected in function of ambient conditions. According to the cir-cumstances, the delivery begin may be corrected through coolant temperature, charge air temperature, fuel temperature or ambient pressure.

Note



The correction procedure always follows an identical scheme. As a first step, a maxi-mum correction value is determined in dependance of current speed and delivery quan-tity from a map. This value represents the maximum possible correction at a specific point of operation. On the basis of a characteristic for the respective influencing vari-able (coolant temperature, charge air temperature, fuel temperature or ambient pressure) a percentage is calculated, which, together with the maximum correction value, deter-mines the actual correction value. This percentage value is signed, allowing either an anticipation or a delay of delivery begin.

From all current corrections the one is determined which allows the greatest correction (2313 DelBegOffUnLimited). This value is limited with the absolute maximum admissi-

ble correction 2314 DelBegOffsetMax ( 18.1.2.1 Absolute maximum values for deliv-ery begin correction) and used as delivery begin correction 2312 DelBegOffset.

The diagram in Figure 46 shows an overview of the sequence of operations for deliv-ery begin correction.

The speed and fuel base points of the maps for the determination of the maximum cor-rection values are identical for all corrections. But the maximum value can be indicated separately for each correction.

The following parameters apply to delivery begin correction in general:

2312 DelBegOffset current correction value for delivery begin

2313 DelBegOffUnLimited unlimited correction value for delivery begin

2314 DelBegOffsetMax maximum correction value for delivery begin

16550 DBCorr:n speed base points for maximum value map

16558 DBCorr:f fuel base points for maximum value map

18.1.2.1 Absolute maximum values for delivery begin correction


16566 DBCorrMax:DB absolute maximum values of correction

18.1.2.2 Delivery begin correction by means of coolant temperature

2316 DelBegOffCoolantTemp current correction value

4316 DBCorrCoolantTempOn activation of this correction

16630 DBCorrCoolTmp:DB maximum values for this correction

16886 DBCorrCoolant:T coolant temperature base points for correction factor characteristic

16894 DBCorrCoolant:x correction factors of correction factor charac-teristic



DB

: M

axi

mu

m v

alu

es

for

co

ola

nt

tem

p. d

ep

en

de

nt

corr

ecti

on

DB

: C

oo

lan

t te

mp

erat

ure

dep

end

ent

co

rrec

tio

n

X

YX

: 168

86Y

: 168

94

DB

: M

axi

mu

m v

alu

es

for

ch

arg

e a

ir

tem

p. d

ep

en

de

nt

corr

ecti

on

DB

: M

axi

mu

m v

alu

es

for

fue

l tem

p.

de

pe

nd

en

t co

rre

cti

on

X

Z

Y

X: 1

6550

Y: 1

6558

Z:

167

58

DB

: F

uel

tem

pe

ratu

re d

epe

nd

ent

co

rrec

tio

n

X

YX

: 169

18Y

: 169

26

DB

: M

axi

mu

m v

alu

es

for

am

bie

nt

pre

ssu

re d

epen

den

t co

rrec

tio

n

DB

: A

mb

ien

t p

ress

ure

de

pen

de

nt

co

rrec

tio

n

X

YX

: 169

34Y

: 169

52

x 3 x 4

u 1x 2x 1

ma

x

x 3 x 4

u 2x 2x 1

min

X

1 0

=

-1

200

0 S

pe

ed

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

290

7 C

oo

lan

tTem

p

200

0 S

pe

ed

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

200

0 S

pe

ed

290

8 C

har

ge

Air

Tem

p

200

0 S

pe

ed

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

291

0 F

uel

Tem

p

290

6 A

mb

ien

tPre

ssu

re

X

Z

Y

X: 1

6550

Y: 1

6558

Z:

166

94

X

Z

Y

X: 1

6550

Y: 1

6558

Z:

166

30

X

Z

Y

X: 1

6550

Y: 1

6558

Z:

168

2223

19 D

elB

eg

Off

Am

bP

ress

231

8 D

elB

eg

Off

Fu

elT

em

p

2317

Del

Be

gO

ffC

ha

rge

Air

T

2316

Del

Be

gO

ffC

oo

lan

tTem

p

2313

De

lBe

gO

ffU

nL

imit

ed

X0

1 0

431

7 D

BC

orr

Ch

arg

eA

irT

em

pO

n

X0

1 0

43

19 D

BC

orr

Am

bP

res

sOn

X0

1 0

431

6 D

BC

orr

Co

ola

ntT

em

pO

n

X0

1 0

43

18 D

BC

orr

Fu

elT

em

pO

n

DB

: A

bs

olu

te m

axim

um

val

ues

fo

r co

rrec

tio

n

X

Z

Y

X: 1

655

0Y

: 16

558

Z: 1

656

6

2000

Sp

eed

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

23

12

De

lBeg

Off

set

u 2

x 2x 1m

in

231

4 D

elB

eg

Off

se

tMa

x

x 1x 2

x 2x 10

/1

X

u 1

x 2x 1m

ax

Lim

itatio

n

-1

Offs

et w

ith h

igh

est

abso

lute

val

ue

DB

: C

har

ge

air

te

mp

erat

ure

d

ep

en

de

nt

corr

ec

tio

n

X

YX

: 169

02Y

: 169

10

Figure 46: Sequence of operations for delivery begin determination


18.1.2.3 Delivery begin correction by means of charge air temperature

2317 DelBegOffChargeAirT current correction value

4317 DBCorrChargeAirTmpOn activation of this correction

16694 DBCorrCharTmp:DB maximum values for this correction

16902 DBCorrChargeAir:T charge air base point for correction factor char-acteristic

16910 DBCorrChargeAir:x correction factors of correction factor charac-teristic

18.1.2.4 Delivery begin correction by means of fuel temperature

2318 DelBegOffFuelTemp current correction value

4318 DBCorrFuelTempOn activation of this correction

16758 DBCorrFuelTmp:DB maximum values for this correction

16918 DBCorrFuelTemp:T fuel temperature base points for correction fac-tor characteristic

16926 DBCorrFuelTemp:x correction factors for correction factor charac-teristic

18.1.2.5 Delivery begin correction by means of ambient pressure

2319 DelBegOffAmbPress current correction value

4319 DBCorrAmbPressOn activation of this correction

16822 DBCorrAmbPress:DB maximum values for this correction

16934 DBCorrAmbPress:p ambient pressure base points for correction factor characteristic

16942 DBCorrAmbPress:x correction factors for correction factor charac-teristic

18.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders

To compensate for tolerances of the injection system, there exists the possibility of cor-recting delivery begin for each single cylinder with a specific map. The map consists of two base points for speed and two for injection quantity. These base points are effective

both for correction of delivery begin and 18.2.2 Correction of delivery period for sin-gle cylinders. Furthermore, these base points are the same for all cylinders, i.e., they cannot be selected separately for each cylinders. The four correction values of the map, however, may be set for each single cylinder independently of the others.



The correction value allows to shift effective delivery begin 2310 DeliveryBegin by ±5° degrees crankshaft.

When activating the cylinder-specific correction function it should be kept in mind that this correction affects all cylinders. Before activating it, all map values must therefore be set to defined values that make sense. Note


398

0 D

eliv

ery

Beg

in1

++ + + + + +

398

1 D

eliv

ery

Beg

in2

398

2 D

eliv

ery

Beg

in3

398

3 D

eliv

ery

Beg

in4

398

4 D

eliv

ery

Beg

in5

398

5 D

eliv

ery

Beg

in6

398

6 D

eliv

ery

Beg

in7

398

7 D

eliv

ery

Beg

in8

+

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cyl

. 1

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cyl

. 3

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cyl

. 5

X

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

752

6

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cyl

. 7

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

ue

lQu

anti

ty

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

ue

lQu

anti

ty

235

0 F

ue

lQu

anti

ty

200

0 S

pee

d

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

ue

lQu

anti

ty

X

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

751

8

X

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

751

0

X

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

753

4

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cyl

. 2

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

ue

lQu

anti

tyX

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

751

4

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cyl

. 4

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

ue

lQu

anti

tyX

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

752

2

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cyl

. 6

X

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

753

0

235

0 F

ue

lQu

anti

ty

200

0 S

pee

d

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cyl

. 8

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

ue

lQu

anti

tyX

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

753

8

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

231

0 D

eliv

eryB

eg

in

231

0 D

eliv

eryB

eg

in

231

0 D

eliv

eryB

eg

in

231

0 D

eliv

eryB

eg

in

231

0 D

eliv

eryB

eg

in

231

0 D

eliv

eryB

eg

in

231

0 D

eliv

eryB

eg

in

231

0 D

eliv

eryB

eg

in

Figure 47: Sequence of operatins for cylinder-specific delivery begin correction

The parameters for delivery begin correction are located at the following positions:

4311 DBCorrCylinderOn activation of correction of delivery begin


17500 DelBegPerCorr:n speed base points for correction of delivery pe-riod and delivery begin

17505 DelBegPerCorr:f injection quantity base points for correction of delivery period and delivery begin

17510 DelBegCorr1:DB correction values for delivery begin of cylinder 1


: :


The resulting delivery begin values can be read from the measurement numbers:

3980 DeliveryBegin1 resulting delivery begin for cylinder 1 [in °BTDC].

: :


Note

The delivery begin values of the individual cylinders should not differ too much from each other, as this might cause irregularities of speed.

Speed [rpm]

Inje

ction

qua

ntity

(Loa

d)

1

2

34

1 Correction value at minimum

speed and off-load

2 Correction value at maximum

speed and off-load

3 Correction value at minimum

speed and full-load

4 Correction value at maximum

speed and full-load

Figure 48: Cylinder-specific delivery begin correction PPN/PNU


Injection to cylinder 5 is to begin earlier by 2° crank at maximum speed 2000 rpm and off-load.



For the other cylinders delivery begin is to remain uncorrected:


17500 DelBegPerCorr:n(0) 800 rpm 17501 DelBegPerCorr:n(1) 2000 rpm 17505 DelBegPerCorr:f(0) 0 mm3/str 17506 DelBegPerCorr:f(1) 500 mm3/str 17510 DelBegCorr1:DB(0) 0 °crank …

17525 DelBegCorr4:DB(3) 0 °crank 17526 DelBegCorr5:DB(0) 0 °crank point 1 17527 DelBegCorr5:DB(1) 2.0 °crank point 2 17528 DelBegCorr5:DB(2) 0 °crank point 3 17529 DelBegCorr5:DB(3) 0 °crank point 4 17530 DelBegCorr6:DB(0) 0 °crank …

17541 DelBegCorr8:DB(3) 0 °crank

Activation:

4311 DBCorrCylinderOn 1

18.2 Delivery period

The delivery period required for fuel metering is determined from an injection pump map with respect to the desired quantity as calculated by the control. The pump map represents the relation between the required injection quantity and the delivery period at a certain speed and for a certain delivery begin.

Speed [rpm]

Injec

tion

quan

tity

(Loa

d)

Injection period[°crankshaft]

Figure 49: Delivery period map

To take account of these dependencies, there exists for each of four different delivery be-gin values one speed and quantity dependent map of 10 x 10 base points. Between these




maps, there will be linear interpolation with respect to delivery begin thus yielding in alto-gether a four-dimensional map with 400 base points. The output quantity of the map repre-sents the final delivery period by °crank (i.e., crankshaft angle).

An overview of the procedure for determining delivery time is provided in Figure 50.

2300 DeliveryPeriod

Delivery Period: Map

X

Z

Y

W: 17010X: 17020Y: 17030Z: 17100

1

0

4300 DeliveryPeriodMapOn

Delivery Period: Alternative characteristic

X

Y X: 17000Y: 17005

2000 Speed

2350 FuelQuantity

2310 DeliveryBegin

2350 FuelQuantity

Figure 50: Sequence of operations for delivery period determination

The delivery period map is provided by the manufacturer of the injectors. It is there that each single point can be precisely run up to on a pump test stand and that the respective de-livery period can be measured. For this purpose, the base points will first be defined (i.e., four instances of delivery begin and ten speed and quantity values for each) which must correspond to the engine's operating range. The first speed point should be within the range of cranking speed, the last slightly above maximum speed. The lowest point for injection quantity must be 0 mm3/str, since maps cannot be extrapolated beyond their limits but will retain the boundary values so it is not be possible to provide injection quantities smaller than that of the lowest quantity base point. Then all 400 points of the map will be run up to and injection quantity registered by degrees crankshaft. The brochure Ordering Informa-

tion for Electronically Controlled Injection Systems ( 2.2 Further information) provides a form for specification of the pump map.

The magnetic valve's instant of impact is interpreted as injection begin ( 17.3 BIP detection and measurement of fly time). However, since BIP is no more than clue to but no accurate definition for injection begin, it may occur that, particularly with small injection amounts, a certain amount has already been injected at that moment. Therefore, negative delivery periods are used for smaller quantities. Though injection takes place under these circumstances, energizing of the valve will terminate before the occurrence of BIP, which means that the valve must not be completely opened to obtain the required in-jection quantity.

Should current injection quantity 2350 FuelQuantity as set by the control unit be 0 mm3/str (e.g., due to load shedding or speed jumps) injection will be completely de-activated, i.e., the valves will not be energized.

Note



Due to the difference of the properties of the pump testing stand and the engine, the injec-tion quantities calculated by the control may differ from those measured by an independent system. If it is required that the correct values are indicated by the control, it will be neces-sary to correct the map on the engine test stand. For determination of the correction it is

recommended to utilize the 18.2.1 Default characteristic for delivery period and to dis-able all of the limiting functions. After that, each single map point must be selected and, with injection begin and speed adjusted to one of the map's base points, load is to be varied until the injection quantity measured by the independent system corresponds to that of the base point. The delivery period indicated by the control is then to be entered in the respec-tive map point. This procedure must be conducted for all of the map points. For map points that cannot be run up to by the engine (e.g., below idle speed) reasonably extrapolated val-ues should be entered.

The parameters relating to delivery period are stored under these numbers:

318 DeliveryPeriodAbsMin absolute minimum delivery period

319 DeliveryPeriodAbsMax absolute maximum delivery period

2300 DeliveryPeriod current delivery period in °crank

2301 DeliveryTime current delivery time by ms

4300 DeliveryPeriodMapOn activation of delivery period map

17010 DelPeriod:DB delivery begin base points for delivery period map

17020 DelPeriod:n speed base points for delivery period map

17030 DelPeriod:f quantity base points for delivery period map

17100 DelPeriod[0]:DP delivery period values for delivery begin 1





For a specific injection system the relationship between speed and delivery period as well as the relationship between injection quantity and delivery period is supposed to be linear, hence two map base points will suffice for either relationship. Delivery duration is ranging between 6° crank and 22° crank over the entire working range. Dependence of delivery period on delivery begin is strongly non-linear so all of the four base will have to be used to minimize possible errors.


Figure 51: Delivery period map

Delivery begin 1


Delivery begin 4

1 Delivery period at minimum 5 Delivery period at minimum speed and off-load speed and off-load

2 Delivery period at maximum 6 Delivery period at maximum speed and off-load speed and off-load

3 Delivery period at minimum 7 Delivery period at minimum speed and full-load speed and full-load

4 Delivery period at maximum 8 Delivery period at maximum speed and full-load speed and full-load


17010 DelPeriod:DB(0) 6 °crank 17011 DelPeriod:DB(1) 12 °crank 17012 DelPeriod:DB(2) 18 °crank 17013 DelPeriod:DB(3) 22 °crank 17020 DelPeriod:n(0) 800 rpm 17021 DelPeriod:n(1) 2000 rpm 17022 DelPeriod:n(2) 0 rpm : : 0 rpm 17024 DelPeriod:n(4) 0 rpm 17030 DelPeriod:f(0) 0 mm3/str 17031 DelPeriod:f(1) 500 mm3/str 17032 DelPeriod:f(2) 0 mm3/str : : 0 mm3/str 17034 DelPeriod:f(4) 0 mm3/str 17100 DelPeriod[0]:DP(0) 2 °crank point 1 17101 DelPeriod[0]:DP(1) 1 °crank point 2 : : 0 °crank 17110 DelPeriod[0]:DP(10) 20 °crank point 3



17111 DelPeriod[0]:DP(11) 30 °crank point 4 : : 0 °crank 17200 DelPeriod[1]:DP(0) 3.5 °crank 17201 DelPeriod[1]:DP(1) 3 °crank : : 0 °crank 17210 DelPeriod[1]:DP(10) 23 °crank 17211 DelPeriod[1]:DP(11) 32 °crank : : 0 °crank 17300 DelPeriod[2]:DP(0) 4 °crank 17301 DelPeriod[2]:DP(1) 3 °crank : : 0 °crank 17310 DelPeriod[2]:DP(10) 25 °crank 17311 DelPeriod[2]:DP(11) 34 °crank : : 0 °crank 17400 DelPeriod[3]:DP(0) 5 °crank point 5 17401 DelPeriod[3]:DP(1) 4 °crank point 6 : : 0 °crank 17410 DelPeriod[3]:DP(10) 28 °crank point 7 17411 DelPeriod[3]:DP(11) 36 °crank point 8

Activation:

4300 DeliveryPeriodMapOn 1

18.2.1 Default characteristic for delivery period

In case no details are known about the characteristic of the injection system, operation will be possible using a default characteristic for the injection period. In this case, the relationship between the required quantity and the injection period is assumed to be lin-ear, and injection begin and speed are not taken into account. The default characteristic will prove especially helpful when the injection map is to be determined on the engine test stand.

Quantity setpoint [mm3/stroke]

Injection period[°crank]

Default characteristic

Figure 52: Default characteristic for delivery period

The parameters for the default characteristic are stored under these numbers:


4300 DeliveryPeriodMapOn = 1 activation of injection map

4300 DeliveryPeriodMapOn = 0 default characteristic active, if map de-activated

17000 DelPeriodAlt:f quantity values of default characteristic

17005 DelPeriodAlt:DP delivery period values of default characteristic.

The default characteristic will be used whenever the injection map is de-activated. Since negative injection periods must be expected to occur, the injection period for 0 mm3/str must be negative. HEINZMANN therefore recommend to define the default characteristic for the entire value range (0 mm3/str corresponds to 20° crank and 500 mm3/str to 50° crank).

Since the default characteristic represents a compensating straight line across the deliv-ery period map, the required quantity as calculated by the control in this mode of opera-tion will differ from the actual injection quantity due to the inherent error of the default characteristic. This deviation will be of minor relevance with regard to the engine's con-trollability. As to the limiting functions, however, this deviation will be of considerable importance since all limitations are bound to affect the calculated value.

18.2.2 Correction of delivery period for single cylinders

To compensate for tolerances of the injection system, there exists the possibility of cor-recting the delivery period for each individual cylinder by a specific map in a way simi-

lar to the one used for


18.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders. The map consists of two base points for speed and two for injection quantity. These base points are effective both for correction of delivery begin and for correction of delivery period. Note that these base points are the same for all cylinders, i.e., they cannot be se-lected separately for each cylinders. The four correction values of the map, however, may be set for each single cylinder independently of the others.

The correction value allows to shift effective delivery period by ±5° degrees crankshaft. This correction value is added to the basic delivery begin as provided by 2300 Deliv-eryPeriod.

Note

Note

When activating the correction function it should be kept in mind that cor-rection will take effect for all cylinders. Therefore, all map parameters must have been defined and set to reasonable values.



396

0 D

eliv

eryP

erio

d1

++ + + + + + +

396

1 D

eliv

eryP

erio

d2

396

2 D

eliv

eryP

erio

d3

396

3 D

eliv

eryP

erio

d4

396

4 D

eliv

eryP

erio

d5

396

5 D

eliv

eryP

erio

d6

396

6 D

eliv

eryP

erio

d7

396

7 D

eliv

eryP

erio

d8

DP

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 1

DP

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 3

DP

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 5

X

Z

Y

X: 1

7500

Y: 1

7505

Z: 1

760

6

DP

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 7

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

200

0 S

pee

d

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

X

Z

Y

X: 1

7500

Y: 1

7505

Z: 1

759

8

X

Z

Y

X: 1

7500

Y: 1

7505

Z: 1

759

0

X

Z

Y

X: 1

7500

Y: 1

7505

Z: 1

761

4

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

de

rOn

DP

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 2

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

X

Z

Y

X: 1

7500

Y: 1

7505

Z: 1

759

4

DP

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 4

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

X

Z

Y

X: 1

7500

Y: 1

7505

Z: 1

760

2

DP

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 6

X

Z

Y

X: 1

7500

Y: 1

7505

Z: 1

761

0

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

200

0 S

pee

d

DP

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 8

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

X

Z

Y

X: 1

7500

Y: 1

7505

Z: 1

761

8

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

de

rOn

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

de

rOn

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

de

rOn

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

de

rOn

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

de

rOn

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

de

rOn

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

de

rOn

230

0 D

eliv

ery

Per

iod

230

0 D

eliv

ery

Per

iod

230

0 D

eliv

ery

Per

iod

230

0 D

eliv

ery

Per

iod

230

0 D

eliv

ery

Per

iod

230

0 D

eliv

ery

Pe

rio

d

230

0 D

eliv

ery

Per

iod

230

0 D

eliv

ery

Per

iod

Figure 53: Sequence of operations for cylinder-specific delivery begin correction

The parameters for delivery period correction are stored under these numbers:

4301 DeliveryPeriodCorrOn activation of delivery period correction for in-dividual cylinders

17500 DelBegPerCorr:n speed base points for correction of delivery pe-riod and delivery begin

17505 DelBegPerCorr:f injection quantity base points for correction of delivery period and delivery begin

17590 DelPerCorr1:DB correction value for delivery period cylinder 1


: :



The resulting delivery period values can be read from the measurement numbers:

3960 DeliveryPeriod1 resulting delivery period cylinder 1 [in °crank].

: :


There must not be too great a difference between the delivery period values of the individual cylinders as this might cause irregularities of speed.

Note


19 Injection control of common rail systems


The HEINZMANN DARDANOS system offers the option of splitting magnet actuation into pre-injection, main injection and post-injection. On request, the DARDANOS system is also available with additional pre- and post-injection, so that a total of five injections are possible for each cylinder. Pre-injection and post-injection, however, will make sense only if there is still sufficient injection pressure available at the moment of injection. This applies particu-larly to common rail systems. Pre-injection and post-injection may be executed in continua-tion with or in separation from main injection.

Delivery begin of main injection may be varied via a map in dependence of speed and load. Determination of delivery period for main injection, however, requires a pump map which will have to be provided by the manufacturer of the injection system.

Besides, the system provides the possibility of correcting delivery begin and delivery period separately for each individual cylinder.

The PC program 3.3 DcDesk 2000 offers many utilities to simplify map parame-terizing. Among other things, all injections may be visualized graphically with the values for each delivery begin and duration. This window allows to parameterize pre- and post-injections easily.

Note

19.1 Delivery begin

To optimize engine performance, delivery begin may be varied. For this purpose, a map with a domain of 15 x 15 base points (supporting points) is provided, along with a second one with a domain of 5 x 5 base points reserved for engine start. They allow to adapt deliv-ery begin to the current working point in dependence of speed and load. The current map is selected with switch function 2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1. This switch function allows to change over together all delivery begin maps, including the ones for pre-pre-, pre-, post- and post-post-injection. Depending on the specific requirements, it will thus be possible to achieve an optimal engine performance with regard to fuel consumption or emissions.

An overview for delivery begin determination is provided in Figure 54.

The delivery begin map is activated by the parameter 4310 DeliveryBeginMapOn. When the map is not active, injection operates independent of speed and load, with a constant de-livery begin as defined by the parameter 310 DeliveryBeginSetp. This function is primarily intended for facilitating adjustment of the delivery begin map on the engine test bench. This is done by running the engine up to a specific load and speed point and by subse-quently varying delivery begin until optimum performance is attained. This procedure must be repeated for all base points. Any base points that cannot be run up to by the spe-cific engine must be set to reasonable extrapolated values.




DB

: M

ap

fo

r e

ng

ine

sta

rt

DB

: M

ap

2

DB

: M

ap

1

X

Z

Y

X:

160

00

Y:

160

15

Z:

16

03

0

200

0 S

pe

ed

235

0 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

200

0 S

pe

ed

235

0 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

235

0 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

200

0 S

pe

ed

X

Z

Y

X:

162

55

Y:

162

70

Z:

16

28

5

X

Z

Y

X:

165

10

Y:

165

15

Z:

16

52

0

2311

Del

Be

gB

aseM

ap1 0

284

8 S

wit

ch

De

lMap

s2O

r1

1 0

&3

805

En

gin

eRu

nn

ing

431

5 B

ase

Ma

pF

orS

tart

On

+

231

2 D

elB

egO

ffse

t

1 0

431

0 D

eliv

ery

Beg

inM

apO

n

310

Del

ive

ryB

eg

inS

etp

231

0 D

eliv

ery

Beg

in

Figure 54: Sequence of operations for determining delivery begin


The current delivery begin derived from the maps 2311 DelBegBaseMap may be adapted

to ambient conditions by means of 19.1.2 Correction of delivery begin 2312 DelBegOff-set.

The resulting delivery begin is indicated by parameter 2310 DeliveryBegin. This value will equal either the current value as deduced from the map or the value as set for constant de-livery begin in 310 DeliveryBeginSetp. It is valid for all cylinders and represents the initial

value for 19.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders.

Delivery begin is specified by degrees crankshaft before TDC (unit: °BTDC) and can be set within a range from –20° to +50° with –20° signifying 20° crank after TDC and +50° signifying 50° before TDC.


The parameters relating to delivery begin have the following numbers:

310 DeliveryBeginSetp delivery begin with map de-activated

2310 DeliveryBegin current delivery begin

2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1 common selection of delivery begin maps

4310 DeliveryBeginMapOn general activation of delivery begin maps







1 Delivery begin at minimum speed and off-load

2 Delivery begin at maximum speed and off-load

3 Delivery begin at minimum speed and full-load

4 Delivery begin at maximum speed and full-load

Figure 55: Delivery begin map

Speed [rpm]

Inje

ctio

n qu

antit

y (L

oad)

Note

3

1

2



Delivery begin is to be parameterized as variable in dependence of speed and load using two speed base points and two quantity base points each:



16000 DelBegin1:n(0) 800 rpm 16001 DelBegin1:n(1) 2000 rpm 16002 DelBegin1:n(2) 0 : : : :

16014 DelBegin1:n(14) 0 rpm 16015 DelBegin1:f(0) 0 mm3/str 16016 DelBegin1:f(1) 1000 mm3/str 16017 DelBegin1:f(2) 0 mm3/str : : : :

16029 DelBegin1:f(14) 0 mm3/str 16030 DelBeginMap1:DB(0) 10 °BTDC point 1 16031 DelBeginMap1:DB(1) 15 °BTDC point 2 16045 DelBeginMap1:DB(15) 12 °BTDC point 3 16046 DelBeginMap1:DB(16) 20 °BTDC point 4

Activation:

4310 DeliveryBeginMapOn 1

19.1.1 Delivery begin map for engine start

For engine start a separate delivery begin map may be used to optimize start-up. The de-livery begin map described above in this case will be used only for ordinary engine op-eration.

The engine start delivery begin map is used only if the delivery begin maps have been generally activated with parameter 4310 DeliveryBeginMapOn.

Note

The parameters for the engine start delivery begin map are:

4315 DBBaseMapForStartOn Activation of delivery begin map for engine start

16510 DBStart:n(x) Speed base points of engine start delivery be-gin map

16515 DBStart:f(x) Quantity base points of engine start delivery begin map

16520 DBStartMap:DB(x) Delivery begin values of engine start delivery begin map

The engine start delivery begin map will be operative as long as parameter 3805 En-gineRunning = 0, i.e. as long as the engine is in its starting-up phase.


19.1.2 Correction of delivery begin

Delivery begin can be corrected in function of ambient conditions. According to the cir-cumstances, the delivery begin may be corrected through coolant temperature, charge air temperature, fuel temperature or ambient pressure.

The correction procedure always follows an identical scheme. As a first step, a maxi-mum correction value is determined in dependence of current speed and delivery quan-tity from a map. This value represents the maximum possible correction at a specific point of operation. On the basis of a characteristic for the respective influencing vari-able (coolant temperature, charge air temperature, fuel temperature or ambient pressure) a percentage is calculated, which, together with the maximum correction value, deter-mines the actual correction value. This percentage value is signed, allowing either an anticipation or a delay of delivery begin.

From all current corrections the one is determined which allows the greatest correction (2313 DelBegOffUnLimited). This value is limited with the absolute maximum admissi-

ble correction 2314 DelBegOffsetMax ( 19.1.2.1 Absolute maximum values for deliv-ery begin correction) and used as delivery begin correction 2312 DelBegOffset.

The diagram in Figure 56 shows an overview of the sequence of operations for deliv-ery begin correction.

The speed and fuel base points of the maps for the determination of the maximum cor-rection values are identical for all corrections. But the maximum value can be indicated separately for each correction.

The following parameters apply to delivery begin correction in general:

2312 DelBegOffset current correction value for delivery begin

2313 DelBegOffUnLimited unlimited correction value for delivery begin


16550 DBCorr:n speed base points for maximum value map

16558 DBCorr:f fuel base points for maximum value map

19.1.2.1 Absolute maximum values for delivery begin correction


16566 DBCorrMax:DB absolute maximum values of correction



x 3 x 4

u 1x 2x 1

ma

x

x 3 x 4

u 2x 2x 1

min

X

1 0

=

-1

2319

Del

Be

gO

ffA

mb

Pre

ss

2318

De

lBe

gO

ffF

ue

lTe

mp

2317

Del

Beg

Off

Ch

arg

eAir

T

2316

Del

Be

gO

ffC

oo

lan

tTem

p

2313

Del

Be

gO

ffU

nL

imit

ed


DB

: M

axi

mu

m v

alu

es f

or

coo

lan

t te

mp

. de

pe

nd

ent

corr

ecti

on

DB

: C

oo

lan

t te

mp

era

ture

dep

end

ent

co

rre

ctio

n

X

YX

: 168

86

Y: 1

689

4

DB

: M

axi

mu

m v

alu

es f

or

cha

rge

air

te

mp

. de

pe

nd

ent

corr

ecti

on

DB

: M

axi

mu

m v

alu

es f

or

fue

l te

mp

. d

ep

end

en

t co

rre

ctio

n

X

Z

Y

X:

165

50Y

: 16

558

Z: 1

675

8

DB

: F

uel

tem

pe

ratu

re d

epe

nd

ent

co

rre

ctio

n

X

YX

: 169

18

Y: 1

692

6

DB

: M

axi

mu

m v

alu

es f

or

amb

ien

t p

res

sure

dep

en

de

nt

corr

ecti

on

DB

: A

mb

ien

t p

ress

ure

de

pen

de

nt

co

rre

ctio

n

X

YX

: 169

34

Y: 1

695

2

200

0 S

pe

ed

235

0 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

290

7 C

oo

lan

tTem

p

200

0 S

pe

ed

235

0 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

235

0 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

200

0 S

pe

ed

290

8 C

har

ge

Air

Tem

p

200

0 S

pe

ed

235

0 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

291

0 F

uel

Tem

p

290

6 A

mb

ien

tPre

ssu

re

X

Z

Y

X:

165

50Y

: 16

558

Z: 1

669

4

X

Z

Y

X:

165

50Y

: 16

558

Z: 1

663

0

X

Z

Y

X:

165

50Y

: 16

558

Z: 1

682

2

X0

1 0

431

7 D

BC

orr

Ch

arg

eA

irT

em

pO

n

X0

1 0

4319

DB

Co

rrA

mb

Pre

ssO

n

X0

1 0

4316

DB

Co

rrC

oo

lan

tTe

mp

On

X0

1 0

DB

: A

bs

olu

te m

axim

um

val

ues

fo

r co

rrec

tio

n

X

Z

Y

X:

165

50

Y:

165

58

Z: 1

656

6

2000

Sp

eed

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

231

2 D

elB

egO

ffse

t

231

4 D

elB

egO

ffse

tMax

x 1x 2

x 2x 10

/1

X

u 1

x 2x 1m

ax

-1

u 2

x 2x 1m

in

Lim

itatio

n

Offs

et w

ith h

igh

est

abso

lute

val

ue

4318

DB

Co

rrF

uel

Tem

pO

n

DB

: C

har

ge

air

tem

per

atu

re

de

pen

de

nt

corr

ect

ion

X

YX

: 169

02

Y: 1

691

0

Figure 56: Sequence of operations for determining delivery begin


19.1.2.2 Delivery begin correction by means of coolant temperature

2316 DelBegOffCoolantTemp current correction value

4316 DBCorrCoolantTempOn activation of this correction

16630 DBCorrCoolTmp:DB maximum values for this correction

16886 DBCorrCoolant:T coolant temperature base points for correction factor characteristic

16894 DBCorrCoolant:x correction factors of correction factor charac-teristic

19.1.2.3 Delivery begin correction by means of charge air temperature

2317 DelBegOffChargeAirT current correction value

4317 DBCorrChargeAirTmpOn activation of this correction

16694 DBCorrCharTmp:DB maximum values for this correction

16902 DBCorrChargeAir:T charge air base point for correction factor char-acteristic

16910 DBCorrChargeAir:x correction factors of correction factor charac-teristic

19.1.2.4 Delivery begin correction by means of fuel temperature

2318 DelBegOffFuelTemp current correction value

4318 DBCorrFuelTempOn activation of this correction

16758 DBCorrFuelTmp:DB maximum values for this correction

16918 DBCorrFuelTemp:T fuel temperature base points for correction fac-tor characteristic

16926 DBCorrFuelTemp:x correction factors of correction factor charac-teristic

19.1.2.5 Delivery begin correction by means of ambient pressure

2319 DelBegOffAmbPress current correction value

4319 DBCorrAmbPressOn activation of this correction

16822 DBCorrAmbPress:DB maximum values for this correction

16934 DBCorrAmbPress:p ambient pressure base points for correction factor characteristic

16942 DBCorrAmbPress:x correction factors of correction factor charac-teristic



19.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders

To compensate for tolerances of the injection system, there exists the possibility of cor-recting delivery begin for each single cylinder with a specific map. The map consists of two base points for rail pressure and two for injection quantity. These base points are ef-

fective both for correction of delivery begin and 19.2.2 Correction of delivery period

for single cylinders, as well as for the correction of single cylinders relating to 19.3

Pre-injection, 19.4 Pre-pre-injection, 19.5 Post-injection and 19.6 Post-post-injection. Furthermore, these base points are the same for all cylinders, i.e., they cannot be selected separately for each cylinder. The four correction values of the map, how-ever, may be set for each single cylinder independently of the others.

Since with common rail systems speed does not affect delivery begin the correction is specified by injection time. The correction value allows to shift the actual delivery be-gin by +/–1 ms injection time. The correction value is converted to degrees crankshaft and added to the basic delivery begin as given by 2310 DeliveryBegin.

Note

When activating the cylinder-specific correction function it should be kept in mind that this correction affects all cylinders. Before activation therefore, all map values must be set to defined values that make sense.

The parameters for delivery begin correction are located at the following positions:

4311 DBCorrCylinderOn activation of correction of delivery begin

17500 DelBegTimeCorr:p rail pressure base points for correction of de-livery period and delivery begin

17505 DelBegTimeCorr:f injection quantity base points for correction of delivery period and delivery begin



: :


The resulting delivery begin values can be read from the measurement numbers:


: :




The delivery begin values of the individual cylinders should not differ too much from each other, as this might cause irregularities of speed.

Note

These correction maps also apply to 19.3 Pre-injection, 19.4 Pre-pre-injection,

19.5 Post-injection and 19.6 Post-post-injection, if the respective injection type and single cylinder correction have been enabled. As injection quantity for the correction maps the current injection quantity of the respective injection is used.


398

0 D

eliv

eryB

egin

1

++ + + + + +

398

1 D

eliv

eryB

egin

2

398

2 D

eliv

eryB

egin

3

398

3 D

eliv

eryB

egin

4

398

4 D

eliv

eryB

egin

5

398

5 D

eliv

eryB

egin

6

398

6 D

eliv

eryB

egin

7

398

7 D

eliv

eryB

egin

8+

231

0 D

eliv

ery

Be

gin

231

0 D

eliv

ery

Be

gin

231

0 D

eliv

ery

Be

gin

231

0 D

eliv

ery

Be

gin

231

0 D

eliv

ery

Be

gin

231

0 D

eliv

ery

Be

gin

231

0 D

eliv

ery

Beg

in

231

0 D

eliv

ery

Be

gin

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 1

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 3

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 5

X

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

752

6

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 7

221

00 R

ailP

ress

ure

236

5 F

ue

lQu

an

tity

Ma

inIn

j

221

00 R

ailP

ress

ure

236

5 F

ue

lQu

an

tity

Ma

inIn

j

236

5 F

ue

lQu

an

tity

Ma

inIn

j

221

00 R

ailP

ress

ure

221

00 R

ailP

ress

ure

236

5 F

ue

lQu

an

tity

Ma

inIn

j

X

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

751

8

X

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

751

0

X

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

753

4

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 2

221

00 R

ailP

ress

ure

236

5 F

ue

lQu

an

tity

Ma

inIn

jX

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

751

4

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 4

221

00 R

ailP

ress

ure

236

5 F

ue

lQu

an

tity

Ma

inIn

jX

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

752

2

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 6

X

Z

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

753

0

236

5 F

ue

lQu

an

tity

Ma

inIn

j

221

00 R

ailP

ress

ure

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4311

DB

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

DB

: C

orr

ecti

on

Cy

l. 8

221

00 R

ailP

ress

ure

236

5 F

ue

lQu

an

tity

Ma

inIn

jX

Y

X: 1

750

0Y

: 17

505

Z: 1

753

8

Z

Figure 57: Sequence of operations for cylinder-specific delivery begin correction



1 Correction value at minimum rail pressure and off-load

2 Correction value at maximum rail pressure and off-load

193

3 Correction value at minimum rail pressure and full-load

4 Correction value at maximum rail pressure and full-load

Figure 58: Cylinder-specific delivery begin correction CR

Parameterizing example:

Injection to cylinder 5 is to begin .2 ms later at maximum pressure of 1400 bar and full-load.

For the other cylinders delivery begin is to remain uncorrected:


17500 DelBegTimeCorr:p(0) 600 bar 17501 DelBegTimeCorr:p(1) 1400 bar 17505 DelBegTimeCorr:f(0) 0 mm3/str 17506 DelBegTimeCorr:f(1) 500 mm3/str 17510 DelBegCorr1:DB(0) 0 ms …

17525 DelBegCorr4:DB(3) 0 ms 17526 DelBegCorr5:DB(0) 0 ms point 1 17527 DelBegCorr5:DB(1) 0 ms point 2 17528 DelBegCorr5:DB(2) 0 ms point 3 17529 DelBegCorr5:DB(3) -0.2 ms point 4 17530 DelBegCorr6:DB(0) 0 ms …

17541 DelBegCorr8:DB(3) 0 ms

Activation:

4311 DBCorrCylinderOn 1


19.2 Delivery period

The delivery period required for fuel metering is determined from an injection pump map with respect to the desired quantity as calculated by the control. Injection quantity of main injection 2365 FuelQuantityMainInj is determined by the injection quantity 2350 Fu-elQuantity of speed governor minus the injection quantities of the currently active pre- and post-injection(s) 22301 PrePreFuelQuantity, 22321 PreInjFuelQuantity, 22341 PostIn-jFuelQuantity and 22361 PostPostFuelQuantity. An overview of the determination of de-

livery time for main injection is provided in Figure 59.

2301

Del

ive

ryT

ime


2365

Fu

elQ

uan

tity

Mai

nIn

j

De

live

ry P

eri

od

: M

ap

X

Z

Y

X:

170

20Y

: 17

030

Z:

170

50

1 0

430

0 D

eliv

eryT

imeM

ap

On

De

live

ry P

eri

od

: A

lter

nat

ive

c

ha

rac

teri

sti

c

X

YX

: 17

000

Y:

170

05

+

223

21 P

reIn

jFu

elQ

uan

tity

235

0 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

223

01 P

reP

reF

ue

lQu

an

tity

223

41 P

ost

InjF

ue

lQu

anti

ty

223

61 P

ost

Po

stF

ue

lQu

anti

ty

2210

0 R

ailP

res

sure

X X-1-1+ +

Figure 59: Diagram showing delivery time determination for main injection



The pump map represents the relation between the required injection quantity and the de-livery period for a certain injection pressure. Speed and delivery begin have no effect with CR systems.

To take account of these dependencies, there exists a rail pressure and quantity dependent map with a domain of 10 x 10 base points. The output quantity of the map represents the final delivery period 2301 DeliveryTime by milliseconds. This delivery period is addition-ally converted to degrees crankshaft and can be viewed in the parameter 2300 DeliveryPe-riod.

As absolute limits for injection time for main injection serve the two parameters 318 DelTimeMainInjAbsMin and 319 DelTimeMainInjAbsMax.

If the engine is equipped with two completely independent rails with separate pressure sen-

sors (see also 20.1 Configuration of rail and rail pressure sensors), injection time and duration for each rail will be calculated separately and indicated in parameters 2300 Deliv-eryPeriodA / 2302 DeliveryPeriodB and 2301 DeliveryTimeA / 2303 DeliveryTimeB.

Figure 60: Delivery time map for common rail

The delivery period map is provided by the manufacturer of the injectors. It is there that each single point can be precisely run up to on a pump test stand and that the respective in-jection time can be measured. For this purpose, the base points are defined first (i.e., ten rail pressure values and ten quantity values) which must correspond to the engine's operat-ing range. The lowest point for injection quantity must be 0 mm3/str because maps cannot be extrapolated beyond their limits but will retain the boundary values so it is not be possi-ble to provide injection quantities smaller than that of the lowest quantity base point. Then all points of the map will be run up to and injection time registered by milliseconds. The

brochure Ordering Information for Electronically Controlled Injection Systems ( 2.2 Further information) provides a form for specification of the pump map.


The magnetic valve's instant of impact is interpreted as injection begin ( 17.3 BIP detection and measurement of fly time). However, since BIP is no more than clue to but no accurate definition for injection begin, it may occur that, particularly with small injection amounts, a certain amount has already been injected at that moment. Therefore, negative delivery periods are used for smaller quantities. Though injection takes place under these circumstances, energizing of the valve will terminate before the occurrence of BIP, which means that the valve must not be completely opened to obtain the required in-jection quantity.

Note

Should current injection quantity 2350 FuelQuantity as set by the control unit be 0 mm3/str (e.g., due to load shedding or speed jumps) injection will be completely de-activated, i.e., the valves will not be energized.

Due to the difference of the properties of the pump testing stand and the engine, the injec-tion quantities calculated by the control may differ from those measured by an independent system. If it is required that the correct values are indicated by the control, it will be neces-sary to correct the map on the engine test stand. For determination of the correction it is

recommended to utilize the 19.2.1 Default characteristic for delivery period and to dis-able all of the limiting functions. After that, each single map point must be selected and, with rail pressure adjusted to one of the map's base points, load must be varied until the in-jection quantity measured by the independent system corresponds to that of the base point. The delivery period indicated in milliseconds by the control is then to be entered in the re-spective map point. This procedure must be conducted for all of the map points. For map points that cannot be run up by the engine reasonably extrapolated values should be en-tered.

The parameters relating to delivery period are stored under these numbers:

318 DelTimeMainInjAbsMin absolute minimum addressing time

319 DelTimeMainInjAbsMax absolute maximum addressing time

2300 DeliveryPeriod current delivery period in °crank

2301 DeliveryTime current delivery time by ms

4300 DeliveryTimeMapOn activation of delivery period map

17020 DelTime:p rail pressure base points for delivery period map

17030 DelTime:f quantity base points for delivery period map

17050 DelTime:DT delivery period values


For a given injection system the relation between rail pressure and delivery period as well as the relation between injection quantity and delivery period is supposed to be linear, hence two map base points will suffice for either relation.





17020 DelTime:p(0) 800 bar 17021 DelTime:p(1) 1400 bar 17022 DelTime:p(2) 0 bar : : : :

17029 DelTime:p(9) 0 bar 17030 DelTime:f(0) 0 mm3/str 17031 DelTime:f(1) 500 mm3/str 17032 DelTime:f(2) 0 mm3/str : : : :

17039 DelTime:f(9) 0 mm3/str 17050 DelTime:t(0) 0.5 ms point 1 17051 DelTime:t(1) 0.3 ms point 2 : : 0 ms 17060 DelTime:t(10) 6.0 ms point 3 17061 DelTime:t(11) 4.5 ms point 4 : : 0 ms 17149 DelTime:t(99) 0 ms

Activation:

4300 DeliveryTimeMapOn 1

Besides the main injection, the delivery time map is also used for all other injection types,

i.e. for 19.3 Pre-injection, 19.4 Pre-pre-injection, 19.5 Post-injection and 19.6 Post-post-injection. The respective injection quantity of each injection type represents the input for the map.

19.2.1 Default characteristic for delivery period

In case no details are known about the characteristic of the injection system, operation will be possible using a default characteristic for the injection period. In this case, the relationship between the required quantity and the injection period is assumed to be lin-ear, and no account is taken of rail pressure. The default characteristic will prove espe-cially helpful when the injection map is to be determined on the engine test stand.

Quantity setpoint [mm3/stroke]

Injection period[°crank]

Default characteristic

Figure 61: Default characteristic for the delivery period


The parameters for the default characteristic are stored under these numbers:

4300 DelTimeMapOn = 1 activation of injection map

4300 DelTimeMapOn = 0 default characteristic active, for map is de-activated

17000 DelTimeAlt:f quantity values of default characteristic

17005 DelTimeAlt:DT delivery period values of default characteristic.

The default characteristic will be used whenever the injection map is de-activated. Since negative injection periods must be expected to occur, the injection period for 0 mm3/str must be negative. Therefore HEINZMANN recommends to use the whole value range for the default characteristic.

Note

Since the default characteristic represents a compensating straight line across the deliv-ery period map, the required quantity as calculated by the control in this mode of opera-tion will differ from the actual injection quantity due to the inherent error of the default characteristic. This deviation will be of minor relevance with regard to the engine's con-trollability. As to the limiting functions, however, this deviation will be of considerable importance since all limitations are bound to affect the calculated value.

19.2.2 Correction of delivery period for single cylinders

To compensate for tolerances of the injection system, there exists the possibility of cor-recting the delivery period for each individual cylinder by a specific map in a way simi-

lar to the one used for 19.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders. The map consists of two base points for rail pressure and two for injection quantity. These base points are effective for delivery begin, delivery period correction and cylinder-

specific correction of 19.3 Pre-injection, 19.4 Pre-pre-injection, 19.5 Post-

injection and 19.6 Post-post-injection. Furthermore, these base points are the same for all cylinders, i.e., they cannot be selected separately for each cylinder. The four correc-tion values of the map, however, may be set for each single cylinder independently of the others.

The correction value allows to shift effective delivery period by ±1 ms injection time. This correction value is added to the basic delivery period as provided by 2301 Delive-ryTime.

When activating the cylinder-specific correction function it should be kept in mind that this correction affects all cylinders. Before activating it there-fore, all map values must be set to defined values that make sense. Note

The parameters for delivery period correction are stored under these numbers:



4301 DPCorrCylinderOn activation of delivery period correction for in-dividual cylinders

17500 DelBegTimeCorr:p rail pressure base points for correction of de-livery period and delivery begin

17505 DelBegTimeCorr:f injection quantity base points for correction of delivery period and delivery begin



: :


3960

Del

ive

ryP

erio

d1

++ + + + + + +

3961

Del

ive

ryP

erio

d2

DP

: C

orr

ec

tio

n C

yl.

1

DP

: C

orr

ec

tio

n C

yl.

3

DP

: C

orr

ec

tio

n C

yl.

5

X

Z

Y

X:

175

00Y

: 17

505

Z:

176

06

DP

: C

orr

ec

tio

n C

yl.

7

2210

0 R

ailP

ress

2365

Fu

elQ

uan

ti

2210

0 R

ailP

ress

2365

Fu

elQ

uan

ti

2365

Fu

elQ

uan

ti

2210

0 R

ailP

ress

2210

0 R

ailP

ress

2365

Fu

elQ

uan

tiure tyM

ain

Inj

ure tyM

ain

Inj

tyM

ain

Inj

ure

ure tyM

ain

Inj

X

Z

Y

X:

175

00Y

: 17

505

Z:

175

98

X

Z

Y

X:

175

00Y

: 17

505

Z:

175

90

X

Z

Y

X:

175

00Y

: 17

505

Z:

176

14

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

DP

: C

orr

ec

tio

n C

yl.

222

100

Ra

ilPre

ss

2365

Fu

elQ

uan

tiure tyM

ain

Inj

X

Z

Y

X:

175

00Y

: 17

505

Z:

175

94

DP

: C

orr

ec

tio

n C

yl.

422

100

Ra

ilPre

ss

2365

Fu

elQ

uan

tiure tyM

ain

Inj

X

Z

Y

X:

175

00Y

: 17

505

Z:

176

02

DP

: C

orr

ec

tio

n C

yl.

6

X

Z

Y

X:

175

00Y

: 17

505

Z:

176

10

2365

Fu

elQ

uan

ti

2210

0 R

ailP

ress

tyM

ain

Inj

ure

DP

: C

orr

ec

tio

n C

yl.

822

100

Ra

ilPre

ss

2365

Fu

elQ

uan

tiure tyM

ain

Inj

X

Z

Y

X:

175

00Y

: 17

505

Z:

176

18

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

0

1 0

4301

DP

Co

rrC

ylin

der

On

230

1 D

eliv

ery

Tim

e

230

1 D

eliv

ery

Tim

e

230

1 D

eliv

ery

Tim

e

230

1 D

eliv

ery

Tim

e

230

1 D

eliv

ery

Tim

e

2301

Del

iver

yTim

e

230

1 D

eliv

ery

Tim

e

230

1 D

eliv

ery

Tim

e

2000

Sp

eed

2000

Sp

eed

2000

Sp

eed

2000

Sp

eed

200

0 S

pee

d

2000

Sp

eed

2000

Sp

eed

2000

Sp

eed

3962

Del

ive

ryP

erio

d3

39

63 D

eliv

ery

Per

iod

4

396

4 D

eliv

ery

Per

iod

5

39

65 D

eliv

ery

Per

iod

6

396

6 D

eli

ver

yP

eri

od

7

396

7 D

eli

ver

yP

eri

od

8

Figure 62: Correction of delivery period for single cylinders



The resulting delivery period values can be read from the measurement numbers:


: :


Note

The difference between the delivery period values of the individual cylinders should not differ too much, as this might cause irregularities of speed.

These correction maps also apply to 19.3 Pre-injection, 19.4 Pre-pre-injection,

19.5 Post-injection and 19.6 Post-post-injection, if the respective injection type and single cylinder correction have been enabled. As injection quantity for the correction maps the current injection quantity of the respective injection is used.

19.3 Pre-injection

In addition to the main injection, the HEINZMANN system DARDANOS offers the op-tion of activating pre-injection. Pre-injection, however, will make sense only when there is still sufficient injection pressure available at the moment of injection. This applies particu-larly to common rail systems.

The main benefit of pre-injection consists in reduction of combustion noise, particularly on low load levels. Pre-injection can, furthermore, help to reduce the NOx emission rate but will also increase smoke emission. Smoke emission, however, can be reduced by post-injection.

Pre-injection can directly merge with main injection or be separated from it. Using merg-ing pre-injection will allow of shaping the injection pattern to a certain extent, as the injec-tor needle is being lifted only partially by pre-injection but completely only by the subse-quent main injection.

Nee

dle

lift

Time

Figure 63: Schematic needle lift pattern with merging pre-injection



In contrast to merging pre-injection there is also separate pre-injection with the injector needle closing before main injection sets in. The control unit will energize the magnetic valves in such a way as to automatically produce merging or separate pre-injection.

Nee

dle

lift

Time

Figure 64: Schematic needle lift pattern with separate pre-injection

The parameters for pre-injection are stored under these numbers:

20321 PreInjBeginSetp delivery begin for operation without map

20324 PreInjTimeSetpPC direct setting of delivery time for testing purposes

20325 PreInjFuelSetp delivery quantity for operation without map

20326 PreInjSpeedMin minimum speed for enabling injection

20327 PreInjFuelMin minimum fuel quantity for enabling injection

20328 PreInjDelTimeAbsMin absolute minimum addressing time

20329 PreInjDelTimeAbsMax absolute maximum addressing time

22320 PreInjectionActive indication of pre-injection state (active/inactive)

22321 PreInjFuelQuantity current pre-injection quantity

22322 PreInjDeliveryBegin current pre-injection period in °BTDC

22323 PreInjDeliveryTime current pre-injection period by ms

22325 PreInjDelPeriod current duration of pre-injection in °crank

22327 PreInjDBBaseMap pre-injection begin from map

22328 PreInjDBToMainInj distance of pre-injection to main injection

22329 PreInjDBOffsetCoolT correction offset from coolant temperature depend-ent delivery begin correction

22330 PreInjFuelQBaseMap injection quantity from map

22331 PreInjFuelQCoolTCorr correction offset from coolant temperature depend-ent delivery quantity correction

22440 DelPerPreInj1 indication of current injection period for cylinder 1

: : :



22447 DelPerPreInj8 indication of current injection period for cylinder 8

22460 DelBegPreInj1 indication of current injection begin for cylinder 1

: : :

22467 DelBegPreInj8 indication of current injection begin for cylinder 8

24320 PreInjectionOn activation of pre-injection

24321 PreInjBeginMapOn activation of delivery begin maps

24322 PreInjDBCorrCylOn activation of correction of delivery begin for specific cylinders

24323 PreInjDBOffsetCoolTOn activation of coolant temperature dependent correc-tion of delivery begin

24324 PreInjDTSetpPCOn activation of direct setting of addressing time

24325 PreInjDQMapOn activation of delivery quantity maps

24326 PreInjDQCorrCylOn activation of delivery begin correction for specific cylinders

24327 PreInjDQCorrCoolTOn activation of coolant temperature dependent delivery begin correction

26600 PreInjection:n speed base points of pre-injection maps

26610 PreInjection:f quantity base points of pre-injection maps

26620 PreInjDBMap1:DB delivery begin values for map 1

26720 PreInjDQMap1:DB delivery quantity values for map 1

26820 PreInjDBMap2:DB delivery begin values for map 2

26920 PreInjDQMap2:DB delivery quantity values for map 2

27020 PreInjCorrCoolT:n speed base points of coolant temperature dependent delivery begin and delivery quantity correction

27030 PreInjCorrCoolT:f quantity base points of coolant temperature depend-ent delivery begin and delivery quantity correction

27040 PreInjCTMap:DB maximum values of delivery begin correction

27105 PreInjCTMap:DQ maximum values of delivery quantity correction

27170 PreInjCorrCoolT:T temperature base points of coolant temperature de-pendent delivery begin and delivery quantity correc-tion

27180 PreInjDBCorrCT:x factors of coolant temperature dependent delivery begin correction



27190 PreInjDQCorrCT:x factors of coolant temperature dependent delivery quantity correction

Pre-injection is comprehensively activated by means of the parameter 24320 PreInjectio-nOn. In addition, current speed must be higher than 20326 PreInjSpeedMin and current de-livery quantity higher than 20327 PreInjFuelMin, otherwise pre-injection will be auto-matically disabled. Whether or not pre-injection is active can be seen from the parameter 22320 PreInjectionActive.

Similarly to main injection, the fly time of the magnetic valve will precede injection begin of pre-injection. For energizing the magnetic valves, the same values will be used as for

main injection ( 17.2 Actuation of control magnets).


TDC

Delivery begin

Flying time

Pre-injection begin

Delivery period

Pre-injection period

Figure 65: Definition of pre-injection begin and pre-injection period

The control circuit is capable of triggering main injection 100 µs after termination of pre-injection. The magnet, however, has fly times that are considerably longer than these acti-vation times, which must be taken account of when adjusting the settings. If long activa-tion times are chosen for pre-injection such that pre-injection would terminate after the be-ginning of main injection, pre-injection will be aborted and the interval between the end of pre-injection and the beginning of main injection set to 100 µs.

Note

The minimum admissible distance between two injections must be derived from the injectors’ data sheets.


19.3.1 Delivery begin values of pre-injection

For adjusting pre-injection begin, two speed and quantity dependent maps with a do-main of 10 x 10 base points each have been provided. The base points are the same for both maps and identical to those for pre-injection quantity. The input variables for the maps are current speed 2000 Speed and total fuel quantity 2350 FuelQuantity.

The delivery begin map must be activated with parameter 24321 PreInjBeginMapOn, otherwise the fixed pre-set of 20321 PreInjBeginSetp will be used.

The current map is selected with switch function 2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1. This switch function relates to both delivery begin map and delivery quantity map. Depend-ing on the specific requirements, it will thus be possible to achieve optimum engine per-formance with regard to fuel consumption or emissions. Current delivery begin of pre-injection is indicated in parameter 22327 PreInjDBBaseMap.

If required, delivery begin of pre-injection may also be corrected by means of coolant temperature. This type of correction is activated by means of parameter 24323 Pre-InjDBCorrCoolTOn.

Based on current speed and fuel quantity, the maximum correction value is determined by means of a map. This value represents the maximum possible correction at a specific point of operation. From a coolant temperature characteristic a percentage quota is de-rived, which is used to determine the current correction value 22329 PreInjDBOffset-CoolT from the maximal possible correction value.

The pre-injection value resulting from 22327 PreInjDBBaseMap and the correction value 22329 PreInjDBOffsetCoolT is indicated in parameter 22328 PreInjDBToMain-Inj.

Delivery begin of pre-injection 22328 PreInjDBToMainInj is specified in degrees crankshaft (°crank) before delivery begin of main injection. This allows to modify the delivery begin map of main injection without having to adjust delivery begin of pre-injection. The parameter 22322 PreInjDeliveryBegin indicates the absolute delivery be-gin of pre-injection in reference to the particular cylinder's top dead centre (°BTDC).




Pre

Inje

ctio

n:

DB

-M

ap 2

Pre

Inje

ctio

n:

DB

-M

ap 1 X

Z

Y

X: 2

660

0Y

: 26

610

Z: 2

662

0

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

200

0 S

pee

d

X

Z

Y

X: 2

660

0Y

: 26

610

Z: 2

682

0

1 01 0

284

8 S

wit

ch

De

lMap

s2O

r124

321

Pre

InjB

egin

Map

On

2032

1 P

reIn

jBeg

inS

etp

Pre

Inj:

DB

-m

ax. v

alu

es f

or

coo

lan

t te

mp

. d

epen

den

t co

rrec

tio

n

Pre

Inj:

DB

-co

ola

nt

tem

per

atu

re

dep

end

ent

co

rre

ctio

n

X

YX

: 27

170

Y: 2

718

0

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

290

7 C

oo

lan

tTe

mp

X

Z

Y

X: 2

702

0Y

: 27

030

Z: 2

704

02

2329

Pre

InjD

BO

ffs

etC

oo

lTX

0

1 0

243

23 P

reIn

jDB

Co

rrC

oo

lTO

n

2232

7 P

reIn

jDB

Ba

seM

ap

2232

8 P

reIn

jDB

To

Mai

nIn

j1 0

0

2232

2 P

reIn

jDel

iver

yB

egin

2232

0 P

reIn

jec

tio

nA

cti

ve

+

2310

Del

ive

ryB

eg

in

&>

x 1x 2

x 2x 10/

1

>x 1

x 2

x 2x 10/

1

2000

Sp

eed

2032

6 P

reIn

jSp

eed

Min

2350

Fu

elQ

uan

tity

2032

7 P

reIn

jFu

elM

in

2432

0 P

reIn

jec

tio

nO

n

3806

En

gin

eIn

jec

tRe

lea

sed

+

Figure 66: Sequence of operations for pre-injection delivery begin determination


For pre-injection too, delivery begin correction for specific cylinders may be activated with parameter 24322 PreInjDBCorrCylOn. This correction uses the same maps as the

main injection ( 19.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders), the injection quantity for pre-injection 22321 PreInjFuelQuantity will, however, enter into the maps.

Current delivery begin of pre-injection is indicated for each single cylinder in the pa-rameter starting from 22460 DelBegPreInj1.

19.3.2 Delivery time of pre-injection

To determine pre-injection delivery quantity, two speed and quantity dependent maps with a domain of 10 x 10 base points have been provided. The base points are the same for both maps and identical to those for pre-injection begin. The input variables for the maps are current speed 2000 Speed and total fuel quantity 2350 FuelQuantity.

The delivery quantity map must be activated with parameter 24325 PreInjDQMapOn, otherwise the fixed pre-set of 20325 PreInjFuelSetp will be used.

If pre-injection is not desirable for certain speed and/or load ranges the respective point of the injection quantity map will have to be set to 0 mm3/str. This will cause the control unit to automatically de-activate pre-injection for this range. Whether or not pre-injection is active can be seen from the parameter 22320 PreInjectionActive.

The current map is selected with switch function 2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1. This switch function relates to both delivery begin map and delivery quantity map. Depend-ing on the specific requirements, it will thus be possible to achieve optimum engine per-formance with regard to fuel consumption or emissions. Current delivery begin of pre-injection is indicated in parameter 22330 PreInjFuelQBaseMap.

If required, delivery quantity of pre-injection may also be corrected by means of coolant temperature. This type of correction is activated by means of parameter 24327 PreIn-jDQCorrCoolTOn.

On the basis of current speed and injection quantity the maximum value of the correc-tion is determined with a map. This value represents the maximum possible correction at a specific point of operation. From a coolant temperature characteristic a percentual quota is derived, which is used to determine the current correction value 22331 PreIn-jFuelQCTCorr from the maximal possible correction value.

The resulting value of pre-injection derived from 22330 PreInjFuelQBaseMap and the correction offset 22331 PreInjFuelQCTCorr is indicated in parameter 22321 PreInjFu-elQuantity.

The delivery period of pre-injection is calculated with this setpoint on the basis of the

delivery period map ( 19.2 Delivery period) and indicated in parameters 22323 PreIn-jDeliveryTime and 22325 PreInjDelPeriod respectively.



For testing purposes, injection time for pre-injection may also be set directly with pa-rameter 20324 PreInjTimeSetpPC. This function must be activated with parameter 24324 PreInjDTSetpPCOn.

The two parameters 20328 PreInjDelTimeAbsMin and 20329 PreInjDelTimeAbsMax serve as absolute limits of injection time for pre-injection.

For pre-injection too, delivery period correction for specific cylinders may be activated with parameter 24326 PreInjDQCorrCylOn. This correction uses the same maps as the

main injection ( 19.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders), the injection quantity for pre-injection 22321 PreInjFuelQuantity will, however, enter into the maps.

Current delivery period of pre-injection is indicated for each single cylinder in the pa-rameters starting from 22440 DelPerPreInj1.

19.4 Pre-pre-injection

In addition to pre-injection, the HEINZMANN system DARDANOS offers the option of activating a second pre-injection, the so-called pre-pre-injection. In order of time, pre-pre-injection occurs before pre-injection. It is implemented only on request.

The parameters for pre-pre-injection are stored at the following numbers:

20301 PrePreInjBeginSetp delivery begin for operation without map

20304 PrePreInjTimeSetpPC direct setting of delivery time for testing purposes

20305 PrePreInjFuelSetp delivery quantity for operation without map

20306 PrePreInjSpeedMin minimum speed for enabling injection

20307 PrePreInjFuelMin minimum quantity for enabling injection

20308 PrePreDelTimeAbsMin absolute minimum addressing time

20309 PrePreDelTimeAbsMax absolute maximum addressing time

22300 PrePreInjectActive indication of status of pre-pre-injection (ac-tive/inactive)

22301 PrePreFuelQuantity current pre-pre-injection fuel quantity

22302 PrePreDeliveryBegin current pre-pre-injection delivery begin in °BTDC

22303 PrePreDeliveryTime current pre-pre-injection period in ms

22305 PrePreDelPeriod current pre-pre-injection period in °crank

22307 PrePreDBBaseMap pre-pre-injection begin from map

22308 PrePreDBToMainInj distance of pre-pre-injection to main injection

22309 PrePreDBOffsetCoolT correction offset from coolant temperature depend-ent correction of delivery begin

22310 PrePreFuelQBaseMap injection quantity from map



22311 PrePreFuelQCoolTCorr correction offset from coolant temperature depend-ent delivery quantity correction

22400 DelPerPrePreInj1 indication of current injection period for cylinder 1

: : :

22407 DelPerPrePreInj8 indication of current injection period for cylinder 8

22420 DelBegPrePreInj1 indication of current injection begin for cylinder 1

: : :

22427 DelBegPrePreInj8 indication of current injection begin for cylinder 8

24300 PrePreInjectionOn Activation of pre-pre-injection

24301 PrePreBeginMapOn activation of delivery begin maps

24302 PrePreDBCorrCylOn activation of correction of delivery begin for specific cylinders

24303 PrePreDBOffsetCoolT activation of coolant temperature dependent correc-tion of delivery begin

24304 PrePreDTSetpPCOn activation of direct setting of addressing time

24305 PrePreDQMapOn activation of delivery quantity maps

24306 PrePreDQCorrCylOn activation of delivery begin correction for specific cylinders

24307 PrePreDQCorrCoolTOn activation of coolant temperature dependent delivery begin correction

26000 PrePreInjection:n speed base points of pre-pre-injection maps

26010 PrePreInjection:f quantity base points of pre-pre-injection maps

26020 PrePreDBMap1:DB delivery begin values for map 1

26120 PrePreDQMap1:DB delivery quantity values for map 1

26220 PrePreDBMap2:DB delivery begin values for map 2

26320 PrePreDQMap2:DB delivery quantity values for map 2

27020 PrePreCorrCoolT:n speed base points of coolant temperature dependent delivery begin and delivery quantity correction

26430 PrePreCorrCoolT:f quantity base points of coolant temperature depend-ent delivery begin and delivery quantity correction

26440 PrePreCTMap:DB maximum values of delivery begin correction

26505 PrePreCTMap:DQ maximum values of delivery quantity correction




26570 PrePreCorrCoolT:T temperature base points of coolant temperature de-pendent delivery begin and delivery quantity correc-tion

26580 PrePreDBCorrCT:x factors of coolant temperature dependent delivery begin correction

26590 PrePreDQCorrCT:x factors of coolant temperature dependent delivery quantity correction

Pre-pre-injection is comprehensively activated by means of parameter 24300 PrePreInjec-tionOn. In addition, current speed must be higher than 20306 PrePreInjSpeedMin and cur-rent delivery quantity higher than 20307 PrePreInjFuelMin, otherwise pre-pre-injection will be automatically disabled. Whether pre-pre-injection is active or not can be seen in pa-rameter 22300 PrePreInjectActive.

Similarly to main injection, the flying time of the magnetic valve will precede injection begin of pre-pre-injection. For energizing the magnetic valves, the same values will be

used as for main injection ( 17.2 Actuation of control magnets).

Figure 67: Definition of pre-pre-injection begin and duration

The control circuit is capable of triggering pre-injection 100 µs after termination of pre-pre-injection. The magnet, however, has fly times that are considerably longer than these activation times, which must be taken account of when adjusting the settings. If long acti-vation times are chosen for pre-pre-injection such that pre-pre-injection would terminate after the beginning of pre-injection, pre-pre-injection will be aborted and the interval be-tween the end of pre-pre-injection and the beginning of pre-injection set to 100 µs.


Note


19.4.1 Delivery begin values of pre-pre-injection

For adjusting pre-pre-injection begin, two speed and quantity dependent maps with a domain of 10 x 10 base points each have been provided. The base points are the same for both maps and identical to those for pre-pre-injection quantity. The input variables for the maps are current speed 2000 Speed and total fuel quantity 2350 FuelQuantity.

The delivery begin map must be activated with parameter 24301 PrePreBeginMapOn, otherwise the fixed pre-set of 20301 PrePreInjBeginSetp will be used.

The current map is selected with switch function 2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1. This switch function relates to both delivery begin map and delivery quantity map. Depend-ing on the specific requirements, it will thus be possible to achieve optimum engine per-formance with regard to fuel consumption or emissions. Current delivery begin of pre-pre-injection is indicated in parameter 22307 PrePreDBBaseMap.

If required, delivery begin of pre-pre-injection may also be corrected by means of cool-ant temperature. This type of correction is activated by means of parameter 24303 PrePreDBCorrCoolTOn.

Based on current speed and fuel quantity, the maximum correction value is determined by means of a map. This value represents the maximum possible correction at a specific point of operation. From a coolant temperature characteristic, a percentual quota is de-rived, which is used to determine the current correction value 22309 PrePreDBOffset-CoolT from the maximal possible correction value.

The value of pre-pre-injection resulting from 22307 PrePreDBBaseMap and the correc-tion offset 22309 PrePreDBOffsetCoolT is indicated in parameter 22308 PrePreDBTo-MainInj.

Delivery begin of pre-pre-injection 22308 PrePreDBToMainInj is specified in degrees crankshaft (°crank) before delivery begin of main injection. This allows to modify the delivery begin map of main injection without having to adjust delivery begin of pre-pre-injection. The parameter 22302 PrePreDeliveryBegin indicates the absolute delivery begin of pre-pre-injection in reference to the particular cylinder's top dead center (°BTDC).

For pre-pre-injection too, delivery begin correction for specific cylinders may be acti-vated with a parameter, the parameter 24302 PrePreDBCorrCylOn. This correction

uses the same maps as the main injection ( 19.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for sin-gle cylinders), the injection quantity for pre-pre-injection 22301 PrePreFuelQuantity will, however, enter into the maps.

Current delivery begin of pre-pre-injection is indicated for each single cylinder in the parameter starting from 22420 DelBegPrePreInj1.




Pre

Pre

In

jec

tio

n:

DB

-M

ap 2

Pre

Pre

In

jec

tio

n:

DB

-M

ap 1

X

Z

Y

X: 2

600

0Y

: 26

010

Z: 2

602

0

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

200

0 S

pee

d

X

Z

Y

X: 2

600

0Y

: 26

010

Z: 2

622

0

1 01 0

284

8 S

wit

ch

De

lMap

s2O

r124

301

Pre

Pre

Beg

inM

ap

On

2030

1 P

reP

reIn

jBe

gin

Se

tp

Pre

Pre

Inj:

DB

-m

ax. v

alu

es

for

co

ola

nt

tem

p.

dep

end

en

t c

orr

ect

ion

Pre

Pre

Inj:

DB

-co

ola

nt

tem

p.

de

pe

nd

en

t co

rre

ctio

n

X

YX

: 26

570

Y: 2

658

0

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

290

7 C

oo

lan

tTe

mp

X

Z

Y

X: 2

642

0Y

: 26

430

Z: 2

644

02

2309

Pre

Pre

DB

Off

setC

oo

lTX

0

1 0

243

03 P

reP

reD

BC

orr

Co

olT

On

2230

7 P

reP

reD

BB

aseM

ap

2230

8 P

reP

reD

BT

oM

ain

Inj

1 0

0

2230

2 P

reP

reD

eliv

ery

Be

gin

&>

x 1x 2

x 2x 10/

1

>x 1

x 2

x 2x 10/

1

2000

Sp

eed

2030

6 P

reP

reIn

jSp

eed

Min

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

2030

7 P

reP

reIn

jFu

elM

in

2230

0 P

reP

reIn

ject

Act

ive

2430

0 P

reP

reIn

jec

tio

nO

n

3806

En

gin

eIn

jec

tRe

lea

sed

++

2310

Del

ive

ryB

eg

in

Figure 68: Sequence of operations for pre-pre-injection delivery begin determination


19.4.2 Delivery time of pre-pre-injection

To determine pre-pre-injection delivery quantity, two speed and quantity dependent maps with a domain of 10 x 10 base points each have been provided. The base points are the same for both maps and identical to those for pre-pre-injection begin. The input variables for the maps are current speed 2000 Speed and total fuel quantity 2350 Fu-elQuantity.

The delivery quantity map must be activated with parameter 24305 PrePreDQMapOn, otherwise the fixed pre-set of 20305 PrePreInjFuelSetp will be used.

If pre-pre-injection is not desired for certain speed and/or load ranges, the respective point of the injection quantity map will have to be set to 0 mm3/str. This will cause the control unit to automatically de-activate pre-pre-injection for this range. Whether pre-pre-injection is active or not can be seen in parameter 22300 PrePreInjectActive.

The current map is selected with switch function 2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1. This switch function relates to both delivery begin map and delivery quantity map. Depend-ing on the specific requirements, it will thus be possible to achieve optimum engine per-formance with regard to fuel consumption or emissions. Current delivery begin of pre-pre-injection is indicated in parameter 22310 PrePreFuelQBaseMap.

If required, delivery quantity of pre-pre-injection may also be corrected by means of coolant temperature. This type of correction is activated by means of parameter 24307 PrePreDQCorrCoolTOn.

On the basis of current speed and injection quantity the maximum value of the correc-tion is determined with a map. This value represents the maximum possible correction at a specific point of operation. From a coolant temperature characteristic, a percentual quota is derived, which is used to determine the current correction value 22311 PrePre-FuelQCTCorr from the maximal possible correction value.

The resulting value of pre-pre-injection derived from 22310 PrePreFuelQBaseMap and the correction offset 22311 PrePreFuelQCTCorr is indicated in parameter 22301 Pre-PreFuelQuantity.

The delivery period of pre-pre-injection is calculated with this setpoint on the basis of

the delivery period map ( 19.2 Delivery period) and indicated in parameters 22303 PrePreDeliveryTime and 22305 PrePreDelPeriod respectively.

For testing purposes, pre-pre-injection time may be set directly with the parameter 20304 PrePreInjTimeSetpPC. This function must be activated with parameter 24304 PrePreDTSetpPCOn.

The two parameters 20308 PrePreDelTimeAbsMin and 20309 PrePreDelTimeAbsMax serve as absolute limits of injection time for pre-pre-injection.




Pre

Pre

Inje

ctio

n:

FQ

-M

ap

2

Pre

Pre

Inje

ctio

n:

FQ

-M

ap

1

X

Z

Y

X: 2

600

0Y

: 26

010

Z: 2

612

0

2000

Sp

eed

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

2000

Sp

eed

X

Z

Y

X: 2

600

0Y

: 26

010

Z: 2

632

0

1 01 0

2848

Sw

itc

hD

elM

aps

2Or1

243

05 P

reP

reD

QM

ap

On

2030

5 P

reP

reIn

jFu

elS

etp

Pre

Pre

In

j: F

Q -

max

. val

ues

fo

r c

oo

lan

t te

mp

. dep

end

ent

co

rre

ctio

n

Pre

Pre

In

j: F

Q -

coo

lan

t te

mp

erat

ure

d

epe

nd

ent

corr

ecti

on

X

YX

: 26

570

Y:

2659

0

2000

Sp

eed

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

2907

Co

ola

ntT

em

p

X

Z

Y

X: 2

642

0Y

: 26

430

Z: 2

650

522

311

Pre

Pre

Fu

elQ

Co

olT

Co

rrX

0

1 0

243

07 P

reP

reD

QC

orr

Co

olT

On

223

10 P

reP

reF

uel

QB

ase

Ma

p22

301

Pre

Pre

Fu

elQ

uan

tity

Del

iver

y P

eri

od

: M

ap

X

Z

Y

X: 1

7020

Y: 1

7030

Z: 1

7050

1 0

430

0 D

eliv

ery

Tim

eMa

pO

n

2210

0 R

ailP

res

sure

A/

Del

iver

y P

erio

d:

Alt

ern

ati

ve

char

acte

rist

ic

X

YX

: 170

00Y

: 170

05

1 0

203

04 P

reP

reIn

jTim

eS

etP

C

u 1

x 2x 1m

ax

u2

x 2x 1m

in

203

08 P

reP

reD

elT

ime

Ab

sMin

2030

9 P

reP

reD

elT

ime

Ab

sM

ax

243

04 P

reP

reD

TS

etp

PC

On

1 0

0

223

03 P

reP

reD

eliv

ery

Tim

e

&>

x 1x 2

x 2x 10/

1

>x 1

x 2

x 2x 10/

1

200

0 S

pee

d

203

06 P

reP

reIn

jSp

eed

Min

235

0 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

203

07 P

reP

reIn

jFu

elM

in

2230

0 P

reP

reIn

jec

tAct

ive

243

00 P

reP

reIn

ject

ion

On

380

6 E

ng

ineI

nje

ctR

elea

sed

+

223

01 P

reP

reF

uel

Qu

anti

ty

2210

1 R

ailP

res

sure

B

Figure 69: Sequence of operations for determining pre-pre-injection delivery begin and duration



For pre-pre-injection too, delivery period correction for specific cylinders may be acti-vated with parameter 24306 PrePreDQCorrCylOn. This correction uses the same maps

as the main injection ( 19.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders), the in-jection quantity for pre-pre-injection 22301 PrePreFuelQuantity will, however, enter into the maps.

Current delivery period of pre-pre-injection is indicated for each single cylinder in the parameters starting from 22420 DelPerPrePreInj1.

19.5 Post-injection

In addition to pre-injection and main injection, the HEINZMANN DARDANOS system offers the option to activate post-injection. Post-injection, however, will make sense only when there is still sufficient injection pressure available at the moment of injection. This will especially be true of common rail systems, but also with cam-driven systems, provided they are suitably accommodated.

The main benefit of post-injection consists in drastically reducing smoke emission without increasing fuel consumption.

Similarly to 19.3 Pre-injection, post-injection can directly merge with main injection or be separated from it, and the control unit will again energize the magnetic valves in such a manner as to automatically produce either merging or separate post-injection in accordance with the pre-defined distance between main injection and post-injection.

The parameters for post-injection are stored by the following numbers:

20341 PostInjBeginSetp delivery begin for operation without map

20344 PostInjTimeSetpPC direct setting of delivery time for testing purposes

20345 PostInjFuelSetp delivery quantity for operation without map

20346 PostInjSpeedMin minimum speed for enabling injection

20347 PostInjFuelMin minimum quantity for enabling injection

20348 PostInjDelTimeAbsMin absolute minimum addressing time

20349 PostInjDelTimeAbsMax absolute maximum addressing time

22340 PostInjectionActive indication of status of post-injection (active/inactive)

22341 PostInjFuelQuantity current post-injection quantity

22342 PostInjDeliveryBegin current post-injection begin in °BTDC

22343 PostInjDeliveryTime current post-injection period in ms

22345 PostInjDelPeriod current post-injection period in °crank

22347 PostInjDBBaseMap post-injection begin from map

22348 PostInjDBToMainInj distance of post-injection from main injection



22349 PostInjDBOffsetCoolT correction offset from coolant temperature depend-ent correction of delivery begin

22350 PostInjFuelQBaseMap injection quantity from map

22351 PostInjFuelQCoolTCorr correction offset from coolant temperature depend-ent delivery quantity correction

22480 DelPerPostInj1 indication of current injection period for cylinder 1

: : :

22487 DelPerPostInj8 indication of current injection period for cylinder 8

22500 DelBegPostInj1 indication of current injection begin for cylinder 1

: : :

22507 DelBegPostInj8 indication of current injection begin for cylinder 8

24340 PostInjectionOn activation of post-injection

24341 PostInjBeginMapOn activation of delivery begin maps

24342 PostInjDBCorrCylOn activation of correction of delivery begin for specific cylinders

24343 PostInjDBOffsetCoolTOn activation of coolant temperature dependent correc-tion of delivery begin

24344 PostInjDTSetpPCOn activation of direct setting of addressing time

24345 PostInjDQMapOn activation of delivery quantity maps

24346 PostInjDQCorrCylOn activation of delivery begin correction for specific cylinders

24347 PostInjDQCorrCoolTOn activation of coolant temperature dependent delivery begin correction

27200 PostInjection:n speed base points of post-injection maps

27210 PostInjection:f quantity base points of post-injection maps

27220 PostInjDBMap1:DB delivery begin values for map 1

27320 PostInjDQMap1:DB delivery quantity values for map 1

27420 PostInjDBMap2:DB delivery begin values for map 2

27520 PostInjDQMap2:DB delivery quantity values for map 2

27620 PostInjCorrCoolT:n speed base points of coolant temperature dependent delivery begin and delivery quantity correction

27630 PostInjCorrCoolT:f quantity base points of coolant temperature depend-ent delivery begin and delivery quantity correction

27640 PostInjCTMap:DB maximum values of delivery begin correction


27705 PostInjCTMap:DQ maximum values of delivery quantity correction

27770 PostInjCorrCoolT:T temperature base points of coolant temperature de-pendent delivery begin and delivery quantity correc-tion

27780 PostInjDBCorrCT:x factors of coolant temperature dependent delivery begin correction

27790 PostInjDQCorrCT:x factors of coolant temperature dependent delivery quantity correction

Post-injection is activated by means of the parameter 24340 PostInjectionOn. In addition, current speed must be higher than 20346 PostInjSpeedMin and current delivery quantity higher than 20347 PostInjFuelMin, otherwise post-injection will automatically be disabled. Whether or not post-injection is active can be seen from the parameter 22340 PostInjectAc-tive.

Similarly to main injection, the fly time of the magnetic valve will precede injection begin of post-injection. For energizing the magnetic valves, the same values will be used as for

main injection ( 17.2 Actuation of control magnets).

Figure 70: Definition of post-injection begin and duration

The control circuit is capable of triggering post-injection 100 µs after termination of main injection. The magnet, however, has fly times that are considerably longer than these acti-vation times, which must be taken account of when adjusting the settings. If long activa-tion times are chosen for main injection such that main injection would end after the be-ginning of post-injection, post-injection will be aborted and the interval between the end of main injection and the beginning of post-injection set to 100 µs.


Note




19.5.1 Delivery begin of post-injection

For adjusting post-injection begin, two speed and quantity dependent maps with a do-main of 10 x 10 base points each have been provided. The base points are the same for both maps and identical to those for post-injection quantity. The input variables for the maps are current speed 2000 Speed and total fuel quantity 2350 FuelQuantity.

The delivery begin map must be activated with parameter 24341 PostInjBeginMapOn, otherwise the fixed pre-set of 20341 PostInjBeginSetp will be used.

The current map is selected with switch function 2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1. This switch function relates to both delivery begin map and delivery quantity map. Depend-ing on the specific requirements, it will thus be possible to achieve optimum engine per-formance with regard to fuel consumption or emissions. Actual delivery begin of post-injection is indicated by parameter 22347 PostInjDBBaseMap.

If required, delivery begin of post-injection may also be corrected by means of coolant temperature. This type of correction is activated by means of parameter 24343 PostInjDBCorrCoolTOn.

Based on current speed and fuel quantity, the maximum correction value is determined by means of a map. This value represents the maximum possible correction at a specific point of operation. From a coolant temperature characteristic a percentual quota is de-rived, which is used to determine the current correction value 22349 PostInjDBOffset-CoolT from the maximal possible correction value.

Actual delivery begin of post-injection resulting from 22347 PostInjDBBaseMap and the correction offset 22349 PostInjDBOffsetCoolT is indicated by parameter 22347 PostInjDBBaseMap.

Delivery begin of post-injection 22348 PostInjDBToMainInj is specified in degrees crankshaft (°crank) after begin of main injection. This allows to modify the delivery be-gin map of main injection without having to adjust delivery begin of post-injection. The parameter 22342 PostInjDeliveryBegin indicates the absolute delivery begin of post-injection in reference to the particular cylinder's top dead centre (°BTDC).

For post-injection too, delivery begin correction for specific cylinders may be activated with parameter 24342 PostInjDBCorrCylOn. This correction uses the same maps as the

main injection ( 19.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders), the injection quantity for post-injection 22341 PostInjFuelQuantity will, however, enter into the maps.

Current delivery begin of post-injection is indicated for each single cylinder in the pa-rameters starting from 22500 DelBegPostInj1.


Po

st

Inje

ctio

n:

DB

-M

ap

2

Po

st

Inje

ctio

n:

DB

-M

ap

1

X

Z

Y

X: 2

720

0Y

: 27

210

Z: 2

722

0

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

200

0 S

pee

d

X

Z

Y

X: 2

720

0Y

: 27

210

Z: 2

742

0

1 01 0

284

8 S

wit

ch

De

lMap

s2O

r124

341

Po

stIn

jBeg

inM

ap

On

2034

1 P

os

tIn

jBeg

inS

etp

Po

st

Inj:

DB

-m

ax.

va

lues

fo

r c

oo

lan

t te

mp

. d

epen

de

nt

co

rre

ctio

n

Po

st

Inj:

DB

-c

oo

lan

t te

mp

era

ture

d

ep

en

de

nt

corr

ect

ion

X

YX

: 27

770

Y: 2

778

0

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

290

7 C

oo

lan

tTe

mp

X

Z

Y

X: 2

762

0Y

: 27

630

Z: 2

764

02

2349

Po

stI

njD

BO

ffse

tCo

olT

X0

1 0

243

43 P

os

tIn

jDB

Co

rrC

oo

lTO

n

2234

7 P

ost

InjD

BB

aseM

ap22

348

Po

stIn

jDB

To

Mai

nIn

j1 0

0

2234

2 P

ost

InjD

eliv

ery

Be

gin

&>

x 1x 2

x 2x 10/

1

>x 1

x 2

x 2x 10/

1

2000

Sp

eed

2034

6 P

ost

InjS

pe

edM

in

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

2034

7 P

ost

InjF

uel

Min

2234

0 P

ost

Inje

ctA

cti

ve

2434

0 P

ost

Inje

cti

on

On

3806

En

gin

eIn

jec

tRe

lea

sed

+

+

2310

Del

ive

ryB

eg

in

X-1

Figure 71: Sequence of operations for determining post-injection delivery begin




19.5.2 Delivery duration of post-injection

To determine post-injection delivery quantity, two speed and quantity dependent maps with a domain of 10 x 10 base points each have been provided. The base points are the same for both maps and identical to those for post-injection begin. The input variables for the maps are current speed 2000 Speed and total fuel quantity 2350 FuelQuantity.

The delivery quantity map must be activated with parameter 24345 PostInjDQMapOn, otherwise the fixed pre-set of 20345 PostInjFuelSetp will be used.

If post-injection is not desirable for certain speed and/or load ranges the respective point of the injection quantity map will have to be set to 0 mm3/str. This will cause the control unit to automatically de-activate post-injection for this range. Whether or not post-injection is active can be seen from the parameter 22340 PostInjectionActive.

The current map is selected with switch function 2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1. This switch function relates to both delivery begin map and delivery quantity map. Depend-ing on the specific requirements, it will thus be possible to achieve optimum engine per-formance with regard to fuel consumption or emissions. Actual delivery begin of post-injection is indicated by parameter 22350 PostInjFuelQBaseMap.

If required, delivery quantity of post-injection may also be corrected by means of cool-ant temperature. This type of correction is activated by means of parameter 24347 PostInjDQCorrCoolTOn.

On the basis of current speed and injection quantity the maximum value of the correc-tion is determined with a map. This value represents the maximum possible correction at a specific point of operation. From a coolant temperature characteristic a percentual quota is derived, which is used to determine the current correction value 22351 PostIn-jFuelQCTCorr from the maximal possible correction value.

The resulting value of post-injection derived from 22350 PostInjFuelQBaseMap and the correction offset 22351 PostInjFuelQCTCorr is indicated by parameter 22341 PostIn-jFuelQuantity.

The delivery period of post-injection is calculated with this setpoint on the basis of the

delivery period map ( 19.2 Delivery period) and indicated in parameters 22343 PostIn-jDeliveryTime and 22345 PostInjDelPeriod respectively.

For testing purposes, injection duration for post-injection may also be set directly with parameter 20344 PostInjTimeSetpPC. This function must be activated with parameter 24344 PostInjDTSetpPCOn.

The parameters 20348 PostInjDelTimeAbsMin and 20349 PostInjDelTimeAbsMax serve as absolute limits of injection duration for post-injection.


Po

st In

ject

ion

: F

Q -

Map

2

Po

st In

ject

ion

: F

Q -

Map

1

X

Z

Y

X: 2

720

0Y

: 27

210

Z: 2

732

0

2000

Sp

eed

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

2000

Sp

eed

X

Z

Y

X: 2

720

0Y

: 27

210

Z: 2

752

0

1 01 0

2848

Sw

itc

hD

elM

aps

2Or1

243

45 P

ost

InjD

QM

apO

n

2034

5 P

ost

InjF

uel

Set

p

Po

st In

j: F

Q -

max

. va

lues

fo

r c

oo

lan

t te

mp

. dep

end

ent

co

rre

ctio

n

Po

st In

j: F

Q -

co

ola

nt

tem

pe

ratu

re

dep

en

den

t co

rrec

tio

n

X

YX

: 27

770

Y:

2779

0

2000

Sp

eed

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

2907

Co

ola

ntT

em

p

X

Z

Y

X: 2

762

0Y

: 27

630

Z: 2

770

522

351

Po

stI

njF

uel

QC

TC

orr

X0

1 0

243

47 P

os

tIn

jDQ

Co

rrC

oo

lTO

n

223

50 P

os

tIn

jFu

elQ

Bas

eM

ap

223

41 P

os

tIn

jFu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

Del

iver

y P

eri

od

: M

ap

X

Z

Y

X: 1

7020

Y: 1

7030

Z: 1

7050

1 0

430

0 D

eliv

ery

Tim

eMa

pO

n

2210

0 R

ailP

res

sure

A/

Del

iver

y P

erio

d:

Alt

ern

ati

ve

char

acte

rist

ic

X

YX

: 170

00Y

: 170

05

1 0

2034

4 P

ost

InjT

ime

Set

pP

C

u 1

x 2x 1m

ax

u2

x 2x 1m

in

203

48 P

os

tIn

jDe

lTim

eAb

sM

in2

0349

Po

stIn

jDe

lTim

eA

bs

Max

243

44 P

os

tIn

jDT

Set

pP

CO

n

1 0

0

223

43 P

os

tIn

jDe

liver

yT

ime

&>

x 1x 2

x 2x 10/

1

>x 1

x 2

x 2x 10/

1

2000

Sp

eed

2034

6 P

os

tIn

jSp

eed

Min

2350

Fu

elQ

uan

tity

2034

7 P

os

tIn

jFu

elM

in

2234

0 P

ost

Inje

cti

on

Ac

tive

2434

0 P

os

tIn

jec

tio

nO

n

3806

En

gin

eIn

jec

tRe

lea

sed

+

223

41 P

os

tIn

jFu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

2210

1 R

ailP

res

sure

B

Figure 72: Sequence of operations for determining post-injection delivery begin and duration




For post-injection too, delivery period correction for specific cylinders may be activated with parameter 24346 PostInjDQCorrCylOn. This correction uses the same maps as the

main injection ( 19.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders), the injection quantity for post-injection 22341 PostInjFuelQuantity will, however, enter into the maps.

Current delivery period of post-injection is indicated for each single cylinder in the pa-rameters starting from 22480 DelPerPostInj1.

19.6 Post-post-injection

In addition to post-injection, the HEINZMANN system DARDANOS offers the option of activating a second post-injection, the so-called post-post-injection. In chronologic order, post-post-injection occurs after post-injection. It is implemented only on request.

The parameters for post-post-injection are stored by the following numbers:

20361 PostPostInjBeginSetp delivery begin for operation without map

20364 PostPostTimeSetpPC direct setting of delivery time for testing purposes

20365 PostPostInjFuelSetp delivery quantity for operation without map

20366 PostPostSpeedMin minimum speed for enabling injection

20367 PostPostFuelMin minimum quantity for enabling injection

20368 PostPstDelTimeAbsMin absolute minimum addressing time

20369 PostPstDelTimeAbsMax absolute maximum addressing time

22360 PostPostInjectActive indication of post-post-injection state (ac-tive/inactive)

22361 PostPostFuelQuantity current post-post-injection fuel quantity

22362 PostPostDeliveryBeg current post-post-injection begin in °BTDC

22363 PostPostDelTime current post-post-injection period in ms

22365 PostPostDelPeriod current post-post-injection period in °crank

22367 PostPostDBBaseMap post-post-injection begin from map

22368 PostPostDBToMainInj distance of post-post-injection from main injection

22369 PostPostDBOffsetCT correction offset from coolant temperature depend-ent correction of delivery begin

22370 PostPostFuelQBaseMap injection quantity from map

22371 PostPostFuelQCTCorr correction offset from coolant temperature depend-ent delivery quantity correction

22520 DelPerPostPostInj1 indication of current injection period for cylinder 1

: : :



22527 DelPerPostPostInj8 indication of current injection period for cylinder 8

22540 DelBegPostPostInj1 indication of current injection begin for cylinder 1

: : :

22547 DelBegPostPostInj8 indication of current injection begin for cylinder 8

24360 PostPostInjectionOn activation of post-post-injection

24361 PostPostBeginMapOn activation of delivery begin maps

24362 PostPostDBCorrCylOn activation of correction of delivery begin for specific cylinders

24363 PostPstDBOffsetCoolTOn activation of coolant temperature dependent correc-tion of delivery begin

24364 PostPostDTSetpPCOn activation of direct setting of addressing time

24365 PostPostDQMapOn activation of delivery quantity maps

24366 PostPostDQCorrCylOn activation of delivery begin correction for specific cylinders

24367 PostPstDQCorrCoolTOn activation of coolant temperature dependent delivery begin correction

27800 PostPostInjection:n speed base points of post-post-injection maps

27810 PostPostInjection:f quantity base points of post-post-injection maps

27820 PostPostInjDBMap1:DB delivery begin values for map 1

27920 PostPostInjDQMap1:DB delivery quantity values for map 1

28020 PostPostInjDBMap2:DB delivery begin values for map 2

28120 PostPostInjDQMap2:DB delivery quantity values for map 2

28220 PostPostInjCorrCoolT:n speed base points of coolant temperature dependent delivery begin and delivery quantity correction

28230 PostPostInjCorrCoolT:f quantity base points of coolant temperature depend-ent delivery begin and delivery quantity correction

28240 PostPostInjCTMap:DB maximum values of delivery begin correction

28305 PostPostInjCTMap:DQ maximum values of delivery quantity correction

28370 PostPostInjCorrCoolT:T temperature base points of coolant temperature de-pendent delivery begin and delivery quantity correc-tion

28380 PostPostInjDBCorrCT:x factors of coolant temperature dependent delivery begin correction


28390 PostPostInjDQCorrCT:x factors of coolant temperature dependent delivery quantity correction

Post-post-injection is activated by means of the parameter 24360 PostPostInjectionOn. In addition, current speed must be higher than 20366 PostPostSpeedMin and current delivery quantity higher than 20367 PostPostFuelMin, otherwise post-post-injection will automati-cally be disabled. Whether post-post-injection is active or not may be seen in parameter 22360 PostPostInjectActive.

Similarly to main injection, the fly time of the magnetic valve will precede injection begin of post-post-injection. For energizing the magnetic valves, the same values will be used as

for main injection ( 17.2 Actuation of control magnets).

Figure 73: Definition of post-post-injection begin and duration

The control is able to activate post-post-injection 100 µs after the end of post-injection. The magnet, however, has fly times that are considerably longer than these activation times, which must be taken account of when adjusting the settings. If long activation times are chosen for post-injection such that post-injection would end after the beginning of post-post-injection, post-post-injection will be aborted and the interval between the end of post-injection and the beginning of post-post-injection set to 100 µs.

Note


19.6.1 Delivery begin of post-post-injection

For adjusting post-post-injection begin, two speed and quantity dependent maps with a domain of 10 x 10 base points each have been provided. The base points are the same for both maps and identical to those for post-post-injection quantity. The input variables for the maps are current speed 2000 Speed and total fuel quantity 2350 FuelQuantity.




The delivery begin map must be activated with parameter 24361 PostPostBeginMapOn, otherwise the fixed pre-set of 20361 PostPostBeginSetp will be used.

The current map is selected with switch function 2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1. This switch function relates to both delivery begin map and delivery quantity map. Depend-ing on the specific requirements, it will thus be possible to achieve optimum engine per-formance with regard to fuel consumption or emissions. Current delivery begin of post-post-injection is shown in parameter 22367 PostPostDBBaseMap.

If required, delivery begin of post-post-injection may also be corrected by means of coolant temperature. This type of correction is activated by means of parameter 24363 PostPstDBCorrCoolTOn.

Based on current speed and fuel quantity, the maximum correction value is determined by means of a map. This value represents the maximum possible correction at a specific point of operation. From a coolant temperature characteristic a percentual quota is de-rived, which is used to determine the current correction value 22369 PostPostInjDBOff-setCT from the maximal possible correction value.

The resulting value of post-post-injection derived from 22367 PostPostDBBaseMap and the correction offset 22369 PostPostDBOffsetCT is shown in parameter 22368 Post-PostDBToMainInj.

Delivery begin of post-post-injection 22368 PostPostDBToMainInj is specified in de-grees crankshaft (°crank) after begin of main injection. This allows to modify the deliv-ery begin map of main injection without having to adjust delivery begin of post-post-injection. The parameter 22362 PostPostDeliveryBeg indicates absolute delivery begin of post-post-injection in reference to the particular cylinder's top dead centre (°BTDC).

For post-post-injection too, delivery begin correction for specific cylinders may be acti-vated with a specific parameter, 24362 PostPostDBCorrCylOn . This correction uses

the same maps as the main injection ( 19.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders), the injection quantity for post-post-injection 22361 PostPostFuelQuantity will, however, enter into the maps.

Current delivery begin of post-post-injection is indicated for each single cylinder in the parameters starting from 22540 DelBegPostPostInj1.


Po

stP

os

t In

jec

tio

n:

DB

-M

ap

2

Po

stP

os

t In

jec

tio

n:

DB

-M

ap

1

X

Z

Y

X: 2

780

0Y

: 27

810

Z: 2

782

0

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

200

0 S

pee

d

X

Z

Y

X: 2

780

0Y

: 27

810

Z: 2

802

0

1 01 0

284

8 S

wit

ch

De

lMap

s2O

r124

361

Po

stP

os

tBeg

inM

ap

On

2036

1 P

ost

Po

stIn

jBe

gin

Se

tp

Po

stP

ost

Inj:

DB

-m

ax. v

alu

es f

or

co

ola

nt

tem

p.

dep

end

en

t c

orr

ect

ion

Po

stP

ost

Inj:

DB

-co

ola

nt

tem

p.

de

pe

nd

en

t co

rre

ctio

n

X

YX

: 28

370

Y: 2

838

0

200

0 S

pee

d

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

290

7 C

oo

lan

tTe

mp

X

Z

Y

X: 2

822

0Y

: 28

230

Z: 2

824

02

2369

Po

stP

ost

DB

Off

setC

TX

0

1 0

243

63 P

os

tPst

DB

Co

rrC

oo

lTO

n

2236

7 P

ost

Po

stD

BB

aseM

ap22

368

Po

stP

ost

DB

To

Mai

nIn

j1 0

0

2236

2 P

ost

Po

stD

eliv

eryB

eg

&>

x 1x 2

x 2x 10/

1

>x 1

x 2

x 2x 10/

1

2000

Sp

eed

2036

6 P

ost

Po

stS

pe

edM

in

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

2036

7 P

ost

Po

stF

uel

Min

2234

0 P

ost

Inje

ctA

cti

ve

2436

0 P

ost

Po

stIn

ject

ion

On

3806

En

gin

eIn

jec

tRe

lea

sed

+

2310

Del

ive

ryB

eg

in

+X-1

Figure 74: Sequence of operations for determining post-post-injection delivery begin




19.6.2 Delivery duration of post-post-injection

To determine post-post-injection delivery quantity, two speed and quantity dependent maps with a domain of 10 x 10 base points each have been provided. The base points are the same for both maps and identical to those for post-post-injection begin. The in-put variables for the maps are current speed 2000 Speed and total fuel quantity 2350 FuelQuantity.

The delivery quantity map must be activated with parameter 24365 PostPostDQMapOn, otherwise the fixed pre-set of 20365 PostPostInjFuelSetp will be used.

If post-post-injection is not desired for certain speed and/or load ranges the respective point of the injection quantity map will have to be set to 0 mm3/str. This will cause the control unit to automatically de-activate post-post-injection for this range. Whether post-post-injection is active or not may be seen in parameter 22360 PostPostInjectAc-tive.

The current map is selected with switch function 2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1. This switch function relates to both delivery begin map and delivery quantity map. Depend-ing on the specific requirements, it will thus be possible to achieve optimum engine per-formance with regard to fuel consumption or emissions. Current delivery quantity of post-post-injection is shown in parameter 22370 PostPostFuelQBaseMap.

If required, delivery quantity of post-post-injection may also be corrected by means of coolant temperature. This type of correction is activated by means of parameter 24367 PostPstDQCorrCoolTOn.

On the basis of current speed and injection quantity the maximum value of the correc-tion is determined with a map. This value represents the maximum possible correction at a specific point of operation. From a coolant temperature characteristic a percentual quota is derived, which is used to determine the current correction value 22371 Post-PostFuelQCTCorr from the maximal possible correction value.

The resulting value of post-post-injection derived from 22370 PostPostFuelQBaseMap and the correction offset 22371 PostPostFuelQCTCorr is shown in parameter 22361 PostPostFuelQuantity.

The delivery period of post-post-injection is calculated with this setpoint on the basis of

the delivery period map ( 19.2 Delivery period) and indicated in parameters 22363 PostPostDelTime and 22345 PostPostDelPeriod respectively.


Po

stP

ost

Inje

ctio

n:

FQ

-M

ap 2

Po

stP

ost

Inje

ctio

n:

FQ

-M

ap 1

X

Z

Y

X: 2

780

0Y

: 27

810

Z: 2

792

0

2000

Sp

eed

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

2000

Sp

eed

X

Z

Y

X: 2

780

0Y

: 27

810

Z: 2

812

0

1 01 0

2848

Sw

itc

hD

elM

aps

2Or1

243

65 P

ost

Po

stD

QM

ap

On

2036

5 P

ost

Po

stIn

jFu

elS

etp

Po

stP

os

t In

j: F

Q -

max

. val

ues

fo

r c

oo

l. t

em

p.

dep

end

ent

corr

ecti

on

Po

stP

os

t In

j: F

Q -

coo

lan

t te

mp

erat

ure

dep

en

de

nt

co

rrec

tio

n

X

YX

: 28

370

Y:

2839

0

2000

Sp

eed

2350

Fu

elQ

ua

nti

ty

2907

Co

ola

ntT

em

p

X

Z

Y

X: 2

822

0Y

: 28

230

Z: 2

830

522

371

Po

stP

ost

Fu

elQ

CT

Co

rrX

0

1 0

243

67 P

os

tPst

DQ

Co

rrC

oo

lTO

n

223

70 P

os

tPo

stF

uel

QB

ase

Ma

p2

2361

Po

stP

os

tFu

elQ

uan

tity

Del

iver

y P

eri

od

: M

ap

X

Z

Y

X: 1

7020

Y: 1

7030

Z: 1

7050

1 0

430

0 D

eliv

ery

Tim

eMa

pO

n

2210

0 R

ailP

res

sure

A/

Del

iver

y P

erio

d:

Alt

ern

ati

ve

char

acte

rist

ic

X

YX

: 170

00Y

: 170

05

1 0

2036

4 P

ost

Po

stT

ime

Se

tpP

C

u 1

x 2x 1m

ax

u2

x 2x 1m

in

203

68 P

os

tPst

Del

Tim

eA

bsM

in2

0369

Po

stP

stD

elT

ime

Ab

sMax

243

64 P

os

tPo

stD

TS

etp

PC

On

1 0

0

223

63 P

os

tPo

stD

elT

ime

&>

x 1x 2

x 2x 10/

1

>x 1

x 2

x 2x 10/

1

2000

Sp

eed

2036

6 P

os

tPo

stS

pee

dM

in

2350

Fu

elQ

uan

tity

2036

7 P

os

tPo

stF

uel

Min

2236

0 P

ost

Po

stIn

ject

Act

ive

2436

0 P

os

tPo

stIn

ject

ion

On

3806

En

gin

eIn

jec

tRe

lea

sed

+

223

61 P

os

tPo

stF

uel

Qu

an

tity

2210

1 R

ailP

res

sure

B

Figure 75: Sequence of operations for determining post-post-injection delivery begin and duration




For testing purposes, the duration of injection for post-post-injection may also be set di-rectly with the parameter 20364 PostPostTimeSetpPC. This function must be activated with parameter 24364 PostPostDTSetpPCOn.

The two parameters 20368 PostPstDelTimeAbsMin and 20369 PostPstDelTimeAbsMax serve as absolute limits for injection duration of post-post-injection.

For post-post-injection too, delivery period correction for specific cylinders may be ac-tivated by means of a specific parameter, in this case 24366 PostPostDQCorrCylOn.

This correction uses the same maps as the main injection ( 19.1.3 Correction of deliv-ery begin for single cylinders), the injection quantity for post-post-injection 22361 Post-PostFuelQuantity will, however, enter into the maps.

Current delivery period of post-post-injection is indicated for each single cylinder in the parameters starting from 22520 DelPerPostPostInj1.

20 Rail pressure control with common rail systems



With common rail systems, injection pressure can be chosen independently of speed and load. After comparing the preset pressure value with the measured rail pressure, the high-pressure pump is regulated via a PID circuit in such a way as to supply the desired pressure. The rail pressure regulator is conceived as an independent control circuit and is assigned PID parame-ters in like manner as the speed control.

The high-pressure pump is usually controlled by means of an interphase reactor. The control device DARDANOS MVC04-6 in addition is available in a variant allowing fuel to be in-jected into the rail by means of injectors (so-called high pressure injection).

Engine

Injectors

Pressure Sensor

Common Rail

High-Pressure Pump

Pressure RegulatorRail PressureMap

Engine Speed

Injection Quantity

Fuel Pressure

Current Output

Speed Calculation

n =

PID

d dt

Measuring WheelCamshaft

or

Setpoint Ramp

Fixed Setpoint

Software Switch

Measuring WheelCrankshaft

Figure 76: Functional block diagram of common rail pressure regulator


20.1 Configuration of rail and rail pressure sensors

The digital controls DARDANOS are conceived for the connection of up to two rail pres-sure sensors and up to two high-pressure pumps. This allows the most varied rail configu-rations. Since the use of two independent rails is limited to exceptional cases, this configu-ration is obtainable only on request. The parameters for configuration of two rails 24110 NumberOfRail2Or1 and the rail pressure indication values 22100 RailPressureA and 22101 RailPressureB therefore are normally not visible.

These two rail pressure values can be read from the parameters 2912 RailPressure1 and

2913 RailPressure2. The rail pressure value used for rail pressure control ( 20.4 Rail

pressure control by means of interphase transformer high-pressure pump or 20.5 Rail

pressure control by means of high-pressure injection) and single cylinder correction (

19.1.3 Correction of delivery begin for single cylinders, 19.2.2 Correction of delivery period for single cylinders) is indicated in parameter 22100 RailPressure (one rail) and in 22100 RailPressureA and 22101 RailPressureB (two rails) respectively. In case of two rails, the values of parameters 22100 RailPressureA and 22101 RailPressureB are identical to the measured values 2912 RailPressure1 and 2913 RailPressure2. For a single rail, the value of 22100 RailPressure normally corresponds to the value of 2912 RailPressure1. When the rail pressure sensor is faulty and if a second redundant sensor is available, the value of the second rail pressure sensor 2913 RailPressure2 is used instead.

20.1.1 One rail, one high-pressure pump, one high-pressure sensor

This arrangement represents the minimum configuration.

24110 NumberOfRail2Or1 = 0 single rail

24200 CurrOut1_On = 1 high-pressure pump 1 active

24210 CurrOut2_On = 0 high-pressure pump 2 non active

912 AssignIn_RailPress1 0 rail pressure sensor 1 active

913 AssignIn_RailPress2 = 0 rail pressure sensor 2 not active

For systems with high-pressure injection the names of the parameters are 24200 HighPressurePump1_On and 24201 HighPressurePump2_On.

Note

20.1.2 One rail, one high-pressure pump, two high-pressure sensors

This arrangement corresponds to the previous configuration, with the second pressure sensor used as redundant sensor. The measurement values of the second pressure sensor are used in case of error of the first pressure sensor.






24201 CurrOut2_On = 0 high-pressure pump 2 not active



20.1.3 One rail, two high-pressure pumps, one high-pressure sensor

When larger rails are used it might be necessary to employ two high-pressure pumps to deliver the required fuel quantity to the rail.





913 AssignIn_RailPress2 = 0 rail pressure sensor 2 not active

20.1.4 One rail, two high-pressure pumps, two high-pressure sensors

This arrangement corresponds to the previous configuration, with the second pressure sensor used as redundant sensor. The measurement values of the second pressure sensor are used in case of error of the first pressure sensor.






20.1.5 Two rails, two high-pressure pumps, two high-pressure sensors

When two completely separated rails are used, the disposition must be such that each rail has a separate high-pressure pump with a separate rail pressure sensor. Both the rail pressure control circuit and the high-pressure pump control in this case are completely independent from each other.

It must be ensured that rail 1 supplies the first half of the cylinders and rail 2 the second half.



Rail 1 Rail 2

6 cylinder engine Cylinders 1…3 Cylinders 4…6

8 cylinder engine Cylinders 1…4 Cylinders 5…8

Table 15: Configuration of two independent rails

20.2 Determination of rail pressure setpoint

A general overview of the determination of rail pressure setpoint is illustrated in the dia-

gram in Figure 77.

Normally, setpoint definition for rail pressure is conducted using a speed and quantity de-pendent map. The map is activated with the parameter 24000 CR_PressBaseMapOn. Oth-erwise the pressure setpoint of parameter 20000 CR_PressSetp is used, which might be useful for testing purposes and commissioning.

The pressure setpoint 22002 CR_PressSetpBaseMap can be adapted to environmental con-

ditions with 20.3 Correction of rail pressure setpoint 22003 CR_PressCorr. During en-gine start-up the maximum pressure setpoint is limited to the value of parameter 20001 CR_PressMaxAtStart to avoid rail pressure overshooting. The resulting rail pressure is in-dicated in 22001 CR_PressSetpSelect.

The selected pressure setpoint may be delayed by a ramp in order to accommodate the set-point adjustment to the dynamic conditions of the rail pressure control system. Thus, for small quantities and on reducing the pressure setpoint it will be necessary to use a very slow ramp as in extreme cases pressure reduction will only be possible by leakage. There-fore, separate ramps have been provided for pressure increase and pressure decrease. The ramps for the rail pressure setpoint are activated by the parameter 24010 CR_PressRampUpOn or 24011 CR_PressRampDownOn. Both have been configured as a characteristic based on quantity dependent base points. The base points are identical for pressure rise and pressure drop, whereas the ramp values may differ from each other. Due to this, it will be possible to achieve an optimum adjustment of the setpoint change rate to the current injection quantity.

The resulting effective rail setpoint used by the rail pressure control is indicated in parame-ter 22000 CR_PressSetpoint.



RP

S:

Map

2000

Sp

eed

235

0 F

uel

Qu

an

tity

X

Z

Y

X:

180

00Y

: 18

008

Z:

180

16

2200

2 C

R_

Pre

ss

Set

pB

as

eMa

p1 0

24

000

CR

_Pre

ss

Bas

eMap

On

+

220

03

CR

_P

res

sS

etp

Co

rr

200

00

CR

_P

ress

Set

p

u2

x 2x 1m

in

2000

1 C

R_

Pre

ssM

axA

tSta

rt

1 0

3804

En

gin

eS

tart

ing

2200

1 C

R_P

ress

Set

pS

elec

t

RP

S:

ram

p u

pw

ard

s

t

X:

184

76Y

: 18

484

NV

NV

: nom

inal

val

ueA

V:

actu

al v

alu

e

AV

t 0

RP

S:

ram

p d

ow

nw

ard

s

t

X:

184

76

Y:

184

92

AV

NV

: nom

inal

val

ueA

V: a

ctua

l val

ue

NV

t 01 0

&2

401

0 C

R_

Pre

ss

Ra

mp

Up

On

>x 1

x 2

x 2x 10/

1

&2

401

1 C

R_

Pre

ssR

am

pD

ow

nO

n

1 0

1 0

22

000

CR

_Pre

ss

Se

tpo

int

<x 1

x 2

x 2x 10

/1

>=

138

02 E

ng

ine

Sto

pR

eq

ue

st

3803

En

gin

eS

top

pe

d

01 0

380

4 E

ng

ineS

tart

ing

Figure 77: Operational sequence for the determination of rail pressure setpoint


The following list gives an overview of the parameters used to determine the rail pressure setpoint:

20000 CR_PressSetp rail pressure setpoint for operation without map

20001 CR_ PressMaxAtStart maximum rail pressure setpoint at engine start-up

22000 CR_PressSetpoint effective rail pressure setpoint

22001 CR_PressSetpSelect selected rail pressure setpoint before ramp

22002 CR_PressSetpBaseMap selected rail pressure setpoint from map

22003 CR_PressSetpCorr correction value for rail pressure setpoint

24000 CR_PressBaseMapOn activation of map

24010 CR_PressRampUpOn activation of upward ramp

24011 CR_PressRampDownOn activation of downward ramp

18000 CR_PressSetp:n speed base points for rail pressure map

18008 CR_PressSetp:f quantity base points for rail pressure map

18016 CR_PressSetp:p pressure setpoint values for rail pressure map.

18476 CR_PressRamp:f quantity base point for rail pressure setpoint ramps

18484 CR_PressRampUp:p ramping speed for pressure rise

18492 CR_PressRampDwn:p ramping speed for pressure decrease

20.3 Correction of rail pressure setpoint

The rail pressure setpoint can be corrected in function of ambient conditions. According to the circumstances, the rail pressure setpoint may be corrected through coolant temperature, charge air temperature, fuel temperature or ambient pressure.

The correction procedure always follows an identical scheme. On the basis of current speed and injection quantity the maximum value of the correction is determined with a map. This value represents the maximum possible correction at a specific point of opera-tion. On the basis of a characteristic for the respective influencing variable (coolant tem-perature, charge air temperature, fuel temperature or ambient pressure) a percentage is cal-culated, which, together with the maximum correction value, determines the actual correc-tion value.

From all active corrections, the one is chosen which yields the greatest correction effect and used as rail pressure setpoint correction 22003 CR_PressSetpCorr.

The diagram in Figure 78 shows an overview of the sequence of operations for rail pres-sure setpoint correction.




The speed and fuel base points of the maps for the determination of the maximum correc-tion values are identical for all corrections. But the maximum value can be indicated sepa-rately for each correction.

The following parameters apply to rail pressure setpoint correction in general:

22003 CR_PressSetpCorr correction value for rail pressure setpoint

18080 CR_PressCorr:n speed base points for maximum value map

18088 CR_PressCorr:f fuel base points for maximum value map

20.3.1 Rail pressure setpoint correction by means of coolant temperature

22004 CR_PressCoolTCorr current correction value

24004 CR_PressCorrCoolTOn activation of correction

18096 CR_CoolTCorr:p maximum value of correction

18400 CR_CorrCoolant:T coolant temperature base points for correction factor characteristic

18408 CR_CorrCoolant:x correction factor base points for correction fac-tor characteristic

20.3.2 Rail pressure setpoint correction by means or charge air temperature

22005 CR_PressChargTCorr current correction value

24005 CR_PressCorrChargTOn activation of correction

18160 CR_ChAirTCorr:p maximum value of correction

18420 CR_CorrChargAir:T charge air base point for correction factor char-acteristic

18428 CR_CorrChargAir:x correction factor base points for correction fac-tor characteristic

20.3.3 Rail pressure setpoint correction by means of fuel temperature

22006 CR_PressFuelTCorr current correction value

24006 CR_PressCorrFuelTOn activation of correction

18224 CR_FuelTCorr:p maximum value of correction

18440 CR_CorrFuelTemp:T fuel temperature base points for correction fac-tor characteristic

18448 CR_CorrFuelTemp:x correction factor base points for correction fac-tor characteristic



RP

S:

Ma

xim

um

te

mp

. d

epe

valu

es

fo

r c

oo

lan

t n

den

t c

orr

ec

tio

n

RP

S:

Co

ola

nt

tem

de

pen

den

per

atu

re

t c

orr

ect

ion

X

YX

: 18

400

Y:

184

08

RP

S:

Ma

xim

um

a

ir t

emp

. d

evalu

es

fo

r c

har

ge

pe

nd

ent

co

rre

cti

on

RP

S:

Ch

arg

e a

ir t

de

pen

den

em

pe

ratu

re

t c

orr

ect

ion

X

YX

: 18

420

Y:

184

28

RP

S M

ax

imu

m

de

pen

den

val

ues

fo

r fu

el t

em

p.

t c

orr

ect

ion

X

Z

Y

X:

180

80Y

: 18

088

Z:

182

24

RP

S:

Fu

el t

em

pe

co

rrec

tio

nra

ture

de

pe

nd

en

t

X

YX

: 18

440

Y:

184

48

RP

S:

Ma

xim

um

p

res

sure

deva

lue

s f

or

am

bie

nt

pe

nd

ent

corr

ec

tio

n

RP

S:

Am

bie

nt

pc

orr

ecti

on

res

sure

dep

en

den

t

X

YX

: 18

460

Y:

184

68

x 3 x 4

u1

x 2x 1m

ax

x 3 x 4

u2

x 2x 1m

in

X

1 0

=

2000

Sp

eed

23

50 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

2907

Co

ola

ntT

emp

2000

Sp

eed

23

50 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

23

50 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

2000

Sp

eed

2908

Ch

arg

eA

irT

emp

2000

Sp

eed

23

50 F

uel

Qu

anti

ty

2910

Fu

elT

em

p

2906

Am

bie

ntP

ress

ure

X

Z

Y

X:

180

80Y

: 18

088

Z:

181

60

X

Z

Y

X:

180

80Y

: 18

088

Z:

180

96

X

Z

Y

X:

180

80Y

: 18

088

Z:

182

8822

007

CR

_Pre

ssA

mb

PC

orr

2200

6 C

R_P

res

sFu

elT

Co

rr

2200

5 C

R_P

res

sCh

arg

TC

orr

2200

4 C

R_P

ress

Co

olT

Co

rr

220

03 C

R_P

res

sSet

pC

orr

X0

1 0

2400

5 C

R_

Pre

ssC

orr

Ch

arg

TO

n

X0

1 0

2400

7 C

R_P

res

sCo

rrA

mb

PO

n

X0

1 0

2400

4 C

R_P

ress

Co

rrC

oo

lTO

n

X0

1 0

2400

6 C

R_P

res

sCo

rrF

uel

TO

n

x 1x 2

x 2x 10/

1

-1

Figure 78: Operational sequence for determining rail pressure setpoint correction


20.3.4 Rail pressure setpoint correction by means of ambient pressure

22007 CR_PressAmbPCorr current correction value

24007 CR_PressCorrAmbPOn activation of correction

18288 CR_ AmbPCorr:p maximum value of correction

18460 CR_CorrAmbPress:T ambient pressure base points for correction factor characteristic

18468 CR_CorrAmbPress:x correction factor base points for correction fac-tor characteristic

20.4 Rail pressure control by means of interphase transformer high-pressure pump

The rail pressure regulator uses the input variable current rail pressure 22100 RailPressure and rail pressure setpoint 22000 CR_PressSetpoint. Based on these variables, nominal cur-rent 22200 CurrOut1_Setp for the pressure control valve high-pressure pump are calcu-lated by the PID control algorithm. Rail pressure control – and pressure control valve con-trol along with it – begins with the start-up procedure, i.e. with the recognition of a speed value. It ends when the engine has stopped and the rail pressure is below the value of 20004 CR_PressMinAtStop.

The parameters used by the rail pressure control are the following

20100 CR_PressGov:Gain gain

20101 CR_PressGov:Stab stability

20102 CR_PressGov:Deriv derivative

When two high-pressure pumps are used with one rail, nominal current of the second high-pressure pump 22201 CurrOut2_Setp corresponds to the nominal current of the first high-pressure pump 22200 CurrOut1_Setp.

When two rails are used, the pressure for both rails 22100 RailPressureA and 22101 Rail-PressureB are adjusted independently from each other to the common rail pressure setpoint 22000 CR_PressSetpoint. This leads to different values of nominal current 22200 Cur-rOut1_Setp and 22201 CurrOut2_Setp.

Maximum admissible current is pre-set with 11252 CO1_CurrentMax and 11262

CO2_CurrentMax respectively (see 20.4.3 Error recognition for pressure control valve high-pressure pumps). During engine start, maximum current is set to another value (11258 CO1_CurrMaxAtStart / 11268 CO2_CurrMaxAtStart). This reduces pressure over-shooting during engine start-up.




20.4.1 Current regulation for pressure control valve high-pressure pumps

(Function is not implemented in DARDANOS MVC01-20).

Current for high-pressure pumps is regulated with a PID control algorithm. The actual current value for high-pressure pumps is indicated in parameters 22201 Cur-rOut1_ActualValue and 22211 CurrOut2_ActualValue. The following parameters are used for the current governor

20200 Curr_Gov1:Gain gain for current governor 1

20201 Curr_Gov1:Stability stability for current governor 1

20202 Curr_Gov1:Derivative derivative for current governor 1

20203 Curr_Gov1:DeviatMax maximum admissible deviation

20210 Curr_Gov2:Gain gain for current governor 2

20211 Curr_Gov2:Stability stability for current governor 2

20212 Curr_Gov2:Derivative derivative for current governor 2

20213 Curr_Gov2:DeviatMax maximum admissible deviation

In addition to the PID variables the current governors offer the possibility to limit regu-lating deviation (difference between nominal and measured current) with the parameters 20203 Curr_Gov1:DeviatMax and 20213 Curr_Gov2:DeviatMax respectively. This en-hances governing in case of major setpoint jumps.

The actual current value for high-pressure pumps is a PWM ratio and is indicated in pa-rameters 22202 CurrOut1_PWM and 22212 CurrOut2_PWM. This PWM ratio is com-pensated with the controls’ power supply 22203 CurrOut1_PWMComp and 22213 Cur-rOut2_PWMComp and transmitted to the pressure control valves.

Maximum admissible PWM ratio is pre-set with 11256 CO1_PWMMax and 11266

CO2_PWMMax respectively (see 20.4.3 Error recognition for pressure control valve high-pressure pumps). During engine start, maximum PWM ratio is set to another value (11259 CO1_PWMMaxAtStart / 11269 CO2_PWMMaxAtStart). This reduces pressure overshooting during engine start-up.

The control frequency for the pressure control valves must be set in parameters 20260 CurrOut1_Frequency and 20261 CurrOut2_Frequency. It must be taken from the pres-sure control valve data-sheet.

For commissioning of the pressure control valves there is the possibility to directly pre-set the current setpoint. This function can be enabled with parameter 24250 Cur-rOut_PCSetpOn, current setpoint must be entered in 20250 CurrOut_PCSetp. This can be activated only when the engine is stopped, while the engine is running it is always the rail pressure governor to determine the current setpoint.

The following table gives an overview of the parameters.



Current governor for high-pressure pump 1

11256 CO1_PWMMax maximum admissible PWM ratio

11259 CO1_PWMMaxAtStart maximum admissible PWM ratio during en-gine start

20203 Curr_Gov1:DeviatMax maximum admissible control deviation

20250 CurrOut_ PCSetp current setpoint during direct pre-set

20260 CurrOut1_Frequency control frequency

22202 CurrOut1_PWM current PWM ratio

22203 CurrOut1_PWMComp current PWM ratio (voltage-compensated)

24250 CurrOut_PCSetpOn activation of direct current pre-set

Current governor for high-pressure pump 2

11266 CO2_PWMMax maximum admissible PWM ratio

11269 CO2_PWMMaxAtStart maximum admissible PWM ratio during en-gine start

20213 Curr_Gov2:DeviatMax maximum admissible control deviation

20250 CurrOut_ PCSetp current setpoint during direct pre-set

20261 CurrOut2_Frequency control frequency

22212 CurrOut2_PWM current PWM ratio

22213 CurrOut2_PWMComp current PWM ratio (voltage-compensated)

24250 CurrOut_PCSetpOn activation of direct current pre-set

20.4.2 Engine start

For starting the engine in common rail systems the rail must first be filled with fuel be-fore the fuel can be injected into the cylinders. In order to achieve this as rapidly as pos-sible, the injection is enabled only when rail pressure has exceeded the value 20002 CR_PressMinForStart. This value must be reached within the time 20003 CR_PressStartTimeout after begin of the start-up, otherwise the error message 3091 Er-rEngine [2] is produced.

When the engine starts, it is important that rail pressure is adjusted rapidly to the de-sired pressure setpoint. This is the reason why several functions are provided that are active only during engine start. These functions are the following:

limitation of pressure setpoint to the value 20001 CR_PressMaxAtStart

limitation of current for pressure control valves to 11258 CO1_CurrMaxAtStart / 11268 CO2_CurrMaxAtStart


limitation of PWM ratio for pressure control valves to 11259 CO1_PWMMaxAtStart / 11269 CO2_PWMMaxAtStart

These functions allow an optimum build-up of rail pressure after engine start. By this, rail pressure will build up faster and injection will be well-defined from the very begin-ning.

20.4.3 Error recognition for pressure control valve high-pressure pumps

Note

(Function is not implemented in DARDANOS MVC01-20).

Current outputs for common rail high-pressure governing are monitored only if the out-puts themselves have been enabled.



The outputs are hardware-monitored for overcurrent. This supervision can be enabled with the parameters

15250 CROut1_SupviseOn monitoring of output 1

15260 CROut2_SupviseOn monitoring of output 2

An error message is triggered when the hardware reports overcurrent for at least the time of the following parameters.

11250 CO1_ DelayTime delay time until error message

11260 CO2_ DelayTime delay time until error message

The thresholds for hardware overcurrent recognition are set at ca. 5A, which is why the output is immediately disabled when this error message appears, in order to protect the hardware and the connected load from destruction. For this reason this monitoring should always be active and the delay time should not be too long. When such an error appears, it is attempted to continue to energize the engine to keep it running as long as possible.

The admissible current for the normal governing range is determined by the following parameters:

11252 CO1_CurrentMax maximum admissible current for output 1

11262 CO2_CurrentMax maximum admissible current for output 2

This maximum current determines the maximum admissible current setpoint of the cur-rent governor and in addition can be monitored for excess by measured current. The pa-rameters for minimum current serve exclusively for monitoring measured current and are not used for current setpoint limitation.

11251 CO1_CurrentMin minimum current for output 1




11261 CO2_CurrentMin minimum current for output 2

This supervision can be enabled with the parameters

15252 CROut1_SupCurrMinOn monitoring of minimum current at output 1

15253 CROut1_SupCurrMaxOn monitoring of maximum current at output 1

15262 CROut2_SupCurrMinOn monitoring of minimum current at output 2

15263 CROut2_SupCurrMaxOn monitoring of maximum current at output 2

An error message is generated when current is higher or lower than the respective thresholds for a period longer than the following parameter.

11253 CO1_CurrentDelay delay time until error message

11263 CO2_CurrentDelay delay time until error message

When monitoring of minimum current is active, it is also monitored whether current is higher than admissible minimum current in not energized outputs. If this is the case for the time 112x3 CROutx_CurrentDelay, an according error message is generated.

In addition it is possible to monitor the admissible difference between nominal current and measured current, whereby different error messages are generated according to the direction of deviation. This error message too is generated only after a delay time.

15255 CROut1_SupDeviatOn activation of monitoring for admissible control deviation output 1

11254 CO1_DeviationMax admissible control deviation output 1

11255 CO1_DeviationDelay delay time until error message output 1

15265 CROut2_SupDeviatOn activation of monitoring for admissible govern-ing deviation output 2

11264 CO2_DeviationMax admissible control deviation output 2

11265 CO2_DeviationDelay delay time until error message output 2

In addition the maximum admissible PWM ratio for the current outputs may be pre-set and monitored. This PWM ratio is voltage-compensated (and therefore independent from supply voltage) and represents the reference value for a supply voltage of 24V.

11256 CO1_PWMMax maximum PWM ratio for output 1

11266 CO2_PWMMax maximum PWM ratio for output 2

This value is also used as maximum limit of PWM ratio for output ( 20.4.1 Current regulation for pressure control valve high-pressure pumps).

An error message is generated when monitoring is enabled and the PWM ratio main-tains maximum PWM ratio for at least the time of the following parameter. For this er-ror there is the possibility to disable the output completely when the error happens.

Note



11257 CO1_PWMMaxDelayTime delay time until error message

15257 CROut1_SupPWMMaxOn activation of monitoring

15258 CROut1_PWMMaxEcyOn output switched off in case of PWMMax error

11267 CO2_PWMMaxDelayTime delay time until error message

15267 CROut2_SupPWMMaxOn activation of monitoring

15268 CROut2_PWMMaxEcyOn output switched off in case of PWMMax error

The PWM ratio is a clue for the actual flowing current. When the actual current setpoint cannot be adjusted, PWM is increased to the maximum. This may be the case, when the measured current does not flow completely through the load but is lost as leakage cur-rent due to an incomplete short circuit or a short circuit low side to earth. In this case no hardware overcurrent recognition is triggered off, since the current measured at the load does not correspond to the whole of the flowing current but only to a part thereof. If this partial current is weak enough to allow the current governor to adjust to it within the set deviation limits, no further error message such as control deviation or current threshold infraction is generated, and this particular error occurrence may be identified only by means of PWM monitoring.

An overview of the error messages generated during monitoring of current outputs for common rail high-pressure governing is shown in

Table 68 : “Possible errors: Common rail high-pressure pumps outputs”.

28.5.19 Common rail high-pressure pumps outputs

The parameter

15251 CROut1_HoldOrReset hold or reset error message

15261 CROut2_HoldOrReset hold or reset error message

allows to configure whether the error message is to be reset when the error state is no longer present. With the exception of hardware overcurrent monitoring this is valid for all other error messages.

20.5 Rail pressure control by means of high-pressure injection

The control device DARDANOS MVC04-6 is available in a variant which allows fuel to be injected into the rail by injectors (so-called high pressure injection). For each camshaft revolution three injections into the rail are made.

The rail pressure regulator uses the input variable current rail pressure 22100 RailPressure and rail pressure setpoint 22000 CR_PressSetpoint. Based on these variables, the injection period 22200 HPR1_DelPeriod is calculated with the PID control algorithm. Rail pressure


control – and along with it, high-pressure injection – begins with the start-up, i.e. with the recognition of a speed value. High-pressure injection in addition requires a synchronized

control unit ( 16.4 Synchronization by tooth gap). It ends when the engine has stopped and the rail pressure is below the value of 20004 CR_PressMinAtStop or synchronization is lost.

The parameters used by the rail pressure control are the following

20100 CR_PressGov:Gain gain

20101 CR_PressGov:Stab stability

20102 CR_PressGov:Deriv derivative

When two high-pressure pumps are used with one rail, the injection period of the second high-pressure injection 22210 HPR2_DelPeriod corresponds to injection period of the sec-ond high-pressure injection 22200 HPR1_DelPeriod.

When two rails are used, the pressure for both rails 22100 RailPressureA and 22101 Rail-PressureB are adjusted independently from each other to the common rail pressure setpoint 22000 CR_PressSetpoint. This leads to different values of injection period 22200 HPR1_DelPeriod and 22210 HPR2_DelPeriod.

The maximum admissible injection period is pre-set with 20200 HPR_DelPeriodMax. During engine start, maximum injection period is set to another value (20201 HPR_DelPerMaxAtStart). This reduces pressure overshooting during engine start-up.

During high-pressure injection the end of injection is determined by a speed and fuel de-pendent map. This map is activated by parameter 24250 HPR_DeliveryEndMapOn. If it is not enabled, the end of injection may also be set with 20250 HPR_DeliveryEndSetp. The current value of injection end is indicated by the parameters 22203 HPR1_DeliveryEnd and 22213 HPR2_DeliveryEnd respectively.

As a reference point for the injection into the cylinders, the control unit uses the top dead centre of cylinder 1. This reference point is also valid for high-pressure injection, which is why the injection end may be adjusted to the requirements of high-pressure injection with parameter 20251 HPR_DelEndOffest.

The current injection period 22200 HPR1_DelPeriod / 22210 HPR2_DelPeriod determines the begin of high-pressure injection 22202 HPR1_DeliveryBegin / 22212 HPR2_DeliveryBegin.

The following table gives an overview of the parameters.

18600 DelEnd:p rail pressure values for delivery end map

18610 DelEnd:f injection quantity base points for delivery end map

18620 DelEnd:DE delivery end values for delivery end map

20200 HPR_ DelPeriodMax maximum delivery period

20201 HPR_ DelPeriodMax maximum delivery period during engine start




20250 HPR_ DeliveryEndSetp delivery end when map is disabled

20251 HPR_ DelEndOffest general offset for delivery end

22200 HPR1_DelPeriod current delivery period for high-pressure pump 1

22202 HPR1_ DeliveryBegin current delivery begin for high-pressure pump 1

22203 HPR1_ DeliveryEnd current delivery end for high-pressure pump 1

22210 HPR2_DelPeriod current delivery period for high-pressure pump 2

22212 HPR2_ DeliveryBegin current delivery begin for high-pressure pump 2

22213 HPR2_ DeliveryEnd current delivery end for high-pressure pump 2

24250 HPR_ DeliveryEndMapOn Activation of map for delivery end

20.5.1 Engine start

For starting the engine in common rail systems the rail must first be filled with fuel be-fore the fuel can be injected into the cylinders. In order to achieve this as rapidly as pos-sible, the injection is enabled only when rail pressure has exceeded the value 20002 CR_PressMinForStart. This value must be reached within the time 20003 CR_PressStartTimeout after begin of the start-up, otherwise the error message 3091 Er-rEngine[2] is produced.

When the engine starts, it is important that rail pressure is adjusted rapidly to the de-sired pressure setpoint. This is the reason why there are several functions that are active only during engine start. These functions are the following:

limitation of pressure setpoint to the value 20001 CR_PressMaxAtStart

limitation of maximum injection period to 20201 HPR_DelPerMaxAtStart

These functions allow an optimum build-up of rail pressure after engine start. By this, rail pressure will build up faster and injection will be well-defined from the very begin-ning.

20.5.2 Actuation of the control magnets of high-pressure injectors

The control current of the control magnets for the high-pressure injectors must be en-tered in parameter

20260 HPR_Current control current for high-pressure injectors

The control magnets for the high-pressure injectors on principle differ considerably

from the control magnets for the injectors for cylinder-injection ( 17 Control of the magnetic valves). For this reason no boost current is required and non BIP measurement is possible.



The rise time reflects the time required by the current to reach the pre-set control cur-rent set in 20260 HPR_Current. It is therefore practically possible to determine the cur-rent rise speed. Actual rise time is indicated by the following parameters:

22260 HPR1_RiseTime rise time high-pressure injector 1

22261 HPR2_RiseTime rise time high-pressure injector 2

The rise time can be filtered if needed, in this case the filter constant must be entered in parameter 20262 HPR_RiseTimeFilter.

The maximum value for the rise time 20261 HPR_RiseTimeMax is used for error moni-toring.

20.5.3 Detection of errors in control magnets for high-pressure injectors

The errors of control magnets for high-pressure injectors are shown in the following pa-rameters:

13025 ErrHPRInject1 Error of high-pressure injector 1

13026 ErrHPRInject2 Error of high-pressure injector 2


Error Meaning

0 Current < (ca.) 1 A - During the whole time the main injection was addressed, current never ex-

ceeded ca. 1 A. This means that no current reached the valve (broken cable). only error message


1 Overcurrent low-side transistor - The hardware has recognized an overcurrent on the low-side transistor and



2 Overcurrent high-side on PWM transistor - The hardware has recognized an overcurrent on the high-side PWM transistor



3 Overcurrent high-side on FREEWHEEL transistor - The hardware has recognized an overcurrent on the high-side FreeWheel tran-

sistor and switched off the power supply. only error message




Error Meaning

7 No rise time was registered - No rise time was registered. only error message


Check parameters of magnetic valve power supply.

8 Rise time too long - Current has not reached pre-set boost current during boost phase. only error message



Table 16: Possible errors of control magnets for high-pressure injectors

When such an error occurs, it is attempted to continue to energize the valve where the error has occurred to keep the engine running as long as possible. Since in case of short circuit the overcurrent error is recognized within a few microseconds and the hardware switches off the power, there is no danger of damaging hardware of magnetic valve and therefore attempts at energizing are kept up.

Current must reach control current set in 20260 HPR_Current within the time 20261 HPR_RiseTimeMax, otherwise the error 13025ff ErrHPRInjectX [8] is generated. This can result either from a parameter error (maximum rise time set too short) or a magnetic valve error. The error ErrHPRInjectX [8] therefore covers the range between no current (13025ff ErrHPRInjectX [0]) and overcurrent (13025ff ErrHPRInjectX[1,2,3]), i.e. when current is flowing but does not reach boost current.

The error message 13025ff ErrHPRInjectX[7] is used to monitor the control and meas-urement procedure, for a feedback by means of control time measurement must always be present. In such a case it is likely that the amplifier is faulty and therefore no injec-tion is happening.

21 Sensors

21 Sensors

With HEINZMANN controls a strict distinction is made between analogue inputs and sen-sors. This means that engine or application control is determined by the current values read by sensors, but where those sensors take their values from is configured separately.

21.1 Sensor overview

Sensors are needed to measure set values, pressures, temperatures, etc., and to execute functions depending on these quantities. The following table provides an overview:

Parameter Meaning Usage

2900 Setpoint1Extern Setpoint adjuster 1 Setpoint input

2901 Setpoint2Extern Setpoint adjuster 2 Setpoint input

Input value from load control unit

2902 LoadControlInput Load control in generator operation

Input value from syn-chronization unit

2903 SyncInput Synchronization in generator operation

Boost pressure dependent limitation of injection quantity

2904 BoostPressure Boost pressure

2905 OilPressure Oil pressure Oil pressure monitoring

Boost pressure dependent fuel limitation, adaptation of injection begin, adaptation of rail pressure setpoint

2906 AmbientPressure Ambient pressure


2907 CoolantTemp Coolant temperature

Temperature dependent idle speed and starting fuel adjustment, PID correction, reduction of speed dependent limitation of fuel quantity, forced idle speed, cor-rection of injection quantity, adaptation of injection begin, adaptation of rail pressure setpoint

Charge air tempera-ture

Charge air temperature warning, adapta-tion of delivery begin

2908 ChargeAirTemp

2909 OilTemp Oil temperature Oil temperature warning, forced idle speed

2910 FuelTemp Fuel temperature Correction of injection quantity, adapta-tion of delivery begin

Exhaust gas tempera-ture

2911 ExhaustTemp Exhaust gas temperature warning

2912 RailPressure1 Rail pressure 1 Common rail

2913 RailPressure2 Rail pressure 2 Common rail

2914 SlideExcitReduction Reduction value of Slide protection in locomotive operation

21 Sensors


Parameter Meaning Usage

excitation signal

Reduction value of speed setpoint

2915 SlideSpeedReduction Slide protection in locomotive operation

Coolant pressure monitoring, forced idle speed

2916 CoolantPressure Coolant pressure

2917 AsymmetricLoad Asymmetrical load Twin-engine propulsion in marine appli-cations

Misfire monitoring, DT1-factor speed governor, integrated load control

2918 MeasuredPower Measured power

2919 PowerSetpoint Load setpoint Integrated power governor

Turbocharger oil tem-perature

2920 TurboOilTemp Turbocharger oil temperature monitoring

2921 FuelPressure Fuel pressure Fuel pressure monitoring

2922 OilLevel Oil level Oil level monitoring

External fuel limita-tion

2923 FuelLimitExtern Fuel limitation

2924 TransmissionOil-Press

Transmission oil pres-sure

Transmission oil pressure monitoring

Table 17: Sensors

21.2 Derived sensors

Measuring values calculated from two or more sensors are called derived sensors. Error monitoring and reaction to sensor errors are configured for the actual sensors.

21.2.1 Relative boost pressure

One of the derived sensors used in the system DARDANOS MVC03-8 is relative boost pressure 2940 BoostPressRelative, which is derived from the difference between abso-lute boost pressure 2904 BoostPressure and ambient pressure 2906 AmbientPressure.

This difference is required only when the boost pressure sensor is executed as absolute pressure adjuster. In this case, the following parameter must be configured as follows:

4940 RelOrAbsBoostSensor = 0 absolute boost pressure sensor, the value for 2940 BoostPressRelative is calculated as dif-ference between 2904 BoostPressure and 2906 AmbientPressure

4940 RelOrAbsBoostSensor =1 relative boost pressure sensor, the value for 2940 BoostPressRelative corresponds to 2904 BoostPressure

21 Sensors


The calculation of relative boost pressure is possible only when both sensors are avail-able.

21.2.2 Altitude over mean sea level

Ambient pressure allows to calculate altitude over mean sea level. To calculate altitude, the international barometric altitude formula is used. It assumes an ambient pressure of 1013,25 mbar and a temperature of 15°C at sea level and a temperature gradient of 0,65 K per 100 m.

The current altitude over mean sea level is indicated in parameter 2941 AbsoluteAlti-tude.

It must be noted that the accuracy of this value is limited, since for the calculation an average atmosphere is used instead of the actual atmospheric state.

21.3 Configuration of sensors

Sensors and setpoint adjusters supply either an analogue signal (current or voltage) or a

PWM signal (refer to 24 Parameterizing the control’s inputs and outputs). It is also pos-sible to measure this signal somewhere else and to have it transmitted to the control via the

communication modules ( 26 Bus protocols).

The sensors available from HEINZMANN are described in detail in the manuals of the basic systems as well as in the brochure „Product Overview Sensors No. E 99 001-e".

In the system DARDANOS MVC03-8 the ambient pressure sensor is directly integrated in the control. In this case only the indication parameter for the sensor value 2906 Ambient-Pressure exists, the configuration parameter is not required and therefore not provided.

Selection and configuration of the sensors as analogue, PWM or "communication" sensors is done with the parameters starting from 4900 ChanTyp... where one of the following val-ues must be entered:

ChanTyp Sensor source

0 analogue signal (current or voltage)

1 PWM signal

2 HZM-CAN periphery module

3 custom defined CAN protocol

4 CANopen protocol

5 DeviceNet-CAN protocol

6 Modbus protocol

7 SAE J1939-CAN protocol


9 HZM-CAN second control device of the same type (twin system)

Table 18: Sensor source

21 Sensors



The signal for setpoint adjuster 1 is received from an analogue potentiometer, and setpoint adjuster 2 is operating by a PWM signal. Boost pressure is received from a periphery module via the HZM-CAN bus:


4900 ChanTypSetp1Ext 0

4901 ChanTypSetp2Ext 1

4904 ChanTypBoostPress 2

21.4 Assigning inputs to sensors and setpoint adjusters

Assignment of inputs to sensors and setpoint adjusters is made by entering the desired channel number of the analogue or PWM input channels or the channel number of the communication module in the assigning parameters from 900 AssignIn.. onward. The channel numbers will run from 1 up to the maximum number depending on the control unit/communication module used.

If the HEINZMANN Load Measuring Unit is connected to 2902 LoadCtrlIn-put, the hardware of the 0..5 V analogue input of the control unit must first be adapted accordingly.

Entering the number 0 in the assignment parameter will signify that the respective sensor has neither been connected nor activated. Consequently, the input will not be subject to monitoring. Therefore, the assignment parameters of any sensors not needed should be set to 0. The sensor value during operation will then constantly be equal to the minimum value.

Double assignments will not be intercepted.


Setpoint adjuster 1 (indication parameter 2900) is to be connected to analogue in-put 1, setpoint adjuster 2 (indication parameter 2901) to PWM input 1, and the boost pressure sensor (indication parameter 2904) to HZM-CAN periphery mod-ule input 3. For the other sensors remaining unused the value 0 is to be entered.


900 AssignIn_Setp1Ext 1


904 AssignIn_BoostPress 3

Note

Note

21 Sensors


21.5 Measuring ranges of sensors

In HEINZMANN controls, all sensor parameters and all relating values are provided with the maximum possible value range. Thus, temperature sensors can be utilized for a range from –100 to +1,000 °C, boost pressure and coolant pressure sensors cover a maximum range from 0 to 5 bar, and oil pressure sensors are working with a maximum range from 0 to 10 (resp. 20) bar. Indication for sensors without physical ranges (setpoint adjuster) is by per cent.

Since there exist pressure sensors with different measuring ranges, the control unit must be informed about the particular value ranges which may differ from the maximum possible physical value range. These ranges are defined as the physical values corresponding to minimum and maximum input values such as 0.5 to 4.5 Volts or 4 to 20 mA for analogue inputs or 10 % and 90 % for PWM inputs. As temperature sensors show non-linear behaviour, suitable linearization characteristics for the various types of temperature sensors are already implemented at the factory so there

will be no need to specify physical measuring ranges for these sensors ( 24.2.2 Linearization of temperature inputs).

Sensor Minimum measuring value Maximum measuring value

Coolant pressure 978 CoolPressSensorLow 979 CoolPressSensorHigh

Oil pressure 980 OilPressSensorLow 981 OilPressSensorHigh

Boost pressure 982 BoostPressSensorLow 983 BoostPressSensorHigh

Ambient pressure 984 AmbPressSensorLow 985 AmbPressSensorHigh

Rail pressure sensor 1 986 RailPress1SensorLow 987 RailPress1SensorHigh

Rail pressure sensor 2 988 RailPress2SensorLow 989 RailPress2SensorHigh

Reduction speed setpoint 0 991 SpeedRedSensorHigh

Measured power 992 MeasPowerSensorLow 993 MeasPowerSensorHigh

Power setpoint 994 PowerSetpSensorLow 995 PowerSetpSensorHigh

Fuel pressure 996 FuelPressSensorLow 997 FuelPressSensorHigh

Transmission oil pressure 998 TrOilPressSensorLow 999 TrOilPressSensorHigh

Table 19: Sensor measuring ranges


A boost pressure sensor with a measuring range from 0.5 to 3.5 bar is to be used.


982 BoostPressSensorLow 0,5 bar 983 BoostPressSensorHigh 3,5 bar

21 Sensors


21.6 Modifying reactions to sensor errors

Setpoint adjusters and sensors are being monitored with regard to their valid measuring

ranges. On exceeding these ranges in either direction, a sensor error is detected ( 24.2.4 Error detection for analogue inputs). For any detected error, the respective response to this error can be modified by appropriate configuration which will allow to adjust the control's behaviour to the specific application and mode of operation in case of failure.

Substitute (default) values may be set for setpoint adjusters and sensors by means of the parameters 1000 Subst... This will permit the control to continue operation should the re-spective sensor fail. There also exists the possibility of reverting to the last valid value be-fore the failure occurred rather than to maintain operation by resorting to a default value. The parameters 5000 SubstOrLast... are used to decide by which value the control is to continue operation in case the setpoint adjuster or the sensor is at fault. If the respective parameter is set to "1" the substitute value will be used as defined, if set to "0" the last valid value will be used. This method of error handling will in most cases permit to main-tain safe emergency operation of the installation.

The following table Table 20 contains a list of the parameters where the substitute values are registered and of the associated parameters provided to select operation by substitute or last valid value.

Substitute value Selection of substitute value Substitute value for

1000 SubstSetp1Ext 5000 SubstOrLastSetp1Ext Setpoint 1

1001 SubstSetp2Ext 5001 SubstOrLastSetp2Ext Setpoint 2

1002 SubstLoadCtrlInput 5002 SubstOrLastLoadCtrIn Value from Load Meas-uring Unit

1003 SubstSyncInput 5003 SubstOrLastSyncInput Synchronizing

1004 SubstBoostPressure 5004 SubstOrLastBoostPres Boost pressure

1005 SubstOilPressure 5005 SubstOrLastOilPress Oil pressure

1006 SubstAmbientPressure 5006 SubstOrLastAmbPress Ambient pressure

1007 SubstCoolantTemp 5007 SubstOrLastCoolTemp Coolant temperature

1008 SubstChargeAirTemp 5008 SubstOrLastChAirTemp Charge air temperature

1009 SubstOilTemp 5009 SubstOrLastOilTemp Oil temperature

1010 SubstFuelTemp 5010 SubstOrLastFuelTemp Fuel temperature

1011 SubstExhaustTemp 5011 SubstOrLastExhstTemp Exhaust gas temperature

1012 SubstRailPressure1 5012 SubstOrLastRailPres1 Rail pressure 1

1013 SubstRailPressure2 5013 SubstOrLastRailPres2 Rail pressure 2

fixed 0 % 5014 SubstOrLastExcitRed Slide protection signal

fixed 0 rpm 5015 SubstOrLastSpeedRed Slide protection signal

21 Sensors


Substitute value Selection of substitute value Substitute value for

1016 SubstCoolPressure 5016 SubstOrLastCoolPress Coolant pressure

1017 SubstAsymmetricLoad 5017 SubstOrLastAsymmLoad Asymmetrical load

1018 SubstMeasuredPower 5018 SubstOrLastMeasPower Measured power

1019 SubstPowerSetpoint 5019 SubstOrLastPowerSetp Load setpoint

1020 SubstTurboOilTemp 5020 SubstOrLastTuOilTemp Turbocharger oil tempera-ture

1021 SubstFuelPressure 5021 SubstOrLastFuelPress Fuel pressure

1022 SubstOilLevel 5022 SubstOrLastOilLevel Oil level

1023 SubstFuelLimitExtern 5023 SubstOrLastFuelLimEx External fuel limitation

1024 SubstTransmOilPress 5024 SubstOrLastTransOilP Transmission oil pressure

Table 20: Sensor default values in case of error

If in marine operation there is a failure of speed adjustment by setpoint 1 (normally bridge, 4..20 mA), the digital potentiometer will be automatically activated to enable adjustment of speed by emergency operation. In this case, it is always the last valid speed setpoint that will be used as an initial

value for the digital potentiometer ( 7.1.5 Marine application). In common rail applications, the selection of the active rail pressure sen-

sors is done as described in section 20.1 Configuration of rail and rail pressure sensors.

For setpoint and sensor inputs, the parameters 5040 HoldOrReset… offer the option to de-cide how the control is to react if an error clears itself (e.g., loose contact in wiring). If the respective parameter is set to "1" the error will be regarded to be latching. Therefore, there will be no reaction by the control when the sensor measurement is back within the valid range. If the parameter is set to "0" the error will be reset and operation continues using the signal coming from the sensor.

Note

21 Sensors


Parameter Reaction to error at

5040 HoldOrResetSetp1Ext Setpoint 1

5041 HoldOrResetSetp2Ext Setpoint 2

5042 HoldOrResetLoadCtrIn Value from Load Measuring Unit

5043 HoldOrResetSyncInput Synchronizing

5044 HoldOrResetBoostPress Boost pressure

5045 HoldOrResetOilPress Oil pressure

5046 HoldOrResetAmbPress Ambient pressure

5047 HoldOrResetCoolTemp Coolant temperature

5048 HoldOrResetChAirTemp Charge air temperature

5049 HoldOrResetOilTemp Oil temperature

5050 HoldOrResetFuelTemp Fuel temperature

5051 HoldOrResetExhstTemp Exhaust gas temperature

5052 HoldOrResetRailPressure1 Rail pressure 1

5053 HoldOrResetRailPressure2 Rail pressure 2

5054 HoldOrResetExcitRed Slide protection signal

5055 HoldOrResetSpeedRed Slide protection signal

5056 HoldOrResetCoolPress Coolant pressure

5057 HoldOrResetAsymmLoad Asymmetrical load

5058 HoldOrResetMeasPower Measured power

5059 HoldOrResetPowerSetp Load setpoint

5060 HoldOrResetTuOilTemp Turbocharger oil temperature

5061 HoldOrResetFuelPress Fuel pressure

5062 HoldOrResetOilLevel Oil level

5063 HoldOrResetFuelLimEx External fuel limitation

5064 HoldOrResetTransOilP Transmission oil pressure

Table 21: Sensor errors

22 Switching functions



With HEINZMANN controls a strict distinction is made between external switches and in-ternal switching functions. This means that engine or application control is being determined by the current values read by switching functions but where those switching functions take their values from is configured separately.

Usually they are influenced by the digital inputs ( 23.3.1 Digital inputs or 23.4.1 Digital inputs), but in specific applications they can be assigned their values by serial or CAN proto-cols. This is why it will be necessary to configure the switching functions and to specify the sources they are receiving their actual states from.

For each switching function there are up to four parameters defining the external source and the current value. The last three digits of the parameter numbers are identical for all switching functions.

If the currently used firmware does not implement a communications module or only the HZM-CAN periphery module is used, the parameters starting from 20810 Comm... and 24810 ChanTyp... are not used.

Parameter Meaning

810 Funct... Assigning a digital input number (own hardware of HZM-CAN periph-ery module)

2810 Switch... Indication of current value of switching function

20810 Comm... Assigning an input number to a communication module

24810 ChanTyp... Assigning a channel type to the external source

Table 22: Switching function parameters

22.1 Complete overview of all switching functions

Switching functions may be defined as on-off switches or as selector switches. The name of a switching function will suggest what its meaning is. The names of selector switches always include the characterization Or where the expression preceding Or will be valid when the value of the switching function is 1 and where the expression following Or will be valid when the switching function has the value 0. With on-off switches the name is equivalent to the signification On. State 1 will always define On and state 0 Off.

For each of the switching functions, there exists a parameter to indicate whether the func-tion is active. "1" always means that the function is active, "0" that it is not active.

A complete overview of all existing switching functions is given in the below table. For explanations of the individual functions and switch priorities, please refer to the respective chapters.

Note



The firmware for the controls is prepared in function of the specific applica-tion. Depending on the application therefore only a part of the listed switching functions is required and indicated.

Switch function Meaning

2810 SwitchEngineStop 1 = engine stop

2811 SwitchIdleSpeed 1 = idle speed active

2812 SwitchDroop2Or1 0 = droop 1 active 1 = droop 2 active

2813 SwitchForcedLimit 1 = fixed fuel limitation active

2814 SwitchSpeedRange2Or1 0 = speed range 1 active

1 = speed range 2 active


2816 SwitchSpeedFix2 1 = Fixed speed 2 active

2817 SwitchSpeedLimit2Or1 0 = speed-dep. fuel limitation 1 active

1 = speed-dep. fuel limitation 2 active

2818 SwitchSlide/SwitchKnock 1 = slide/knock signal coming in

2819 SwitchNotch3 1 = speed notch switch 3




2823 SwitchExcitLimit1 1 = first limitation of excitation signal

2824 SwitchExcitLimit2 1 = second limitation of excitation signal

2825 SwitchSpeedInc 1 = speed increase

2826 SwitchSpeedDec 1 = speed decrease

2827 SwitchSetpoint2Or1 0 = setpoint adjuster 1 active, 1 = setpoint adjuster 2 active

2828 SwitchErrorReset 01 = current errors cleared

2829 SwitchFreezeSetp1 1 = freeze setpoint 1

2830 SwitchFreezeSetp2 1 = freeze setpoint 2

2831 SwitchIMOrAllSpeed 0 = variable speed control

1 = idle/maximum speed control

2834 SwitchSyncEnable 1 = synchronizing enabled

2835 SwitchLoadEnable 1 = load control enabled

Note


Switch function Meaning

0 = manual generator operation 1 = automatic genera-tor operation

2836 SwitchAutoOrManual

2840 SwitchExcitationOn 1 = excitation signal enabled

2841 SwitchLowIdleOn 1 = low idle speed requested (locomotive operation)

1 = master, 0 = slave in twin-engine systems (marine operation)

2841 SwitchMasterOrSlave

2842 SwitchLoadTransfer 1 = load pick-up requested

2843 SwitchClutch 1 = clutch closed

2844 SwitchAsymLoadEnable 1 = asymmetrical load input enabled

2846 SwitchGenBreaker 1 = breaker closed

2847 SwitchAlternator 1 = battery charging by alternator is active

0 = delivery begin and injection maps 1 are active 2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1

1 = delivery begin and injection maps 2 are active

2849 SwitchStartEngine 1 = engine start

Table 23: Switching functions

22.1.1 Engine stop

With regard to the engine stop switch, parameter 2810 StopImpulseOrSwitch will permit to decide by way of configuration whether the stop command is to be in effect for the period the engine stop switch is activated (4810 StopImpulseOrSwitch = 0) or whether a single pulse will suffice to activate engine stop (4810 StopImpulseOrSwitch = 1). In the latter case, the engine stop request will end only when the engine has completely stopped, i.e. when speed 0 is recognized.

In specific situations it might be necessary to uphold the engine stop request even longer, for example when the engine turns backwards after a very quick stop. In such a case, the electronic control recognizes new impulses from the pick-up and erroneously

interprets them as engine start. In extreme cases this can lead to a pick-up error ( 6.3.2 Failure monitoring of pickups when engine is running) of the speed pickups while the engine is running). In order to avoid this situation, the engine stop request can be pro-longed by the duration of 809 EngineStopExtraTime after speed 0 is recognized.

Note

For safety reasons, HEINZMANN recommend to always connect the engine stop directly, regardless of a possible additional transmission via a communi-cation module.




22.2 Assignment of digital inputs

A digital input can be readily assigned to some switching function by entering the number of the switch input as value of the assignment parameter of the respective function. The numbers of digital inputs always run from 1 to the maximum number of the particular con-trol device.

In the parameters starting from 810 Funct... therefore the number of the respective digital input must be entered. These assignment parameters are parallel to the indication parame-ters for switching functions that start from 2810 Switch....

Assignment of 0 means that the respective switching function has not been allocated to a digital input. Such a switching function will always have the value 0, except when it is re-

ceived via a communications module ( 22.3 Assignment of communication modules).

The digital inputs can be configured as high-active, i.e., active with the switch closed, or low-active, i.e., active with the switch open. High-active inputs are designated by positive digital input numbers, low-active ones with negative digital input numbers.

One single switch may simultaneously activate or change over several functions. In this case, the functions involved will have to be assigned the same switch number, possibly with the activity inverted.

If a switching function is required that is permanently active (e.g. when the engine is run-ning exclusively by active fixed speed 2815 SpeedFix1 in generator operation), any unused (not connected) input may be utilized to activate this function by assigning the negative number of the switch input to the switching function.

Switching pulses must have a duration of at least 10 ms in order to be recog-nized by the control electronics. Any switching function will be active only for

the time the switch input is active (with the exception of 22.1.1 Engine stop).


By closing the switch of input no. 1 you want the engine to stop. When the switch is open on input 2 you want the engine to run at fixed speed 1. By closing the switch on input 2 you want to disable fixed speed 1 and at the same time enable the fixed fuel limitation.


810 FunctEngineStop 1

813 FuncForcedLimit 2 815 FunctSpeedFix1 -2

Indication: Switch open Switch closed

2810 SwitchEngineStop 0 1 2813 SwitchForcedLimit 0 1 2815 SwitchSpeedFix1 1 0

Note



22.2.1 HZM-CAN periphery module

The digital inputs of periphery modules connected with HZM-CAN protocol are con-sidered extensions of the digital inputs on the own hardware. The digital inputs of the periphery module are therefore added to the already available digital inputs.

If the system contains several periphery modules, the number of digital inputs increases by the number of inputs on all periphery modules, whereby the node numbers of the pe-riphery modules determine the sequence. The maximum number is limited to 32.

If, for instance, a Type 1 periphery module (DC 6-07 with max. 5 digital inputs, node no. 1) and a Type 0 module (PE 2-01 with max. 8 digital inputs, node no.2) are con-nected, the resulting number of available digital inputs is 21: numbers from 1 to 8 on your own hardware, numbers 9 to 13 on the DC 6-07 periphery module and numbers 14 to 21 on the PE 2-01.

22.3 Assignment of communication modules

A switching function may also obtain its current value from a communication module, e.g. a CAN protocol like DeviceNet or a serial protocol like Modbus.

Which switching functions are addressed by which bit of the communications telegrams is determined by the manufacturer of the sending module and must be agreed with him. The switching functions received from the communications module are then simply numbered from 1 onwards and the respective number is entered in the assignment parameters starting from 20810 Comm.... These assignment parameters are parallel to the indication parame-ters for switching functions that start from 2810 Switch....

Assignment of 0 means that the respective switching function is not addressed by a communica-

tions module (but possibly by a digital input, see 22.2 Assignment of digital inputs). For com-munication purposes, such a switching function will always have the value 0.

For safety reasons, a function must be activated consciously via a communications module. For this reason, the switching functions addressed by communications modules can be only

high-active, i.e. become active on receipt of a "1", as opposed to digital inputs ( 22.2 Assignment of digital inputs). When the connection to the communication module is inter-rupted, the switching function automatically adopts the value 0.

Since there are different types of communication modules, the type must be indicated in 24810 ChanTyp... These assignment parameters are parallel to the indication parameters for switching functions that start from 2810 Switch....

ChanTyp Switch function source

0 Digital input (own hardware) or HZM-CAN periphery module

3 custom defined CAN protocol


4 CANopen protocol

5 DeviceNet-CAN protocol

6 Modbus protocol

7 SAE J1939-CAN protocol

8 HZM-CAN Customer Module

9 HZM-CAN second control device of the same type (twin system)

Table 24: Switch function sources

22.4 Value of a switching function

With on-off switches the name is equivalent to the signification On. State 1 of the switch-ing function will always define On and state 0 Off. The identifiers of change-over switches or of parameters selecting between two functions always include an "Or", where the ex-pression preceding "Or" will be valid when the value of the switching function is 1 and where the expression following "Or" will be valid when the switching function has the value 0.

If no communication module is enabled in the current firmware, the value of the switching function is determined exclusively by digital input. The parameters starting from 20810 Comm... and 24810 ChanTyp... do not exist.

If, on the other hand, a communication module must be taken into account, then each switching function can be addressed either by a digital input or by the communications module or even by both.

1. Digital input only Parameter 24810 ChanTyp... must be set to 0. If 810 Funct... = 0, then the switching function always has the value 0, otherwise it has the current value of the digital input (possibly with inverted activity).

2. Communication module only Parameter 810 Funct... must be set to 0 and 24810 ChanTyp... >= 3. If 20810 Comm... = 0, then the switching function always has the value 0, other-wise it has the current value of the received telegram. When the connection to the communication module is interrupted, the switching function automatically adopts the value 0.

3. Both digital input and communication module Parameter 810 Funct... is not equal 0, 20810 Comm... > 0 and 24810 ChanTyp... >= 3. The current value from the digital input (possibly inverted) and from the commu-nications module are combined with OR. The switching function will therefore be




= 0 only if both sources send the value 0; it will be = 1 if at least one source sends the value 1. When the connection to the communication module is interrupted, the switching function automatically adopts the value 0 for this transmission path. In this case, the digital input alone decides on the overall value.

For safety reasons, HEINZMANN recommend to always connect the engine stop directly, regardless of a possible additional transmission via a communi-cation module. On the other hand, HEINZMANN advises never to connect change-over switches that select between two functions (with OR in their iden-tifier) with two signal paths.

Note

23 Inputs and outputs


23.1 Configuration of the channels for selectable inputs and outputs

In all basic control systems certain connections are freely configurable. This will affect the number of available digital or PWM inputs and outputs. This must be taken into account

during the configuration of sensors ( 21.4 Assigning inputs to sensors and setpoint ad-

justers), the configuration of switching functions ( 22 Switching functions) and the con-

figuration of PWM and digital outputs ( 24.4 PWM outputs or 24.5 Digital outputs). Even if the number of available inputs and outputs might vary, the number or the respec-tive connection stays the same.

The assignments of the channels cannot be altered during operation. It will

therefore be necessary to save the data (

Note

3.2 Saving Data) and restart the

governor by a 3.10 Reset of control unit after configuration.

23.2 DARDANOS MVC01-20

23.2.1 Digital Inputs

The HEINZMANN DARDANOS MVC01-20 Digital Control provides eleven digital

inputs that can be used as on-off-switches or as change-over switches for functions.

The below table explains the relations between the inputs and the control's connector pins:

Input No. Connector / Pin

Digital input 1 X05 / A

Digital input 2 X05 / B

Digital input 3 X05 / C

Digital input 4 X05 / D

Digital input 5 X05 / E

Digital input 6 X05 / F

Digital input 7 X05 / G

Digital input 8 X05 / P

Digital input 9 X05 / R

Digital input 10 X03 / E

Digital input 11 X03 / F

Since the input signals are being debounced by the control circuit it is necessary that

they be applied for at least 100 ms to be detected.



23.2.2 Analogue Inputs

The HEINZMANN DARDANOS MVC01-20 Digital Control are equipped with nine ana-

logue inputs. Four of them can universally be used as setpoint inputs and pressure inputs,

the other five as temperature inputs. The universal inputs can be configured as current in-

puts of 4..20 mA or as voltage inputs of 0..5 V. The temperature inputs are by standard

configured for PT 1000 sensors but may be accommodated to PTC-/NTC sensors.

The details of the implementation of the desired inputs should be discussed with

HEINZMANN where they will be configured at the factory according to customer re-

quests.

The software denotations and the connections of the analogue inputs are listed in the be-

low table.

Input No. Denotation Connector / Pin

Analogue input 1 3510 AnalogIn1 X04 / D

Analogue input 2 3520 AnalogIn2 X02 / F

Analogue input 3 3530 AnalogIn3 X02 / D

Analogue input 4 3540 AnalogIn4 X03 / J

Analogue input 5 3550 TempIn1 X02 / C

Analogue input 6 3560 TempIn2 X02 / V

Analogue input 7 3570 TempIn3 X03 / C

Analogue input 8 3580 TempIn4 X03 / D

Analogue input 9 3590 TempIn5 X03 / G

The analogue input 1 is provided for an analogue signal from the application and is by

standard used for the speed setpoint. The analogue inputs 2 to 4 are provided for engine

signals and are by standard used for boost pressure, oil pressure and rail pressure.

23.2.2.1 Units of the Analogue Inputs

Any of the four setpoint or pressure inputs can be configured at the factory either as a cur-

rent input or as a voltage input. In order to be able to display these inputs with their respec-

tive current or voltage units the control must be given information on the configuration of

the input. This is achieved by means the parameters 5510 AnalogIn1_Type through 5540

AnalogIn4_Type. The signification of the value to be entered will be:

0 = indication without unit (by digits only)

1 = indication by volts

2 = indication by mA




It is only the indication of the measuring value associated with the respective input that is affected by these parameters. They have no effect upon the hard-ware implementation as a current or voltage input. These parameters will be activated only following a reset.

23.2.2.2 Calibration of the Analogue Inputs

Sensors convert physical quantities (e.g., pressure) to electric quantities (voltage,

current). The control unit measures the voltages or currents and displays them using

the units previously selected ( 23.2.2.1 Units of the Analogue Inputs). To enable the

control to operate using the physical value transmitted by the sensor, it is necessary

that the control be provided information on the relation between the electrically

measured values and the actual physical quantities. This relation is established by

two reference values which are represented by the sensor output values associated

with the minimum and maximum measuring values described in the previous chap-

ter. With this information, the control is capable of normalizing the measured values

and of displaying them specified in per cent of the sensor range or directly in terms

of their physical values.

Each of the four analogue inputs is associated with a low reference value (parameters

1510, 1520, 1530, and 1540 AnalogInx_RefLow) and a high reference value (parame-

ters 1511, 1521, 1531, and 1541 AnalogInx_RefHigh).

Error threshold 16000

Error threshold 64000

63100

18700

4,8

1,0

3,5

0,5

3,5

0,5

[bar] [V] [bar]

BOOST PRESSURE SENSOR

VOLTAGE CONTROL MEASUREMENT

BOOST PRESSUREVALUE

Fig. 3: Measuring Procedure

A boost pressure sensor has been connected to input 3. Its measuring range is supposed to

be from 0.5 bar to 3.5 bar and is to be converted into voltages ranging from 1.0 V to 4.8 V.

Note


The parameter 3530 AnalogIn3 will display the voltage as measured, and the parameter

2904 BoostPressure will read the converted measuring value by bar.



982 BoostPressSensorLow 0,5 bar

983 BoostPressSensorHigh 3,5 bar

1530 AnalogIn3_RefLow 1,0 V

1531 AnalogIn3_RefHigh 4,8 V

4904 ChanType_BoostPress 0

5530 AnalogIn3_Type 1

Due to the non-linear behaviour of temperature sensor signals, two reference values

will not suffice to precisely determine temperature. For this reason, linearization

characteristics must be introduced. By standard, the following two curves have been

pre-defined at the factory:

Characteristic 1 is by standard configured for type PT 1000 sensors and is stored at

the parameter numbers from 7900 TempIn1:digit(0) through 7909 TempIn1:digit(9)

and 7920 TempIn1:T(0) through 7929 TempIn1:T(9).

Characteristic 2 is by standard configured for type PT 200 sensors and is stored at the

parameter numbers from 7940 TempIn2:digit(0) through 7949 TempIn2:digit(9) and

7960 TempIn2:T(0) through 7969 TempIn2:T(9).

By means of the parameters 5550, 5560, 5570, 5580, and 5590 TempInx_SensorType

it is decided by which characteristic the respective sensor is to be scaled.

5550 TempIn1_SensorType = X Linearization characteristic

X Characteristic

0 Pt1000

1 Ni1000

2 Pt100

3 Pt200

4 NTC 2 kOhm

Since these linearization characteristics are represented by normal parameters of the

control they can any time be adapted to other passive sensor types.




23.2.2.3 Filtering of Analogue Inputs

The measured value of an analogue input can be filtered through a digital filter. The

following table gives an overview of the filter parameters:

Input No. Parameter

1 1514 AnalogIn1_Filter




5 1554 TempIn1_Filter





Each of these parameters is to hold a filter value ranging from 1 to 255. The value 1

signifies that there will be no filtering. The filter values are used to calculate the time

constant by the following formula:

= 64

valueFilter [s]

For normally fast sensor changes filter value 8 will be best suited. For measuring

quantities changing more slowly, such as temperatures, a filter value of about 50 can

be used. The filtering time constant should correspond approximately to the sensor's

time constant.

Example of Parameterization:


1524 AnalogIn2_Filter 8

Time constant:

= 64

8 [s] = 0,125 s



23.2.2.4 Error Detection for Analogue Inputs

On failure of a sensor (e.g., by short circuit or cable break), the control will read

voltages or currents that are outside the normal measuring range. These irregular

measuring values can be used to define error limits and inadmissible operating

ranges by which the control can recognize that the sensor is at fault.

For the analogue inputs 1 to 4, the error limits are set using the unit selected for the

sensor ( 23.2.2.1 Units of the Analogue Inputs). The error limits for temperature

sensors must be specified in digits.

The parameters 1512, 1522, 1532, 1542, 1552, 1562, 1572, 1582, and 1592 Analog-

Inx_ErrorLow or TempInx_ErrorLow define the low error limits.

The parameters 1513, 1523, 1533, 1543, 1553, 1563, 1573, 1583, and 1593 Analog-

Inx_ErrorHigh or TempInx_ErrorHigh determine the high error limits.


The boost pressure sensor connected to analog input 3 and operating within a normal

voltage range of 1.0 V to 4.8 V is assumed to supply a voltage of 5 V in case of cable

break and a voltage of 0 V in case of a short circuit. The ranges below 0.6 V and

above 4.9 V are defined as inadmissible by the following parameters:



1530 AnalogIn3_RefLow 1,0 V

1531 AnalogIn3_RefHigh 4,8 V

1532 AnalogIn3_ErrorLow 0,6 V

1533 AnalogIn3_ErrorHigh 4,9 V

4904 ChanType_BoostPress 0

5530 AnalogIn3_Type 1

These error limits should not be chosen too close to the minimum and maximum val-

ues in order to prevent natural fluctuations of the values measured by the sensors

from being mistaken as errors. On the other hand, it must be ensured that short cir-

cuits or cable breaks are unambiguously recognized as such.

Once an error is detected, the error parameter (error flag) associated with the analogue in-

put is set. The actions to be taken when any such error occurs will be explained in the

chapter 28 Error Handling. If an analogue input is not used due to not being assigned to

a sensor it will not be monitored for errors.


23.2.2.5 Overview of the Parameters Associated with Analogue Inputs

For setpoint or pressure inputs, the following parameters are provided (with x repre-

senting the inputs 1..4):

15x0 AnalogInx_RefLow low reference value

15x1 AnalogInx_RefHigh high reference value

15x2 AnalogInx_ErrLow low error limit

15x3 AnalogInx_ErrHigh high error limit

15x4 AnalogInx_Filter filter value

35x0 AnalogInx actual measuring value in per cent in relation to the

reference values 1510 and 1511 (to be displayed

only if this channel is assigned to any sensor)

35x1 AnalogInx_Value actual measuring value of the input displayed by the

selected unit (digits, current or voltage)

55x0 AnalogInx_Type selection of the unit to be used for indication of the

actual measurement

For a temperature sensor, there exist the following parameters (with y representing

the inputs 1..5 and x standing for y+4 = 5..9):

15x2 TempIny_ErrorLow low error limit

15x3 TempIny_ErrorHigh high error limit

15x4 TempIny_Filter filter value

35x0 TempIny actual measuring value by degrees Celsius

35x1 TempIny_Value current measuring value by digits

55x0 TempIny_SensorType selection of the linearization characteristic for the

respective type of temperature sensor

Any inputs that have not been assigned a sensor will not be monitored for errors, and

it is only the measuring value 35x1 AnalogInx_Value or respectively TempIny_Value

that will be indicated.



23.2.3 PWM Input

The DARDANOS MVC01-20 Digital Control provides one PWM input that may be

used as a setpoint input or as a sensor input. This input is available via two plugs as

shown in the below table.

Input No. Connector / Pin

PWM 1 X03 / H

PWM 1 X04 / H

The connector X03 comprises mainly sensors of the engine whereas the connector X04

is provided for signals from the installation. Depending on the application, the PWM

signal may be assigned to either of the two pins, but both inputs must never be used si-

multaneously.

Transmission of the PWM signal is typically using a range from 5 % PWM to 95 %

PWM. To normalize the measuring range, the low reference value is to be entered in pa-

rameter 1500 PWMIn_RefLow and the high reference value in parameter 1501

PWMIn_RefHigh.

The measuring parameter 3500 PWMIn will display the PWM ratio by per cent, and the

measuring parameter 3501 FrequencyIn the PWM frequency.

Selection as a PWM sensor is made as described in chapter 21.1 Sensor overview,

and assignment to the sensor as explained in chapter 21.4 Assigning inputs to sen-

sors and setpoint adjusters

Assignment of Inputs to Sensors and Setpoint Adjusters.


The setpoint adjuster 2 is to set speed by means of a PWM ratio of between 5% and 95%.



1500 PWMIn_RefLow 5 %

1501 PWMIn_RefHigh 95 %

4901 ChanTyp_Setp2Ext 1




23.2.3.1 Error Detection at the PWM Input

The following failure causes will be detected at the PWM input and indicated as er-

rors of the assigned sensor:

- PWM signal is missing

- Frequency exceeds the maximum admissible frequency of 1000 Hz by 25%. In this

case, the PWM input is switched off in order to minimize interrupt stress for the

control.

- The PWM ratio is less than half the difference between 0% and the reference pa-

rameter 1500 PWMIn_RefLow or greater than half the difference between zwischen

1501 PWMIn_RefHigh and 100 %.


23.2.4 Digital Outputs

The DARDANOS MVC01-20 Digital Control provides up to six digital outputs. Besides

for other purposes, they are used to indicate errors and overspeed. Optionally, two of the

outputs can also be utilized as PWM outputs (23.2.5 PWM Outputs).

The connector/pin assignment can be seen from the below table

Output No. Connector / Pin

Digital output 1 X05 / K

Digital output 2 X05 / J

Digital output 3 X05 / H

Digital output 4 X05 / S

Digital output 5 X06 / G

Digital output 6 X07 / G

Digital output 7 X06 / F (optional)

Digital output 8 X07 / F (optional)

Every digital measurement (display value = 0 or 1) contained in the list of the measuring

parameters (parameters 2000 through 3999) can be assigned to a digital output. Assign-

ment is made by means of the parameters 880x DigitalOutx:Assign or 880x Digita-

lOutx:Param.

If output is to be by inverted measurings, the number of the measuring parameter must be

entered negative in sign.

The values currently output can be displayed by the parameters 2851 DigitalOut1 through

2856 DigitalOut8.

It should be noted that for the outputs 7 and 8 the parameters 4805

PWMOut1OrDigitalOut7 and respectively 4806 PWMOut2OrDigitalOut8 must addition-

ally be set to 0 to make sure that these outputs are configured as digital outputs.


Output 1 is to indicate „Synchronized with tooth gap“ (2007 SynchronToGap), output 2

„No alarm“ (3801 CommonAlarm) and output 5 „Engine stop“ (3803 EngineStopped):


851 DigitalOut1_Assign 2007

852 DigitalOut2_Assign -3801

855 DigitalOut5_Assign 3803

4805 PWMOut1OrDigitalOut7 0

The parameters 4805 PWMOut1OrDigitalOut7 and 4806 PWMOut2Or-

DigitalOut8 will be activated only following a

Basic Information DARDANOS 271 Note

3.10 Reset of control unit.



23.2.5 PWM Outputs

These outputs are available optionally. They are not acquired with the supplemental

90 V extension.

The digital outputs 7 and 8 ( 23.2.4 Digital Outputs) may also be utilized as PWM out-

puts. This is achieved by setting the parameters 4805 PWMOut1OrDigitalOut7 or 4806

PWMOut2OrDigitalOut8 respectively to 1.

These outputs are low-side switching. They can be used to drive power output stages,

e.g., for the common rail high-pressure pump or for signal transmission. When used as a

power output stage load may be directly connected. Using it as a signal output will re-

quire a pull-up resistor to be provided between the signal and the 24V output.


PWM output 1 (signal) X06 / F

PWM output 2 (signal) X07 / F

23.2.5.1 Assignment of Output Parameters to PWM Outputs

Any of the control's measurements (parameters 2000 through 3999) can be output via

the PWM outputs. This is again accomplished by assigning the parameter number of

the measurement to the desired output. For PWM output 1, the parameter number of

the measuring value is to be entered as value of the parameter 1600

PWMOut1_Assign. The same procedure applies to PWM output 2 and parameter

1605 PWMOut2_Assign


PWM output 1 is to be used to read out speed (indication parameter 2000 Speed), and

output 2 to read out injection quantity (indication parameter 2350 FuelQuantity).


1600 PWMOut1_Assign -2000

1605 PWMOut2_Assign -2350



Signal output can be inverted (e.g., small PWM ratio for high speeds) by en-tering the parameter numbers negative in sign. This will particularly be necessary when it is used as a signal output since the outputs are low-side switching. The effect of the parameter number being negative will be that there is a long low-phase for small output values and a short low-phase for large ones.

Note


23.2.5.2 Value Range of Output Parameters

When values are to be read out, it will sometimes not be the entire range that is of in-

terest but only a restricted one. This can be taken account of by adapting output to

the desired range by means of the parameters 1603 PWMOut1_ValueMin and 1604

PWMOut1_ValueMax and, respectively, 1608 PWMOut2_ValueMin and 1609

PWMOut2_ValueMax. As there are a great many different value ranges, these pa-

rameters are to be set to the required low and high output values specified in per cent

of the value range of the respective output parameter.

If the entire value range is required, the minimum value is to be set to 0 % and the

maximum value to 100 %.


Actual speed 2000 Speed is to be read out via a PWM output but with the output

range restricted to 500 rpm through 1500 rpm. With this restriction, 500 rpm will

correspond to 5 % and 1500 rpm to 95 %. As the values of this parameter have a

range from 0 to 4000 rpm, output will have to be adapted:

SPEED[ rpm ]

PWM-RATIO[%]

500

1500

5 95

Value range of

Va

lue

ran

ge o

f

outp

ut p

aram

eter

PWM output

0

Fig. 4: Reading Out a Parameter via a PWM Output




%5,12%100*4000

500=lueMinPWMOut1_Va

%5,37%100*4000

1500=lueMax PWMOut1_Va


1600 PWMOut1_Assign 2000

1603 PWMOut1_ValueMin 12,5 %

1604 PWMOut1_ValueMax 37,5 %


23.2.5.3 Value Range of PWM Outputs

Normally, a PWM ratio between 5 % and 95 % will be required only.

Adaptation of the output range is achieved by means of the parameters 1601

PWMOut1_RefLow and 1602 PWMOut1_RefHigh and the parameters 1606

PWMOut2_RefLow and 1607 PWMOut2_RefHigh respectively. The limit values may

be entered specified directly in per cent PWM ratio.

The frequency of the PWM signals can be adjusted from 128 Hz to 500 Hz by means

of the parameter 1625 PWMOut1Frequency , 1626 PWMOut2Frequency.


Actual speed 2000 Speed is to be read out via the PWM output 1 by a pulse-pause ra-

tio of 5 %..95 %. The range is to be restricted to 500 rpm through 1500 rpm, i.e.,

500 rpm will correspond to 5 % and 1500 rpm to 95 % PWM ratio. The PWM fre-

quency is to be 500 Hz:



1601 PWMOut1_RefLow 5 %

1602 PWMOut1_RefHigh 95 %

1603 PWMOut1_ValueMin 12,5 %

1604 PWMOut1_ValueMax 37,5 %

1625 PWMOut1Frequency 500 Hz


The parameters 4805 PWMOut1OrDigitalOut7 and 4806 PWMOut2Or-

DigitalOut8 will become active only following a 3.10 Reset of control

unit

Note



23.2.6 Analogue Outputs

The DARDANOS MVC01-20 Digital Control has two analogue outputs that may be

utilized for indicating speed or injection quantity or as setpoint outputs to other units.

The analogue outputs are configured at the factory as current outputs of 4..20 mA or as

voltage outputs of 0..5 V.

The connector / pin assignment can be seen from the below table..


Analogue output 1 X04 / F

Analogue output 2 X04 / G

All adjustments concerning the analogue outputs can be made very com-

fortably by means of 3.3 DcDesk 2000 as this programme provides a

special window for parameterizing the analogue outputs taking account of all aspects thus facilitating parameterization considerably.

23.2.6.1 Assignment of Output Parameters to Analogue Outputs

Every measurement of the control (parameters 2000 through 3999) can be read out

via the analogue outputs. This is achieved by entering the parameter number of the

measuring value that is to be output in the desired output parameter. For the analogue

output 1 the respective measuring parameter number is to be entered in the parameter

1640 AnalogOut1_Assign. Similarly for analogue output 2, the measuring parameter

number will have to be entered as value of the parameter 1645 AnalogOut2_Assign.


Speed (indication parameter 2000) is to be read out via analogue output 1 and injec-

tion quantity (indication parameter 2350) via analogue output 2.


1640 AnalogOut1_Assign 2000


Signal output can be inverted (e.g., low current for high speeds) by entering

the parameter numbers negative in sign.

Note

Note



23.2.6.2 Value Range of Output Parameters

When values are to be read out, it will sometimes not be the entire range that is of in-

terest but only a restricted one. This can be taken account of by adapting output to

the desired range by means of the parameters 1643 AnalogOut1_ValueMin and 1644

AnalogOut2_ValueMax and, respectively, 1648 AnalogOut2_ValueMin and 1649

AnalogOut2_ValueMax. As there are a great many different value ranges, these pa-

rameters are to be set to the required low and high output values specified in per cent

of the value range of the respective output parameter.

If the entire value range is required, the minimum value is to be set to 0 % and the

maximum value to 100 %.


Current speed 2000 Speed is to be read out via a current output of 4..20 mA, but

should be restricted to the range from 500 rpm to 1500 rpm. Given this restriction,

500 rpm will correspond to 4 mA and 1500 rpm to 20 mA. As the values for this pa-

rameter are ranging from 0 to 4000 rpm, output has to be adjusted accordingly:

SPEED[ rpm ]

CURRENT [mA]

500

1500

4 20

Value range of

Val

ue

ran

ge o

f

out

put p

ara

met

er

analogue output

0

Fig. 5: Reading Out a Parameter via an Analogue Output



1643 %5,12%100*4000

500=_ValueMin AnalogOut1

1644 %5,37%100*4000

1500=_ValueMax AnalogOut1



1643 AnalogOut1_ValueMin 12,5 %

1644 AnalogOut1_ValueMax 37,5 %

23.2.6.3 Value Range of Analogue Outputs

The analogue outputs can be hardware configured as current outputs with ranges of 0

to 25 mA or as voltage outputs with ranges of 0 to 5 V. Configuration is made at the

factory according to customer request.

In the majority of cases, particularly with current outputs, the standard output range of

4..20 mA will be desired rather than the maximum output range of approx. 0 ... 25 mA.

Adaptation of the output ranges is achieved through the parameters 1641

AnalogOut1_RefLow and 1642 AnalogOut1_RefHigh resp. through the parameters

1646 AnalogOut2_RefLow and 1647 AnalogOut2_RefHigh. The values to be entered

refer to the maximum output value and should be specified in per cent.


Current speed 2000 Speed is to be output out via a current output of 4..20 mA, but

with the range restricted to 500 rpm to 1500 rpm. With this restriction, 500 rpm will

correspond to 4 mA and 1500 rpm to 20 mA.

1641 %16%100*25

4=_RefLow AnalogOut1

1642 %80%100*25

20=_RefHigh AnalogOut1



1641 AnalogOut1_RefLow 10,8 %

1642 AnaloOut1_RefHigh 54,0 %

1643 AnalogOut1_ValueMin 12,5 %

1644 AnalogOut1_ValueMax 37,5 %

Due to tolerances of the components, the output ranges for identical para-meter values may vary for different controls. To ensure accuracy of output, the output ranges should be measured and the parameters accordingly ad-justed.

Note




Pin assignment for the various in- and outputs is dealt with in a chapter 25.2 Pin assign-

ment for MVC03-8. The specification of in- and outputs is described in a chapter 2.5

Specification of control unit DARDANOS MVC03-8

23.3.1 Digital inputs

The control DARDANOS MVC03-8 has nine digital inputs that mey be used as on-off-switches or as change-over switches for functions.

Four inputs for the determination of digital inputs 6 to 9 are executed as binary-only in-puts. For inputs 1 to 5 it is possible to have the applied voltage indicated in parameters 3605 BinaryIn1Voltage to 3609 BinaryIn5Voltage.

The digital inputs 2 and 3 are provided with a pull-up, so that here voltage is indicated even when the input is open. This must be taken into account during connection, i.e. for inputs 2 and 3 GND must be applied, for all other inputs supply voltage.

Assignment of the digital inputs to switching function has been described in chapter 22 Switching functions. The following table provides an overview of the digital inputs:

Input Measurement values Type

Digital input 1 3605 BinaryIn1Voltage pull-down

Digital input 2 3606 BinaryIn2Voltage pull-up

Digital input 3 3607 BinaryIn3Voltage pull-up



Digital input 6 - pull-down




Table 25: DARDANOS MVC03-8 digital inputs

Since the input signals are being debounced by the control circuit it is necessary that they be applied for at least 10 ms to be detected.

Note


23.3.2 Analogue inputs

The control DARDANOS MVC03-8 features 16 analogue inputs. Eleven of them can universally be used as setpoint inputs and pressure inputs, the other five as temperature inputs.

The universal input 9 may be configured as voltage input with 0…5 V or as current in-put with 0..25 mA. This function is enabled by the following parameter:

5550 AI9VoltOrCurrent = 0 current input

5550 AI9VoltOrCurrent = 1 voltage input

Using the voltage inputs 1 to 8, the connected sensors or setpoint adjusters may be pow-ered by the control with a voltage of 5 V. This must be communicated to the control with parameter

55xx AIxWithSensorSupply = 1 sensor on voltage input x is powered with 5V by the control

In this case, the sensor voltage measured at the input is not used as an absolute value but referred to the respective reference voltage and a relative measurement is carried out. The control offers four independent 5V reference voltage sources, so that two sen-sors may be powered by the same reference voltage. The value of the voltage references is indicated by the following parameters:

3512 SensorSupplyAI12 voltage reference for analogue input 1 and 2




If a sensor is connected to such a reference, the corresponding reference tension is

monitored and, in case of error, indicated in the sensor error status (refer to 28.5.4

Setpoint adjusters and sensors). The reaction to error is the same as for a sensor error ( 21.6 Modifying reactions to sensor errors).

The temperature input 2 is provided for NTC temperature sensors with a resistance of

approx. R25 = 10 k at 25°C. Only these sensors may be used, since the temperature measurements are very inaccurate if other sensors are connected.

Index Designation Type Input

3511 AnalogIn1_Value 1 Analogue input 1 0..5 V










3551 AnalogIn9_Value 9 Analogue input 9 0..5 V/0..25 mA

3556 AnalogIn10_Value 10 Analogue input 10 0..25 mA


12 3571 TempIn1_Value Temperature input 1 PT1000 / NTC2 k

13 3576 TempIn2_Value Temperature input 2 NTC10 k




Table 26: DARDANOS MVC03-8 analogue inputs

The temperature input 1,3,4 and 5 are provided for Ni1000, PT1000 or NTC tempera-

ture sensors with a resistance of ca. R25 = 2 k at 25°C. If necessary, PT100 or PT200 sensors may be connected in exceptional cases, whereby it should be noted that thermic measurement is not very accurate when this types of sensor are connected.

For temperature measurement an internal 5V voltage reference is used.

3592 SensorSupplyTemp voltage reference for temperature inputs

The reference voltage is monitored and any error that occurs is indicated in the error

state of the respective sensor (refer to 28.5.4 Setpoint adjusters and sensors). The re-

action to error is the same as for a sensor error ( 21.6 Modifying reactions to sensor errors).

Table 26 gives an overview of the analogue inputs. The index in the first columns is

to be used for parametrizing 24.2 Analogue inputs.

23.3.3 PWM inputs

The control DARDANOS MVC03-8 features two PWM inputs that may be used as set-point and pressure inputs.

Parameterizing of PWM inputs is described in chapter 24.3 PWM inputs.

23.3.4 Digital and PWM outputs

The control device DARDANOS MVC03-8 features a total of 13 freely configurable digital outputs, the first eight of which may also be used as PWM outputs. In addition, two special current outputs are available that may be used to address the pressure con-



trol valve for common rail high-pressure control. Parameter setting for these outputs is

described in a chapter 20.4 Rail pressure control by means of interphase transformer high-pressure pump.

In addition, the control features a frequency output that allows to output the signal of

speed pickup 1 (refer to 23.3.5 Frequency output).

Digital output 9 is provided for direct addressing of the starter (refer to 15.3 Start re-quest). Digital output 10 should be used to connect an error lamp. If this output is re-

quired for another purpose, it should be noted that this output is used for 28.6.2 Bootloader status indication, i.e. when the control is in bootloader mode, this output is addressed according to state. All other digital and PWM outputs may be used freely.

Outputs 1 to 8 may be used as digital or PWM outputs. To this purpose the correspond-ing configuration parameter must be set accordingly:

4801 DigChannel1PWMOrDO output configuration output 1








The following table provides an overview of digital and PWM outputs:

Power

(max.)

Frequency

range

Current

measurement Output No. Type

D/PWM output 1 high-side 2.5 A 50..300 Hz -




D/PWM output 5 high-side 2.5 A 50..500 Hz







Digital output 9 high-side 12 A - -

Digital output 10 low-side 0.5 A - -



Digital output 13 high-side 2.5 A - -

Frequency output 0.5 A 10..10000 Hz -

high-side CR current output 1 2.5 A 50..300 Hz

low-side

high-side CR current output 2 2.5 A 50..300 Hz

low-side

Table 27: DARDANOS MVC03-8 digital and PWM outputs

For outputs 5 to 8 the currently flowing current is measured and indicated in parameters

3615 DigOut5Feedback actual current at output 5




23.3.5 Frequency output

The control DARDANOS MVC03-8 offers the possibility to output the signal of speed pickup 1 from a frequency output. The signal is output only if speed pickup 1 shows no error and speed is within the range set by parameters

40 FreqOutSpeedMin minimum speed at speed pickup 1, starting from which the speed signal is output

41 FreqOutSpeedMax maximum speed at speed pickup 1, up to which the speed signal is output

Otherwise the output has operating voltage.

23.3.5.1 Error monitoring at frequency output

The frequency output can be monitored for short circuit. To this purpose, monitoring is to be set with parameter

15240 FreqOut_SupviseOn activation of monitoring at frequency output

Monitoring occurs only when the speed signal is looped through and output fre-quency is between 100 Hz and 2000 Hz.


Error Meaning

Short circuit to earth or broken cable 0 - Governor has detected a short circuit to earth or a broken cable. only error message

Check wiring and connected loads.

Short circuit to supply voltage 1 - Governor has detected a short circuit to supply voltage. only error message


Table 28: Possible errors of frequency output

The error message may be delayed by means of the parameter

11240 FreqOut_DelayTime delay time until error message

This means that the error state must remain active for at least the time set in this pa-rameter before an error message is generated. The following error messages may be output:

13025 ErrFrequencyOut error number of frequency output

The parameter

15241 FreqOut_HoldOrReset hold or reset error message

allows to configure whether the error message is to be reset when the error state is no longer present.


Pin assignment for the various in- and outputs is dealt with in a chapter 25.3 Pin assign-

ment for MVC04-6. The specification of in- and outputs is described in a chapter 2.6 Specification of control unit DARDANOS MVC04-6.

23.4.1 Digital inputs

The control DARDANOS MVC04-6 has 17 digital inputs that may be used as on-off-switches or as change-over switches for functions. All inputs feature a pull-down, i.e. it is not necessary to provide supply voltage.

Assignment of the digital inputs to switching function has been described in chapter 22 Switching functions.

Since the input signals are being debounced by the control circuit, it is necessary that they be applied for at least 10 ms to be detected.



23.4.2 Analogue inputs

The control DARDANOS MVC04-6 provides 16 analogue inputs. Twelve of these may be used as setpoint and pressure inputs and four as temperature inputs.

Using the voltage inputs 1 to 10, the connected sensors or setpoint adjusters may be powered by the control with a voltage of 5 V. This must be communicated to the control with parameter


In this case, the sensor voltage measured at the input is not used as an absolute value but referred to the respective reference voltage and a relative measurement is carried out. The control offers five independent 5V reference voltage sources, so that two sen-sors each may be powered by the same reference voltage. The value of the voltage ref-erences is indicated by the following parameters:






If a sensor is connected to such a reference, the corresponding reference tension is

monitored and, in case of error, indicated in the sensor error status (refer to 28.5.4

Setpoint adjusters and sensors). The reaction to error is the same as for a sensor error ( 21.6 Modifying reactions to sensor errors).


Index Input Designation Type














12 Analogue input 12 3566 AnalogIn12_Value 0..36 V

13 Temperature input 1 3571 TempIn1_Value PT1000 / NTC2 k




Table 29: DARDANOS MVC04-6 analogue inputs

The temperature input are conceived for Ni1000, PT1000 or NTC temperature sensors

with a resistance of ca. R25 = 2 k at 25°C. If necessary, PT100 or PT200 sensors may be connected in exceptional cases, whereby it should be noted that with this types of sensors thermic measurement is not very accurate.

For temperature measurement an internal 5V voltage reference is used.

3592 SensorSupplyTemp voltage reference for temperature inputs

The reference voltage is monitored and any error that occurs is indicated in the error

state of the respective sensor (refer to 28.5.4 Setpoint adjusters and sensors). The re-

action to error is the same as for a sensor error ( 21.6 Modifying reactions to sensor errors).

Table 29 gives an overview of the analogue inputs. The index in the first columns is

to be used for parametrizing 24.2 Analogue inputs.


The control device DARDANOS MVC04-6 features a total of 10 freely configurable digital outputs, the first nine of which may also be used as PWM outputs. In addition, two special current outputs are available that may be used to address the pressure con-trol valve (suction valve) for common rail high-pressure control. Parameter setting for

these outputs is described in a chapter 20.4 Rail pressure control by means of inter-phase transformer high-pressure pump.

The control device DARDANOS MVC04-6 in addition is available in a variant allow-ing fuel to be injected into the rail by means of injectors (so called high-pressure injec-

tion). Parameterizing of high-pressure injection is described in chapter 20.5 Rail pres-sure control by means of high-pressure injection.

Digital output 10 should be used to connect an error lamp. If this output is required for

another purpose, it should be noted that this output is used for 28.6.2 Bootloader status indication, i.e. when the control is in bootloader mode, this output is addressed according to state. All other digital and PWM outputs may be used freely.

Outputs 1 to 9 may be used as digital or PWM outputs. To this purpose, the correspond-ing configuration parameter must be set accordingly:











The following table provides an overview of digital and PWM outputs:

Power

(max.)

Frequency

range

Current

measurementOutput No. Type

D/PWM output 1 low-side 3 A 50..300 Hz





D/PWM output 5 low-side 0.5 A 50..300 Hz -




high-sideD/PWM output 9 0.5 A 50..300 Hz -

low-side


high-sideCR current output 1

(pressure control valve) 2 A 50..300 Hz

low-side


(pressure control valve) 2 A 50..300 Hz

low-side


(high-pressure injection) 10 A - -

low-side


(high-pressure injection) 10 A - -

low-side

Table 30: DARDANOS MVC04-6 digital and PWM outputs



For outputs 1 to 4, the currently flowing current is measured and indicated in parame-ters





If an inductive load is connected to one of the PWM outputs 5 to 8, for this output an external recovery diode must be provided.

Note

24 Parameterizing the control’s inputs and outputs



24.1 Digital inputs

Parameterizing of digital inputs is described in detail in chapter 22 Switching functions.

24.2 Analogue inputs

24.2.1 Calibration of analogue inputs

Sensors convert physical quantities (e.g., pressure) into electric quantities (voltage, cur-rent). The control measures voltage or current. To enable the control to operate with the physical value transmitted by the sensor, it is necessary to provide the control with two reference values that inform it about the relation between the electrically measured val-ues and the actual physical quantities. The two reference values are the sensor output values associated with the minimum and maximum measuring values described in the

previous chapter 21.5 Measuring ranges of sensors. With this information, the control is capable of standardizing the measured values and of displaying them specified in per cent of the sensor range or directly in terms of their physical values.

Each of the voltage/current inputs is associated with a low reference value (parameters 15xx AnalogInx_RefLow) and a high reference value (parameters 15xx Analog-Inx_RefHigh).


A boost pressure sensor has been connected to input 3. Its measuring range is supposed to be from 0.5 bar to 3.5 bar and is to be converted into voltages ranging from 0.5 V to 4.5 V. The parameter 3520 AnalogIn3 will display the voltage as measured, and the pa-rameter 2904 BoostPressure will read the converted measuring value by bar.



982 BoostPressSensorLow 0.5 bar

983 BoostPressSensorHigh 3.5 bar 1520 AnalogIn3_RefLow 0.5 V 1521 AnalogIn3_RefHigh 4.5 V

24.2.2 Linearization of temperature inputs

Due to the non-linear behaviour of temperature sensor signals, two reference values will not suffice to determine temperature with accuracy. For this reason, linearization char-acteristics are provided and stored in the software. Parameters 55xx TempInx_SensorType allow to configure which sensor type is used and, accordingly, which characteristic is to be employed, by entering an index.



Linearization characteristics are normally provided for the following sensors:

Characteristic index Sensor

0 PT1000

1 Ni1000

2 PT100

3 PT200

4 NTC2 k

Table 31: Index for temperature linearization

If other types of sensor are used, the characteristics may be adapted accordingly. This applies in particular to NTC sensors, since their characteristic is not standardized, but may change according to the sensor used.

Temperature (°C) PT1000 () Ni1000 ()

-50 803.1 742.6

-30 882.2 841.5

-15 941.2 919.2

0 1000.0 1000.0

10 1039.0 1055.5

20 1077.9 1112.4

30 1116.7 1170.6

40 1155.4 1230.1

50 1194.0 1291.1

60 1232.4 1353.4

75 1289.8 1449.7

90 1347.0 1549.4

105 1403.9 1652.7

120 1460.6 1759.8

150 1573.1 1986.6

Table 32: Linearization characteristic for PT1000 and Ni1000

The values defining temperature linearization are stored at the parameter positions fol-lowing 7800 TempLin1:Ohm(0) and 7820 TempLin1:T(0). To parameterize the charac-teristics up to 15 pairs of values are available for each.



Table 32 gives an overview of the linearization characteristics for PT1000 and Ni1000 sensors.

The following table gives an overview of the linearization characteristics for PT100 and PT200 sensors.

Temperature (°C) PT100 () PT200 ()

-40 84.3 169.2

0 100.0 200.0

100 138.5 275.4

200 176.2 348.5

300 213.7 419.2

350 231.5 453.7

400 249.8 487.6

450 268.0 520.9

500 286.2 553.6

550 304.5 585.7

600 322.8 617.3

650 341.2 648.3

700 359.8 678.7

800 397.4 737.7

1000 475.5 848.7

Table 33: Linearization characteristic for PT100 and PT200

The following table shows the linearization characteristics for an NTC2 k sensor. It should be noted that this characteristic applies only to a specific NTC sensor. According to the sensor used, the characteristic will have to be verified and, if necessary, adapted.

Temperature (°C) NTC2 k ()

-40 48153.0

-30 26854.0

-20 15614.0

-10 9426.0

0 5887.0

15 3074.9

30 1715.4



Temperature (°C) NTC2 k ()

45 1008.6

60 612.3

75 382.9

90 246.2

100 186.0

110 142.1

120 109.7

130 85.5

Table 34: Linearization characteristic for NTC2 k


It is wished to linearize the temperature sensor at temperature input 1 by means of charac-teristic 3.


5570 TempIn1_SensorType 3

24.2.3 Filtering of analogue inputs

The measured value of an analogue input can be filtered through a digital filter. The re-spective parameters are stored at the numbers 15xx AnalogInx_Filter.

In these parameters the time constant is entered in seconds. A value of 0.00 s corre-sponds to no filtering. For normally fast sensor changes, a filter value 0.10 s will be ap-propriate. For measuring quantities that change more slowly, such as temperatures, a fil-ter value of about 1.00 s may be used. The filtering time constant should correspond ap-proximately to the sensor's time constant.

For measuring values requiring quick control (e.g. rail pressure) no filtering is allowed.



1519 AnalogIn2_Filter 0,10 s

24.2.4 Error detection for analogue inputs

If a sensor fails (e.g., by short circuit or cable break), the control will read voltages or currents lying outside the normal measuring range. These irregular measuring values can be used to define inadmissible operating ranges by which the control can recognize that the sensor is at fault.



For analogue inputs, the error limits are entered in the respective electric unit. The error limits for temperature sensors must be specified in ohm.

The parameters 15xx AnalogInx_ErrorLow and TempInx_ErrorLow define the lower er-ror limits.

The parameters 15xx AnalogInx_ErrorHigh and TempInx_ErrorHigh determine the up-per error limits.


The boost pressure sensor connected to analogue input 3 and operating within a normal voltage range of 0.5 V to 4.5 V is assumed to supply a voltage of 5 V in case of cable break and a voltage of 0 V in case of a short circuit. The ranges below 0.3 V and above 4.7 V are defined as inadmissible by the following parameters:



1520 AnalogIn3_RefLow 0.50 V 1521 AnalogIn3_RefHigh 4.50 V 1522 AnalogIn3_ErrorLow 0.30 V 1523 AnalogIn3_ErrorHigh 4.70 V

These error limits should not be chosen too close to the minimum and maximum values

in order to prevent natural fluctuations of the values measured by the sensors from be-

ing mistaken as errors. On the other hand, it must be ensured that short circuits or cable

breaks are unambiguously recognized as such.

For most of the voltage sensors there is the possibility to supply the connected sensors

and setpoint adjusters with a 5V voltage from the control unit (refer to 23.3.2

Analogue inputs and 23.4.2 Analogue inputs). This must be communicated to the con-trol with parameter


In this case, the sensor voltage measured at the input is not used as an absolute value but referred to the respective reference voltage and a relative measurement is carried out. The control offers several independent 5V reference voltage sources, so that two sensors may be powered by the same reference voltage.

When a sensor is connected to such a reference, the respective reference voltage is monitored.

Once an error is detected, the error parameter associated with the analogue input and

with the respective sensor is set. For the actions to be taken in the event that any such

error occurs, please refer to the chapter 21.6 Modifying reactions to sensor errors. If



an analogue input is not used due to not being assigned to a sensor it will not be moni-

tored for errors.


Error Meaning

0 Signal short circuit to earth - The measuring value of the respective input value is below the lower error

threshold. Reaction according to the configuration of sensor error handling.

Check sensor cable.

Check sensor.

Check parameters for error thresholds.

1 Signal short circuit to supply voltage - The measuring value of the respective input value is below the upper error


Check sensor cable.

Check sensor.


2 Sensor supply voltage, cable break or short circuit to earth - The measured value of the respective reference voltage is below 4.5 V. - Monitoring active only with temperature input or if sensor referencing is active. Reaction according to the configuration of sensor error handling.

Check sensor cable.

Check sensor.

3 Sensor supply voltage, short circuit to supply voltage - The measured value of the respective reference voltage is greater than 5.5 V. - Monitoring active only with temperature input or if sensor referencing is active. Reaction according to the configuration of sensor error handling.

Check sensor cable.

Check sensor.

Table 35: Error detection for analogue inputs



24.2.5 Overview of the parameters associated with analogue inputs

For inputs relating to setpoints and pressure the following parameters are provided:

Parameter Meaning

15x0/5 AnalogInx_RefLow lower reference value

15x1/6 AnalogInx_RefHigh upper reference value

15x2/7 AnalogInx_ErrLow lower error limit

15x3/8 AnalogInx_ErrHigh upper error limit

15x4/9 AnalogInx_Filter filtering constant

35x0/5 AnalogInx current measuring value in electric unit

Table 36: Parameters for analogue inputs

For temperature inputs the following parameters are provided:

Parameter Meaning

15x2/7 TempIny_ErrorLow lower error limit

15x3/8 TempIny_ErrorHigh upper error limit

15x4/9 TempIny_Filter filtering constant

35x0/5 TempIny_Value current measuring value in ohm

55x0 TempIny_SensorType selection of the linearization characteristic for the temperature sensor

7800 TempLin1:Ohm(x) ff linearization characteristics

Table 37: Parameters for temperature inputs

Any inputs that have not been assigned a sensor will not be monitored for errors, and it is only the measuring value 35xx AnalogInx_Value or respectively TempIny_Value that will be indicated.

24.3 PWM inputs

Transmission of the PWM signal is typically using a range from 5 % PWM to 95 % PWM. To standardize the measuring range, the lower reference value is to be entered in the pa-rameters 150x PWMInx_RefLow and the upper reference value in the parameters 15x PWMInx_RefHigh.

The measuring parameters starting from 3500 PWMInx will indicate the PWM ratio, and the measuring parameters starting from 3501 FrequencyInx the PWM frequency.


Selection as a PWM sensor is made as described in chapter 21.3 Configuration of sen-

sors. Assignment to the sensors is to be conducted as explained in chapter 21.4 Assigning inputs to sensors and setpoint adjusters.


The setpoint adjuster 2 is to set speed by means of a PWM ratio of between 5% and 95%.




1500 PWMIn1_RefLow 5 %

1501 PWMIn1_RefHigh 95 %

4901 ChanTyp_Setp2Ext 1

24.3.1 Error detection at PWM inputs

The following failure causes will be detected at the PWM input and indicated as errors of the assigned sensor:

- PWM signal is missing.

- Frequency exceeds the maximum admissible frequency of 1000 Hz by 25%. In this case, the PWM input is switched off in order to minimize interrupt stress for the control.

- The PWM ratio lies outside the error limits, that are equivalent to half the lower reference parameter (starting from 150x PWMIn1_RefLow) and the average be-tween the higher reference parameter (starting from 150x PWMIn1_RefHigh) and 100%.

24.4 PWM outputs

The controls DARDANOS MVC03-8 and DARDANOS MVC04-6 feature several PWM outputs that may be used to output different types of values. The characteristics of the

PWM outputs and the admissible frequency range are described in chapter 23.3.4 Digital

and PWM outputs and 23.4.3 Digital and PWM outputs. As an example for parameter setting of a PWM output here output 1 is used: Parameterizing of the other outputs follows the same procedure.

The HEINZMANN PC programme 3.3 DcDesk 2000 provides an easy and comfortable utility to parameterize PWM outputs. All parameters required for configuration are visualized together is a dedicated window. Note



24.4.1 PWM output frequency

According to their type, PWM outputs have a different frequency (refer to chapter

23.3.4 Digital and PWM outputs and 23.4.3 Digital and PWM outputs).This function is enabled by the following parameters:

1651 PWMOut1_Frequency output frequency for PWM output 1









24.4.2 Assignment of output parameters to PWM outputs

Every parameter of the control unit can be read out via PWM outputs. To this purpose, all you have to do is to assign its parameter number to the desired output in 1600 PWMOut1_Assign. This makes sense only for measurement or indication values with a value range greater than [0,1], but in the control itself no limitations are implemented.

Signal output can be inverted (e.g., small PWM ratio for high speeds) by entering the parameter numbers negative in sign. The effect of the parameter number being entered with a negative sign will be that there is a long high-phase for small output values and a short high-phase for large ones.


PWM output 1 is to be used to read out speed (indication parameter 2000 Speed), and output 2 to read out injection quantity (indication parameter 2350 FuelQuantity).






24.4.3 Value Range of output parameters

When values are to be read out, it will sometimes not be the entire range that is of inter-est but only a restricted one. Therefore, output via the first PWM output can be adapted to the desired range by means of the 1603 PWMOut1_ValueMin and 1604 PWMOut1_ValueMax. As there are a great many different value ranges, these parame-ters are to be set to the required low and high output values specified in per cent of the value range of the respective output parameter.

SPEED[ rpm ]

PWM-RATIO[%]

500

1500

5 95

Value range of

Va

lue

ran

ge o

f

outp

ut p

aram

eter

PWM output

0

Figure 79: Reading out a parameter via a PWM output

If the entire value range is required, the minimum value is to be set to 0 % and the maximum value to 100 %.

The HEINZMANN PC programme 3.3 DcDesk 2000 features a special window for PWM outputs, where the value ranges of the output parameters are listed with their physical values and the respective percentage values are calculated.


Actual speed 2000 Speed is to be read out via a PWM output but the range is to be re-stricted to 500 rpm - 1500 rpm, i.e., 500 rpm will correspond to 5 % and 1500 rpm to 95 %. As the values of this parameter have a range from 0 to 4000 rpm, output will have to be adapted:

Note



%5.12%100*4000

500=lueMin PWMOut1_Va

%5.37%100*4000

1500=lueMax PWMOut1_Va



1603 PWMOut1_ValueMin 12.5 %

1604 PWMOut1_ValueMax 37.5 %

24.4.4 Value range of PWM outputs

Normally, only a PWM ratio between 5 % and 95 % will be required.

To adapt the output range of the first PWM output the parameters 1601 PWMOut1_RefLow and 1602 PWMOut1_RefHigh are to be used. The limit values may be specified directly in per cent PWM ratio.


Actual speed 2000 Speed is to be read out via the PWM output 1 by a pulse-pause ratio of 5 %..95 %. The range is to be restricted to 500 rpm - 1500 rpm, i.e., 500 rpm will correspond to 5 % and 1500 rpm to 95 % PWM ratio.



1601 PWMOut1_RefLow 5 % 1602 PWMOut1_RefHigh 95 % 1603 PWMOut1_ValueMin 12.5 %

1604 PWMOut1_ValueMax 37.5 %

24.4.5 Error monitoring of PWM outputs

PWM outputs are monitored for cable break, short circuit and overcurrent. For outputs with current feedback measuring, it is additionally possible to monitor current limit in-fraction, and for controlled current outputs to monitor a control deviation. Monitoring and parameterizing of PWM outputs is heavily dependent on the electric characteristics of the connected load.

Monitoring of cable break, short circuit and overcurrent is activated with the parameters

151x0 DOPWMx_SupviseOn activates monitoring of output x

The error message may be delayed by means of the parameter

111x0 DOPWMx_DelayTime delay time until error message

This means that the error state must remain active for at least the time set in this pa-rameter before an error message is generated.



Monitoring is possible only when both the high-phase and the low-phase of the PWM signal are greater than 150 µs. Delay time must be adjusted to output frequency since at 50 Hz a period is 20 ms long and the delay time therefore must in any case be longer than this value.

In addition, the hardware at PWM outputs is monitored for plausibility. In case of unlikely signals an error message is read out, which may point out a faulty transistor.

For outputs with current feedback measurement there is the additional possibility to monitor whether the current flowing at any one moment is within an admissible range. This supervision can be enabled with the parameters

151x2 DOPWMx_SupCurrMinOn activation of monitoring whether current is lower than lower current limit

151x3 DOPWMx_SupCurrMaxOn activation of monitoring whether current is higher than upper current limit

These thresholds are set with the parameters

111x2 DOPWMx_CurrentMin lower current threshold

111x3 DOPWMx_CurrentMax upper current threshold

An error message is generated when current is higher or lower than the respective thresholds for a period longer than the following parameter. Monitoring the lower threshold might be useful for eventualities like a cable break.

111x4 DOPWMx_CurrentDelay delay time until error message

When monitoring of minimum current is active, it is also monitored whether current is higher than the admissible minimum current in not energized outputs (0% PWM). If this is the case for the time 111x4 CROutx_CurrentDelay, the according error message is generated.

In addition, it is possible to monitor the admissible difference between nominal current and measured current, whereby different error messages are generated according to the direction of deviation. This error message too is generated only after a delay time.

151x5 DOPWMx_SupDeviatOn activation of monitoring for admissible govern-ing deviation

111x5 DOPWMx_DeviationMax maximum admissible control deviation

111x6 DOPWMx_DeviationDelay delay time until error message


Note



Error Meaning

0 Signal short circuit to earth Cable broken (only for low-side outputs) - Governor has detected a short circuit to earth or a broken cable. only error message


1 Short circuit to supply voltage Cable broken (only for high-side outputs) - Governor has detected a short circuit to supply voltage or a broken cable. only error message


2 Transistor error - The control has detected an error in the transistor of the respective output. only error message


3 Control deviation is negative - The difference between measured power and set power is higher than a set

value for a set interval of time. - Monitored only if the function is active. only error message


4 Control deviation is positive - The difference between measured power and set power is higher than a set



5 Threshold infraction while switched off - Although the output should not be energized, a current stronger than a param-

eterized threshold is flowing. only error message


6 Threshold infraction minimum value - Current is lower than admissible minimum value for a set interval of time. only error message


7 Threshold infraction maximum value - Current is higher than admissible maximum value for a set interval of time. only error message



Error Meaning


Table 38: Possible errors for PWM outputs

The parameter

152x1 DOPWMx_HoldOrReset hold or reset error message

allows to configure whether the error message is to be reset when the error state is no longer present. This applies comprehensively to all error messages on the respective output.

24.5 Digital outputs

A digital output may be assigned to each measurement or indication value with value range [0,1] in parameter list 2. In addition, for the output of error parameters it is possible to read out single errors of an error state. To this purpose, single bits of an error state are selected by means of a mask parameter to determine the specific errors. If more than one error bit is selected, the output becomes active as soon as at least one error bit is set.

Two output variants are possible, only one of which is implemented in any specific firm-ware version of the control unit. Either each digital output is assigned exactly one output value (so called simple allocation) or several values may be assigned to each digital output (so called multiple allocation).

The values currently output are displayed by parameter 2851 DigitalOut1 and subsequent parameters.

The parameter settings described in the following sections – in particular mul-tiple allocation – can be achieved in an easy and comfortable way using a

dedicated window of 3.3 DcDesk 2000.

24.5.1 Simple allocation

Assignment is made by means of the parameters starting from 8801 DigitalOut1:Assign. The parameter numbers of the required measurement and indications values must be en-tered here. If inverted output of the measurement is desired, the number of the measur-ing parameter is to be entered negative in sign.

To mask the error state parameters, the parameters starting from 8960 Digita-lOut1:Mask are provided.

Note




Output 1 is to indicate "Fuel quantity limited by boost pressure" ( 2714

BoostLimitActive) and output 2 to indicate "Oil pressure warning" ( 3010 Er-rOilPressWarn – error bit 5). You wish output 3 to be active as long as engine

start has not been enabled (i.e., as long as 3806 EngineRelease has not been ac-tivated).


8801 DigitalOut1_Assign 2714 8802 DigitalOut2_Assign 3010 8803 DigitalOut3_Assign -3806 8960 DigitalOut1:Mask 0000 Hex 8970 DigitalOut2:Mask 0020 Hex 8980 DigitalOut3:Mask 0000 Hex

24.5.2 Multiple allocation

Using multiple allocation, up to 8 output values may be assigned to each digital output. The maximum amount is defined in the firmware and cannot be augmented. But it is possible to use less values that the maximum.

This type of allocation makes sense whenever it is necessary to visualize a number of error parameters greater than the number of available digital outputs. The related pa-rameter numbers must be entered in the parameter fields starting from 8800 Digita-lOut1:Param(0)..(7). If you wish to negate an allocation parameter, its parameter num-ber must be entered with negative sign.

The current values of these single output parameter now may either be linked by logic operator for output on the digital output or configured to produce different blinking codes. The preferred alternative may be chosen separately for each digital output.

To do this, indicate the logical link you wish to use or the value 80 Hex if your prefer a blinking code in the parameters starting from 4851 DigitalOut1:Logic Enter the value 0 if only one parameter was assigned to the output.

24.5.2.1 Logical operators

The value for the logical operation in 4851 DigitalOut1:Logic consists of single bits. Bit value 0 corresponds to the logic operator AND and bit value 1 to the logic opera-tor OR. The lowest bit represents the operator between the allocation parameters 1 and 2, the following bit between assignment parameters 2 and 3 and so forth. With a maximum of eight allocation parameters this allows a maximum of seven operators, equivalent to a value between 0 and 7F Hex. The processing sequence is from the lowest to the highest allocation parameter. Bracketing is not possible.


24.5.2.2 Blinking signals

If, instead of a logical operation the value 80 Hex was entered in 4851 Digita-lOut1:Logic, the digital output visualizes blinking signals. If the first allocation pa-rameter is active, the output emits the following blinking signal:

2* short, 1* long, 2* short

for the second allocation parameter


for the third


and so on. In between signals there is a pause to better distinguish the single errors. If, for instance, both the first and the third allocation parameters are active, the re-sulting blinking signal is as follows:

2x short 1x long 2x short 2x short 2x short 3x long pause

Figure 80: Blinking signal

By counting along with the long blinks it is possible to determine which parameter is active. The operator of the system must be informed about the meaning of the blink signals.

24.5.2.3 Blinking and continuous light

Operators frequently wish to visualize error messages in form of blinking signals, and to allocate a continuous light to one or more specific errors of particular impor-tance. The parameters starting from 4880 DigitalOut1:Prior can be used for this pur-pose.

Each set bit means that the active state of the related parameter in 8800 Digita-lOut1:Param(0)..(7) is to generate a continuous light on the digital output. All other values with a 0 in the priority bit continue to generate blinking signals – please note that these are visible only if no value of higher priority is active.

It is recommended to start the allocation of parameter numbers to the digital output from the blinking signals and to put the ones with high priority at the end of the field.


The control unit allows to indicate up to four parameters for each digital output.

output 1 is to blink once if oil pressure is low (3010 ErrOilPressure – error bit 5), blink twice if coolant temperature is high (3012 ErrCoolantTemp – error bit 5),




blink thrice if exhaust gas temperature is high (3016 ErrExhaustTemp – error bit 5), be lit continuously if oil pressure is so low that engine had to be stopped (3010 ErrOilPress – error bit 15)

output 2 is to indicate pickup errors (3001 ErrPickUp1 or 3002 ErrPickUp2, all error bits for each)

output 3 is to be active as long as engine start has not been enabled (i.e., as long as 3806 Engi-neRelease has not been activated).


4851 DigitalOut1:Logic 80 Hex (blinking) 4852 DigitalOut2:Logic 01 Hex (logical OR) 4853 DigitalOut3:Logic 00 Hex (single parameter) 4880 DigitalOut1:Prior 08 Hex (4. par. continuous output) 8800 DigitalOut1:Param(0) 3010

8801 DigitalOut1:Param(1) 3012





8820 DigitalOut3:Param(0) -3806 8960 DigitalOut1:Mask(0) 0020 Hex 8961 DigitalOut1:Mask(1) 0020 Hex 8962 DigitalOut1:Mask(2) 0020 Hex 8963 DigitalOut1:Mask(3) 8000 Hex 8970 DigitalOut2:Mask(0) FFFF Hex 8971 DigitalOut2:Mask(1) FFFF Hex 8980 DigitalOut3:Mask(0) 0000 Hex

24.5.3 Error monitoring of digital outputs

Digital outputs are monitored for cable break, short circuit and overcurrent. For outputs with current feedback measurement it is additionally possible to use the flowing current for error assessment. Monitoring and parameterizing of digital outputs is heavily de-pendent on the electric characteristics of the connected loads.

Monitoring is activated with the parameter

151x0 DOPWMy_SupviseOn monitoring of output

The electrical characteristics of the connected load require a short interruption of output monitoring whenever output level changes. This delay time is set with the following pa-rameter:

111x0 DOPWMy_DelayTime delay time after edge change


For outputs with current feedback measurement there is the additional possibility to monitor whether the current flowing at any one moment is within the admissible range. If output level is "high", flowing current must be higher than

111x2 DOPWMy_CurrentMin lower current threshold

otherwise an error message is generated.

This type of monitoring may also be useful to recognize a cable break.

In addition, the hardware is monitored for plausibility. In case of unlikely signals an er-ror message is read out, which may point out a faulty transistor.



Error Meaning

Signal short circuit to earth 0 Cable broken (only for low-side outputs) - Governor has detected a short circuit to earth or a broken cable. only error message


Short circuit to supply voltage 1 Cable broken (only for high-side outputs) - Governor has detected a short circuit to supply voltage or a broken cable. only error message


Transistor error 2 - The control has detected an error in the transistor of the respective output. only error message


Table 39: Possible digital sensor errors

The parameter

151x1 DOPWMy_HoldOrReset hold or reset error message

allows to configure whether the error message is to be reset when the error state is no longer present. This applies in common to all error messages.

25 Pin assignment

25 Pin assignment

The assignment of all connectors/pins is shown in the tables below. A (+) signifies the supply

for the respective sensor which is not necessarily identical to the supply of the control unit.

25.1 Pin assignment for MVC01-20

Connector X01 - MVC01-20


25 Pin assignment

Connector X02 – MVC01-20



25 Pin assignment




25 Pin assignment

Connector X01: Dialogue/Diagnosis Connector X03: Sensors Pin Type Assignment Pin Type Assignment

3 (K) TxD A (+) 2 (L) RxD J Signal Analogue Input 4

4 (+) K (-)

5 (-) C Signal Temperature Input 3

1 n.c. B (-)

D Signal Temperature Input 4

L (-) Connector X02: Sensors

G Signal Temperature Input 5 Pin Type Assignment

L (+) N (-)

K Signal Speed / position sensor 1 E Signal Digital Input 10 U (-) F Signal Digital Input 11

J (+) M (+)

H Signal Speed / position sensor 2 H Signal PWM-/Frequency Intput T (-) I (-)

A (+)

M Signal Camshaft index adjuster Connector X04: System signals N (-) Pin Type Assignment

G (+) E (+) F Signal Analogue Input 2 D Signal Analogue Input 1 S (-) M (-)

E (+) F Signal Analogue Output 1 D Signal Analogue Input 3 G Signal Analogue Output 2 R (-) N (-)

C Signal Temperature Input 1 H Signal PWM-/Frequency Input B (-) I (-)

V Signal Temperature Input 2 A (H) P (-) J (L) CAN-bus 1

K (-)

C (H)

B (L) CAN-bus 2 L (-)


25 Pin assignment


Connector X05: System signals Connector X07: Magnetic valves Bank B Pin Type Assignment Pin Type Assignment L (+) A Signal Magnetic valve MVB1

M (+) B Signal Magnetic valve MVB2

T (-) C Signal Magnetic valve MVB3

N (-)

Voltage supply

D Signal Magnetic valve MVB4

A Signal Digital Input 1 E Signal Magnetic valve MVB5 B Signal Digital Input 2 P (+) Supply MVB1 … MVB5

C Signal Digital Input 3 M Signal Magnetic valve MVB6 D Signal Digital Input 4 L Signal Magnetic valve MVB7 E Signal Digital Input 5 K Signal Magnetic valve MVB8 F Signal Digital Input 6 J Signal Magnetic valve MVB9 G Signal Digital Input 7 H Signal Magnetic valve MVB10 P Signal Digital Input 8 T (+) Supply MVB6 … MVB10

R Signal Digital Input 9 G Signal Digital Output 6

K Signal Digital Output 1 J Signal Digital Output 2

F PWM Output 2 / Digital Output 8 (optional)

H Signal Digital Output 3 N n.c.

S Signal Digital Output 4 S optional bank amplifier 2,

R current controled

Connector X06: Magnetic valves Bank A Pin Type Assignment

A Signal Magnetic valve MVA1 B Signal Magnetic valve MVA2 C Signal Magnetic valve MVA3 D Signal Magnetic valve MVA4 E Signal Magnetic valve MVA5 P (+) Supply MVA1 … MVA5

M Signal Magnetic valve MVA6 L Signal Magnetic valve MVA7 K Signal Magnetic valve MVA8 J Signal Magnetic valve MVA9 H Signal Magnetic valve MVA10 T (+) Supply MVA6 … MVA10

F PWM Output 1 / Digital Output 7 (optional)

G Signal Digital Output 5 N n.c.

S optional bank amplifier 1, R current controled

25 Pin assignment



25 Pin assignment

Connector D Connector D

Pin Type Assignment Pin Type Assignment

1 (+) 7 Ref

2 (+)

15 Gnd

16 Gnd

Voltage supply power side

4 (+)

3 Gnd Voltage supply

electronics

68 Signal Terminal 15

8 (H)

45 (H)

9 (L)

40 (L)

10 Gnd

54 120

CAN bus 1

22 (H)

59 (H)

23 (L)

41 (L)

24 Gnd

55 120

CAN bus 2

36 TxD

37 RxD

38 Gnd

Dialogue/Diagnosis

50 (+)

51 Signal

52 Gnd

LSB

13 Signal

12 Gnd Digital output 5

27 Signal

26 Gnd Digital output 6

6 Signal Analogue input 1

5 Gnd

21 Ref


19 Gnd

35 (+)


33 Gnd

49 (+)


47 Gnd

63 (+)


61 Gnd

60 SignalTemperature input 1

46 Gnd

64 Signal

65 Signal

Digital input 2

66 Signal

Digital input 3

67 Signal

Digital input 4

69 Signal

Digital input 5

Digital input 6

Digital input 7 70 Signal

53 Signal

39 Signal

Digital output 1

25 Signal

Digital output 2

11 Signal

Digital output 3

14 Signal

Digital output 4

Digital output 10 (LS)

28 Signal Digital output 11 (LS)

Digital output 12 (LS) 42 Signal

56 Signal Speed signal output


25 Pin assignment

Connector C Connector C

Pin Type Assignment Pin Type Assignment

22 (H) 24 SignalMagnetic valve MVA 1 Frequency input 1

8 (L) 23 Gnd

18 (H) 25 SignalMagnetic valve MVB 1 Frequency input 2

4 (L) 26 Gnd

21 (H) 63 Ref Magnetic valve MVA 2

7 (L)

17 (H)

3 (L) Magnetic valve MVB 2

20 (H)

6 (L) Magnetic valve MVA 3

16 (H)


19 (H)

5 (L) Magnetic valve MVA 4

15 (H)


9 (H)

10 (L)

Current output /

High pressure pump 1

11 (H)

12 (L) Current output /

High pressure pump 2

69 (+)

55 Signal

41 Gnd

Speed / position sensor 1

68 (+)

54 Signal

40 Gnd

Speed / position sensor 2

70 (+)

56 Signal

42 Gnd

Camshaft index adjuster

43 (+)

57 (+)

Supply output

Supply output


35 Gnd

62 Ref


34 Gnd

61 Ref


33 Gnd

60 Ref


32 Gnd

59 Ref


31 Gnd

58 Ref


30 Gnd


36 Gnd


37 Gnd


38 Gnd


39 Gnd


25 Pin assignment

Connector C


Pin Type Assignment

64 Signal

65 Signal

Digital input 1 Digital input 8

Digital input 9 66 Signal

29 Signal Digital output 9

Digital output 13 67 Signal

13 Signal Digital output 7 27 Gnd

14 Signal

Digital output 8 28 Gnd

25 Pin assignment


Connector X1-L Connector X1-R Pin Type Assignment Pin Type Assignment 1 Ref +5V 6 (+)

10 Signal 12 (+) Analog input 1

18 Gnd 7 Gnd Voltage supply power side

2 Ref +5V 13 Gnd 11 Signal 18 (+) Analog input 2

Voltage supply electronics 19 Gnd 19 Gnd 3 Ref +5V 26 Signal Terminal 15

12 Signal 1 (L) Analog input 3

20 Gnd 8 (H) CAN bus 1

28 SHLD Shield 14 Gnd 4 Ref +5V 2 (L)

13 Signal 9 (H) Analog input 4 CAN bus 2

21 Gnd 15 Gnd 5 Ref +5V 3 SHLD Shield

14 Signal 4 (K) Analog input 5

22 Gnd 10 (L) 6 Ref +5V 16 (+ Ubat)

ISO 9141 / HZM

15 Signal 17 Gnd Analog input 6

23 Gnd 5 (K)

31 SHLD Shield 11 (L) Dialogue/Diagnosis 7 Ref +5V 16 (+ Ubat) HZM

16 Signal 17 Gnd Analog input 7

24 Gnd 24 SHLD Shield 8 Ref +5V 21 Signal

Temperature input 4 17 Signal 23 Gnd Analog input 8

25 Gnd 22 Signal Temperature input 5

9 Signal 23 Gnd 25 Gnd

Analog input 11 (0..36V) 20 SHLD Shield

34 SHLD Shield 25 Signal Digital output 9 (DOE; Low 0,7A) 27 Signal Digital input 1 30 Signal Digital input 2 33 Signal Digital input 3 26 Signal

Temperature input 1 18 Gnd 29 Signal

Temperature input 2 20 Gnd 32 Signal

Temperature input 3 23 Gnd


25 Pin assignment

Connector X1-L – MVC04-6

Connector X1-R – MVC04-6


25 Pin assignment

X2-L X2-R Pin Type Assignment Pin Type Assignment 2 +12V 7 (H)

Magnetic valve MVA 1 11 Signal 6 (L) Speed/position sensor 1

19 Gnd 5 (H) Magnetic valve MVB 1

4 +12V 10 (L)

13 Signal 13 (H) Speed/position sensor 2 Magnetic valve MVA 2

21 Gnd 12 (L)

3 +12V 3 (H) Magnetic valve MVB 2

12 Signal 16 (L) Camshaft index sensor

20 Gnd 19 (H) Magnetic valve MVA 3

27 SHLD Shield 18 (L)

6 Ref +5V 2 (H) Magnetic valve MVB 3

15 Signal 4 (L) Analog input 9

23 Gnd 11 SHLD Shield

5 Ref +5V 1 (H) Current output /

14 Signal 8 (L) High pressure pump 1 Analog input 10

22 Gnd 14 (H) Current output /

28 SHLD Shield 20 (L) High pressure pump 2

9 Signal Digital input 4 9 SHLD Shield

17 Signal Digital input 5 21 Signal Digital input 12 25 Signal Digital input 6 22 Signal Digital input 13 34 Signal Digital input 7 23 Signal Digital input 14

8 Signal Digital input 8 15 SHLD Shield

16 Signal Digital input 9 24 Signal Digital input 15 24 Signal Digital input 10 25 Signal Digital input 16 7 Signal Digital input 11 26 Signal Digital input 17

29 SHLD Shield 17 SHLD Shield

1 Signal Digital output 1 (High 2A max) 10 Signal Digital output 2 (High 2A max) 18 Signal Digital output 3 (High 2A max) 26 Signal Digital output 4 (High 2A max) 33 Signal Digital output 5 (Low 0,7A max) 32 Signal Digital output 6 (Low 0,7A max) 31 Signal Digital output 7 (Low 0,7A max) 30 Signal Digital output 8 (Low 0,7A max)


25 Pin assignment


Connector X2-L – MVC04-6

Connector X2-R – MVC04-6

26 Bus protocols

26 Bus protocols

On request, one of the following bus protocols can be implemented in the firmware.

Bus system Protocol Notes

available for all digital HEINZMANN devices HZM-CAN CAN bus 29-bit-identifier SAE J1939 standard for automotive applications

slave in predefined master-/slave connection set 12 additional TPDOs

CANopen CAN bus 11-bit-identifier

DeviceNet Slave in predefined master-/ slave connection set

Table 40: Bus protocols

The components of the series DARDANOS MVC03-8 and DARDANOS MVC04-6 feature two CAN components each, so that up to two different CAN protocols are possible. The first

CAN bus is reserved for the 26.1 CAN protocol HZM-CAN. On the second CAN bus, either HZM-CAN or one of the CAN protocols described below may be implemented.

26.1 CAN protocol HZM-CAN

The HEINZMANN-CAN protocol is based on the CAN specification 2.0B with a 29-bit identifier. Transmission is on point-to-point, i.e. the telegrams are normally sent from ex-actly one unit to exactly one other unit. Beside the command code, the telegram identifier therefore contains information about sender and receiver. The maximum 8 data bytes are therefore available completely for operative data.

Sender and receiver can be any digital HEINZMANN devices or an external device linked to the HEINZMANN CAN protocol by a customer (so called customer module). The de-vices are categorized as follows:

Device identifier Device type

DC Speed governor (conventional or direct injection)

GC Generator management THESEUS

PE Periphery module

CM Customer module

PC DcDesk 2000/CAN or ARGOS/CAN or HP 03/CAN

Table 41: Device types HZM-CAN

It is possible to have up to 31 devices connected to the network. Their maximum number will in most cases depend on the network's capacity of utilization. Each device of the same type is assigned a different node number. The device identifier (DC, GC…) appears in all related parameter names.


26 Bus protocols

It is possible to link devices in varying combinations. In twin engine systems for marine applications, for instance, it is possible to link together two speed governors (DC DC).

In generator applications, each THESEUS is linked to its speed governor (GC DC), while the THESEUS devices take care of the load ripartition between themselves (GC GC).

Periphery modules allow to increase the number of available input and output ports and therefore of assignable sensors, switching functions and indicators (DC PE). But mainly they provide a second actuator for V-engines or a gas actuator for dual fuel en-gines.

The HEINZMANN diagnosis devices connected to this CAN bus, such as DcDesk 2000/CAN, allow very comfortable access to all control devices con-nected to the bus for parameterizing and diagnosis. If in a control, the HZM-CAN protocol is implemented both on CAN bus 1 and on CAN bus 2, the com-munication with a HEINZMANN diagnosis device is possible on one bus only.

Note

26.1.1 Configuration of the HEINZMANN CAN Bus

Any user/device linked to a HEINZMANN CAN bus will be precisely identified by device type and node number. The device type is pre-determined by the type of the con-trol device and cannot be changed. The node number, however, can be freely selected but must not recur repeatedly for a specific device type.

The CAN network node number of the control unit is to be entered in the parameter 401 CanMyNodeNumber. Each control unit will receive only the messages that are ad-dressed to it.

In generator systems, the node number of the generator control must be identical with the one of the related speed governor. For both devices therefore the same entry is re-quired in 400 CanMyNodeNumber. The units are differentiated by the device type, DC or GC respectively. Node numbers of all other devices are assigned separately:

402 CanDCNodeNumber node number 2 speed governor (twin system)

403 CanCMNodeNumber node number of customer module

404 CanPENodeNumber node number of periphery module

407 CanPENodeType type of periphery module

The function parameter 4416 CanSegmentOrBaudrate determines whether to work with the baud rate 416 CanBaudrate (4416 CanSegmentOrBaudrate = 0) or with the segment settings in the parameters 410 CanPrescaler to 415 CanPropSegment (4416 CanSeg-mentOrBaudrate = 1).

In 416 CanBaudrate only the four indicated values are admissible as baud rates, for every other entry 250 kBaud will be used. To these four values the segment settings


26 Bus protocols

listed in the following tables are stably assigned. If another baud rate should be neces-sary or the segment settings have to be changed because of the sampling moment or the cable length, you will have to work with the segment settings (4416 CanSegmentOr-Baudrate = 1).

All network participants must have configured to identical baud rates.

Parameter 125 kBaud 250 kBaud 500 kBaud 1 MBaud

410 Can1Prescaler

420 Can2Prescaler 27 13 6 6

411 Can1SyncJumpWidth

421 Can2SyncJumpWidth 2 2 2 0

412 Can1SamplingMode

422 Can2SamplingMode 0 0 0 0

413 Can1PhaseSegment1

423 Can2PhaseSegment1 2 2 2 0

414 Can1PhaseSegment2

424 Can2PhaseSegment2 3 3 3 1

415 Can1PropSegment

425 Can2PropSegment 7 7 7 3

416 Can1Baudrate

426 Can2Baudrate

125 250 500 1000

4416 Can1SegmentOrBaud

4426 Can2SegmentOrBaud

0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1

Table 42: Baudrate

CAN communication to another device is established only if both the sending device type and the receiving device type are enabled with all nodes required. Connections to one of the diagnosis devices (device type PC) on the other hand are ready to receive at all times.

4400 CanCommDCOn = 1 device type speed governor enabled

4401 CanCommGCOn = 1 device type THESEUS enabled

4402 CanCommPEOn = 1 device type periphery module enabled

4406 CanCommCMOn = 1 device type customer module enabled

These configuration parameters will become active only after a 3.2 Saving Data to the

control and a 3.10 Reset of control unit.

26.1.2 Monitoring the CAN communication

Communication is constantly monitored. After the control device is switched on, the amount of time determined in 400 CanStartTimeOutDelay may pass before an error message is originated, in order to take account of the different start-up times of the con-


26 Bus protocols

trol units. All participants of the CAN network should have been parameterized for one and the same time delay. During this interval, the complete network must have been supplied power to prevent error messages from being output on powering the system up.

The parameters

2412 CanGCNodeState31to16 and/or: 2413 CanGCNodeState15to01

2414 CanPENodeState31to16 and/or: 2415 CanPENodeState15to01

2422 CanCMNodeState31to16 and/or: 2423 CanCMNodeState15to01

2424 CanPCNodeState31to16 and/or: 2425 CanPCNodeState15to01

indicate whether a connection is established between the control unit and one of the connected modules. In doing so, the bit is activated that corresponds to the node number of the module.

The following common error messages can be generated:

3070 ErrCanBus1 error of CAN bus 1

3071 ErrCanComm1 error of CAN Communications 1

3072 ErrCanBus2 error of CAN bus 2

3073 ErrCanComm2 error of CAN Communications 2

In case of a CAN bus error, the CAN controller outputs error messages such as BusOff. In spite of resetting the controller, it may sometimes not be possible to clear the errors permanently. In most cases, this will be due to wrong cabling, missing termination or different Baud rates of single network participants. The control unit will then attempt to establish an error-free communication status by repeatedly resetting the CAN controller.

The following table provides an overview of the assignment of error state for CAN bus errors:

Error Code Meaning

0 0x0001 CAN bus error CAN controller is in BusOff state.

Table 43: Possible errors CAN bus

The CAN communication errors 3071 ErrCanComm1 and 3073 ErrCanComm2 are, by contrast, network errors with respect to content, i.e., there is no physical fault and com-munication is in principle possible. Information on the communication errors concern-ing the HEINZMANN CAN bus can be obtained from the following parameters:

2401 CanTxBufferState status of transmitter buffer

2402 CanRxBufferState status of receiver buffer

2403 CanRxTimeout status of reception timeout monitoring

2404 CanTypeMismatch status of device number


26 Bus protocols

The values of the parameters 2401 through 2404 are in binary code with the bit number corresponding to the device ID. Any indication by these parameters will activate the er-ror 3071 ErrCanComm1 or 3073 ErrCanComm2.

The transmitter and receiver buffers are monitored for overrun for each device type and indicated by the parameters 2401 CanTxBufferState and 2402 CanRxBufferState. The messages must be received within a certain time window, otherwise the error 2403 CanRxTimeout will be set. The error 2404 CanTypeMismatch signals a configuration fault due to a second participant with identical device number and identical device type being connected to the network. In this case, the command disables CAN communica-tion until the configuration error is corrected by a modification of the node number.

If there is overrun of the transmitter or receiver buffer, only this error will be indicated and communication continue though one message or more might not have been sent or received. If some messages could not be transmitted due to a transmitter buffer overrun, the opposite station will signal the timeout error.

Generally, the error 2403 CanRxTimeout will be set whenever there is no answer from the opposite station. Though in this event messages will continue to be transmitted to the opposite station there will a change-over to certain emergency operations with re-gard to content.

Whether the control device is generally ready to communicate via CAN is indicated by parameter 2405 CanOnline.

The following table provides an overview of the assignment of error state for CAN communication errors:

Error Code Meaning

0 0x0001 Receipt time was exceeded

Parameter 2403 CanRxTimeout shows on what device type the time-out has occurred.

1 0x0002 Overflow of receipt buffer

The receipt buffer has overflown. Some messages could not be re-ceived. Parameter 2402 CanRxBufferState shows on what device type the receipt buffer has overflown.

2 0x0004 Overflow of send buffer

The send buffer has overflown. Some messages could not be sent.Parameter 2401 CanTxBufferState shows on what device type the send buffer has overflown.

3 0x0008 Erroneous device configuration

Two devices with the same device number and of the same device type are connected to the CAN network. CAN communication is dis-abled.


26 Bus protocols

Table 44: Possible errors in CAN communication

26.1.3 Generator control THESEUS

In generator systems, the node number of the generator control must be identical with the one of the related speed governor. For both devices therefore the same entry is re-quired in 400 CanMyNodeNumber. The connection is activated with 4401 Can-CommGCOn = 1. One of the parameters 2412 CanGCNodeState31to16 or 2413 CanGCNodeState15to01 respectively indicates whether the connection is established. The bit with the node number of THESEUS is set during active communication.

THESEUS sends the values of 2042 GenSetOffset, 2111 FuelGenSetOffset and 3200

GenCtrlMainsOrIsland to the speed governor. The related functions are described in 13 Generator operation.

26.1.4 Periphery module

A periphery module is used when more inputs or outputs than the ones available on the control device are required. In particular, it is necessary for dual fuel systems, where a second actuator is required for gas positioning.

The node number of periphery module must be entered in 404 CanPENodeNumber. In parameter 407 CanPENodeType the type of periphery module used must be entered.

Type Module Maximum amount (partly by choice)

Digital inputs

Digital outputs

Analogue outputs

PWM-outputs

Sensors AD/Tmp/PWM

Actuators

0 10 (4/2/4) 8 5 4 5 1 PE 2-01

1 7 (3/1/3) 5 2 2 2 1 DC 6-07

2 0 0 0 0 1 ELEKTRA fixed

3 9 (5/2/2) 12 3 2 3 1 PE 1-03

4 11 (8/2/1) 11 5 2 3 3 PE 1-04

Table 45: Periphery modules

One of the parameters 2414 CanPENodeState31to16 or 2415 CanPENodeState15to01 respectively indicates whether the connection is established. The bit with the node num-ber is set during active communication.

26.1.4.1 Command transmission

Some commands originating from the speed governor and transmitted by the CAN bus can be addressed to the periphery module and immediately put into practice there. This refers to error clearance and automatic reset of the speed governor. It


26 Bus protocols

does not matter whether the function was output by the speed governor via a com-munication unit such as DcDesk 2000 or the handheld programmer or by the switch-ing function 2828 SwitchErrorReset. Whether the related function is to be transmit-ted to the periphery module is set in

4444 PEErrorResetOn = 1 forward error clearing command

4445 PEAutoResetOn = 1 forward control reset command

Especially during commissioning it makes sense to carry out the automatic reset at the same time for speed governor and periphery module, for in this way both control units boot at the same time and find each other over the CAN bus.

26.1.4.2 Actuator

The fuel setpoint for control of the actuator on the periphery module side is provided by the control device in 2355 PEFuelQuantity. If an adjustment of fuel setpoint to position values is required, for instance when a non-linear throttle valve is addressed, then this must be done on the side of the periphery module. The set values for the ac-tuators are fed back by the periphery module to the speed governor and indicated in 2355 PEActPos.

A "0" should be entered in parameter 440 PEActPosSetpSendRate responsible for the telegram sending rate, in order for the actuator position to be transmitted as often as possible. Telegram transmission is enabled with 4440 PEActPosSetpointOn = 1.

Automatic matching of the periphery module actuator must occur directly at the pe-riphery module.

26.1.4.3 Sensors

The maximum number of sensors of a periphery module results from the maximum number of available analogue inputs (current/voltage), temperature inputs and PWM inputs. Numbering of sensors is in this sequence, starting from 1.

Allocation to the sensors of the control device is done in parameters 900 AssignIn_...

as described in 21 Sensors). As channel type the value 2 must be entered in 4900 ChanTyp...

26.1.4.4 Digital inputs

The allocation of digital inputs of the periphery module to switching functions is de-

scribed in detail in 22.2 Assignment of digital inputs.

26.1.4.5 Digital outputs

For allocation of the digital outputs of the control device, the two variants described

in detail in 24.5 Digital outputs are possible


26 Bus protocols

The respective parameter numbers are the ones starting from 450 PEDigOut1_Assign for simple allocation and starting from 4460 PEDigOut1:Logic, 4480 PEDigOut1:Prior and 9000 PEDigOut1:Param for multiple allocation

Current values of digital outputs are indicated in the parameters starting from 2470 PEDigitalOut...

441 PEDigOutSendRate defines how frequently the telegram with the digital output values will be sent. A value of 0 means that the telegram will be sent only if there is a state change in at least one digital output. If the telegram is to be sent at all is de-termined by setting parameter 4441 PEDigOutOn = 1.

26.1.4.6 Analogue outputs

Parameter setting for analogue outputs of the periphery module is identical to the pa-

rameter setting of 24.4 PWM outputs for your own hardware. The only difference consists in the physical value range of the analogue output (e.g. 4..20 mA), which must be set on the side of the periphery module. In the control device only the value

assigned to the output is indicated ( 24.4.3 Value Range of output parameters) and whether there are limits to the value range.

The parameters for the analogue outputs of the periphery module are determined starting from 480 PECurrOut... (resp. 480 PEAnaOut...).

480 PECurrOut1_Assign

483 PECurrOut1_ValueMin

484 PECurrOut1_ValueMax

The currently transmitted values are indicated in 2480 PECurrOut...

442 PEAnalogOutSendRate defines how frequently the telegram with the analogue output values will be sent. A value of 0 means that the telegram will be sent only if there is a state change in at least one analogue output. If the telegram is to be sent at all is determined by setting parameter 4442 PEAnalogOutOn = 1.

26.1.4.7 PWM outputs

Parameter setting for 24.4 PWM outputs of the periphery module is identical to pa-rameter setting for your own hardware. The only difference consists in the utilized range of the PWM transmission (e.g. 10..90 %), which must be set on the side of the periphery module. In the control device only the value assigned to the output is indi-

cated ( 24.4.3 Value Range of output parameters) and whether there are limits to the value range. The parameters for the PWM outputs of the periphery module are determined starting from 455 PEPWMOut...

455 PEPWMOut1_Assign

458 PEPWMOut1_ValueMin

459 PEPWMOut1_ValueMax


26 Bus protocols

The currently transmitted values are indicated in 2475 PEPWMOut...

443 PEPWMOutSendRate defines how frequently the telegram with the PWM output values will be sent. A value of 0 means that the telegram will be sent only if there is a state change in at least one PWM output. If the telegram is to be sent at all is de-termined by setting parameter 4443 PEPWMOutOn = 1.

26.1.5 Customer module

The use of a freely selectable customer device as customer module and its connection to the HEINZMANN-CAN bus protocol in this device are described in detail in the man-ual HEINZMANN CAN Customer-Modul, publication No. DG 05007-e. This manual also describes all parameters that require setting in the control device itself. The channel type required for sensors and switching functions received by the customer module must be set to the value 8.

26.2 CAN protocol CANopen

The CANopen protocol is an open protocol with general validity for the most different ap-plications. It defines the way data is transmitted but not the contents of the resulting com-munication. Data transmission therefore must be agreed between the users on both sides. The HEINZMANN devices are conceived as slaves in the Predefined Master/Slave Con-nection Set In addition to the standard four TPDOs, additional 12 TPDOs are available. The HEINZMANN control device allows to parameterize all values to receive and send. As channel type for sensors and switching functions, the value 4 must be entered. This is described extensively in the manual CANopen Implementation, publication N° DG 06 002-e.

26.3 CAN protocol DeviceNet

The DeviceNet protocol is an open protocol with general validity for the most different ap-plications. It defines the way data is transmitted but not the contents of the resulting com-munication. The HEINZMANN control device allows to parameterize all values to re-ceive and send.

The HEINZMANN devices support only a part of the complete protocol, the so called Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set. This establishes a master/slave connection, whereby all HEINZMANN devices act as slaves. The respective messages are exclusively Group 2 Messages, i.e. the HEINZMANN devices support only Group 2 Only Messages.

Setting of parameters for DeviceNet connections to HEINZMANN control devices is de-scribed in detail in the DeviceNet manual, publication DG 06 003-e. As channel type for sensors and switching functions, the value 5 must be entered.


26 Bus protocols

26.4 CAN protocol SAE J1939

The SAE J1939 protocol is a standardized protocol used primarily in automotive applica-tions. It describes both the way data is transmitted as the content of the data. In general, it is the firmware of the control device that decides which data can be received and sent. The single telegrams may be enabled and disabled with parameter settings. Each telegram source and transmission rate may be parameterized separately. As channel type for sensors and switching functions, the value 7 must be entered. The SAE J1939 connection to HEINZMANN control devices is described extensively in the manual SAE J1939, publi-cation N° DG 06 004-e.


27 Data management


27 Data management

The control provides various parameters for information on governor type, software ver-sion, hardware version, etc.

27.1 Serial number of control unit

Each individual control unit is unambiguously identified by a serial number. The first 4 digits identify the year of production and the month of delivery. The remaining digits rep-resent the serial production number. The serial number is to be found on the HEINZMANN type plate or can be viewed in the following parameters:

3844 SerialDate year and month of production

3845 SerialNumber serial production number

27.2 Identification of control

The application-dependent functionality of a control is unambiguously defined by the soft-ware, which runs only on exactly one specific type of hardware.

3840 HardwareVersion version number of control hardware

3842 SoftwareVersion version number of control software

3843 BootSoftwareVersion version number of bootloader software

The software version identifier consists of a unique two to four digit customer number de-fined by HEINZMANN, by a one to two digit variant number and by a two digit revision index. DcDesk2000 and the Hand Programmers will permit the customer access only to control devices including software with a specific customer number. The variants serve to define different implementations, e.g., for different engines of a manufacturer or for differ-ent applications of a certain type engine. Due to software extensions there can exist differ-ent revision stages for the same variant with every higher ranking revision index including the next lower one and replacing it completely.

27.3 Identification number of PC-programme / handheld programmer

Each HEINZMANN PC programme and each HEINZMANN handheld programmer ( 3.1 Possibilities of parameterization) has a specific identification number that is passed on to the control. The current identification number of the PC programme or handheld pro-grammer is displayed by the parameter 3850 Identifier. The identification number of the PC programme or handheld programmer which was utilized last for storing parameter changes in the control can be viewed by the parameter 3851 LastIdentifier. The user of this identifier is responsible for the setting of parameters.

28 Error Handling

28 Error Handling

28.1 General

The HEINZMANN control devices DARDANOS MVC03-8 and DARDANOS MVC04-6 include an integrated error monitoring system by which errors caused by sensors, speed

pickups, etc., may be detected and reported. It is also possible to use digital outputs ( 24.5 Digital outputs) for external indication of the errors by visual or audible signals or to send the error messages to a higher-level system by way of communication modules.

The various errors may be viewed at the parameters 3000..3099, 13000..13099 and 23000..23099. A currently set error parameter will read the value "1", otherwise the value "0".

Generally, the following errors types can be distinguished:

Errors in configuring the control and adjusting the parameters of the control device

These errors are caused by erroneous input on the part of the user and cannot be in-

tercepted by either the PC or the handheld programmer. They do not occur in series

fabricated controls.

Errors occurring during operation

These errors are the most significant when using governors produced in series. Errors

such as failures of speed pickups, setpoint adjusters, pressure and temperature sen-

sor, or logical errors such as excessive temperatures or low boost pressure are typical

of this category.

Internal computational errors of the control

These errors may be due to defective components or other inadmissible operating

conditions. Under normal circumstances, they are not likely to occur.

To cancel any error one should first eliminate its cause before clearing any of the current errors. Some errors are cleared automatically as soon as the failure cause has been elimi-

nated (see also 28.5 Error parameter list). Errors can be cleared by means of the PC, by

the handheld programmer or, if configured accordingly, by a digital input ( 22 Switching functions). Fatal errors leading to an emergency shutdown can be cleared only when the engine has stopped. If the system does not stop reporting an error, the search for its cause must go on.

On principle, the control starts operating on the assumption that there is no error and will only then begin to check for possible occurrences of errors. This implies that the control

can be put into an error free state by a 3.10 Reset of control unit, but will immediately begin to report any errors that are currently active.

Basically, all errors may be subdivided into three categories. The first category consists or mere warnings, meaning that the control device has not recognized an actual error but, for example, a sensor value is out of its admissible range. Such warnings are generated mainly


28 Error Handling

by the sensor value monitoring functions 10 Warning and emergency shutdown func-

tions, such as the 10.12 Speed dependent oil pressure monitoring.

Besides there are errors which allow the engine to continue to run, albeit possibly with limited functionality (e.g., a sensor has failed).

The last category consists of what are called fatal errors that will lead to an emergency shutdown of the engine (e.g. overspeeding, failure of both speed pickups).

These error categories are signalled by the following three parameters:

3799 CommonWarning only warnings

3800 EmergencyAlarm emergency alarm

3801 CommonAlarm common alarm

Parameter 3799 CommonWarning is set exclusively when there are only warnings. The pa-rameter 3801 CommonAlarm will be set on the occurrence of any error, 3800 EmergencyA-larm only for fatal errors. Thus, 3799 CommonWarning and 3800 EmergencyAlarm will never occur alone by themselves.

Normally, these two alarm parameters are assigned to 24.5 Digital outputs in order to be able to signal the error condition. The emergency alarm is usually output in inverted form (low-active) and interpreted as the signal "Governor ready" which would also signal a fa-tal error in case of missing power supply.

With this assignment, the outputs are to be interpreted as follows:

Status "Common alarm" Status "Governor ready" Meaning

not active not active no power supply

not active active no error

active not active emergency alarm

active active common alarm

Table 46: Alarms

The "Governor ready" output, i.e., the inverted emergency alarm signal, is usually used to activate the overspeed protection device.

Both in the system DARDANOS MVC03-8 and in the system DARDANOS

MVC04-6 the digital output 10 is used for common alarm. The 28.6

Bootloader uses this output for the indication of state (see 28.6.2 Bootloader status indication

Note

).

As to the common alarm, there also exists the option to make the output blink at a fre-

quency of 1 Hz to denote a warning (e.g., for 10.12 Speed dependent oil pressure moni-toring). For this purpose, the parameter 5101 CommAlarmWarnFlashOn is to be set to "1".


28 Error Handling

As soon as at least one true error (no warning) comes in, the common alarm will be con-tinuously active.

The common alarm output can also be configured in such a way that the output is reset for 0.5 seconds on the occurrence of any new error. An PLC connected to the output will thus be able to detect the new error. For this configuration, the parameter 5102 CommonAlarm-ResetOn should be set to "1" and the above function disabled (5101 CommAlarmWarn-FlashOn = 0).

28.2 Seven Segment Display

The circuit board includes two 7-segment displays. If any error occurs, it will display the

parameter number of the current error. Since the first two digits always read 30, it will suf-

fice to have but the last two digits displayed. If several errors have occurred at the same

time, they will in turn be displayed one after another for one second and then again from

the beginning. When no error is active, the number “00” is displayed.

The values displayed here can also be viewed by means of the parameter

3820 SevenSegmentDisplay

In contrast to any other errors, failures of the individual cylinders will no be displayed by

their error number but by their respective cylinder number, in other words, the error num-

ber 3058 is not indicated by 58 but by A9. For the cylinder bank B the lower-case letter b

will be used to prevent confusion with the digit 8. Indication for cylinder number 10 will

be by 0 so that b0, e.g., will indicate an error of cylinder B10

The two points provided by the display are used to signal detection of speed by speed

pickup 1 and respectively by speed pickup 2. When the engine is at standstill, a point will

light up on the bottom right of either of the display's digits. As soon as the control unit de-

tects any speed these points are switched off, the left point for pickup 1 and the right one

for pickup 2. If both pickups are at fault before engine start, both points will be visible dur-

ing the attempt to start the engine.

Whenever an exception error occurs the value of the exception error parameter (3095

through 3099 will be indicated by the display. Depending on the error type, it may happen

that communication with the control unit is interrupted. In such a case, the seven-segment

display can still serve as a diagnostics tool.

E plus one dash will be followed by a number corresponding to the parameter

3095 ExceptionNumber.

E plus two dashes will be followed by four numbers corresponding to the pa-

rameters 3096 ExceptionAddr1High and 3097 ExceptionAddr1Low.

E plus three dashes will be followed by four numbers corresponding to the pa-

rameters 3098 ExceptionAddr2High and 3099 ExceptionAddr2Low.


28 Error Handling

This indication is periodically repeated in turn.

When in 0 Supplementary Information

23.3.5.1 Error monitoring at frequency output Note


28 Error Handling

mode, the seven-segment display will serve to output other information.

28.3 Configuration errors

If the configuration of the control device is faulty, this will be indicated in 3092 ErrCon-figuration. A faulty configuration may result for instance if during parameter setting for inputs and outputs the channel type was not indicated.

In addition to 3092 ErrConfiguration an error code is output in 3000 ConfigurationError, which gives information about the type of error occurred. The message displayed in 3000 ConfigurationErrorchanges every second and shows all currently present configuration er-rors.

The communication programme 3.3 DcDesk 2000 displays the error mes-sage for configuration errors in the window "Current errors".

A configuration error cannot simply be cleared with the command "clear error"; the cause of the error must be corrected first. Most configuration errors are checked only when the control device starts. Therefore a reset will be necessary after the parameters have been changed and saved in the control device.

The following tables give an overview of the error codes and their meaning. It depends on the version of the control device software whether one of the mentioned communications protocols is supported or less. In other words, not all the errors mentioned here will occurr in a specific control unit.

Configuration errors – switching functions allocation

800 Channel type was assigned to a switching function not supported by the software

804 Channel number too high for customer protocol switching function

805 Channel number too high for CANopen switching function

806 Channel number too high for DeviceNet switching function

807 Channel number too high for Modbus switching function

808 Channel number too high for SAE J1939 sensor input.

809 Channel number too high for HZM-CAN customer module switching function

810 Channel number too high for HZM-CAN twin-module switching function

854 Customer protocol inactive or not supportive of switching functions

855 CANOpen inactive or not supportive of switching functions

856 DeviceNet inactive or not supportive of switching functions

Note


28 Error Handling

857 Modbus inactive or not supportive of switching functions

858 SAE J1939 switching input inactive or features no digital inputs

859 HZM-CAN customer module inactive or not supportive of switching functions

860 HZM-CAN twin-module inactive or not supportive of switching functions

Configuration errors - sensor allocation

900 Channel type was assigned to sensor not supported by the software

901 Channel number too high for analogue sensor input

902 Channel number too high for PWM sensor input

903 Channel number too high for HZM-CAN-PE module sensor input

904 Channel number too high for customer protocol sensor input

905 Channel number too high for CANopen sensor input

906 Channel number too high for DeviceNet sensor input

907 Channel number too high for Modbus sensor input

908 Channel number too high for SAE J1939 sensor input.

909 Channel number too high for HZM-CAN customer module sensor input

910 Channel number too high for HZM-CAN twin-module sensor input

Configuration error – speed range

1000 Frequency resulting from teeth number and maximum required speed is too high.

Configuration error engine/injection pump

Engine configuration not possible with this control device (e.g., 8 cylinder engine

with MVC04) 1010

Configuration of high-pressure pump injection not possible with this control device

(e.g., 8 cylinder engine with MVC04) 1011

Communication protocol CANopen

21750 CANopen not active, but values from it have been requested

Communication protocol Modbus

21800 Modbus not active, but values from it have been requested


28 Error Handling

Communication protocol DeviceNet

21850 DeviceNet not active, but values from it have been requested

21851 A DeviceNet sensor that is not transmitted was allocated

Communication protocol SAE J1939

21900 SAE J1939 not active, but values from it have been requested

Communication protocol HZM-CAN CM

21950 HZM-CAN CM not active, but values from it have been requested

Table 47: Configuration errors

28.4 Error memories

When the control is powered down it will lose any existing information on actual errors. In order to be able to check upon which errors have occurred, a permanent error memory has been incorporated in the control. Any errors that have occurred at least once will be stored there,

For each error registered since the error memory was last cleared, an error count and the time of first and last occurrence are registered. The times are indicated in form of operating hours of the engine, i.e. the hours the engine has been running. The error count is increased only if the engine operating hours counter has changed by at least one second since the last occurrence of the error.

In addition, for each error up to four data about the circumstances of its occurrence may be registered, e.g., speed, fuel quantity, coolant temperature for the last occurrence. The rele-vant environment information is defined via DcDesk 2000.

The values stored in the error memory are treated by the control merely as monitor values and are not any further taken account of. In other words, it is only the errors occurring dur-ing operation that the control will respond to.

The permanent error memory can be cleared by means of the PC or the handheld pro-grammer only. After clearance, the control will revert to accumulating any occurring errors in the empty error memory.

When the parameter 5100 NoStoreSerrOn is set to "1" and the error memory is

then cleared, no errors will be stored in the error memory before the next 3.10 Reset of control unit. This feature is meant to provide the possibility of shipping a control with customer specific data in an error-free state without

Note


28 Error Handling

having to stimulate the inputs with the correct values. The parameter 5100 it-self cannot be stored.

28.5 Error parameter list

The error parameter list of the main program listed below contains descriptions of the causes of each single error and of the control's response. Furthermore, it lists the appropri-ate actions to be taken to eliminate the respective error.

Errors are grouped in ascending order with the numbers 3001..3099, 13000..13099, 23000..23099 Each number corresponds to a group of errors of up to 14 single error states

and two additional informations. Error states are structured in bits (see Table 48). If sev-eral errors belonging to the same group are set at the same time, the respective combina-tion of error bits is shown in hexadecimal format. In DcDesk 2000 there is a special win-dow indicating the current errors, in which each single error state and a short description are indicated.

At least one of the errors from 0 to 13 (0x0001..0x2000) of each error group has a mean-ing, which is described in the following section.

Error 14 is set (0x4000) when all other active errors of this error group are only warnings.

Error 15 means that at least one of the errors 0…13 of this error group has led to an emer-gency shutdown (0x8000).

Errors which have not been used are not described.

The following table shows an overview of the single errors of an error group, together with the respective code and a description ot the two errors 14 and 15, which exist in each error group. The two errors 14 and 15 are not mentioned again in the following description of the single error groups.


28 Error Handling

Error Code Meaning

0 0x0001

1 0x0002

2 0x0004

3 0x0008

4 0x0010

5 0x0020

6 0x0040

7 0x0080

8 0x0100

9 0x0200

10 0x0400

11 0x0800

12 0x1000

13 0x2000

14 0x4000 Warning - At least one error in this group has triggered off a warning. only indicated

15 0x8000 Emergency shutdown - At least one error in this group has triggered off an emergency

shutdown. The engine is stopped / cannot be started.

Table 48: General error status


28 Error Handling

28.5.1 Speed sensors

3001 ErrPickUp1 3002 ErrPickUp2

Error Meaning

Speed pickup has failed or cable of speed pickup is faulty 0 - For a certain interval of time no signal is measured (monitoring only when 2000

Speed > 256 StartSpeed2). - The camshaft index sensor has measured a revolution and the speed pickup

transmits no signal. - The emergency operation camshaft index sensor is already synchronized and

the speed pickup transmits no signal. The speed pickup is disbled and its tasks are taken over by a redundant pickup

(if available).

Check distance between speed pickup and gear rim.

Check cable to pickup.

Check pickup, replace if necessary.

Speed pickup does not start or is too far away from gear rim 1 - The speed pickup delivers no signal although the redundant pickup already reg-

isters a speed. Only for redundant speed pickups 1 and 2. The speed pickup is disbled and its tasks are taken over by a redundant pickup

(if available).

Check distance between speed pickup and gear rim.

Check cable to pickup.


Speed pickup transmits a frequency which is too high 3 - The interrupt difference over several periods is shorter than 500 µs, meaning

that the input frequency is too high. The speed pickup is disbled and its tasks are taken over by a redundant pickup

(if available).


Speed pickup has been mounted in wrong direction of magnetization 4 - Monitored only if function 4015 CheckPickUpDirection is active Only error message

Check preferred direction of speed pickup.

Check configuration of preferred direction.

Table 49: Possible errors: Speed pickups


28 Error Handling

Supplementary Information

6.3.1 Monitoring mode of pickups during engine start

6.3.2 Failure monitoring of pickups when engine is running

6.3.6 Monitoring of excessive frequency


28.5.2 Camshaft index sensor

3003 ErrPickUpIndex

Error Meaning

Camshaft index sensor has failed or cable to camshaft index sensor is faulty 0 - For a certain interval of time no signal is measured (monitoring only when 2000

Speed > 256 StartSpeed2). - Crankshaft gap has been detected but camshaft index sensor transmits no signal. On engine start: emergency shutdown, if test procedure is not allowed, other-

wise attempt to synchronize. With running engine: only error message

Check distance between camshaft index sensor and gear rim.

Check cable to camshaft index sensor.

Check camshaft index sensor, replace if necessary.

Camshaft index sensor has been mounted in wrong direction of magnetization4 - Monitored only if function 4016 CheckPickUpDirection is active. only error message

Check preferred direction of camshaft index sensor.

Check configuration of preferred direction.

Table 50: Possible errors: Camshaft index sensor


6.3.3 Failure monitoring of camshaft index adjuster during engine start

6.3.4 Failure monitoring of camshaft index adjuster when engine is running

6.3.5 Monitoring of mounting direction

16.5 Failure of camshaft index sensor



28 Error Handling

28.5.3 Overspeed

3004 ErrOverSpeed

Error Meaning

Overspeed pickup 1 0 - Engine speed as registered by pickup 1 was/is exceeding overspeed. - A combination between teeth number of pickup 1 and maximum

speed/overspeed results in a measuring frequency higher than allowed. Emergency shutdown

Check overspeed parameter (21 SpeedOver).

Check adjustment of set speed.

Check PID adjustment.

Check whether overspeeding was due to thrust operation.

Overspeed pickup 2 1 - Engine speed as registered by pickup 2 was/is exceeding overspeed. - A combination between teeth number of pickup 2 and maximum

speed/overspeed results in a measuring frequency higher than allowed. Emergency shutdown





Overspeed camshaft index sensor 2 - Speed of camshaft index sensor was/is exceeding overspeed. For emergency camshaft wheel: emergency shutdown For camshaft measuring pin: only error message





Table 51: Possible errors: Overspeed


6.4 Overspeed monitoring

6.2 Speed sensing


28 Error Handling

28.5.4 Setpoint adjusters and sensors

3005 ErrSetpoint1Extern 3017 ErrRailPress1

3006 ErrSetpoint2Extern 3018 ErrRailPress2

3007 ErrLoadInput 3019 ErrExcitReduct 3008 ErrSyncInput 3020 ErrSpeedReduct 3009 ErrBoostPressure 3021 ErrCoolantPressure 3010 ErrOilPressure 3023 ErrMeasuredPower 3011 ErrAmbientPressure 3024 ErrPowerSetpoint 3012 ErrCoolantTemp 3025 ErrTurboOilTemp 3013 ErrChargeAirTemp 3026 ErrFuelPress 3014 ErrOilTemp 3027 ErrOilLevel 3015 ErrFuelTemp 3028 ErrFuelLimitExtern 3016 ErrExhaustTemp 3029 ErrTransOilPressure

13040 ErrExhaustTempCyl1 13044 ErrExhaustTempCyl5




Error Meaning

Signal short circuit to earth 0 - The measuring value of the respective input value is below the lower error


Check sensor cable.

Check sensor.


Signal short circuit to supply voltage 1 - The measuring value of the respective input value is below the upper error


Check sensor cable.

Check sensor.


Sensor supply voltage, cable break or short circuit to earth 2 - The measured value of the respective reference voltage is below 4.5 V. - Monitoring active only with temperature input or if sensor referencing is active. Reaction according to the configuration of sensor error handling.

Check sensor cable.


28 Error Handling

Error Meaning

Check sensor.

Sensor supply voltage, short circuit to supply voltage 3 - The measured value of the respective reference voltage is greater than 5.5 V. - Monitoring active only with temperature input or if sensor referencing is active. Reaction according to the configuration of sensor error handling.

Check sensor cable.

Check sensor.

Error via communication module 4 - The connection to the communication module has dropped. - The communication module delivers an erroneous sensor value. Reaction according to the configuration of sensor error handling.

Check the connection to the communication module.

Check sensor cable.

Check sensor.

Threshold 1 surpassed in excess or in default 5 - The sensor value is higher or lower that the threshold value 1 and the respective


monitoring.

Threshold 2 surpassed in excess or in default 6 - The sensor value is higher or lower that the threshold value 2 and the respective


monitoring.

Table 52: Possible errors: Setpoint adjusters and sensors


21.6 Modifying reactions to sensor errors

24.2.4 Error detection for analogue inputs

10.1 General monitoring of sensor values


28 Error Handling

28.5.5 Injection

3035 ErrInjection

Error Meaning

Cylinder error 0 - More than 1920 CylinderFaultEcy cylinders report an error. - Monitored only if function 5920 CylinderFaultEcyOn is active Emergency shutdown.

Overlapping of injection at amplifier A 1 - At amplifier A, the injection for the current cylinder starts before the end of




Overlapping of injection at amplifier B 2 - At amplifier B, the injection for the current cylinder starts before the end of




Short circuit high-side to earth at amplifier A 3 - All injectors of amplifier A register overcurrent high-side PWM Error message, further control attempts are made


Short circuit high-side to earth at amplifier B 4 - All injectors of amplifier B register overcurrent high-side PWM Error message, further control attempts are made Check cabling and injector.

Short circuit high-side to supply voltage at bank A 5 - All injectors on bank A register overcurrent high-side free wheel Error message, further control attempts are made


Short circuit high-side to supply voltage at bank B 6 - All injectors on bank A register overcurrent high-side free wheel Error message, further control attempts are made


Short circuit low-side to earth at amplifier A 7 - At least one injector of amplifier A registers a rise time which is too great or not

measurable.


28 Error Handling

Error Meaning

Error message, further control attempts are made


Short circuit low-side to earth at amplifier B 8 - At least one injector of amplifier B registers a rise time which is too great or not



Short circuit low-side to supply voltage at bank A 9 - One injector on bank A registers low-side overcurrent - All other injectors on this bank register: overcurrent high-side free wheel Error message, further control attempts are made


Short circuit low-side to supply voltage at bank B 10 - One injector on bank B registers overcurrent low-side - All other injectors on this bank register: overcurrent high-side free wheel Error message, further control attempts are made


Table 53: Possible errors: Injection



28.5.6 Synchronization

3036 ErrSynchronisation

Error Meaning

Synchronizing lost with running engine 0 - Monitoning only as long as 2000 Speed > 256 StartSpeed2 injection is turned off, attempt at renewed synchronization

Check distance of pickup from sensing wheel.

Check sensing wheel.

Check speed pickup

Check parameter 6 GapRatio.

Distance between gap and index sensor is too great 1 - Monitoring only during engine start. - Monitored only if function 4007 CheckGapToIndexDist is active. only error message

Check configuration of sensor positions.


28 Error Handling

Error Meaning

Wrong number of teeth on active crankshaft impulse transmitter 2 - The number of measured teeth between two gaps following one after the other

does not correspond to the pre-set number of teeth. Injection is turned off, attempt at renewed synchronization



Check speed pickup.


Synchronization not possible 3 - Synchronization was not successful within 10 seconds after attempted engine

start. only error message



Check speed pickup


Wrong number of teeth on emergency camshaft wheel 4 - The additional tooth of the emergency camshaft wheel is not registered where

expected. during emergency operation: emergency shutdown otherwise: only error message

Check distance of pickup from camshaft wheel.

Check camshaft wheel.

Check speed pickup

Table 54: Possible errors: Synchronization


16.4 Synchronization by tooth gap


28 Error Handling

28.5.7 Injector supply voltage

3037 ErrInjectorSupply

Error Meaning

Injector supply voltage is too low 5 - The injector supply voltage is too low by more than 10 V for over 1 second. warning

Injector supply voltage is too high 6 - The injector supply voltage is too high by more than 10 V for over 1 second. warning

Table 55: Possible errors: Injector supply voltage


17.2 Actuation of control magnets


3048 ErrPowerGovernor

Error Meaning

Power control deviation too great 0 - The difference between measured power and set power is higher than a set


Table 56: Possible errors: Integrated power governor




28 Error Handling

28.5.9 Injectors

3050 ErrCylinder1 3054 ErrCylinder5




13025 ErrHPRInject1 13026 ErrHPRInject2

Error Meaning

Current < (ca.) 1 A 0 - During the whole time the main injection was addressed, current never sur-

passed ca. 1 A. This means that no current reached the valve (broken cable). only error message


Overcurrent low-side transistor 1 - The hardware has recognized an overcurrent on the low-side transistor and

switched off the power supply. only error message


Overcurrent high-side on PWM transistor 2 - The hardware has recognized an overcurrent on the high-side PWM transistor



Overcurrent high-side on FREEWHEEL transistor 3 - The hardware has recognized an overcurrent on the high-side FreeWheel tran-

sistor and switched off the power supply. only error message


No fly time was registered 4 - No fly time was registered. only error message



Fly time too short 5 - The registered fly time lies outside the admissible range. - Monitored only if the function 5951 BipSupervisingOn is active. only error message




28 Error Handling

Error Meaning

Flytime too long 6 - The registered fly time lies outside the admissible range. - Monitored only if the function 5951 BipSupervisingOn is active. only error message



No rise time was registered 7 - No fly time was registered. only error message



Rise time too long 8 - Current has not reached pre-set boost current during boost phase. only error message



Table 57: Possible errors: Injectors



20.5.3 Detection of errors in control magnets for high-pressure injectors

28.5.10 CAN bus

3070 ErrCanBus1 3072 ErrCanBus2

Error Meaning

BusOff was reported 0 - The CAN controller reports BusOff. CAN telegrams can no longer be sent or received.

Check CAN cabling.

Check CAN terminator.

Check baud rate.

Table 58: Possible errors: CAN bus




28 Error Handling

28.5.11 CAN communication

3071 ErrCanComm1 3072 ErrCanComm2

Error Meaning

Receipt time was exceeded 0 - Parameter 2403 CanRxTimeout shows on what device type the timeout has oc-

curred. Reaction depends on device type.

Overflow of receipt buffer 1

- The receipt buffer has overflown. Some messages could not be received. Pa-rameter 2402 CanRxBufferState shows on what device type the receipt buffer has overflown.

only error message

Overflow of send buffer 2

- The send buffer has overflown. Some messages could not be sent. Parameter 2401 CanTxBufferState shows on what device type the send buffer has over-flown.

only error message

Erroneous device configuration 3

- Two devices with the same device number and of the same device type are con-nected to the CAN network. CAN communication is disabled.

No CAN telegrams are send or received.

Assign a unique device number in the respective parameter.

Table 59: Possible errors: CAN communication




28 Error Handling

28.5.12 Internal temperature measurement

3079 ErrInternTemperature

Error Meaning

Internal temperature is too high 5 - Internal temperature is higher that 100 °C for more than 1 second. warning

Internal temperature is extremely high 6 - Internal temperature is higher that 110 °C for more than 1 second. warning

Table 60: Possible errors: Internal temperature measurement

28.5.13 Supply voltage

3085 ErrPowerSupply

Error Meaning

Supply voltage too low 0 - Supply voltage for the control device is lower than 9 V. Emergency shutdown

Check supply voltage.

Supply voltage is too high 1 - Supply voltage for the control device is higher than 33 V. Emergency shutdown

Check supply voltage.

Short circuit supply voltage 2 - At one high-side digital output or at the high-pressure pump control there is a

short circuit. - Control device is powered through short circuit. Emergency shutdown

Check wiring

Error on transistor for enabling power outputs 3 - power outputs cannot be activated or switched off Emergency shutdown

Check wiring

Error of supply voltage of power electronics 4 - The power component of the electronics is not powered. - Broken cable or short circuit to earth. Emergency shutdown


28 Error Handling

Error Meaning

Check wiring

Error of 12V reference Voltage too low 5 - Reference voltage for pickup supply is lower than 10 V. only error message

Check wiring

Error of 12V reference Voltage too high 6 - Reference voltage for pickup supply is higher than 14 V. only error message

Check wiring

Error of 7.5V reference Voltage too low (only DARDANOS MVC04-6) 7 - Internal 7.5V reference voltage is too low. only error message

Error of 7.5V reference Voltage too high (only DARDANOS MVC04-6) 8 - Internal 7.5V reference voltage is too high. only error message





Table 61: Possible errors: Supply voltage


28 Error Handling

28.5.14 Data memory

3087 ErrEEPROM

Error Meaning

Error during EEPROM access 0 - Data could not be read or written. Reading error: emergency shutdown, standard program parameters are used

(this error can happen only during control device start-up). Writing error: only error message, data cannot be saved.

Parameter memory is faulty 1 - The data sectors reserved for memorizing parameters are faulty.

(this error can happen only during control device start-up) emergency shutdown, standard program parameters are used

Parameter memory not valid 2 - EEPROM is unreadable (see error 0).

(this error can happen only during control device start-up) - First control device start-up after program download. emergency shutdown, standard program parameters are used instead.

ECU page is faulty 3 - The data sectors reserved for control device identification are faulty. only error message, data are used on.

NMI page is faulty 4 - The data sectors reserved for NMI data (e.g., seconds of operation) is faulty. only error message, data are used on.

Workdata page is faulty 5 - The data sectors reserved for operational data are faulty. error memory is cleared, other data is used on.

Table 62: Possible errors: Data memory


28 Error Handling

28.5.15 Engine-specific errors

3091 ErrEngine

Error Meaning

Charge control alternator 0 - Battery is not charged by alternator. only error message

Check cabling between alternator and battery.

Starter 1 - Starter is not able to start engine. only error message

Rail pressure for engine start 2 - The rail pressure required to start the engine cannot be built up. only error message

Table 63: Possible errors: Engine-specific errors


20.4.2 Engine start

20.5.1 Engine start

15.3 Start request

15.4 Alternator monitoring

28.5.16 Configuration

3092 ErrConfiguration

Error Meaning

Configuration error 0 - At least one configuration of the control device is faulty. only error message

The configuration error is shown in parameter 3000 ConfigurationError.

Check and correct faulty configuration.

Table 64: Possible errors: Configuration


28.3 Configuration errors


28 Error Handling

28.5.17 Internal computing error

3094 ErrIntern

Error Meaning

Stack overflow 0 - The memory reserved for the stack is full. Emergency shutdown

Write down parameters 3195 to 3199.

Restart governor by a reset.and inform HEINZMANN.

Exception error 1 - The control device reports an internal computing error. Emergency shutdown.



Error in cyclical program test 2 - Checksum calculated by the program does not correspond to the memorized

checksum. Emergency shutdown.



Error in cyclical RAM test 3 - The cyclical RAM test reports an error. Emergency shutdown.



Overflow of error memory 4 - The memory space reserved for errors is full. only error message new errors are no longer memorized in the error memory.

The error memory must be cleared.

Error index too great 5 - Attempt to set an error whose parameter does not exist. only error message


Table 65: Possible errors: Internal computing error


28 Error Handling


13000 ErrDigitalOut1 13007 ErrDigitalOut8






13006 ErrDigitalOut7

Error Meaning

Signal short circuit to earth 0 Cable broken (only for low-side outputs) - Governor has detected a short circuit to earth or a broken cable. only error message


Short circuit to supply voltage 1 Cable broken (only for high-side outputs) - Governor has detected a short circuit to supply voltage or a broken cable. only error message


Transistor error 2 - Governor has detected an error in the transistor of the respective output. only error message


Control deviation is negative 3 - The difference between measured power and set power is higher than a set



Control deviation is positive 4 - The difference between measured power and set power is higher than a set



Threshold infraction while switched off 5 - Although the output should not be energized, a current stronger than a param-

eterized threshold is flowing.


28 Error Handling

Error Meaning

only error message


Threshold infraction minimum value 6 - Current is lower than admissible minimum value for a set interval of time. only error message


Threshold infraction maximum value 7 - Current is higher than admissible maximum value for a set interval of time. only error message


Table 66: Possible errors: Digital and PWM outputs


24.4.5 Error monitoring of PWM outputs

24.5.3 Error monitoring of digital outputs


28 Error Handling

28.5.19 Common rail high-pressure pumps outputs

Function is not implemented in DARDANOS MVC01-20.

13020 ErrCurrentOut1 13021 ErrCurrentOut2

Error Meaning

3 Control deviation is negative - The difference between measured power and set power is higher than a set



4 Control deviation is positive - The difference between measured power and set power is higher than a set



5 Threshold infraction while switched off - Although the output should not be energized, a current stronger than a param-

eterized threshold is flowing. only error message


6 Threshold infraction minimum value - Current is lower than admissible minimum value for a set interval of time. only error message


7 Threshold infraction maximum value - Current is higher than admissible maximum value for a set interval of time. only error message


8 Overcurrent low-side transistor - The hardware has recognized an overcurrent on the low-side transistor and



NoteNote


28 Error Handling

Error Meaning

Overcurrent high-side transistor 9 - The hardware has recognized an overcurrent on the high-side transistor and

interrupted the power supply. only error message


PWM at maximum 10 - The PWM ratio reaches maximum value for a set interval of time. only error message output is switched off if parameter 152x8 CROutx_PWMMaxEcyOn is set.


Table 67: Possible errors: Common rail high-pressure pumps outputs


20.4.3 Error recognition for pressure control valve high-pressure pumps

28.5.20 Frequency output

13025 ErrFrequencyOut

Error Meaning

Short circuit to earth or broken cable 0 - Governor has detected a short circuit to earth or a broken cable. only error message


Short circuit to supply voltage 1 - Governor has detected a short circuit to supply voltage. only error message


Table 68: Possible errors: Frequency output


23.3.5.1 Error monitoring at frequency output


28 Error Handling

28.6 Bootloader

The HEINZMANN digital controls include what is called a bootloader. This programme section is stored at a specific location of the read-only memory and is programmed once for all at the factory. The bootloader cannot be erased.

On starting the control programme by powering it up or by a reset, the bootloader pro-gramme is always executed first. This programme performs various relevant tests telling whether the actual control programme is or is not operable. Based on these tests the boot-loader decides whether further programme execution can be handed on to the control pro-gramme or whether execution must remain confined to the bootloader to preclude any risk of personal injury or damage to the engine. As long as the programme is in bootloader mode the engine cannot be started.

The entire bootloader tests and the subsequent initialization of the main pro-gramme will take about. 150-200 ms.

Note

28.6.1 Bootloader start tests

The following section describes which tests are performed by the bootloader and which measures may have to be taken. As long as these tests are running, there will be no communication with the device, especially when due to some fatal error the programme is caught in an infinite loop.

Test of internal watchdog

This is to check whether the watchdog integrated into the processor is operable. This is to ensure that in case of some undefined programme execution the control will go into a safe state after a pre-defined time.

If the test is not interrupted by the internal watchdog, the error message 3087 Err-MissingIntWatchdg is triggered.

If both watchdog tests yield a negative result (internal and external watchdog dou-ble fault), the bootloader program remains in an endless loop for safety reasons and no communication with DcDesk 2000 is possible.

Test of external watchdog

This test checks whether the external watchdog situated on the printed circuit board is functional. This is to ensure that in case of some undefined programme execution the control will go into a safe state after a pre-defined time.

If the test is not interrupted by the external watchdog, the error message 3086 Err-MissingExtWatchdg is triggered.

If both watchdog tests yield a negative result (internal and external watchdog dou-ble fault), the bootloader program remains in an endless loop for safety reasons and no communication with DcDesk 2000 is possible.


28 Error Handling

RAM test

During this test, various binary patterns are written into the internal processor RAM memory and read out again. If at least one cell does not contain the expected code it is checked whether this RAM sector is used by the bootloader program itself. If so, the bootloader program enters an endless loop and no communication with DcDesk 2000 is possible. If not, the communication to DcDesk 2000 becomes active and the faulty RAM cell is indicated.

EEPROM test

This test checks existence of an EEPROM. If EEPROM could not be detected DcDesk reports error 3011 ErrEEPROM and any further access to EEPROM will be blocked.

Bootloader programme test

By this test, a check-sum is calculated for the memory area containing the bootloader programme and compared with the check-sum that has been pre-programmed at the factory. If the sums do not match, the bootloader programme will remain in an end-less loop, and no communication with DcDesk 2000 is possible.

Main program test

By this test, a check-sum is calculated over the memory area containing the main programme and compared with the check-sum pre-programmed at the factory. If the sums do not match, the bootloader will go into a state which is indicated by the error 3087 ErrMainCheckSum via DcDesk 2000.

Watchdog triggering while main program is running

The bootloader passes into a state which is indicated in DcDesk 2000 as 3092 ErrEx-ternWatchdog or 3093 ErrInternWatchdog, as the case may be.

28.6.2 Bootloader status indication at DARDANOS MVC03-8 und MVC04-6

As long as the control device is in bootloader mode, the bootloader signals its status by

way of a blinking code on digital output 10 23.3.4 Digital and PWM outputs and

23.4.3 Digital and PWM outputs . During normal operation this never happens. The only exceptions are an update of the firmware, which is effected through the bootloader,

or an aborted 28.6.1 Bootloader start tests.

In these cases the status of the bootloader is indicated as follows:

Indication Meaning

quick blinking (100 ms each)

Checksum over bootloader area is inconsistent, communication with DcDesk 2000 is not possi-ble.

2 x blink then pause RAM-memory space reserved for bootloader is


28 Error Handling

Indication Meaning

inconsistent, communication with DcDesk 2000 is not possible.

(2x 100 ms, then 400 ms off)

2 x slow blink then pause System is in bootloader, communication with DcDesk 2000 for firmware update or diagnosis is possible.

(2x 400 ms, then 2 ms off)

lght stays on Firmware is being updated.

slow blinking on EEPROM could not be cleared for firmware update. (1 s on, 200 ms off)

slow blinking off FLASH could not be cleared for firmware up-date. (200 ms on, 1 s off)

regular blinking EEPROM could not be programmed for firm-ware update. (200 ms on, 200 s off)

Table 69: Bootloader status indication

28.6.3 Bootloader status indication at DARDANOS MVC01-20

Watchdog Test Indication:

This is to check whether the watchdog integrated into the processor is operable. This

is to ensure that in case of some undefined programme execution the control will go

into a safe state after a pre-defined time. If the outcome of the watchdog test is nega-

tive, the bootloader programme will remain in an endless loop, and the indication

will not change.

External RAM-Test Indication:

During this test, various binary patterns are written to the external RAM memory on

the control circuit board and read out again. If at least one storage location does not

contain the expected code, the bootloader programme enters into an endless loop,

and the above indication is retained.

Internal RAM Test Indication:


28 Error Handling

During this test, various binary patterns are written into the internal RAM memory of

the processor and read out again. If at least one cell does not contain the expected

code, the bootloader programme enters into an endless loop, and the above indication

is retained.

Bootloader Programme Test Indication:

By this test, a check-sum is calculated for the memory area containing the bootloader

programme and compared with the check-sum that has been pre-programmed at the

factory. If there is no match, the bootloader programme will remain in an endless

loop, and the above indication will be retained.

Control Programme Test Indication:

By this test, a check-sum is calculated for the memory area containing the control

programme and compared with the pre-programmed check-sum. If they do not

match, the bootloader will go into a state which is indicated by the error

3087 ErrMainCheckSum via serial communication (PC programme or Hand Pro-

grammer).

Watchdog Triggering Indication:

The bootloader passes into a state which is indicated as the watchdog error

3089 ErrWatchdog via serial communication (PC programme or Hand Programmer).

28.6.4 Bootloader Communication at DARDANOS MVC01-20

Serial communication with the bootloader can be entered into when the

seven-segment display reads “FE” or “Ud”.

FE : B tloade

See above “Watchdog Triggering”

ted, on the other hand, this state will

or re-programming the control programme, the following codes will be used:

lear ROM

oo r is active, no errors reports, control programme not loaded yet.

Ud :

On the one hand, errors will in this state be repor

serve as a starting point for downloading a new control programme. By principle, this

procedure will always have to be carried out by the bootloader.

F

C


28 Error Handling

Programme ROM, (while download proceeds segments of the display

are lighted alternating moving around)

Programming finished

Error due to clearing or programming

28.6.5 Bootloader communication with DcDesk 2000

Whenever the bootloader recognizes a situation that does not allow to start the main program – either because there is no main program available or because a hardware memory error has happened – it is possible to establish a connection from DcDesk 2000 and to read out the cause of the error. The only exceptions are when neither the internal nor the external watchdog respond (that would be a double fault), when the RAM re-quired by the bootloader is faulty or when the bootloader program itself is inconsistent (fails checksum test). In this case the program stays in an endless loop and a connection is not possible. The following table shows the meaning of each indicated value:

The following parameters are not visible in the main program, only in the bootloader.

MVC03-8 and MVC04-6

Indicated value Meaning

3076 ErrEEPROM

EEPROM not available or bootpage unreadable or

bootpage inconsistent or error in EEPROM pro-

gramming cycle.

3077 ErrEEPROMBootPage Bootpage not consistent.

3078 ErrRAMTest

RAM is faulty in area outside the one required by

the bootloader, the faulty address and its content are

indicated in 3200 ErrRAMAddressHigh to 3225

ErrTPURAMValueLow

3086 ErrMissingExtWatchdg Test of external watchdog has failed.

3087 ErrMissingIntWatchdg Test of internal watchdog has failed.

3089 ErrMainEmpty

no main programm available

entry address in Flash has been deleted or program

length or program checksum in EEPROM bootpage

have been deleted.

Note


28 Error Handling

MVC03-8 and MVC04-6


Main program is inconsistent.

3090 ErrMainCheckSum Checksum over program in flash does not corre-

spond to checksum memorized in bootpage.

Unknown reset origin:

3091 ErrResetSource Neither Power On nor Autoreset nor external / inter-

nal watchdog.

3092 ErrExternWatchdog Reset by external watchdog monitoring.

3093 ErrInternWatchdog Reset by internal watchdog monitoring.

An exception error has happened, it is shown in

3095 ExceptionNumber to 3099 ExceptionInfoLow 3094 ErrIntern

3195 ExceptionNumber Exception code

3196 ExceptionAddrHigh Address where exception has happened, high part.

3197 ExceptionAddrLow Address where exception has happened, low part.

3198 ExceptionInfoHigh Information about exception, high part.

3199 ExceptionInfoLow Information about exception, low part.

3200 ErrRAMAddressHigh Faulty address in SRAM, high part.

3201 ErrRAMAddressLow Faulty address in SRAM, low part.

3202 ErrRAMTestValHigh SRAM test value, high part

3203 ErrRAMTestValLow SRAM test value, low part

3204 ErrRAMValueHigh SRAM value, high part

3205 ErrRAMValueLow SRAM value, low part

3210 ErrDECRAMAddressHigh Faulty address in DECRAM, high part.

3211 ErrDECRAMAddressLow Faulty address in DECRAM, low part.

3212 ErrDECRAMTestValHigh DECRAM test value, high part.

3213 ErrDECRAMTestValLow DECRAM test value, low part.

3214 ErrDECRAMValueHigh DECRAM value, high part.

3215 ErrDECRAMValueLow DECRAM value, low part.

3220 ErrTPURAMAddressHigh Faulty address in TPURAM, high part.

3221 ErrTPURAMAddressLow Faulty address in TPURAM, low part.

3222 ErrTPURAMTestValHigh TPURAM test value, high part.

3223 ErrTPURAMTestValLow TPURAM test value, low part.


28 Error Handling

MVC03-8 and MVC04-6


3224 ErrTPURAMValueHigh TPURAM value, high part.

3225 ErrTPURAMValueLow TPURAM value, low part.

3300 ResetSource Content of Reset Status Register

3847 DownloadCounter Number of main program downloads.

3840 HardwareVersion Hardware version of bootloader

3841 AddHardwareVersion Additional hardware version of bootloader

3842 SoftwareVersion Software version of bootloader

3843 DBootSoftwareVersion Developer version of bootloader software.

3848 Identifier Identifier of DcDesk 2000 dongle.

3851 LastIdentifier

3870 Timer

No meaning, are required by DcDesk 2000 for com-

patibility reasons.

Table 70: Parameters of bootlader MVC03-8 and MVC04-6

MVC01-20


3070 ErrCanBus Error CAN bus1.

3071 ErrCanComm Error CAN communication via CAN bus1.

3072 ErrCanBus2 Error CAN bus2.

3073 ErrCanComm2 Error CAN communication via CAN bus2.

3075 ErrClearFlash Error reseting flash

Error programming flash 3076 ErrProgFlash

3087 ErrMainCheckSum Error of control programme checksum

3089 ErrWatchdog Watchdog error.

3094 ErrIntern Internal software error.

3095 ExceptionMumber Error code for software error.

3096 ExceptionAddr1High Error code 1 for software error, high part.

3097 ExceptionAddr1Low Error code 1 for software error, low part.

3098 ExceptionAddr2High Error code 2 for software error, high part.


28 Error Handling


MVC01-20


3099 ExceptionAddr2Low Error code 2 for software error, low part.

3840 HardwareVersion MVC hardware serial number.

3842 SoftwareVersion Software version number.

3843 BootSoftwareVersion Bootloader version number.

3870 Timer Internal millisecond-timer

Table 71: Parameters of bootlader MVC01-20

29 Parameter description


29.1 Synoptical table

Table 72 shows all groups of parameters. This table gives an overview as to which nu-

meric ranges correspond to which functions. The following four parameter tables ( 29.2

List 1: Parameters, 29.3 List 2: Measuring values, 30.1 List 3: Functions, 30.2 List 4: Characteristics and maps) list every single parameter along with a short description and a link to the relative chapter in the manual.

These four parameter lists explain all parameters that can possibly be defined in the control units. Not all of these parameters will be used in any one specific firmware, basically be-cause of varying hardware requirements, differences between the implemented applica-tions and customized implementation of functions. Only the present parameters are there-fore decisive for the functionality of a control unit. The list below does not entitle to a claim to specific functions contained in the list below.

For each parameter the defined level is indicated. On a servicing tool like DcDesk 2000 or a handheld programmer only such parameters will be visible whose level is not higher than the one of the tool.

If some parameters are valid only for a specific basic system (DARDANOS MVC03-8, DARDANOS MVC04-6), this is indicated in bold script beside the parameter name.

In the same place references to other manuals are indicated, if they contain a full descrip-tion of the respective parameter.

For characteristic curves and maps only the first field parameter is included and the pa-rameter numbers are indicated with the complement "ff" (and following).

Groups of parameters with the same name and subsequent numbering like 1510 AnalogIn1_RefLow, 1520 AnalogIn2_RefLow,... (lower reference for the respective ana-logue input) are listed only under the first number, with the complement "ff". The number in the parameter name is substituted with "x" or "y".

In a few rare cases, the same parameter number has been assigned to different functions within different applications. Such numbers are listed more than once, with indication of the application. To differentiate between different injection systems the following abbre-viations are used:

CR Common Rail

PPN Pump-Pipe-Nozzle

HPI High Pressure Injection




Parameter Measurements Functions Curves

No. Designation No. Designation No. Designation No. Designation

1 Number of Teeth/Speed 2000 Speed Pickup/ Speed

4000Speed Pickup/ Speed

6000

100 Stability/Droop Idle/Maximum Speed

2100 Stability/Droop Idle/Maximum Speed

4100Stability/Droop Idle/Maximum Speed

6100 Stability Map

200 Ramp/Start

2200 4200 Ramp 6200 Stability Map (correction values)

300 Injection

2300 Injection 4300 Injection 6300

400 CAN bus

2400 CAN bus 4400 CAN bus 6400 Load-dependent Fuel Limitation

500 Oil PressureBoost Pres-sureTemperatures

2500 4500Oil PressureBoost Pres-sureTemperatures

6500 Oil Pressure Monitorin-gCoolant Pressure Moni-toring

600 Excitation Control 2600 Excitation Control 4600 Excitation Control 6600 Excitation Control

700 Limitations 2700 Limitations 4700 Limitations 6700 Speed-dependent Fuel Limitation 1

800 Digital Switch Functions 2800 Digital Switch Functions 4800Configuration of Digital Input/Output Channels

6800 Speed-dependent Fuel Limitation 2

900 Setpoint AdjustersSen-sors

2900 Setpoint AdjustersSen-sors

4900Setpoint AdjustersSen-sors

6900 NotchesSpeed dependentLoad Limitation

1000 Error Handling 3000 Actual Errors 5000 Error Handling

1200 Generator 3200 Generator 5200 Generator

1350 Locomotive 3350 Locomotive 5350 Locomotive

1500 Analogue Inputs 3500 Analogue Inputs 5500Configuration of Ana-logue Input Channels

1600 PWM-Outputs 3600 Internal Measurements Feedback Digital Outputs

1800 Status

3800 Status 5800 7800 Temperature Sensors

1900 Magnetic Valves 3900 Status Magnetic Valves 5900Magnetic Valves

7900 Temperature Sensors

8800 Digital Outputs

16000 Delivery Begin

13000 Actual Errors 17000 Delivery Period

11100 PWM-Outputs Digital Outputs

15100PWM-Outputs Digital Outputs

11250 Current Outputs 15250 Current Outputs

17500 Correction of Cylinder-specific Delivery Begin and Period

18000 Effective rail pressure setpoint

20000 Rail pressure 22000 Rail pressure 24000 Rail pressure 26000

Pre-Pre-Injection Pre Injection Post-Injection Map Post-Post-Injection

20100 Rail Pressure Regulator 22100 Rail Pressure Regulator 24100 Rail Pressure Regulator

20200 Current Regulator 22200 Current Regulator 24200 Current Regulator

20300

Pre-Pre-Injection Pre Injection Post-Injection Post-Post-Injection

22300

Pre-Pre-Injection Pre Injection Post-Injection Post-Post-Injection

24300

Pre-Pre-Injection Pre-Injection Post-Injection Post-Post-Injection

20800 Communication Switch Functions

24800Communication Switch Functions

23000 Actual Errors

23700 Bit Collections

21750 CANopen 23750 CANopen 25750 CANopen

21850 DeviceNet 23850 DeviceNet 25850 DeviceNet

21900 SAE J1939 23900 SAE J1939 25900 SAE J1939


25950HZM-CAN Customer Module


Parameter Measurements Functions Curves

No. Designation No. Designation No. Designation No. Designation

29000 CANopen

29400 DeviceNet

29600 SAE J1939


29900 Bit Collections

Table 72: Parameter groups



29.2 List 1: Parameters

1 TeethPickUp1 Level: 6 Range: 30..255

Number of teeth pickup 1

47 Page(s):

2 TeethPickUp2 Level: 6 Range: 30..255

Number of teeth pickup 2

47 Page(s):

3 SensorToGapPickUp1 Level: 6 Range: 0..720 °BTDC

Distance of pickup 1 sensor to the mark on the crank-shaft wheel

152, 155 Page(s):

4 SensorToGapPickUp2 Level: 6 Range: 0..720 °BTDC

Distance of pickup 2 sensor to the mark on the crank-shaft wheel

152, 155 Page(s):

5 SensorToCamIndex Level: 6 Range: 0..720 °BTDC

Distance of camshaft index sensor to the mark on the camshaft wheel

152, 155, 93 Page(s):

6 GapRatio Level: 6 Ratio for determination of the synchronizing mark

– multiplier for the time between two teeth

Range: 0..1,99 resp. 0..3,98 154, 346 Page(s):

7 GapToCamIndexMax Level: 6 Allowed distance to camshaft index f Range: 0..720 °crank

155 Page(s):

9 EngineConfiguration Level: 6 Configuration of cylinder number and firing sequence Range: 0..4

156 Page(s):

10 SpeedMin1 Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Minimum speed for speed range 1

39, 40, 44, 55, 109 Page(s):

11 SpeedMin2 Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Minimum speed for speed range 2

56, 10956109 Page(s):

12 SpeedMax1 Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Maximum speed for speed range 1

56, 109 Page(s):

13 SpeedMax2 Level: 2 speed for sp Range: 0..4000 rpm

Maximum eed range 2

56, 109 Page(s):



17 SpeedFix1 Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Fixed speed 1

55 Page(s):

18 SpeedFix2 Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Fixed speed 2

55 Page(s):

20 SpeedSetpPC Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed setpoint set by PC

53, 55, 117, 121 Page(s):

21 SpeedOver Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed threshold for emergency stop in case of over-speed

50, 93, 342 Page(s):

24 SpeedMinAbsolute Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Minimum idle speed for lowering during zero load lo-comotive operation

124 Page(s):

28 DT1SpeedThreshold Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed threshold above which speed increase/decrease is monitored

Page(s): 81, 94

29 DT1SpSetpDiffThresh Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed setpoint jump thresholdspeed increase/decrease is monitored only if lower.

Page(s): 81

30 DT1SpeedDiffMax Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed range around speed setpoint for recognition load or speed jump has been compensated.

Page(s): 82

31 DT1SpeedDiffTime Level: 2 Range: 1..1000 s

Time for recognition if load or speed jump has been compensated.

Page(s): 82

32 SpeedGradDT1Thresh Level: 2 Range: 0..2000 rpmps

Threshold for speed gradientis calculated outside DT1-factor

Page(s): 81

33 SpeedGradDT1Filter Level: 2 Range: 0..2,55 s

Filter for determination of speed gradient

Resp. 1..255 Page(s): 81

34 PowerGradDT1Thresh Level: 2 Range: 0..50 %/s factor

Threshold for power gradientis calculated outside DT1-

Page(s): 81



35 PowerGradDT1Filter Level: 2 Range: 0..2,55 s

Filter for determination of power gradient

resp. 1..255 Page(s): 81

40 FreqOutSpeedMin DARDANOS MVC03-8 Level: 6 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Lower limit of the speed range within which the fre-quency output is enabled

282 Page(s):

41 FreqOutSpeedMax DARDANOS MVC03-8 Level: 6 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Upper limit of the speed range within which the fre-quency output is enabled

282 Page(s):

60 SpeedMinAtTempLow Level: 3 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Idle speed for cold engine

67 Page(s):

61 SpeedMinTempLow Level: 3 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Low temperature limit for temperature dependent idle speed

67 Page(s):

62 SpeedMinTempHigh Level: 3 Range: -100..+1000 °C

High temperature limit for temperature dependent idle speed

67 Page(s):

90 SpeedSwitch Level: 3 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Switch 1 Speed

Page(s): 50, 142

91 SpeedSwitch2 Level: 3 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Switch 2 Speed

Page(s): 50

92 SpeedSwitch3 Level: 3 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Switch 3 Speed

Page(s): 50

100 Gain Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Gain for speed governor

74 Page(s):

101 Stability Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Stability for speed governor

74 Page(s):

102 Derivative Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Derivative for speed governor

74 Page(s):



103 SpeedDT1 Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

DT1-factor for speed gradient

Page(s): 82

104 PowerDT1 Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

DT1-factor for power gradient

Page(s): 82

105 Gain2 Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Page(s):

106 Stability2 Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Page(s):

107 Derivative2 Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Page(s):

110 StaticCorrFactor Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Correction factor of PID values in static operation

80 Page(s):

111 StaticCorrRange Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed range for correction factor

80 Page(s):

120 Droop1 Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Droop 1

71, 135 Page(s):

121 Droop1RefLow Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Fuel quantity reference point off-load for droop 1

73, 135 Page(s):

122 Droop1RefHigh Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Fuel quantity reference point full-load for droop 1

73, 135 Page(s):

123 Droop1SpeedRef Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed reference point for droop 1

72, 135 Page(s):

125 Droop2 Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Droop 2

71, 135 Page(s):



126 Droop2RefLow Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Fuel quantity reference point off-load for droop 2

73, 135 Page(s):

127 Droop2RefHigh Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Fuel quantity reference point full-load for droop 2

73, 135 Page(s):

128 Droop2SpeedRef Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed reference point for droop 2

72, 135 Page(s):

Marine Operation Twin Engine 129 TwinEcyDroop Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 min-1

Droop for emergency operation in master-/slave-sets

Page(s):

130 IMRampUp Level: 2 Range: 0..800 mm³/str/s

Fuel ramp upward at idle / maximum speed governor

111, 144 Page(s):

Marine Operation Twin Engine 130 TwinEcyDroopRefLow Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str/s Page(s):

Fuel quantity reference point off-load for droop at emergency operation in master-/slave-sets

131 IMRampDown Level: 2 Range: 0..800 mm³/str/s

Fuel ramp downward for idle/maximum speed governor

111, 144 Page(s):

Marine Operation Twin Engine 131 TwinEcyDroopRefHigh Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str/s Page(s):

Fuel quantity reference point full load for droop at emergency operation in master-/slave-sets

Marine Operation Twin Engine 132 TwinEcyDroopSpeedref Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 min-1 Page(s):

Speed reference point for droop at emergency operation in master-/slave-sets

140 IMIdleDroop Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Droop for idle speed control

110 Page(s):

141 IMMaximumDroop Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Droop for maximum speed limit

110 Page(s):

142 IMDroopRefLow Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Reference point at zero load for droop of idle/maximum speed control

110 Page(s):



143 IMDroopRefHigh Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Reference point at full load for droop of idle/maximum speed control

110 Page(s):

150 IMSpeedIncrease Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed increase for loaded idle speed

111 Page(s):

160 PID_ColdCorr Level: 3 Range: 0..400 %

PID correction factor for cold engine

79 Page(s):

161 PID_CorrTempLow Level: 3 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Low temperature limit for temperature dependent PID correction

79 Page(s):

162 PID_CorrTempHigh Level: 3 Range: -100..+1000 °C

High temperature limit for temperature dependent PID correction

79 Page(s):

230 SpeedRampUp Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpmps

Change rate for upward speed ramp (speed increase per second))

68 Page(s):

231 SpeedRampDown Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpmps

Change rate for downward speed ramp (speed decrease per second)

68 Page(s):

232 SpeedRampUp2 Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpmps

Change rate for second upward speed ramp (speed increase per second)

69 Page(s):

233 SpeedRampDown2 Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpmps

Change rate for second downward speed ramp (speed decrease per second)

69 Page(s):

234 SpeedRampUp3 Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpmps

Change rate for third upward speed ramp (speed increase per second))

69 Page(s):

235 SpeedRampDown3 Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpmps

Change rate for third downward speed ramp (speed decrease per second)

69 Page(s):

236 SpeedSwitchToRamp2 Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed when to switch to second speed ramp

69 Page(s):

237 SpeedSwitchToRamp3 Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed when to switch to third speed ramp

69 Page(s):



240 StartSpeedRampUp Level: 3 Range: 0..4000 rpmps

Change rate for speed increase during start-up (speed increase per second)

44 Page(s):

241 SpeedMinAbsRampDown Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpmps

Change rate for speed decrease during speed lowering in locomotive operation (speed decrease per second)

124 Page(s):

242 SpeedMinAbsDelay Level: 2 Range: 0..600 s resp. 0..1000 s

Delay until lowering begin of idle speed in locomotive operation

124 Page(s):

250 StartType Level: 3 Range: 1..3

Type of starting fuel adjustment: 1: Fixed starting fuel limitation

38 Page(s): 2: Variable starting fuel limitation 3: Temperature dependent starting fuel limitation

251 LimitsDelay Level: 3 Range: 0..100 s

Delay time for activation of boundary functions. This time starts running when the governor detects engine start-off 40, 44 Page(s):

255 StartSpeed1 Level: 3 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Minimum speed above which the engine is recognized as being cranked (beginning of starting phase 1)

39, 40, 44, 48 Page(s):


Minimum speed above which engine is recognized to be running.

39, 44, 49, 146, 340, 346 Page(s):


With the speed ramp function enabledthe speed gover-nor will start the engine with speed as set by StartS-peed3 and then ramp up to set speed. 44 Page(s):

260 StartFuel1 Level: 3 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Start fuel 1

39, 40, 43 Page(s):

261 StartFuel2 Level: 3 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Start fuel 2 (required only for start types 2 and 3)

40, 43 Page(s):

265 StartDuration1 Level: 3 Range: 0..100 s

Holding time for operation by starting fuel 1 (needed only for start type 2)

40 Page(s):

266 StartDuration2 Level: 3 Range: 0..100 s

Time during which fuel is linearly increased from 260 StartFuel1 to 261 StartFuel2

40 Page(s): (required only for start type 2)



270 StartTempWarm Level: 3 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Temperature of warm engine at which the engine is started with 260 StartFuel1


271 StartTempCold Level: 3 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Temperature of cold engine at which the engine is started with 261 StartFuel2


280 StarterCrankTimeMax Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s resp. 0..1000 s Page(s)

Maximum cranking activation time

146

281 StarterInterlockTime Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s resp. 0..1000 s

Interlocking time for starter

146 Page(s):

282 StarterCrankAttempts Level: 4 Range: 1..255

Number of cranking attempts

146 Page(s):

290 AlternatorStartDelay Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s resp. 0..1000 s

Delay time for monitoring of alternator tension after engine start

147 Page(s):

310 DeliveryBeginSetp Level: 4 Delivery begin if map is disabled (4310 DeliveryBe-

ginMapOn = 0)

Range: -20..+50 °BTDC 167, 184 Page(s):

318 DelTimeMainInjAbsMin CR

DeliveryPeriodMinAbs PPN Level: 4 Range: -8.192..8.192 ms resp. -15,624..15,624 ms

Lower limit for delivery period of injection

-20..50 °crank 178, 195 Page(s):

319 DelTimeMainInjAbsMax CR

DeliveryPeriodMaxAbs PPN Level: 4 Range: -8.192..8.192 ms resp. -15,624..15,624 ms

Upper limit for delivery period of injection

-20..50 °crank 178, 195 Page(s):

352 FuelAtZeroLoad Level: 3 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Zero-load fuel for rapid reaction during load shedding.

83 Page(s):



Marine Operation Multiengine 397 PartnerDCNodeNumber Level: 3 Range: 0..31

Node number further engine at the same control lever

Page(s):

Marine Operation Multiengine 398 ThirdDCNodeNumber Level: 3 Range: 0..31

Node number first engine at the same control lever

Page(s):

Marine Operation Multiengine 399 FourthDCNodeNumber Level: 3 Range: 0..31

Node number second engine at the second control lever

Page(s):

400 CanStartTimeOutDelay Level: 6 Range: 0..100 s

Delay of HZM-CAN-connection monitoring after reset.

144, 321, 325 Page(s):

401 CanMyNodeNumber Level: 6 Range: 1..31

Own node numbers in HZM-CAN network

144, 321 Page(s):

402 CanOtherNodeNumber

CanDCNodeNumber Level: 6 Range: 1..31

Node number of other customer module in HZM-CAN network

Page(s): 144, 321

403 CanCMNodeNumber Level: 6 Range: 1..31

Node number of customer module in HZM-CAN net-work

Page(s): 321

404 CanPENodeNumber(x) Level: 6 ff Range: 1..31

Node numbers of periphery modules in HZM-CAN network

Page(s): 321, 325

407 CanPENodeType(x) Level: 6 ff Range: 0..4

Node numbers of periphery modules in HZM-CAN network

Page(s): 321, 325

410 Can1Prescaler Level: 6 Range: 0..255 resp. 0..63

Prescaler for CAN Baud rate when 4416 Can1SegmentOrBaudrate = 1

321 Page(s):

411 Can1SyncJumpWidth Level: 6 Range: 0..3

Synchronizing jump width for CAN Baud rate when 4416 Can1SegmentOrBaudrate = 1

322 Page(s):



412 Can1SamplingMode Level: 6 Range: 0..1

Sampling mode for CAN Baud rate when 4416 Can1SegmentOrBaudrate = 1

322 Page(s):

413 Can1PhaseSegment1 Level: 6 Range: 0..7 resp. 0..15

Phase segment 1 of CAN baudrate when 4416 Can1SegmentOrBaudrate = 1

Page(s): 322

414 Can1PhaseSegment2 Level: 6 Range: 0..7


Page(s): 322

415 Can1PropSegment Level: 6 Range: 0..7

Phase segment for CAN baud rate when 4416 Can1SegmentOrBaudrate = 1

321 Page(s):

416 Can1Baudrate Level: 4 CAN baudrate

when 4416 Can1SegmentOrBaudrate = 0 Range: 125,250,500,1000 kBaud Page(s): 321

420 Can2Prescaler Level: 6 Range: 0..255 resp. 0..63

Prescaler for CAN Baud rate when 4417 Can2SegmentOrBaudrate = 1

Page(s): 322

421 Can2SyncJumpWidth Level: 6 Range: 0..3

Synchronizing jump width for CAN Baud rate when 4417 Can2SegmentOrBaudrate = 1

Page(s): 322

422 Can2SamplingMode Level: 6 Range: 0..1

Sampling mode for CAN Baud rate when 4417 Can2SegmentOrBaudrate = 1

Page(s): 322

423 Can2PhaseSegment1 Level: 6 Range: 0..7 resp. 0..15


Page(s): 322

424 Can2PhaseSegment2 Level: 6 Range: 0..7


Page(s): 322

425 Can2PropSegment Level: 6 Range: 0..7

Phase segment for CAN baud rate when 4417 Can2SegmentOrBaudrate = 1

Page(s): 322



426 Can2Baudrate Level: 4 CAN baudrate

when 4417 Can2SegmentOrBaudrate = 0 Range: 125,250,500,1000 kBaud Page(s): 322

440 PEFuelSetpSendRate Level: 6 Range: 0..100 s Page(s) 326

Sending rate of fuel setpoint to HZM-CAN periphery module

441 PEDigOutSendRate Level: 6 Range: 0..100 s Page(s) 327

Transmission rate of digital output values to the HZM-CAN periphery module

442 PEAnalogOutSendRate Level: 6 Range: 0..100 s Page(s) 327

Transmission rate of analogue output values to the HZM-CAN periphery module

443 PEPWMOutSendRate Level: 6 Range: 0..100 s Page(s) 328

Transmission rate of PWM output values to the HZM-CAN periphery module

447 PEMeasureSendRate Level: 6 Range: 0..100 s Page(s):

Transmission rate of measured values to the HZM-CAN periphery module

450 PEDigOutx_Assign Level: 6 Range: -29999..29999 Pages(s): 327

Assignation of a parameter to the digital output x of the HZM-CAN periphery module (x PE1-03: 1..3PE1-04: 1..5PE2-01: 1..4 PE6-07: 1..2)

ff

455 PEPWMOutx_Assign Level: 4 Range: -29999..29999 Page(s):: 327

Assignation of a parameter to the PWM output x of the HZM-CAN periphery module (x PE1-03: 1..3PE1-04: 1..3PE2-01: 1..4 PE6-07: 1..2)

ff

458 PEPWMOutx_ValueMin Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 327

Minimum value at PWM output x of HZM-CAN pe-riphery module by per cent of value range of output parameter (x: see 455 PEPWMOutx_Assign)

ff

459 PEPWMOutx_ValueMax Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Pages(s): 327

Maximum value at PWM output x of HZM-CAN pe-riphery module by per cent of value range of output parameter

ff

(x: see 455 PEPWMOutx_Assign)

475 PEPowerOutx_Assign Level: 4 Range: -29999..29999

Assignation of a parameter to the PWM power output of the HZM-CAN periphery module PE 2-01

Page(s):



478 PEPowerOutx_ValueMin Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Minimum value at PWM power output of HZM-CAN periphery module PE 2-01 by per cent of value range

Page(s):

479 PEPowerOutx_ValueMax Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Maximum value at PWM power output of HZM-CAN periphery module PE 2-01 by per cent of value range

Page(s):

PE1-03PE1-04 PE2-01PE6-07 PE2-01

480 PEAnaOutx_Assign PECurrOutx_Assign PEVoltOutx_Assign Level: 4 Range: -29999..29999 Pages(s):

Assignation of a parameter to the analogue output x of the HZM-CAN periphery module (x PE1-03: 1..2PE1-04: 1..2PE2-01: 1..4 PE6-07: 1..2)

ff

327

PE1-03PE1-04 PE2-01PE6-07 PE2-01

483 PEAnaOutx_ValueMin PECurrOutx_ValueMin PEVoltOutx_ValueMin Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Pages(s): 327

Minimum value at analogue output x of HZM-CAN periphery module by per cent of value range (x: see 480 PEAnaOutx_Assign)

ff

PE1-03PE1-04 PE2-01PE6-07 PE2-01

484 PEAnaOutx_ValueMax PECurrOutx_ValueMax PEVoltOutx_ValueMax Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Pages(s): 327

Maximum value at analogue output x of HZM-CAN periphery module by per cent of value range (x: see 480 PEAnaOutx_Assign)

ff

500 OilPressStartDelay Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Starting delay for speed dependent oil pressure monitor-ing

Page(s): 103

501 OilPressWarnDelay Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay before signalling oil pressure warning

Page(s): 103

502 OilPressEcyDelay Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay before executing oil pressure emergency shutdown

103 Page(s):

503 OilPressHysteresis Level: 4 Range: 0..10 bar

Hysteresis for error reset for speed-dependent oil pres-sure monitoring

Page(s): 105

505 CoolPressStartDelay Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Starting delay of coolant pressure monitoring

Page(s): 105

506 CoolPressDelay1 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 1 error message of coolant pressure monitoring

Page(s): 106



507 CoolPressDelay2 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 2 error message of coolant pressure monitoring

Page(s): 106

508 CoolPressHysteresis Level: 4 Range: 0..5 bar

Hysteresis for error reset of coolant pressure monitoring

Page(s): 106

520 RailPress1Hysteresis CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar

Hysteresis for error reset of rail pressure 1 monitoring

Page(s): 99

521 RailPress1Limit1 CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar

Limit 1 for rail pressure 1 monitoring

Page(s): 99

522 RailPress1Delay1 CR Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 1 error message of rail pressure 1 monitoring

Page(s): 99



Page(s): 99



Page(s): 99

525 RailPress2Hysteresis CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar

Hysteresis for error reset of rail pressure 2 monitoring

Page(s): 100



Page(s): 100



Page(s): 100



Page(s): 100



Page(s): 100

530 RailPressLeakLimit CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar

Limitation of rail pressure when rail leakage is detected

Page(s):



550 CoolTempHysteresis Level: 4 Range: 0..150 °C

Hysteresis for error reset of coolant temperature moni-toring

Page(s): 97

551 CoolTempLimit1 Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Limit 1 for coolant temperature monitoring

Page(s): 97

552 CoolTempDelay1 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 1 error message of coolant tem-perature monitoring

Page(s): 97

553 CoolTempLimit2 Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Limit 2 for coolant temperature monitoring

Page(s): 97

554 CoolTempDelay2 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 2 error message of coolant tem-perature monitoring

Page(s): 97

555 ChAirTempHysteresis Level: 4 Range: 0..150 °C

Hysteresis for error reset of charge air temperature monitoring

Page(s): 97

556 ChAirTempLimit1 Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Limit 1 for charge air temperature monitoring

Page(s): 97

557 ChAirTempDelay1 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 1 error message of charge air tem-perature monitoring

Page(s): 97

558 ChAirTempLimit2 Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Limit 2 for charge air temperature monitoring

Page(s): 97

559 ChAirTempDelay2 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 2 error message of charge air tem-perature monitoring

Page(s): 98

560 OilTempHysteresis Level: 4 Range: 0..150 °C

Hysteresis for error reset of oil temperature monitoring

Page(s): 95

561 OilTempLimit1 Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Limit 1 for oil temperature monitoring

Page(s): 95

562 OilTempDelay1 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 1 error message of oil temperature monitoring

95 Page(s):



563 OilTempLimit2 Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Limit 2 for oil temperature monitoring

Page(s): 95

564 OilTempDelay2 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 2 error message of oil temperature monitoring

Page(s): 95

565 FuelTempHysteresis Level: 4 Range: 0..150 °C

Hysteresis for error reset of fuel temperature monitoring

Page(s): 99

566 FuelTempLimit1 Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Limit 1 for fuel temperature monitoring

Page(s): 99

567 FuelTempDelay1 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 1 error message of fuel temperature monitoring

Page(s): 99

568 FuelTempLimit2 Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Limit 2 for fuel temperature monitoring

Page(s): 99

569 FuelTempDelay2 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 2 error message for fuel tempera-ture monitoring

Page(s): 99

570 ExhaustTempHysteres Level: 4 Range: 0..150 °C

Hysteresis for error reset of exhaust gas temperature monitoring

Page(s): 98

571 ExhaustTempLimit1 Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Limit 1 for exhaust gas temperature monitoring

Page(s): 98

572 ExhaustTempDelay1 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 1 error message of exhaust gas temperature monitoring

Page(s): 98

573 ExhaustTempLimit2 Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Limit 2 for exhaust gas temperature monitoring

98 Page(s):

574 ExhaustTempDelay2 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 2 error message of exhaust gas temperature monitoring

Page(s): 98

575 TurboOilTempHysteres Level: 4 Range: 0..150 °C

Hysteresis for error reset of turbocharger oil tempera-ture monitoring

Page(s): 100



576 TurboOilTempLimit1 Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Limit 1 for turbocharger oil temperature monitoring

Page(s): 101

577 TurboOilTempDelay1 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 1 error message of turbocharger oil temperature monitoring

Page(s): 101

578 TurboOilTempLimit2 Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Limit 2 for turbocharger oil temperature monitoring

Page(s): 101

579 TurboOilTempDelay2 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 2 error message of turbocharger oil temperature monitoring

Page(s): 101

580 FuelPressHysteresis Level: 4 Range: 0..6 bar

Hysteresis for error reset of fuel pressure monitoring

Page(s): 101

581 FuelPressLimit1 Level: 4 Range: 0..6 bar

Limit 1 for fuel pressure monitoring

Page(s): 101

582 FuelPressDelay1 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 1 error message of fuel pressure monitoring

Page(s): 101

583 FuelPressLimit2 Level: 4 Range: 0..6 bar

Limit 2 for fuel pressure monitoring

Page(s): 101

584 FuelPressDelay2 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 2 error message of fuel pressure monitoring

Page(s): 101

585 OilLevelHysteres Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Hysteresis for error reset of oil level monitoring

Page(s): 102

586 OilLevelLimit1 Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Limit 1 for oil level monitoring

Page(s): 102

587 OilLevelDelay1 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 1 error message of oil level moni-toring

Page(s): 102

588 OilLevelLimit2 Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Limit 2 for oil level monitoring

Page(s): 102



589 OilLevelDelay2 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 2 error message of oil level moni-toring

Page(s): 102

590 TrOilPressHysteresis Level: 4 Range: 0..6 bar

Hysteresis for error reset of transmission oil pressure monitoring

Page(s): 103

591 TrOilPressLimit1 Level: 4 Range: 0..6 bar

Limit 1 for transmission oil pressure monitoring

Page(s): 103

592 TrOilPressDelay1 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 1 error message of transmission oil pressure monitoring

Page(s): 103

593 TrOilPressLimit2 Level: 4 Range: 0..6 bar

Limit 2 for transmission oil pressure monitoring

Page(s): 103

594 TrOilPressDelay2 Level: 4 Range: 0..600 s

Time delay for limit 2 error message of transmission oil pressure monitoring

Page(s): 103

600 ExcitCntrlFactor Level: 2 Range: -400..400 %

Amplification factor for excitation control in locomo-tive operation

Page(s): 115, 117

605 ExcitLimitForced1 Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

First limitation of excitation signal at activated excita-tion signal limitation in locomotive operation

Page(s): 122

606 ExcitLimitForced2 Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Second limitation of excitation signal at activated exci-tation signal limitation in locomotive operation

Page(s): 122

610 ExcitCntrlRampUp Level: 2 Range: 0..800 %/s

Factor for upward ramp for excitation control in loco-motive operation (in percent per second)

Page(s): 117

611 ExcitCntrlRampDown Level: 2 Range: 0..800 %/s

Factor for downward ramp for excitation control in locomotive operation (in percent per second)

Page(s): 117

620 ExcitSlideDec Level: 2 Range: -50..50 %

Reduction value for decreasing power control signal in locomotive operation in case of sliding wheels

Page(s): 125

621 ExcitSlideDuration Level: 2 Range: 0..100 s

Waiting time after decreasing power control signal in locomotive operation in case of sliding wheels

Page(s): 125



630 ExcitGovGain Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Gain factor of load governor in locomotive operation

Page(s): 120

631 ExcitGovStability Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Stability factor of load governor in locomotive opera-tion

Page(s): 120

632 ExcitGovDerivative Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Derivative factor of load governor in locomotive opera-tion

Page(s): 120

633 ExcitationSetpFilter Level: 2 Range: 0,01..2,55 s resp. 1..255

Filter value of excitation signal in locomotive operation

Page(s): 120

635 ExcitationSetpPC Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Excitation signal setpoint with PC in locomotive opera-tion

Page(s): 117, 121

636 ExcitFuelOffset Level: 2 Range: -50..50 %

Offset of fuel value from load characteristic in locomo-tive operation

Page(s): 116, 120

637 ExcitFuelLimForced1 Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Excitation signal limitation at activated load limitation in locomotive operation

Page(s): 122

638 ExcitFuelLimForced2 Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Excitation signal limitation at activated load limitation in locomotive operation

Page(s): 122

640 ExcitGovFuelRampUp Level: 2 Range: 0..800 %/s

Ramping rate upward for fuel quantity in locomotive operation (in percent per second)

Page(s): 120

641 ExcitGovFuelRampDown Level: 2 Range: 0..800 %/s

Ramping rate downward for fuel quantity in locomotive operation (in percent per second)

Page(s): 120

650 ExcitLimitTempDec Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Reduction of fuel quantity for temperature dependent lowering of the fuel setpoint characteristic during exci-tation governing with warm engine Page(s): 123

651 ExcitLimitTempLow Level: 2 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Lower limit for temperature dependent lowering of the fuel setpoint characteristic during excitation governing

Page(s): 123



652 ExcitLimitTempHigh Level: 2 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Upper limit for temperature dependent lowering of the fuel setpoint characteristic during excitation governing

Page(s): 123

711 FuelLimitMaxAbsolute Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Absolute injection quantity limitation

Page(s): 84

715 FuelLimitForced Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Injection quantity limitation when forced limitation is active

Page(s): 91

809 EngineStopExtraTime Level: 4 Range: 0..100 s

Extra time for engine stop request

Page(s): 257

810 FunctEngineStop Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Engine stop" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255, 258, 260

811 FunctIdleSpeed Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Idle speed" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

812 FunctDroop2Or1 Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Droop 1/2" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 140, 255

813 FunctForcedLimit Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Forced Limitation" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

814 FunctSpeedRange2Or1 Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Speed range ½" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 56, 255

815 FunctSpeedFix1 Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Fixed speed 1" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

816 FunctSpeedFix2 Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Fixed speed 2" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255



817 FunctSpeedLimit2Or1 Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Speed limitation 1/2" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

818 FunctSlide Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Slide protection" in locomotive operation

Page(s): 255 (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

818 FunctKnock Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Knocking" in generator operation


819 FunctNotch3 Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Speed notch 3" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255



Page(s): 255



Page(s): 255



Page(s): 255

823 FunctExcitLimit1 Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "First excitation signal limitation" in locomotive operation


824 FunctExcitLimit2 Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Second excitation sig-nal limitation" in locomotive operation




825 FunctSpeedInc Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Speed increase" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32) Page(s): 255

826 FunctSpeedDec Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Speed decrease" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

827 FunctSetpoint2Or1 Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Setpoint adjuster 1/2" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 57, 255

828 FunctErrorReset Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Reset error" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

829 FunctFreezeSetp1 Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Freeze Setpoint 1" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

830 FunctFreezeSetp2 Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Freeze Setpoint 2" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

831 FunctIMOrAllSpeedGov Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Governor mode" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

832 FunctCruiseControl Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Cruise control" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

834 FunctSyncEnable Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Synchronizing enable" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

835 FunctLoadEnable Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Load control enable" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255



836 FunctAutoOrManual Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Change Over Generator Operation"


840 FunctExcitationOn Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Excitation signal" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 115, 255

Locomotive Operation 841 FunctLowIdleOn Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Low idle speed" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

Marine Operation Twin Engine 841 FunctMasterOrSlave Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Master oder Slave" (x DARDANOS MVC01-20: 11, DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

Generator 842 FunctPID2Or1 Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "PID parameter set 2 or 1"

Page(s): 255 (x DARDANOS MVC01-20: 11, DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Marine Operation Twin Engine 842 FunctLoadTransfer Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Load Transfer" (x DARDANOS MVC01-20: 11, DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

Marine Operation Multiengine 842 FunctCommand Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Command" (x DARDANOS MVC01-20: 11, DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

Marine Operation Twin Engine 843 FunctClutch Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Clutch" (x DARDANOS MVC01-20: 11, DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

Marine Operation Multiengine 843 FunctSynchro Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Synchro" (x DARDANOS MVC01-20: 11, DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

Marine Operation Twin Engine 844 FunctAsymLoadEnable Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Asymmetrical Load" (x DARDANOS MVC01-20: 11, DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255



845 FunctRailLeakDetect Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Rail-Leakage" (x DARDANOS MVC01-20: 11, DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

846 FunctGenBreaker Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Contactor" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

847 FunctAlternator Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Alternator tension" (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

848 FunctDelMaps2Or1 Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Characteristi map 1/2 for delivery begin and quantity for pre- and post-injection“ Page(s): 255 (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

849 FunctStartEngine Level: 6 Range: -x..x

Switch assignment to function "Engine Start Request“ (x DARDANOS MVC01-20: 11, DARDANOS MVC03-8: 9, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 17, with HZM-CAN periphery module up to 32)

Page(s): 255

900 AssignIn_Setp1Ext Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to speed setpoint 1

Page(s): 64, 250, 326

901 AssignIn_Setp2Ext Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to speed setpoint 2

Page(s): 250

902 AssignIn_LoadCtrlInp Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to load setpoint

Page(s): 136, 250

903 AssignIn_SyncInput Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to speed setpoint from synchronizing unit

Page(s): 250

904 AssignIn_BoostPress Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to boost pressure

Page(s): 250

905 AssignIn_OilPress Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to oil pressure

Page(s): 250



DARDANOS MVC04-6 906 AssignIn_AmbPress Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to ambient pressure

Page(s): 250

907 AssignIn_CoolantTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to coolant temperature

Page(s): 250

908 AssignIn_ChAirTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to charge air temperature

Page(s): 250

909 AssignIn_OilTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to oil temperature

Page(s): 250

910 AssignIn_FuelTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to fuel temperature

Page(s): 250

911 AssignIn_ExhaustTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to exhaust gas temperature

Page(s): 250

912 AssignIn_RailPress1 CR Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to rail pressure 1

Page(s): 230, 250

913 AssignIn_RailPress2 CR Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to rail pressure 2

Page(s): 230, 250

914 AssignIn_ExcitReduct Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to the reduced value of excitation signal for slide protection

Page(s): 250

915 AssignIn_SpeedReduct Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to the reduced value of speed setpoint for slide protection

Page(s): 250

916 AssignIn_CoolPress Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to coolant pressure

Page(s): 250

Marine Operation Twin Engine 917 AssignIn_AsymmLoad Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to asymmetrical load

Page(s): 250



918 AssignIn_MeasPower Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to measured power

Page(s): 250

919 AssignIn_PowerSetp Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to power setpoint

Page(s): 250

920 AssignIn_TurbOilTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to Turbocharger oil tem-perature

Page(s): 250

921 AssignIn_FuelPress Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to fuel pressure

Page(s): 250

922 AssignIn_OilLevel Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to oil level

Page(s): 250

923 AssignIn_FuelLimExt Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to external fuel quantity limitation

Page(s): 250

924 AssignIn_TransmOilPr Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to transmission oil pres-sure

Page(s): 250

925 AssignIn_AirMass Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to air mass

Page(s): 250

976 SensorSwitchLow Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

0-threshold for switching functions via analogue input

Page(s):

977 SensorSwitchHigh Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

1- threshold for switching functions via analogue input

Page(s):

978 CoolPressSensorLow Level: 4 Range: 0..5 bar

Minimum value of coolant pressure sensor

Page(s): 251

979 CoolPressSensorHigh Level: 4 Range: 0..5 bar

Maximum value of coolant pressure sensor

Page(s): 251



980 OilPressSensorLow Level: 4 Range: 0..10 bar

Minimum value of oil pressure sensor

Page(s): 251

981 OilPressSensorHigh Level: 4 Range: 0..10 bar

Maximum value of oil pressure sensor

Page(s): 251

982 BoostPressSensorLow Level: 4 Range: 0..5 bar

Minimum value of boost pressure sensor

Page(s): 251

983 BoostPressSensorHigh Level: 4 Range: 0..5 bar

Maximum value of boost pressure sensor

Page(s): 251

984 AmbPressSensorLow DARDANOS MVC04-6 Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 mbar

Minimum value of ambient pressure sensor

Page(s): 251

985 AmbPressSensorHigh DARDANOS MVC04-6 Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 mbar

Maximum value of ambient pressure sensor

Page(s): 251

986 RailPress1SensorLow CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar

Minimum value of rail pressure sensor 1

Page(s): 251

987 RailPress1SensorHigh CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar

Maximum value of rail pressure sensor 1

Page(s): 251

988 RailPress2SensorLow CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar

Minimum value of rail pressure sensor 2

251 Page(s):

989 RailPress2SensorHigh CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar

Maximum value of rail pressure sensor 2

251 Page(s):

991 SpeedRedSensorHigh Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 251

Maximum value of sensor for speed reduction for slide protection in locomotive operation

992 MeasPowerSensorLow Level: 4 Range: 0..2500 kW

Minimum value of measured power sensor

Page(s): 251



993 MeasPowerSensorHigh Level: 4 Range: 0..2500 kW

Maximum value of measured power sensor

Page(s): 251

994 PowerSetpSensorLow Level: 4 Range: 0..2500 kW

Minimum value of power setpoint sensor

Page(s): 251

995 PowerSetpSensorHigh Level: 4 Range: 0..2500 kW

Maximum value of power setpoint sensor

Page(s): 251

996 FuelPressSensorLow Level: 4 Range: 0..6 bar

Minimum value of fuel pressure sensor

Page(s): 251

997 FuelPressSensorHigh Level: 4 Range: 0..6 bar

Maximum value of fuel pressure sensor

Page(s): 251

998 TrOilPressSensorLow Level: 4 Range: 0..40 bar

Minimum value of transmission oil pressure sensor

Page(s): 251

999 TrOilPressSensorHigh Level: 4 Range: 0..40 bar

Maximum value of transmission oil pressure sensor

Page(s): 251

1000 SubstSetp1Ext Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Substitute value for speed setpoint1 in case of error

Page(s): 252

1001 SubstSetp2Ext Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Substitute value for speed setpoint2 in case of error

Page(s): 252

1002 SubstLoadCtrlInput Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Substitute value for power setpoint in case of error

Page(s) 252

1003 SubstSyncInput Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Substitute value for synchronizing signal in case of error

Page(s): 252

1004 SubstBoostPressure Level: 4 Range: 0..5 bar

Substitute value for boost pressure in case of error

Page(s): 252



1005 SubstOilPressure Level: 4 Range: 0..10 bar

Substitute value for oil pressure in case of error

Page(s): 252

1006 SubstAmbientPressure Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 mbar

Substitute value for ambient pressure in case of error

Page(s): 252

1007 SubstCoolantTemp Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Substitute value for coolant temperature in case of error

Page(s): 252

1008 SubstChargeAirTemp Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Substitute value for charge air temperature in case of error

Page(s): 252252

1009 SubstOilTemp Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Substitute value for oil temperature in case of error

252 Page(s):

1010 SubstFuelTemp Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Substitute value for fuel temperature in case of error

252 Page(s):

1011 SubstExhaustTemp Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Substitute value for exhaust gas temperature in case of error

252 Page(s):

1012 SubstRailPressure1 CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar

Substitute value for rail pressure 1 in case of error

252 Page(s):

1013 SubstRailPressure2 CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar

Substitute value for rail pressure 2 in case of error

252 Page(s):

1016 SubstCoolPressure Level: 4 Range: 0..5 bar

Substitute value for coolant pressure in case of error

Page(s): 253

Marine Operation Twin Engine 1017 SubstAsymmetricLoad Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Default value for asymmetrical load in case of error

Page(s): 253

1018 SubstMeasuredPower Level: 4 Range: 0..100%

Substitute value for measured power in case of error

rsp. 0..2500 kW Page(s): 253



1019 SubstPowerSetpoint Level: 4 Range: 0..100%

Substitute value for power setpoint in case of error

rsp. 0..2500 kW Page(s): 253

1020 SubstTurboOilTemp Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Substitute value for turbocharger oil temperature in case of error

Page(s): 253

1021 SubstFuelPressure Level: 4 Range: 0..6 bar

Substitute value for fuel pressure in case of error

Page(s): 253

1022 SubstOilLevel Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Substitute value for oil level in case of error

Page(s): 253

1023 SubstFuelLimitExtern Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Substitute value for external fuel limitation in case of error

Page(s): 253

1024 SubstTransmOilPress Level: 4 Range: 0..40 bar

Substitute value for transmission oil pressure in case of error

Page(s): 253

1025 SubstAirMass Level: 4 Range: 0..1000 kg/h

Default value for air mass in case of error

Page(s): 253

1210 DigitalPotSpeedRamp Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm/s

Change rate (gradient) of speed setpoint when switch speed increas/decrease is used

Page(s): 61, 66, 130

1220 SynchronFactor Level: 2 Range: -100..+100 %

Amplification factor of synchronization signal for ana-logue setpoint modification

Page(s): 131

1221 SynchronReference Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Reference value for synchronization signal

Page(s): 132

1230 LoadControlFactor Level: 2 Range: -100..+100 %

Amplification factor of load setpoint signal for ana-logue setpoint modification

Page(s): 133

1231 LoadControlReference Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Reference value for load control signal

Page(s): 133



1232 RatedPower Level: 2 Range: 0..100%

Rated power

rsp. 0..2500 kW Page(s): 71, 137

1233 PowerGovGain Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Gain for integrated load governor

Page(s): 137

1234 PowerGovStability Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Stability factor for integrated load governor

Page(s): 138

1235 PowerGovDerivative Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Derivative factor for integrated load governor

Page(s): 138

1239 MaxPowerDifference Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Maximum admissible difference between rated and measured power for integrated load governor

Page(s): 138

1240 MaxPowerDiffMaxTime Level: 2 Range: 0..600 s resp. 0..1000 s

Maximum admissible time span for maximum admissi-ble difference between rated and measured power for integrated load governor

Page(s): 138

1241 PowerSetpRampUp Level: 2 Range: 0..800 %/s

Step width for upward load ramp for integrated load governor (power increase per second)

rsp. 0..20000 kW/s Page(s): 137

1242 PowerSetpRampDown Level: 2 Range: 0..800 %/s

Step width for downward load ramp for integrated load

governor (power decrease per second) rsp. 0..20000 kW/s Page(s): 137

1243 PowerSetpointPC Level: 2 Range: 0..100%

Power setpoint by PC for integrated load governor

rsp. 0..2500 kW Page(s): 137

1245 KnockPowerReduction Level: 2 Range: 0..100 %

Reduced value for power reduction in case of engine knocking (integrated power governor)

Page(s): 138138

1246 KnockDuration Level: 2 Range: 0..100 s

Waiting time after power setpoint was reduced after recognition of engine knocking (integrated power gov-ernor) Page(s): 138



Marine Operation Twin Engine 1250 FuelAtZeroLoad Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Fuel quantity value at zero load in master-/slave opera-tion

Page(s):

1250 PositionIUpperRef Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

High reference value of contro lever in position 1 (vessel setpoint with information of sense of rotation)

Page(s):

Marine Operation Twin Engine 1251 FuelAtFullLoad Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Fuel quantity value at full load in master/slave opera-tion

Page(s):

1251 Position0UpperRef Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

High reference value of contro lever in position 0 (vessel setpoint with information of sense of rotation)

Page(s):

Marine Operation Twin Engine 1252 SlaveLoadForDeClutch Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Load setpoint in master/slave operation

Page(s):

1252 PositionIIILowerRef Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Lower reference value of control lever in position III (vessel setpoint with information of sense of rotation)

Page(s):

Marine Operation Twin Engine 1253 SlaveLoadRampUp Level: 4 Range: 0..800 %/s

Load setpoint of other control unit in master/slave op-eration

Page(s):

1253 PositionIRange Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Range of control lever in position I (vessel setpoint with information of sense of rotation)

Page(s):

Marine Operation Twin Engine 1254 SlaveLoadRampDown Level: 4 Range: 0..800 %/s

Setpoint fuel quantity for slave in master/slave opera-tion

Page(s):

1254 Position0Range Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Range of control lever in position 0 (vessel setpoint with information of sense of rotation)

Page(s):

Marine Operation Twin Engine 1255 LowerSpeedClutchIn Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 min-1

Min. speed to engage clutch

Page(s):

1255 PositionIIIRange Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Range of control lever in position III (vessel setpoint with information of sense of rotation)

Page(s):



Marine Operation Twin Engine 1256 UpperSpeedClutchIn Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 min-1

Max. speed to engage clutch

Page(s):

1256 PositionISpeedInc Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 min-1

Speed increase when engaging clutch in position I (vessel setpoint with information of sense of rotation)

Page(s):

1257 PositionIIISpeedInc Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 min-1

Speed increase when engaging clutch in position III (vessel setpoint with information of sense of rotation)

Page(s):

1258 PositionIDelay Level: 4 Range: 0..100 s

Delay for setpoint definition when engaging clutch in position I (vessel setpoint with information of sense of rotation) Page(s):

1259 PositionIIIDelay Level: 4 Range: 0..100 s

Delay for setpoint definition when engaging clutch in position III (vessel setpoint with information of sense of rotation) Page(s):

1350 DigSlideSpeedDec Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed reduction in case of sliding wheels

Page(s): 127

1355 DigSlideDuration Level: 2 Range: 0..100 s

Waiting time during slide protection after reduction of setpoint 1356 AnaSlideSpeedMin

Page(s): 127

1356 AnaSlideSpeedMin Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Absolute minimum speed during reduction through analogue slide protection

Page(s): 128

1500 PWMInx_RefLow DARDANOS MVC01-20/03-8 Level: 4 ff Range: 0..100 %

Lower reference of PWM-Input x

Page(s): DARDANOS MVC01-20: 1 DARDANOS MVC03-8: 2

1501 PWMInx_RefHigh DARDANOS MVC01-20/03-8 Level: 4 ff Range: 0..100 %

Upper reference of PWM-Input x

Page(s): DARDANOS MVC01-20: 1 DARDANOS MVC03-8: 2

1510 AnalogInx_RefLow Level: 4 ff Range: 0..5 V

Lower reference value for analogue input x

0..36 V 0..25 mA resp. 0..65535 Page(s): 288



1511 AnalogInx_RefHigh Level: 4 ff Range: 0..5 V

Upper reference value for analogue input x

0..36 V 0..25 mA resp. 0..65535 Page(s): 288

1512 AnalogInx_ErrorLow Level: 4 ff Range: 0..5 V

Lower error limit for analogue input x

0..36 V 0..25 mA resp. 0..65535 Page(s): 292

1513 AnalogInx_ErrorHigh Level: 4 ff Range: 0..5 V

Upper error limit for analogue input x

0..36 V 0..25 mA resp. 0..65535 Page(s): 292

1514 AnalogInx_Filter Level: 6 ff Range: 0..100 s

Filter value of analogue input x

resp. 1..255 Page(s): 291

1552 TempInx_ErrorLow

1572 Level: 4 ff Range: 0..60000 Ohm

Lower error limit of temperature input x

Page(s): 292

1553 TempInx_ErrorHigh

1573 Level: 4 ff Range: 0..60000 Ohm

Upper error limit of temperature input x

292 Page(s):

1554 TempInx_Filter

1574 Level: 4 ff Range: 0..100 s

Filter value of temperature input x

Page(s): 291

1600 PWMOutx_Assign Level: 4 ff Range: -29999..+29999

Function assignment to PWM output x

Page(s): 296

1601 PWMOutx_RefLow Level: 4 ff Range: 0..100 %

Minimum value of PWM output x

Page(s): 298



1602 PWMOutx_RefHigh Level: 4 ff Range: 0..100 %

Maximum value of PWM outputs x

Page(s): 298

1603 PWMOutx_ValueMin Level: 4 ff Range: 0..100 %

Minimum value of PWM output x in per cent of the value range of output parameter

Page(s): 297

1604 PWMOutx_ValueMax Level: 4 ff Range: 0..100 %

Maximum value of PWM output x in per cent of the value range of output parameter

Page(s): 297

1625 PWMOutx_Frequency DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 6 ff Range: 128..500 Hz

Frequency ofPWM output x

Page(s):

1640 AnalogOutx_Assign DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 4 ff Range: -29999..+29999

Function assignment to analogue output x

Page(s):

1641 AnalogOutx_RefLow DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 4 Minimum value of analogue output x ff Range: 0 100 %

Page(s):

1642 AnalogOutx_RefHigh DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 4 Maximum value of analogue output x ff Range: 0 100 %

Page(s):

1643 AnalogOutx_ValueMin DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 4 ff

Range: 0 100 % Page(s):

Minimum value of analogue output x in per cent of the value range of output parameter

1644 AnalogOutx_ValueMax DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 4 ff

Range: 0 100 % Page(s):

Maximum value of analogue output x in per cent of the value range of output parameter

1651 PWMOutx_Frequency Level: 6 ff Range: 50..300 Hz

Frequency of PWM output x

rsp. 50..500 Hz Page(s): 296

1800 Level Level: 1 Range: 1..7

User level

Page(s): 27

1810 OperationMode Level: 6 Range: 0..4

Operation mode 0 = standard 3 = generator set

Page(s): 52, 57, 60, 63, 64 1 = vehicle 4 = marine 2 = locomotive



1876 ValueStep Level: 2 Range: 0..65535

Step width for value modifications

Page(s): (only handheld programmer)

1900 CylinderMask Level: 6 Mask of active cylinders Range: 00.. xx Hex (xx DARDANOS MVC03-8: FF, DARDANOS

MVC04-6: 3F) Page(s): 162

1901 CylinderMask20to17 DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 6 Range: 00..000F Hex

Mask of active cylinders

Page(s):

1905 ClickTestCylinder Level: 2 Range: 0..x

Selection of cylinder for click test

Page(s): (x DARDANOS MVC01-20: 20, DARDANOS MVC03-8: 8, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 6)

1920 CylinderFaultEcy Level: 4 Range: 1..x

Number of admissible faulty cylinders before engine is switched off

165, 166, 345 Page(s): (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 8, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 6)

1950 BoostTime Level: 6 Range: 0..4 ms

Energizing time by boost current (1960 BoostCurrent)

Page(s): 158, 159

1951 MeasWindowTime Level: 6 Range: 0..4 ms

Time window for detection of closing point (BIP)

Page(s): 158, 159

1952 FlyTimeDefault Level: 6 Range: 0..4 ms

Default flying time of the magnetic valves

Page(s): 158, 159, 161

1953 FlyTimeFilter Level: 6 Range: 1..255

Filter constant for measuring the flying time of the magnetic valves

Page(s): 158, 161

1960 BoostCurrent Level: 6 Range: 0..x A

Boost current

resp. 0..15 (x DARDANOS MVC03-8: 33.33, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 25)

Page(s): 158

1961 HoldCurrent Level: 6 Range: 0..x A

Hold current


Page(s): 158

1962 BipThreshold Level: 6 Range: 0..x A/ms

Threshold for detecting closing point (BIP)


Page(s): 158, 160



10550 ExhTempCorrStability Level: 6 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 147

Stability for cylinder temperature correction

10551 ExhaustTempCorrMax Level: 6 Range: 0..1 ms

Maximum correction value for cylinder temperature correction.

rsp. 0..5 °crank Page(s): 147

10900 AssignIn_ExhTempCylx Level: 6 ff Range: 0..16

Assignment of input channel to cylinder temperature sensor x

Page(s):

11000 SubstExhaustTempCylx Level: 4 ff Range: 0..100 %

Substitute value for cylinder temperature sensor x

Page(s): 252

11110 DOx_DelayTime DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 6 Range: 0..2,55 s Page(s):

Delay for error indication at digital output x ff

11110 DOPWMx_DelayTime DARDANOS MVC03-8/04-6 Level: 6 Range: 0..2,55 s Page(s): 298

Delay for error indication at PWM/digital output x ff

11112 DOPWMx_CurrentMin Level: 6 Range: 0..z A Page(s):

Minimaler zulässiger Strom am PWM/digital output x ff (z DARDANOS MVC03-8: 3, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 11) 299

11113 DOPWMx_CurrentMax Level: 6 Range: 0..z A Page(s): 299

Maximum admissible current on PWM/digital output x ff (z DARDANOS MVC03-8: 3, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 11)

11114 DOPWMx_CurrentDelay Level: 6 Range: 0..100 s Page(s): 299

Delay time for excess of current limit at PWM/digital output x

ff

11115 DOPWMx_DeviationMax Level: 6 Range: 0..z A Page(s): 299

Maximum admissible current deviation at PWM/digital output x

ff

(z DARDANOS MVC03-8: 3, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 11)

11116 DOPWMx_DeviatDelay Level: 6 Range: 0..100 s Page(s): 299

Delay for indication of deviation error at PWM/digital output x

ff

11190 DOx_DelayTime Level: 6 Range: 0..2,55 s Page(s): 298

Delay for error indication at digital output x ff



11240 FreqOut_DelayTime DARDANOS MVC03-8 Level: 6 Range: 0..2,55 s Page(s): 283

Delay for error indication at frequency output

11250 COx_DelayTime CR Level: 6 Range: 0..0,5 s Page(s):

Delay for error indication at regulated current output x 11260

11251 COx_CurrentMin CR Level: 6 Range: 0..2,5 A Page(s): 240

Minimum admissible current at regulated current output x

11261

11252 COx_CurrentMax CR Level: 6 Range: 0..2,5 A

Maximum admissible current at regulated current out-put x

11262

resp. 0..100 % Page(s): 237, 240

11253 COx_CurrentDelay CR Level: 6 Range: 0..100 s Page(s): 241

Delay for indication of excess of current limit at regu-lated current output x

11263

11254 COx_DeviationMax CR Level: 6 Range: 0..2,5 A Page(s): 241241

Maximum admissible current deviation at regulated current output x

11264

11255 COx_DeviationDelay CR Level: 6 Range: 0..100 s Page(s): 241

Delay of indication of deviation error at regulated cur-rent output x

11265

11256 COx_PWMMax CR Level: 6 Range: 0..100 % Page(s):

Maximum PWM ratio at regulated current output x 11266

238, 241

11257 COx_PWMMaxDelayTime CR Level: 6 Range: 0..2,55 s Page(s): 242

Delay of indication in case PWM ratio is at maximum 11267

11258 COx_CurrMaxAtStart CR Level: 6 Range: 0..2,5 A Page(s): 237, 239

Setpoint limit for current regulator of current output x at engine start

11268

11259 COx_PWMMaxAtStart CR Level: 6 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 238

Output value limit of current output x at engine start 11269

20000 CR_PressSetp CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar Page(s): 232, 234

Rail pressure setpoint when characteristic map is not active(24000 CR_PressBaseMapOn = 0)



20001 CR_PressMaxAtStart CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar Page(s): 232, 239, 244

Maximum admissible rail pressure setpoint at engine start

20002 CR_PressMinForStart CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar Page(s): 239, 244

Minimum rail pressure for injection to be enabled at engine start

20003 CR_PressStartTimeout CR Level: 4 Range: 0..100 s Page(s): 239, 244

Time within which rail pressure for engine start must be built up

20004 CR_PressMinAtStop CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar Page(s): 237, 243

Minimal rail pressure - when engine has stoppedbelow this limit energizing of high pressure pump is disabled

20005 CR_PressMaxAtClickT CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar Page(s): 162

Maximum rail pressure for click test enabling

20100 CR_PressGov:Gain CR Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 237, 243

Gain factor of rail pressure control circuit

20101 CR_PressGov:Stab CR Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 237, 243

Stability factor of rail pressure control circuit

20102 CR_PressGov:Deriv CR Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 237, 243

Derivative factor of rail pressure control circuit

20200 Curr_Govx:Gain CR Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 238

Gain factor of current control circuit x (regulated cur-rent output high-pressure pump)

20210

20200 HPR_DelPeriodMax DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 4 Range: 0..180 °crank Page(s): 243

Upper limit for delivery period of high-pressure pump

20201 Curr_Govx:Stability CR Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 238

Stability factor of current control circuit x (regulated current output high-pressure pump)

20211

20201 HPR_DelPerMaxAtStart DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 4 Range: 0..180 °crank Page(s): 243

Maximum admissible delivery period of high-pressure pump at engine start

20202 Curr_Govx:Derivative CR Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 238

Derivative factor of current control circuit x. (regulated current output high-pressure pump)

20212



20205 Curr_Govx:DeviatMax CR Level: 6 Range: 0..2,5 A Page(s): 238

Maximum admissible deviation 20215

20250 CurrOut_PCSetp CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2,5 A

Current setpoint for current outputs and high-pressure pumps via DcDesk 2000 (highest priority)

resp. 0..100 % Page(s): 238

20250 HPR_DeliveryEndSetp DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 4 Range: -100..100 °BTDC Page(s): 238, 243

Setpoint for delivery end of high-pressure pumpif with-out characteristic map

20251 HPR_DeliveryEndOffset DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 4 Range: -360..360 °crank Page(s): 243

Offset of delivery end in relation to OT of first cylinder

20260 CurrOutx_Frequency CR Level: 4 Range: 50..300 Hz Page(s):

Control frequency for current output x 20261

238, 244, 246

20260 HPR_Current DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 6 Control current for high-pressure pump Range: 0..10 A

244 Page(s):

20261 HPR_RiseTimeMax DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 6 Range: 0..16,384 ms

Maximum admissible current rise time for magnetic valves of high-pressure pump

resp. 0..15,624 ms Page(s): 238, 245

20262 HPR_RiseTimeFilter DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 6 Range: 1..255

Filter constant for rise time of magnetic valves of high-pressure pump

Page(s): 245

20301 PrePreInjBeginSetp CR Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °crank Page(s): 207, 210

Pre-pre-injection begin when characteristic map is not enabled (24301 PrePreBeginMapOn = 0)

20304 PrePreInjTimeSetpPC CR Level: 4 Range: -8,192..8,192 ms

Pre-pre-injection time when direct setpoint is enabled (24304 PrePreDTSetpPCOn = 1)

resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 207, 212

20305 PrePreInjFuelSetp CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 207, 212

Pre-pre-injection quantity when characteristic map is not enabled (24305 PrePreDQMapOn = 0)

20306 PrePreInjSpeedMin CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 207, 209

Minimum speed for enabling pre-pre-injection



20307 PrePreInjFuelMin CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 207, 209

Minimum injection quantity for enabling pre-pre-injection

20308 PrePreDelTimeAbsMin CR Level: 4 Range: -8,192..8,192 ms

Lower limit for delivery time of pre-pre-injection

resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 207, 212

20309 PrePreDelTimeAbsMax CR Level: 4 Range: -8,192..8,192 ms

Upper limit for delivery time of pre-pre-injection

resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 207, 212

20321 PreInjBeginSetp CR Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °crank Page(s): 201, 204

Pre-injection beginif characteristic map is not enabled (24321 PreIngBeginMapOn = 0)

20324 PreInjTimeSetpPC CR Level: 4 Range: -8,192..8,192 ms

Pre-injection time setpointif direct setpoint is enabled (24324 PreInjDTSetpPCOn = 0)

resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 201, 207

20325 PreInjFuelSetp CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 201, 206

Pre-injection fuel setpointif characteristic map is not enabled (24325 PreIngDQMapOn = 0)

20326 PreInjSpeedMin CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 201

Minimum speed to enable pre-injection

20327 PreInjFuelMin CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 201

Minimum fuel quantity to enable pre-injection

20328 PreInjDelTimeAbsMin CR Level: 4 Range: -8,192..8,192 ms

Lower limit for delivery time of pre-injection

resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 201, 207

20329 PreInjDelTimeAbsMax CR Level: 4 Range: -8,192..8,192 ms

Upper limit for delivery time of pre-injection

resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 201, 207

20341 PostInjBeginSetp CR Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °crank Page(s): 214, 217

Post-injection begin when characteristic map is not enabled (24341 PostIngBeginMapOn = 0)



20344 PostInjTimeSetpPC CR Level: 4 Range: -8,192..8,192 ms

Post-injection time when direct setpoint is enabled (24344 PostInjDTSetpPCOn = 0)

resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 214, 219

20345 PostInjFuelSetp CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 214, 219

Post-injection fuel quantity when characteristic map is not enabled (24345 PostInjDQMapOn = 0)

20346 PostInjSpeedMin CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 214, 216

Minimale Speed to enable post-injection

20347 PostInjFuelMin CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 214, 216

Minimum fuel quantity to enable post-injection

20348 PostInjDelTimeAbsMin CR Level: 4 Range: -8,192..8,192 ms

Lower limit for delivery time of post-injection

resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 214, 219

20349 PostInjDelTimeAbsMax CR Level: 4 Range: -8,192..8,192 ms

Upper limit for delivery time of post-injection

resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 214, 219

20361 PostPostInjBeginSetp CR Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °crank Page(s): 221, 224

Post-post-injection beginif characteristic map is not enabled (24361 PostPostBeginMapOn = 0)

20364 PostPostTimeSetpPC CR Level: 4 Range: -8,192..8,192 ms

Post-post-injection time when direct setpoint is enabled (24364 PostPostDTSetpPCOn = 0)

resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 221, 228

20365 PostPostInjFuelSetp CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 221, 226

Post-post-injection quantity when characteristic map is not enabled (24365 PostPostDQMapOn = 0)

20366 PostPostSpeedMin CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 221, 223

Minimum speed to enable post-post-injection

20367 PostPostFuelMin CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 221, 223

Minimum fuel quantity to enable post-post-injection

20368 PostPstDelTimeAbsMin CR Level: 4 Range: -8,192..8,192 ms

Lower limit for delivery time of post-post-injection

resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 221, 228



20369 PostPstDelTimeAbsMax CR Level: 4 Range: -8,192..8,192 ms

Upper limit for delivery time of post-post-injection

resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 221, 228

20810 CommEngineStop Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Engine stop" via com-munication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20811 CommIdleSpeed Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Idle speed" via commu-nication modules Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20812 CommDroop2Or1 Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Droop 1/2" via commu-nication modules Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20813 CommForcedLimit Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Forced Limitation" via communication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20814 CommSpeedRange2Or1 Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Speed range 1/2" via communication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20815 CommSpeedFix1 Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Fixed speed 1" via communication modules Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20816 CommSpeedFix2 Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Fixed speed 2" via communication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20817 CommSpeedLimit2Or1 Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Speed limit 1/2" via communication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20818 CommSlide Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Slide Protection" in locomotive operation via communication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20818 CommKnock Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Knocking" in generator operation via communication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20819 CommNotch3 Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Speed notch 3" in lo-comotive operation via communication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260





Page(s): 255, 259, 260


Switch assignment to function "Speed notch 1" in lo-comotive operation via communication modules Page(s): 255, 259, 260



Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20823 CommExcitLimit1 Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "First excitation signal limitation" in locomotive operation via communication modules Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20824 CommExcitLimit2 Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Second excitation sig-nal limitation" in locomotive operation via communica-tion modules Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20825 CommSpeedInc Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Speed increase" via communication modules Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20826 CommSpeedDec Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Speed decrease" via communication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20827 CommSetpoint2Or1 Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Setpoint adjuster 1/2" via communication modules

Page(s): 57, 255, 259, 260

20828 CommErrorReset Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Reset error" via com-munication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20829 CommFreezeSetp1 Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Freeze Setpoint 1" via communication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20830 CommFreezeSetp2 Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Freeze Setpoint 2" via communication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20831 CommIMOrAllSpeedGov Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Governor mode" via communication modules Page(s): 255, 259, 260



20832 CommCruiseControl Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Cruise control" via communication modules Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20834 CommSyncEnable Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "synchronization" via communication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20835 CommLoadEnable Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Load control enable" via communication modules Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20836 CommAutoOrManual Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Change Over Generator Operation" via communication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20840 CommExcitationOn Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Excitation signal" via communication modules Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20841 CommLowIdleOn Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Low idle speed" via communication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Marine Operation Twin Engine 20841 CommMasterOrSlave Level: 6 Range: 0..16 Page(s):

Switch assignment to function "master or slave" via communication modules

Generator 20842 CommPID2Or1 Level: 6 Range: 0..16 Page(s):

Switch assignment to function "PID parameter set 2 or 1" via communication modules

Marine Operation Twin Engine 20842 CommLoadTransfer Level: 6 Range: 0..16 Page(s):

Switch assignment to function "load transfer” via com-munication modules

Marine Operation Multiengine 20842 CommCommand Level: 6 Range: 0..16 Page(s):

Switch assignment to function "command” via commu-nication modules

Marine Operation Twin Engine 20843 CommClutch Level: 6 Range: 0..16 Page(s):

Switch assignment to function "clutch” via communica-tion modules



Marine Operation Multiengine 20843 CommSynchro Level: 6 Range: 0..16 Page(s):

Switch assignment to function "synchro” via communi-cation modules

Marine Operation Twin Engine 20844 CommAsymLoadEnable Level: 6 Range: 0..16 Page(s):

Switch assignment to function "asymmetrical load” via communication modules

20845 CommRailLeakDetect Level: 6 Range: 0..16 Page(s):

Switch assignment to function "rail leakage” via com-munication modules

20846 CommGenBreaker Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Contactor" via commu-nication modules

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20848 CommDelMaps2Or1 Level: 6 Range: 0..16

Switch assignment to function "Characteristic map 1/2 for delivery begin and delivery quantity pre- / post-injection“ via communication modules Page(s): 255, 259, 260

20849 CommStartEngine Level: 6 Range: 0..16 Page(s):

Switch assignment to function " Engine Start Request “ via communication modules

see WAGO 21700 WAGO:Baudrate Level: 4 Range: 125,250,500,1000 kBaud

Baudrate of WAGO-CANopen-network

see WAGO 21701 WAGO:SlaveID Level: 4 Range: 1..127

Node number of slave in WAGO-CANopen-netzwork

see WAGO 21702 WAGO:ModulSendRate Level: 4 Range: 0..50 s

Receiving interval of WAGO-module for messages

resp. 0..100 s

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21750 CanOp:Baudrate Level: 4 Range: 125,250,500,1000 kBaud

Baudrate of CANopen network

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21751 CanOp:MyNodeNo Level: 4 Range: 1..127

Personal node number in CANopen network

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21752 CanOp:PartnerNodeNo Level: 4 Range: 0..127

Master and partner node number in CANopen network

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21753 CanOp:TimeOutDelay Level: 4 Range: 0..127

Duration of timeout delay for receiving telegram after start-up of control device



see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21754 CanOp:HBeatConsTime Level: 4 Range: 0..100 s

Receiving interval for life signal (heartbeat)

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21755 CanOp:HBeatProdTime Level: 4 Range: 0..100 s

Sending interval for life signal (heartbeat)

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21756 CanOp:GuardingTime Level: 4 Range: 0..100

Receiving interval for life signal (node guarding)

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21757 CanOp:LifeTimeFactor Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Factor for receving interval of life signal (node guard-ing)

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21760 CanOp:ID_SYNCCons Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Identifier of SYNC receiving telegram

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21761 CanOp:ID_EMCYProd Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Identifier of EMCY sending telegram Warning: 21751 CanOp:MyNodeNo is added

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21762 CanOp:ID_HBeatCons Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Identifier of life guarding or heartbeat receiving tele-gram LifeGuarding: 21751 CanOp:MyNodeNo is added Heartbeat: 21752 CanOp:PartnerNodeNo is added

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21763 CanOp:ID_HBeatProd Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Identifier of heartbeat sending telegram Warning: 21751 CanOp:MyNodeNo is added

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21764 CanOp:ID_ClientSDO Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Identifier of SDO receiving telegram Warning: 21751 CanOp:MyNodeNo is added

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21765 CanOp:ID_ServerSDO Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Identifier of SDO sending telegram Warning: 21751 CanOp:MyNodeNo is added

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21770 CanOp:RPDOID(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Identifier of RPDOs Warning: 21751 CanOp:MyNodeNo is added x = 0..4

ff

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 21774 CanOp:TPDOID(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Identifier of TPDOs Warning: 21751 CanOp:MyNodeNo is added to the first four standard TPDOs x = 0..15

ff

see DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d 21850 DNet:BaudRate Level: 4 Range: 125250500 kBaud

Baudrate of DeviceNet systems



see DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d 21851 DNet:MacId Level: 4 Range: 0..63

Personal identifier in DeviceNet system

see DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d 21852 DNet:NoOfRxBytes Level: 4 Range: 0..32

Number of expectet bytes via polled messageStandard: 2 byte switch functions15 words sensors

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 21900 J1939:Baudrate Level: 4 Range: 125250 kBaud

Baudrate in SAE J1939 bus system

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 21901 J1939:MyNodeNumber Level: 4 Range: 1..31

Personal node number in SAE J1939 bus system

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 21902 J1939:StartTOutDelay Level: 4 Range: 0..100 s

Duration of timeout delay for receiving telegram after start-up of control device

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 21910 J1939:RefEngTorque Level: 4 Range: 0..64255 Nm

Maximum torque of engine

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 21911 J1939:FuelRefMin Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Fuel at zero load

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 21912 J1939:FuelRefMax Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Fuel at full load

HZM CAN Customer-Module Manual DG 05007-d 21950 CMRxTelxTimeout Level: 4 Range: 0..100 s

Timeout of receiving telegram x ff

see HEINZMANN CAN Customer-ModuleManual DG 05007-d

21960

CMTxTelxSendRate

Level: 4 Range: 0..100 s

Sending rate of sending telegram x ff



29.3 List 2: Measuring values

2000 Speed Level: 1 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Current speed

46, 81, 115, 119, 204, Page(s): 206, 210, 212, 217, 219, 223, 226, 296, 298, 340, 346

2001 SpeedPickUp1 Level: 1 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Current speed as read by speed pickup 1

46 Page(s):

2002 SpeedPickUp2 Level: 1 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Current speed as read by speed pickup 2

46 Page(s):

2003 SpeedPickUp1Value Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Unfiltered speed as read by speed pickup 1

Page(s): 46

2004 SpeedPickUp2Value Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Unfiltered speed as read by speed pickup 2

46 Page(s):

2005 ActivePickUp Level: 1 Range: 0..2

Active pickup check 0 = pickup 1 active

46, 48 Page(s): 1 = pickup 2 active 2 = index adjuster active

2006 PMMErrorCode Level: 6 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error code relating to recognition of tooth gap

Page(s): 153

2007 SynchronToGap Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Message showing that tooth gap was recognized

Page(s): 38, 153

2008 TryToFindGap Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Message indicating that tooth gap is searched for (in case of lost camshaft index sensor signal)

Page(s): 46

2009 SpeedCamIndex Level: 1 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Current speed value from camshaft index sensor

Page(s): 46

2010 GapToCamIndex Level: 4 Range: 0..720 °crank

Distance by degrees crankshaft angle between synchro-nization gap and camshaft index

Page(s): 152, 155



2011 GapToCamIndexValue Level: 4 Range: 0..720 °crank Page(s):

Unfiltered distance by degrees crankshaft angle be-tween synchronization gap and camshaft index

2022 SpeedGradientPickUp1 Level: 4 Range: -4000..4000 rpm/s

Current rate of speed change per second from pickup 1

Page(s):

2023 SpeedGradientPickUp2 Level: 4 Range: -4000..4000 rpm/s

Current rate of speed change per second from pickup 2

Page(s):

2024 SpeedGradientCam Level: 4 Range: -4000..4000 rpm/s Page(s):

Current rate of speed change per second from index adjuster

2025 SpeedGradient Level: 4 Range: -4000..+4000 rpm/s

Current rate of speed change per second

Page(s):

2028 SpeedGradientDT1 Level: 4 Range: -2000..+2000 rpm/s

Speed gradient

Page(s): 81

2029 PowerGradientDT1 Level: 4 Range: -1250..+1250 kW/s

Power gradient

Page(s): 81

2031 SpeedSetp Level: 1 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed setpoint with droop as measured

Page(s): 39, 44, 53, 55, 69, 73, 81

2032 SpeedSetpRamp Level: 1 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed setpoint after speed ramp as determined

Page(s): 55, 68, 73

2033 SpeedSetpointSelect Level: 1 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed setpoint as adjusted by setpoint adjuster or switche.g.idle speed or fixed speed

Page(s): 55, 57, 68, 130

see SAE J1939, manual DG 06 004-d 2035 SpeedSetpLimit Level: 1 Range: 0..4000 min-1

Maximum speed

Page(s):

2040 DroopOffset Level: 1 Speed offset due to droop Range: -2000..+2000 rpm Page(s): 73

2041 DigitalPotOffset Level: 1 Range: -4000..+4000 rpm

Speed offset caused by digital potentiometer

Page(s): 66, 130



2042 GenSetOffset Level: 1 Speed offset caused by synchronization and load con-

trol in generator mode

Range: -4000..+4000 rpm Page(s): 63, 129, 133, 138, 325

2090 SpeedSwitchActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Code indicating that speed threshold 90 SpeedSwitch was exceeded

Page(s): 50

2091 SpeedSwitch2Active Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Code indicating that speed threshold 91 SpeedSwitch2 was exceeded

Page(s): 50

2092 SpeedSwitch3Active Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Code indicating that speed threshold 92 SpeedSwitch3 was exceeded

Page(s): 50

2100 PID_CorrFactor Level: 1 Range: 0..400 %

PID correction factor as determined

Page(s): 76

2110 FuelSetpSpeedGov Level: 3 Injection quantity calculated by speed governor Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 74

2111 FuelGenSetOffset Level: 3 Offset for fuel quantity setpoint Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 138, 325

2120 DroopPresent Level: 1 Range: -100..+100 %

Current droop by which the governor is presently oper-ating

Page(s): 73

2121 SpeedJumpActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Speed jump was recognized

Page(s): 81

2122 PowerJumpActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Power jump was recognized

Page(s): 81

2131 IMFuelSetp Level: 1 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Current fuel setpoint due to idle/maximum speed con-trol

109, 111 Page(s):

2132 IMFuelSetpSelect Level: 1 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Current fuel setpoint due to idle/maximum speed con-trol before ramp

Page(s): 109, 111



2140 GoverningAtMaxOrIdle Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication whether speed control is by maximum speed or idle speed

Page(s): 110

2141 IMOrAllSpeedGov Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication whether idle/maximum speed control or vari-able speed control is active

Page(s): 108

2250 EngineStartCounter Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Number of engine starts since counder was cleared last

Page(s): 38, 145

2300 DeliveryPeriod Level: 1 ff Range: -100..+100 °crank

Current injection duration by degrees crankshaft

Page(s): 30, 178, 181, 195

2301 DeliveryTime Level: 1 ff Range: -8,192..8,192 ms

Current injection duration by milliseconds

resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 178, 195, 198

2305 PEActPos Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

HZM-CAN periphery module:

Page(s): Current actuator position

2310 DeliveryBegin Level: 1 Range: -100..+100 °BTDC

Current injection begin

Page(s): 30, 169, 174, 186, 191

2311 DelBegBaseMap Level: 1 Range: -100..100 °BTDC

Delivery begin from currently active delivery begin map

Page(s): 167, 186

2312 DelBegOffset Level: 1 Range: -100..100 °crank

Offset for delivery begin correction

Page(s): 167, 171, 186, 188

2313 DelBegOffUnLimited Level: 1 Range: -100..100 °crank

Unlimited offset for delivery begin correction

Page(s): 171, 188

2314 DelBegOffsetMax Level: 1 Range: -100..100 °crank

Maximum admissible offset for delivery begin correc-tion

Page(s): 171, 188

2316 DelBegOffCoolantTemp Level: 1 Range: -100..100 °crank

Coolant temperature dependent delivery begin correc-tion

Page(s): 171, 190



2317 DelBegOffChargeAirT Level: 1 Range: -100..100 °crank

Charge air temperature dependent delivery begin cor-rection

Page(s): 173, 190

2318 DelBegOffFuelTemp Level: 1 Range: -100..100 °crank

Fuel temperature dependent delivery begin correction

Page(s): 173, 190

2319 DelBegOffAmbPress Level: 1 Range: -100..100 °crank

Ambient pressure dependent delivery begin correction

Page(s): 173, 190

2320 PEActuatorOn Level: 1 Range: 0/1

HZM-CAN periphery module:

Page(s): Code indication about actuators activation (corresp. 5910 ActuatorOn in periphery module)

2350 FuelQuantity Level: 1 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Current injection quantity

Page(s):74, 84, 115, 117, 119, 145, 177, 194, 196, 204, 206, 210, 212, 217, 219, 223, 226, 296

2355 PEFuelQuantity Level: 1 ff Range: 0..100 %

HZM-CAN periphery module: injection quantity setpoint (for actuator x)

Page(s): 326

2360 FuelQuantityLimited Level: 1 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Limited injection quantity

Page(s): 145

2361 FuelQuantityUnlimit Level: 1 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Unlimited injection quantity

Page(s): 84

2365 FuelQuantityMainInj CR Level: 1 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Effective injection quantity of main injection

Page(s): 194

2380 FuelConsumption Level: 1 Range: 0..500 l/h

Current fuel consumption

Page(s): 145

2401 CanTxBufferState Level: 1 Range: 0..FF Hex

State of CAN source buffer

Page(s): 323, 351

2402 CanRxBufferState Level: 1 Range: 0..FF Hex

State of CAN destination buffer

Page(s): 323, 351



2403 CanRxTimeout Level: 1 Range: 0..FF Hex

State of CAN destination timeout monitoring

Page(s): 323, 351

2404 CanTypeMismatch Level: 1 Range: 0..FF Hex

State of CAN device numbers

Page(s): 323

2405 CanxOnline Level: 1 2407 Range: 0..1

General state of CAN controller x

Page(s): 144, 324

2406 CanxState Level: 1 2408 Range: 0..FF

General state of CAN controller x

Page(s):

2410 CANDCNodeState31to16 Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex

HZM-CAN: Indication of activity for speed governor with node number 16..31 Page(s):

2411 CANDCNodeState15to01 Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex

HZM-CAN: Indication of activity for speed governor with node number 1..15 Page(s):

2412 CanGCNodeState31to16 Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex

HZM-CAN THESEUS: Indication of activity for THESEUS with node number 16..31 Page(s): 323, 325

2413 CanGCNodeState15to01 Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex

HZM-CAN THESEUS: Indication of activity for THESEUS with node number 1..15 Page(s): 323, 325

2414 CanPENodeState31to16 Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex

HZM-CAN periphery module: Indication of activity for periphery module with node number 16..31 Page(s): 323, 325

2415 CanPENodeState15to01 Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex

HZM-CAN periphery module: Indication of activity for periphery module with node number 1..15 Page(s): 323, 325

2422 CanCMNodeState31to16 Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex

HZM-CAN Customer-Modul: Indication of activity for customer module with node number 16..31 Page(s): 323

2423 CanCMNodeState15to01 Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex

HZM-CAN Customer-Modul: Indication of activity for customer module with node number 1..15 Page(s): 323



2424 CanPCNodeState31to16 Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex

HZM-CAN Dialog/Diagnose: Indication of activity for PC with node number 16..31

Page(s): 323323

2425 CanPCNodeState15to01 Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex

HZM-CAN Dialog/Diagnose: Indication of activity for PC with node number 1..15

Page(s): 323

2470 PEDigitalOutx Level: 1 ff Range: 0..1

HZM-CAN periphery module: Indication of current values for digital outputs

Page(s): 327

2475 PEPWMOutx Level: 1 ff Range: 0..100 %

HZM-CAN periphery module: Indication of current values for PWM outputs

Page(s): 328

2480 PEAnaOutx Level: 1 ff Range: 0..100 %

HZM-CAN periphery module: Indication of current values for analogue outputs

Page(s): 327

2489 PEModulesMax Level: 1 Range: 0..3

HZM-CAN periphery module: Indication of max. number of HZM-CAN periphery modules defined in this firmware Page(s):

2490 PEModulesMaxType(x) Level: 1 ff Range: 0..3

HZM-CAN periphery module: Indication of max. number of HZM-CAN periphery modules per module type in this firmware Page(s): x = 0..11 0: PE 2-01 5: APOLLON 1: PE 6-07 6: PE MVC 01 2: ELEKTRA 7: Analogue input module 3: PE 1-03 8: ARIADNE 4: PE 1-04 11: Digital I/O module Only modul types inequal 0 may be assigned as PE-modules starting with 407 CanPENodeType

2600 ExcitationSetpoint Level: 1 Current excitation signal in locomotive operation Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 115, 119, 121, 122, 124

2601 ExcitControlLimit Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

Current limitation of excitation signal in locomotive operation

Page(s): 121

2602 ExcitFuelSetpoint Level: 1 Range: 0..500 mm³/str

Current fuel setpoint for excitation signal calculation in locomotive operation

Page(s): 119



2630 ExcitPI_CorrFactor Level: 1 Range: 0..400 %

Calculated PI-correction factor for controlling of excita-tion signal in locomotive operation

Page(s): 121

2640 ExcitLimitMaxActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication whether excitation signal in locomotive op-eration is limited

Page(s): 122, 122

2641 ExcitFuelLimActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication whether current fuel for calculation of excita-tion signal in locomotive operation is limited

Page(s): 122, 122

2642 ExcitForceLim1Active Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication whether excitation signal is limited by switch function "First excitation signal limitation" in locomo-tive operation Page(s): 122, 122

2643 ExcitForceLim2Active Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication whether excitation signal is limited by switch function "Second excitation signal limitation" in loco-motive operation Page(s): 122, 122

2644 ExcitSlideLimActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication whether excitation signal is limited by slide protection in locomotive operation

Page(s): 122, 126, 126

2645 ExcitTempLimActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication whether excitation signal is limited by tem-perature in locomotive operation

Page(s): 122

2646 ExcitBoostLimActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication whether excitation signal is limited by boost pressure in locomotive operation

Page(s): 122, 123

2647 ExcitSpeedLimActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication whether excitation signal is limited in de-pendence of speed in locomotive operation

Page(s): 122, 124

2650 ExcitFuelLimitTemp Level: 1 Current fuel setpoint for excitation signal by tempera-

ture dependent fuel lowering in locomotive operation

Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 123

2655 ExcitFuelLimitBoost Level: 1 Current fuel setpoint for excitation signal by boost pres-

sure dependent fuel lowering in locomotive operation


2656 ExcitFuelLimitSpeed Level: 1 Current fuel setpoint for excitation signal by speed de-

pendent fuel lowering in locomotive operation




2701 FuelLimitMax Level: 1 Current maximum fuel quantity limit Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 85

2702 FuelLimitStart Level: 1 Fuel limit as determined by starting fuel limitation Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 85

2703 FuelLimitSpeed Level: 1 Fuel limit as determined by speed dependent fuel limi-

tation

Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 85, 87

2704 FuelLimitBoost Level: 1 Fuel limit as determined by boost pressure dependent

fuel limitation


2705 FuelLimitForced Level: 1 Fuel limit as determined by forced limitation Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 85, 91

2706 FuelRedCoolantTemp Level: 1 Coolant temperature dependent reduction value of fuel

quantity only if 4706 FuelRedCoolTempOn = 1

Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 85, 88, 143

2707 FuelRedChargeAirTemp Level: 1 Charge air temperature dependent reduction value of

fuel quantity only if 4707 FuelRedChAirTempOn = 1


2708 FuelRedFuelTemp Level: 1 Fuel temperature dependent reduction value of fuel

quantity only if 4708 FuelRedFuelTempOn = 1


2709 FuelRedAmbientPress Level: 1 Ambient temperature dependent reduction value of fuel

quantity only if 4709 FuelRedAmbPressOn = 1


2710 FuelLimitMinActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication that actuator position is at lower limit

Page(s): 85, 131

2711 FuelLimitMaxActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication that actuator position is at upper limit

Page(s): 85, 131, 143

2712 StartLimitActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication that actuator travel is limited by starting fuel limitation

Page(s): 85

2713 SpeedLimitActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication that actuator travel is limited by speed de-pendent fuel limitation

Page(s): 85, 87



2714 BoostLimitActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication that actuator travel is limited by boost pres-sure dependent fuel limitation

Page(s): 85, 90, 302

2715 ForcedLimitActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication that actuator travel is limited by forced limi-tation

Page(s): 85, 91

2716 CoolantTempRedActive Level: 1 Indication that coolant temperature dependent fuel limi-

tation is active

Range: 0..1 Page(s): 85, 88, 143

2717 ChAirTempRedActive Level: 1 Indication that charge air temperature dependent fuel

limitation is active

Range: 0..1 Page(s): 85, 88

2718 FuelTempRedActive Level: 1 Indication that fuel temperature dependent fuel limita-

tion is active

Range: 0..1 Page(s): 85, 88, 89

2719 AmbPressRedActive Level: 1 Indication that ambient temperature dependent fuel

limitation is active

Range: 0..1 Page(s): 85, 88, 90

2720 FuelLimitExtActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication whether external fuel limitation is active

Page(s): 85, 92

Marine Operation Twin Engine 2721 AsymmLoadLimitActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Indication whether fuel injection is limited by asymmet-rical load

Marine Operation Twin Engine 2722 FuelLimitAsymmLoad Level: 1 Current maximum injection quantity caused ba limita-

tion of asymmetrical load

Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s):

2730 SetpLimitExtActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Indication whether external limitation of speed setpoint is active

2750 FuelTempCorrOffset Level: 4 Fuel temperature dependent fuel correction offset (map

value corrected by factor from curve)

Range: -250..250 mm³/str Page(s): 145

2751 FuelTempCorrMap Level: 4 Fuel temperature dependent fuel correction value from

map

Range: -250..250 mm³/str Page(s): 145

2810 SwitchEngineStop Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Engine stop"

Page(s):53, 55, 113, 255, 257, 259



2811 SwitchIdleSpeed Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Idle speed"

Page(s): 53, 256

2812 SwitchDroop2Or1 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Droop 1/2"

Page(s): 53, 71, 256

2813 SwitchForcedLimit Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Forced limitation"

Page(s): 91, 256

2814 SwitchSpeedRange2Or1 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Speed range 1/2"

Page(s): 53, 56, 256

2815 SwitchSpeedFix1 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Fixed speed 1"

Page(s): 53, 256, 258

2816 SwitchSpeedFix2 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Fixed speed 2"

Page(s): 53, 256

2817 SwitchSpeedLimit2Or1 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Speed limit 1/2"

Page(s): 86, 256

2818 SwitchSlide Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Sliding wheels"

Page(s): 125, 126, 138, 256

2818 SwitchKnock Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Knocking" in generator operation

Page(s):

2819 SwitchNotch3 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Speed notch3"

Page(s): 112, 256



Page(s): 112, 256



Page(s): 112, 256



Page(s): 112, 256



2823 SwitchExcitLimit1 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "First excitation signal limitation"

Page(s): 122, 256

2824 SwitchExcitLimit2 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Second excitation signal limitation"

Page(s): 122, 256

2825 SwitchSpeedInc Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Speed increase"

Page(s): 61, 66, 130, 256

2826 SwitchSpeedDec Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Speed decrease"

Page(s): 61, 66, 130, 2566166130256

2827 SwitchSetpoint2Or1 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Speed setpoint adjuster 1/2"

Page(s): 53, 56, 60, 64, 109, 256

2828 SwitchErrorReset Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Reset error"

256, 326 Page(s):

2829 SwitchFreezeSetp1 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Freeze Setpoint 1"

Page(s): 57, 109, 256

2830 SwitchFreezeSetp2 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Freeze Setpoint 2"

Page(s): 57, 109, 256

2831 SwitchIMOrAllSpeed Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Governor mode"

Page(s): 108, 256

2832 SwitchCruiseControl Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Cruise control"

Page(s):

2834 SwitchSyncEnable Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Enable synchronization"

Page(s): 129, 131, 137, 140, 256

2835 SwitchLoadEnable Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Enable load control"

Page(s): 132, 137, 140, 256



2836 SwitchAutoOrManual Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position function "Change over generator opera-tion auto or manual"

Page(s): 131, 133, 137, 139, 257

2840 SwitchExcitationOn Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position function "Excitation signal"

Page(s): 115, 257

2841 SwitchLowIdleOn Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position "Low idle speed"

Page(s): 124, 257

Marine Operation Twin Engine 2841 SwitchMasterOrSlave Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position function "Master or Slave"

Page(s): 124, 257

Generator 2842 SwitchPID2Or1 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position function "PID parameter set 2 or 1"

Page(s): 124, 257

Marine Operation Twin Engine 2842 SwitchLoadTransfer Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position function "Load transfer"

Page(s): 124, 257

Marine Operation Multiengine 2842 SwitchCommand Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position function "Command"

Page(s): 124, 257

Marine Operation Twin Engine 2843 SwitchClutch Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position function "Clutch"

Page(s): 124, 257

Marine Operation Multiengine 2843 SwitchSynchro Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position function "Synchro"

Page(s): 124, 257

Marine Operation Twin Engine 2844 SwitchAsymLoadEnable Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position function "Asymmetrical load"

Page(s): 124, 257

2845 SwitchRailLeakDetect Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position function "Rail Leakage"

Page(s): 124, 257

2846 SwitchGenBreaker Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position function "Contactor"

Page(s): 83, 257



2847 SwitchAlternator Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position function "Alternator tension"

Page(s): 147, 257

2848 SwitchDelMaps2Or1 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Switch position function "Characteristic map 1/2 for delivery begin and delivery quantity for pre- / post-injection“ Page(s): 167, 169, 184, 186, 204,

206, 210, 212, 217, 219, 224, 226,

2849 SwitchStartEngine Level: 1 Switch position "Engine Start Request" Range: 0..1 Page(s):

2851 DigitalOutx Level: 1 ff Range: 0..1

State of digital output x

Page(s): 301

2900 Setpoint1Extern Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

Current value of speed setpoint adjuster 1

55, 57, 64, 108, 247 Page(s):

2901 Setpoint2Extern Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

Current value of speed setpoint adjuster 2

Page(s): 55, 57, 64, 108, 247

2902 LoadControlInput Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

Current value of load control signal / load control set-point

Page(s): 133, 135, 136, 247, 250

2903 SyncInput Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

Current value of synchronization signal

Page(s): 131, 247

2904 BoostPressure Level: 1 Range: 0..5 bar

Current value of boost pressure

Page(s): 123, 247, 288

2905 OilPressure Level: 1 Range: 0..10 bar

Current value of oil pressure

Page(s): 247, 103, 93

2906 AmbientPressure Level: 1 Range: 0..5 bar

Current value of ambient pressure

Page(s): 89, 247, 249

2907 CoolantTemp Level: 1 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Current value of coolant temperature

Page(s): 42, 67, 79, 88, 93, 97, 123, 247



2908 ChargeAirTemp Level: 1 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Current value of charge air temperature

Page(s): 89, 93, 98, 247

2909 OilTemp Level: 1 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Current value of oil temperature

Page(s): 93, 95, 247

2910 FuelTemp Level: 1 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Current value of fuel temperature

Page(s): 89, 93, 99, 247

2911 ExhaustTemp Level: 1 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Current value of exhaust gas temperature

Page(s): 93, 98, 247

2912 RailPressure1 CR Level: 1 Range: 0..2000 bar

Current value of rail pressure 1

Page(s): 93, 99, 230, 247

2913 RailPressure2 CR Level: 1 Range: 0..2000 bar

Current value of rail pressure 2

Page(s): 93, 100, 230, 247

2914 SlideExcitReduction Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

Current value for the reduction of excitation signal for slide protection in locomotive operation

Page(s): 126, 247

2915 SlideSpeedReduction Level: 1 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Current value for speed setpoint reduction for slide protection in locomotive operation

Page(s): 248

2916 CoolantPressure Level: 1 Range: 0..5 bar

Current value of coolant pressure

Page(s): 93, 105, 248

Marine Operation Twin Engine 2917 AsymmetricLoad Level: 1 Range: 0..100%

Current value of asymmetrical load

Page(s):

2918 MeasuredPower Level: 1 Range: 0..100%

Current value of measured power signal

rsp. 0..2500 kW Page(s): 71, 75, 81, 137, 248

2919 PowerSetpoint Level: 1 Range: 0..100%

Current value of power setpoint signal

rsp. 0..2500 kW Page(s): 137, 248



2920 TurboOilTemp Level: 1 Range: -100..+1000 °C

Current value of turbocharger oil temperature

Page(s): 93, 101, 248

2921 FuelPressure Level: 1 Range: 0..6 bar

Current value of fuel pressure

Page(s): 93, 101, 248

2922 OilLevel Level: 1 Range: 0..100%

Current value of oil level

Page(s): 93, 102, 248

2923 FuelLimitExtern Level: 1 Current value of external fuel limitation Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 85, 92, 248

2924 TransmissionOilPress Level: 1 Range: 0..40 bar

Current value of transmission oil pressure

Page(s): 93, 103, 248

2925 AirMass Level: 1 Range: 0..1000 kg/h

Current value of air mass

Page(s): 248

2940 BoostPressRelative Level: 1 Current value of relative boost pressure (boost pressure

in relation to ambient air pressure)

Range: 0..5 bar Page(s): 90, 248

2941 AbsoluteAltitude Level: 1 Current value of absolute altitude Range: 0..5000 m Page(s): 249

3000 ConfigurationError Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Indication of configuration errors

Page(s): 335, 355

3001 ErrPickup1 Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of speed pickup 1

Page(s): 48, 155, 304, 340

3002 ErrPickup2 Level: 1 Error indication of speed pickup 2 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 48, 304, 340

3003 ErrPickupIndex Level: 1 Error indication of camshaft index pickup Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 48, 154, 341



3004 ErrOverSpeed Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of overspeed

Page(s): 47, 50, 342

3005 ErrSetpoint1Extern Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of speed setpoint adjuster 1

Page(s): 343

3006 ErrSetpoint2Extern Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of speed setpoint adjuster 2

Page(s): 343

3007 ErrLoadInput Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of load control signal / load setpoint

Page(s): 343

3008 ErrSyncInput Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of synchronization signal

Page(s): 343

3009 ErrBoostPressure Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of boost pressure value

343 Page(s):

3010 ErrOilPressure Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of oil pressure value

Page(s): 103, 302, 303, 343

3011 ErrAmbientPressure Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of ambient pressure value

Page(s): 343

3012 ErrCoolantTemp Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of coolant temperature value

Page(s): 93, 97, 303, 343

3013 ErrChargeAirTemp Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of charge air temperature value

Page(s): 93, 98, 343

3014 ErrOilTemp Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of oil temperature value

Page(s): 93, 95, 343

3015 ErrFuelTemp Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of fuel temperature value

Page(s): 93, 99, 343

3016 ErrExhaustTemp Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of exhaust gas temperature value

Page(s): 93, 98, 304, 343



3017 ErrRailPress1 CR Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of rail pressure value 1

Page(s): 93, 100, 343

3018 ErrRailPress2 CR Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of rail pressure value 2

93, 100, 343 Page(s):

3019 ErrExcitReduct Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of reduction value for excitation signal for slide protection in locomotive operation

Page(s): 153, 343

3020 ErrSpeedReduct Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of reduction value for speed setpoint for slide protection in locomotive operation

Page(s): 343

3021 ErrCoolantPressure Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of coolant pressure value

Page(s): 93, 106, 343

3023 ErrMeasuredPower Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of measured powers signal

Page(s): 137, 343

3024 ErrPowerSetpoint Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of power setpoint signal

Page(s): 137, 343

3025 ErrTurboOilTemp Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of turbocharger oil temperature value

Page(s): 93, 101, 343

3026 ErrFuelPress Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of fuel pressure value

Page(s): 93, 101, 343

3027 ErrOilLevel Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of oil level value

Page(s): 93, 102, 343

3028 ErrFuelLimitExtern Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of external fuel limitation value

Page(s): 343

3029 ErrTransOilPressure Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of transmission oil pressure value

Page(s): 93, 103, 343



3035 ErrInjection Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Injection error

Page(s): 156, 164, 345

3036 ErrSynchronisation Level: 1 Synchronization error Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 154, 346

3037 ErrInjectorSupply Level: 1 Error indication of injector power supply Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 157, 348

3045 ErrRail Level: 1 Error indication of rail Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s):

Marine Operation Twin Engine 3048 ErrTwinEngine Level: 1 Error indication in Master / Slave operation Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s):

3048 ErrPowerGovernor Level: 1 Error indication of integrated load governor Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s):

3050 ErrCylinderx Level: 1 ff Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of cylinder x

Page(s): 163, 349

3070 ErrCanBus1 Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of CAN bus 1

Page(s): 144, 323, 350

3071 ErrCanComm1 Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of CAN communication via CAN bus 1

Page(s): 144, 323, 351

3072 ErrCanBus2 Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of CAN bus 2

Page(s): 323, 350

3073 ErrCanComm2 Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of CAN communication vai CAN bus 2

Page(s): 323

3079 ErrInternTemperature Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of internal temperature measurement

Page(s): 352

3085 ErrPowerSupply Level: 1 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Error indication of power supply

Page(s): 352



3087 ErrFlash DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 1 Error indication of Flash Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 354

3087 ErrEEPROM DARDANOS MVC03-8/04-6 Level: 1 Error indication of EEPROM Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 354

3091 ErrEngine Level: 1 Error indication for engine errors Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 146, 239, 244, 355, 366

3092 ErrConfiguration Level: 1 Configuration error Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 335, 355, 362, 366

3094 ErrIntern Level: 1 Internal error of control device Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 356, 366

3095 ExceptionNumber DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 1 Error number for software error Range: 0..255 Hex Page(s):

3096 ExceptionAddr1High DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 1 Upper extended error number 1 for software error Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s):

3097 ExceptionAddr1Low DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 1 Lower extended error number 1 for software error Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s):

3098 ExceptionAddr2High DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 1 Upper extended error number 2 for software error Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s):

3099 ExceptionAddr2Low DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 1 Lower extended error number 2 for software error Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s):

3101 SErr… DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 1 Error mark ff Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Belonging current errors see 3001 ff Page(s):

3195 ExceptionNumber Level: 1 Indication of the last memorized exception error: Range: 0000..FFFF Hex exception number Page(s): 366

3196 ExceptionAddrHigh Level: 1 Indication of the last memorized exception error: Range: 0000..FFFF Hex address where exception has happened (high) Page(s): 366



3197 ExceptionAddrLow Level: 1 Indication of the last memorized exception error: Range: 0000..FFFF Hex address where exception has happened (low) Page(s): 366

3198 ExceptionInfoHigh Level: 1 Indication of the last memorized exception error: Range: 0000..FFFF Hex information about the exception (high) Page(s): 366

3199 ExceptionInfoLow Level: 1 Indication of the last memorized exception error: Range: 0000..FFFF Hex information about the exception (low) Page(s): 366

3200 GenCtrlMainsOrIsland Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication whether in generator operation by THESEUS the station is working in mains or in isolated operation

Page(s): 138, 325, 365 0: isolated operation 1: mains operation

3201 GenCtrlAutoOrManual Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication whether generator operation is manual or automatic

Page(s): 140, 366 0: manual operation 1: automatic operation

3232 RelativePower Level: 1 Range: 0..2500kW

Relative power as related to rated power

rsp. 0..200 % Page(s): 137

3233 PowerSetpEffective Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

Effective power setpoint

Page(s): 137

3234 GovernorPowerOrSpeed Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Load governor is active (1) or not active (0)

Page(s): 137

3235 PowerPIDCorrFactor Level: 1 Range: 0..400 %

PID correction factor for integrated load governor

Page(s): 138

3245 KnockPowerRedActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Power reduction for knocking is active

Page(s): 139

Marine Operation Twin Engine 3250 TwinEnginePhase Level: 1 Range: 0..5

Phase of engagement of master / slave operation

Page(s):



3250 LeverSetpoint Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

Setpoint after evaluation of sense of rotation

Page(s):

Marine Operation Twin Engine 3251 CloseClutchPossible Level: 1 Range: 0..1

01: clutch engagement possible

Page(s): 10: clutch disengagement possible

3251 SetpointNeutralPos Level: 1 Range: 0..1

0: Control lever not in neutral position

Page(s): 1: Control lever in neutral position

Marine Operation Twin Engine 3252 PositionerOrGovernor Level: 1 Range: 0..1

0: Speed governor

Page(s): 1: Slave in positioner mode

3252 SetpBackwOrForw Level: 1 Range: 0..1

0: Control lever in forward direction

Page(s): 1: Control lever in reverse direction, if not in neutral position

Marine Operation Twin Engine 3253 MyLoadSetpoint Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

Current load setpoint

Page(s):

3253 GearShiftingOff Level: 1 Range: 0..1

1: Cluch deactivated

Page(s):

Marine Operation Twin Engine 3254 OtherLoadSetpoint Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

Load setpoint of second engine

Page(s):

3254 SetpointPositionI Level: 1 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Control lever in position 1 (engaging clutch forward gear)

Marine Operation Twin Engine 3255 SlaveFuelSetpoint Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

Fuel setpoint of slave

Page(s):

3255 SetpointPosition0 Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Control lever in position 0 (neutral)

Page(s):

Marine Operation Twin Engine 3256 Slave&MasterLimited Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Slave and master at fuel limitation

Page(s):



3256 SetpointPositionIII Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Control lever in position III (engaging clutch reverse gear)

Page(s):

Marine Operation Multiengine 3257 SetpointCommandActiv Level: 1 Range: 0..1

COMMAND button pushed at this control lever

Page(s):

Marine Operation Multiengine 3258 SetpointSynchroActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

SYNCHRO button pushed at this control lever

Page(s):

Marine Operation Multiengine 3259 SetpointActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Control lever sets setpoint for several engines

Page(s): (active reference input)

Marine Operation Multiengine 3260 CanSetpXSetpoint Level: 1 ff Range: 0..100 % Page(s):

Setpoint of control lever X after evaluation of sense of rotation X = 2..4, see 3251 SetpointNeutralPos

Marine Operation Multiengine 3261 CanSetpXNeutralPos Level: 1 ff Range: 0..1

0: Control lever not in neutral position

Page(s): 1: Control lever in neutral position X = 2..4, see 3251 SetpointNeutralPos

Marine Operation Multiengine 3262 CanSetpXBackwOrForw Level: 1 ff Range: 0..1

0: Control lever in forward direction

Page(s): 1: Control lever in reverse direction, if not in neutral position, X = 2..4, see 3252

Marine Operation Multiengine 3263 CanSetpXGearShiftOff Level: 1 ff Range: 0..1

1: Cluch deactivated at control lever X

Page(s): X = 2..4, see 2353 GearShiftingOff

Marine Operation Multiengine 3264 CanSetpXPositionI Level: 1 ff Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Control lever X in position 1 (engaging clutch forward gear) X = 2..4, see3254 SetpointPositionI

Marine Operation Multiengine 3265 CanSetpXPosition0 Level: 1 ff Range: 0..1

Control lever X in position 0 (neutral)

Page(s): X = 2..4, see 3256 SetpointPosition0

Marine Operation Multiengine 3266 CanSetpXPositionIII Level: 1 ff Range: 0..1

Control lever X in position III

Page(s): (engaging clutch reverse gear) X = 2..4, see 3256 SetpointPositionIII

Marine Operation Multiengine 3267 CanSetpXCommandActiv Level: 1 ff Range: 0..1

COMMAND button pushed at control lever X X = 2..4, sie 3257 SetpointCommandActiv

Page(s):



Marine Operation Multiengine 3268 CanSetpXSynchroActiv Level: 1 ff Range: 0..1

SYNCHRO button pushed at control lever X

Page(s): X = 2..4, see 3258 SetpointSynchroActiv

Marine Operation Multiengine 3269 CanSetpXActive Level: 1 ff Range: 0..1

Control lever X sets setpoint for several engines

Page(s): (active reference input) X = 2..4, see 3259 SetpointActive

Marine Operation Multiengine 3290 CommonLeverSetpoint Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

Resulting setpoint

Page(s):

Marine Operation Multiengine 3291 CommandLED Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Status of COMMAND-LED at control lever

Page(s):

Marine Operation Multiengine 3292 SynchroLED Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Status of SYNCHRO-LED at control lever

Page(s):

3295 ForwardGearValve Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Forward gear

Page(s):

3296 BackwardGearValve Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Reverse gear

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3301 ThermalPower Level: 1 Range: 0..10000 kWth

Current thermal engine power

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3303 LambdaSetpoint Level: 1 Range: 0..2,5

Lambda setpoint

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3305 GasThrottlePos Level: 1 Range: 0..100 %

Current postion of throttle valve

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3306 GasTemp Level: 1 Range: -100..1000 °C

Current gas temperature

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3307 GasPressure Level: 1 Range: 0..5 bar Page(s):

Absolute gas pressure at inlet of Gas Metering Unit ELEKTRA



see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3308 GasDeltaPressure Level: 1 Range: 0..5000 mbar

Gas delta pressure at Gas Metering Unit ELEKTRA

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3309 GasFlow Level: 1 Range: 0..5000 Nm3/h

Current gas flow

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3315 ThroatlDeltaPressure Level: 1 Range: 0..5000 mbar Page(s):

Gas delta pressure at mixer 1 between air inlet and Ven-turi insert

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3316 AirPressure1 Level: 1 Range: 0..5 bar

Absolute air pressure at inlet of mixer 1

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3322 VentlDeltaPressure Level: 1 Range: 0..5000 mbar Page(s):

Gas delta pressure at mixer 1 between air inlet and gas inlet

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3325 Throat2DeltaPressure Level: 1 Range: 0..5000 mbar Page(s):

Gas delta pressure at mixer 2 between air inlet and Ven-turi insert

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3326 AirPressure2 Level: 1 Range: 0..5 bar

Absolute air pressure at inlet of mixer 2

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3332 Vent2DeltaPressure Level: 1 Range: 0..5000 mbar Page(s):

Gas delta pressure at mixer 2 between air inlet and gas inlet

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3334 AirTemp Level: 1 Range: -100..1000 °C

Current air temperature

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3335 AirFlow Level: 1 Range: 0..60000 Nm3/h

Current air pressure

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3336 MixFlow Level: 1 Range: 0..60000 Nm3/h

Current mixture flow

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3337 AirFuelRatio Level: 1 Current air fuel ratio Range: 0..40 Nm3/Nm3 Page(s):



see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3339 Lambda Level: 1 Range: 0..2,5

Current lambda value

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3340 ClosedLoopActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Closed loop air fuel ratio control algorithm is activ

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3342 ClosedLoopGasFlow Level: 1 Range: 0..5000 Nm3/h Page(s):

Calculated gas flow, resulting from engine power for closed loop AFR control

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3343 ClosedLoopAirFlow Level: 1 Range: 0..60000 Nm3/h

Calculated air flow for closed loop AFR control

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3344 ClosedLoopAirFuelRat Level: 1 Calculated air fuel ratio for closed loop AFR control Range: 0..40 Nm3/Nm3 Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3345 ClosedLoopLambda Level: 1 Range: 0..2,5

Calculated lambda value for closed loop AFR control

Page(s):

see KRONOS 30 M, Manual DG 01 005-d 3346 ClosedLoopLambdaTrim Level: 1 Range: -1,25..1,25 Page(s):

Lamda setpoint correction from closed loop AFR con-trol

3350 Notch Level: 1 Range: 0..15

Current speed notch in locomotive operation

Page(s): 60, 114

3500 PWMInx DARDANOS MVC03-8 Level: 1 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 294

Current value of PWM input x

3502

3501 FrequencyInx DARDANOS MVC03-8 Level: 1 Range: 0..5000 Hz Page(s): 294

Current frequency of PWM input x

3503

3510 AnalogInx Level: 1 ff Range: 0..100 %

Normalized value of analogue input x

Page(s): 279, 288

3511 AnalogInx_Value Level: 1 ff Range: 0..5 V

Normalized value of analogue input x

rsp. 0..25 mA rsp. 0..36 V Page(s): 279, 284



3512 SensorSupplyAIxy Level: 1 ff Range: 0..10 V

Current value of sensor power supply for analogue in-puts x and y

Page(s): 284, 279

3550 TempInx DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 1 ff Range: -100..+1000 °C

Normalized value of temperature input x

Page(s):

3551 TempInx_Value DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 1 ff Range: 0..60000 Ohm

Unnormalized value of temperature input 1

Page(s):

3570 TempInx Level: 1 ff Range: -100..+1000 °C

Normalized value of temperature input x

Page(s): 280, 285

3571 TempInx_Value Level: 1 ff Range: 0..60000 Ohm

Unnormalized value of temperature input 1

Page(s): 280, 285

3592 SensorSupplyTemp Level: 1 Range: 0..10 V

Current value of of sensor power supply for temperature inputs

Page(s): 280, 285

3600 PowerSupply Level: 1 Range: 0..55 V

Current value of power supply of power electronics

Page(s):

3601 InternTemperature Level: 1 Current value of internal temperature (printed board) Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s):

3602 Reference12V Level: 4 Range: 0..20 V

Current value of internal 12 V supply

Page(s):

3603 SensorSupply1 DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 1 Range: 0..10 V


Page(s):

3603 Reference2.6V DARDANOS MVC04-6 Level: 4 Range: 0..5 V

Current value of internal 2.6 V supply

Page(s):

3604 SensorSupply2 DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 1 Range: 0..10 V


Page(s):



Page(s):





Page(s): 278

3605 AnOutxFeedback DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 4 Current value of analogue output x ff Range: 0..10 V Page(s):

3605 BinaryInxVoltage DARDANOS MVC03-8 Level: 1 Aktuelle Spannung an Binäreingang x ff Range: 0..36 V Page(s): 278

3605 BinaryInxVoltage DARDANOS MVC03-8 Level: 1 Current voltage at binary input x ff Range: 0..36 V Page(s): 278

3610 InjectorSupply Level: 1 Current value of supply voltage of magnetic valves Range: 0..105 V Page(s): 157

3611 DigOutxFeedback Level: 4 Currently flowing current on digital/PWM output x ff Range: 0..3 A rsp. 0..11A Page(s): 282

3790 IgnitionOn Level: 1 Current binary value at terminal 15 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 23

3799 CommonWarning Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Code indicating that all present errors are only warnings

Page(s): 332

3800 EmergencyAlarm Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication of emergency alarm

Page(s): 38, 332

3801 CommonAlarm Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication of common alarm

Page(s): 332

3802 EngineStopRequest Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication that engine is stopped by internally or exter-nally applied engine stop command

Page(s): 38, 55, 137

3803 EngineStopped Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication that engine has stopped

Page(s): 38, 55



3804 EngineStarting Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication that engine is starting

Page(s): 38

3805 EngineRunning Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication that engine is running

Page(s): 38, 145, 187

3806 EngineInjectReleased Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication that injection is released

Page(s): 38, 153, 302, 304

3808 EngineStarter Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication of starter state

Page(s): 146

3810 OperationMode Level: 6 Range: 0..4

Operation mode 0 = standard 3 = generator set 1 = vehicle 4 = marine Page(s): 49, 52, 57, 60, 63, 64,

112, 129 2 = locomotive

3830 Phase Level: 1 Range: 0..9

Current phase of speed governor

Page(s): 38, 137, 162

3840 HardwareVersion Level: 1 Range: 00.00..99.99

Version number of control device hardware

Page(s): 330

3842 SoftwareVersion Level: 1 Range: 00.0.00..65.5.35

Version number of software (Firmware)

oder 00.00.00..6553.99.99 30 places customer ID, 1 place variant, 2 places revi-sion index

Page(s): 330 or 4 places customer ID, 2 places variant, 2 places revision index

3843 BootSoftwareVersion Level: 1 Version number of bootloader software Range: 00.00.00 .. 65.5.35 Page(s): 330

3844 SerialDate Level: 1 Range: 0..9912

Serial date of control device hardware

Page(s): 330

3845 SerialNumber Level: 1 Range: 0..65535

Serial number of control device hardware

Page(s): 330

3847 DownloadCounter Level: 1 Range: 0..65535

Count of firmware download to control device

Page(s):



3850 Identifier Level: 1 Range: 0..65535

Identifier number of PC programme\handheld device programme

Page(s): 330

3851 LastIdentifier Level: 1 Range: 0..65535

Identifier number of PC programme\handheld device programme of last memorized parameter modification

Page(s): 330

3865 CalculationTime Level: 1 Range: 0..18,724 ms

Required calculation time of main processor

Page(s):

3870 Timer Level: 1 Range: 0..65.535 ms

Internal milliseconds timer

Page(s):

3871 OperatingHourMeter Level: 1 Range: 0..65535 h

Operating hour meter for running engine

Page(s): 38, 146

3872 OperatingSecondMeter Level: 1 Range: 0..3599 s

Operating seconds meter for running engine until next full operating hour

Page(s): 38, 146

3895 RAMTestAddrHigh DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 6 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Upper value of current tested memory adress

Page(s):

3896 RAMTestAddrLow DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 6 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Lower value of current tested memory adress

Page(s):

3897 StackTestFreeBytes Level: 6 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex

Indication of free bytes in stack

Page(s):

3900 CylinderNumber Level: 1 Range: 0..10

Number of cylinders

Page(s):

3901 CurrentCylinder Level: 1 Range: 0..xx

Currently driven cylinders

Page(s): (xx DARDANOS MVC01-20: 20, DARDANOS MVC03-8: 8, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 6)

3902 ClickTestActive Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Indication that clicktest is active

Page(s): 162

3911 ActiveCylinder Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Currently active cylinders

Page(s):



3911 ActiveCylinder16to1 DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 4 Range: 00..FFFF Hex


Page(s):

3912 ActiveCylinder20to17 DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 4 Range: 00..000F Hex


Page(s):

3913 ActiveCylinderNumber DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 1 Range: 0..xx Hex

Number of currently active cylinders

Page(s): (xx DARDANOS MVC01-20: 20, DARDANOS MVC03-8: 8, DARDANOS MVC04-6: 6)

3920 RiseTimeX Level: 3 Rise time of magnetic valve at cylinder X ff Range: 0..16,384 ms Page(s): 159

3940 FlyTimeX Level: 3 Flying time of magnetic valve at cylinder X ff Range: 0..16,384 ms Page(s): 159

3960 DeliveryPeriodX Level: 3 Delivery period at cylinder X in °KW ff Range: -100..100 °crank Page(s): 147, 183, 200

3980 DeliveryBeginX Level: 3 Delivery begin at cylinder X in °KW before top dead

center ff

Range: -100..100 °BTDC Page(s): 175, 191

12550 ExhTempCorrCylX:DT CR

ExhTempCorrCylX:DP PLD Level: 1 ff Range: -1..1 ms -5..5 °crank

Cylinder temperature dependent delivery time correc-tion

Page(s): 147

12570 ExhaustTempAverage Level: 1 Average cylinder temperature Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 147

12900 ExhaustTempCylX Level: 1 Current value of exhaust gas temperature at cylinder X ff Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 147

13000 ErrDigitalOutX Level: 1 Error of digital output X ff Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 357

13020 ErrCurrentOutX CR Level: 1 Error of regulated current output X ff Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 359



13025 ErrFrequencyOut DARDANOS MVC03-8 Level: 1 Error state of frequency output Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 283, 360

13025 ErrHPRInjectx DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 1 Error state of high-pressure pump control 13026 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 245, 349

13040 ErrExhaustTempCylX Level: 1 Error temperature sensor of cylinder X ff Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 343

13060 ErrAirMass Level: 1 Error of air mass sensor Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s):

13100 SErr… DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 1 Error mark ff Range: 0000..FFFF Hex belonging current errors see 13000 ff Page(s):

22000 CR_PressSetpoint CR Level: 1 Effective rail pressure setpoint after ramping Range: 0..2000 bar Page(s): 232, 234, 237, 242

22001 CR_PressSetpSelect CR Level: 1 Corrected rail pressure setpoint Range: 0..2000 bar Page(s): 232, 234

22002 CR_PressSetpBaseMap CR Level: 1 Rail pressure setpoint from base map resp. from Range: 0..2000 bar 20000 RailPressSetp when map is not enabled Page(s): 232, 234 24000 CR_PressBaseMapOn = 0

22003 CR_PressSetpCorr CR Level: 1 Current rail pressure setpoint correction value Range: 0..2000 bar Page(s): 232, 234

22004 CR_PressCoolTCorr CR Level: 1 Offset from coolant temperature dependent correction

of rail pressure setpoint when 24004

Range: 0..2000 bar Page(s): 235 CR_PressCorrCoolTOn = 1

22005 CR_PressChargTCorr CR Level: 1 Offset from charge air temperature dependent Range: 0..2000 bar correction of rail pressure setpoint when 24005 Page(s): 235 CR_PressCorrChargTOn = 1

22006 CR_PressFuelTCorr CR Level: 1 Offset from fuel temperature dependent Range: 0..2000 bar correction of rail pressure setpoint when 24006 Page(s): 235 CR_PressCorrFuelTOn = 1

22007 CR_PressAmbPCorr CR Level: 1 Offset from ambient pressure dependent Range: 0..2000 bar correction of rail pressure setpoint when 24007 Page(s): 237 CR_PressCorrAmbPOn = 1



22100 RailPressure CR Level: 1 Current rail pressure Range: 0..2000 bar Page(s): 230, 237, 242

22100 RailPressureA CR Level: 1 Current rail pressure of rail A Range: 0..2000 bar (only systems with two independent rails) Page(s): 230, 237, 242

22101 RailPressureB CR Level: 1 Current rail pressure of rail B Range: 0..2000 bar (only systems with two independent rails) Page(s): 230, 237, 243

22200 CurrOutx_Setp DARDANOS MVC01-20/03-8 + CR Level: 1 Current setpoint for regulated current output x 22210 Range: 0..5 A resp. 0..100 % Page(s): 237

22200 HPRx_DelPeriod DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 1 Delivery period of high-pressure pump x 22210 Range: 0..180 °crank Page(s): 243

22201 CurrOutx_ActualValue DARDANOS MVC03-8 + CR Level: 1 Current feedback measurement of regulated current

output x 22211

Range: 0..5 A Page(s): 237, 238

22202 CurrOutx_PWM DARDANOS MVC03-8 + CR Level: 1 PWM ratio of regulated current output x 22212 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 238

DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI 22202 HPRx_DeliveryBegin Level: 1 Delivery begin of high-pressure pump x 22212 Range: -360..360 °crank Page(s): 243

22203 CurrOutx_PWMComp CR Level: 1 Power supply compensated PWM ratio to regulated

current output x 22213

Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 238

22203 HPRx_DeliveryEnd DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 1 Delivery end of high-pressure pump x 22213 Range: -360..360 °crank Page(s): 243

22260 HPRx_RiseTime DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 1 Rise time of high-pressure pump x 22270 Range: 0..16,384 ms Page(s): 245

22300 PrePreInjectActive CR Level: 1 Indication that pre-pre-injection is active Range: 0..1 Page(s): 207, 209, 212



22301 PrePreFuelQuantity CR Level: 1 Current pre-pre-injection fuel quantity Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 194, 207, 210, 212, 214

22302 PrePreDeliveryBegin CR Level: 1 Current pre-pre-injection begin in °BTDC Range: -100..100 °BTDC Page(s): 207, 210

22303 PrePreDeliveryTime CR Level: 1 Current pre-pre-injection delivery period in ms ff Range: -8,192..8,192 ms resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 207, 212

22305 PrePreDelPeriod CR Level: 1 Current pre-pre-injection delivery period in °crank ff Range: -100..100 °crank Page(s): 207, 212

22307 PrePreDBBaseMap CR Level: 1 Pre-pre-injection begin from base map Range: -100..100 °crank Page(s): 207, 210

22308 PrePreDBToMainInj CR Level: 1 Resulting distance of pre-pre-injection begin to main

injection

Range: -100..100 °crank Page(s): 207, 210

22309 PrePreDBOffsetCoolT CR Level: 1 Offset of pre-pre-injection begin resulting from correc-

tion of coolant temperature


22310 PrePreFuelQBaseMap CR Level: 1 Pre-pre-injection fuel quantity from base map Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 207, 212

22311 PrePreFuelQCoolTCorr CR Level: 1 Offset of pre-pre-injection fuel quantity taken from

correction of coolant temperature


22320 PreInjectionActive CR Level: 1 Indication that pre-injection is active Range: 0..1 Page(s): 201, 203, 206

22321 PreInjFuelQuantity CR Level: 1 Current pre-injection fuel quantity Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 194, 201, 206

22322 PreInjDeliveryBegin CR Level: 1 Current pre-injection begin in °BTDC Range: -100..100 °BTDC Page(s): 201, 204



22323 PreInjDeliveryTime CR Level: 1 Current pre-injection delivery period in ms ff Range: -8,192..8,192 ms resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 201, 206

22325 PreInjDelPeriod CR Level: 1 Current pre-injection delivery period in °crank ff Range: -100..100 °crank Page(s): 201, 206

22327 PreInjDBBaseMap CR Level: 1 Pre-injection begin from base map Range: -100..100 °crank Page(s): 201, 204

22328 PreInjDBToMainInj CR Level: 1 Resulting distance of pre-injection begin to main injec-

tion


22329 PreInjDBOffsetCoolT CR Level: 1 Offset of pre-injection begin from correction of coolant

temperature


22330 PreInjFuelQBaseMap CR Level: 1 Pre-injection fuel quantity from base map Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 201, 206

22331 PreInjFuelQCoolTCorr CR Level: 1 Offset of pre-injection fuel quantity from correction of

coolant temperature


22340 PostInjectionActive CR Level: 1 Indication that post-injection is active Range: 0..1

214, 216, 219 Page(s):

22341 PostInjFuelQuantity CR Level: 1 Current post-injection fuel quantity Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 194, 214, 217, 219, 221

22342 PostInjDeliveryBegin CR Level: 1 Current post-injection begin in °BTDC Range: -100..100 °BTDC Page(s): 214, 217

22343 PostInjDeliveryTime CR Level: 1 Current post-injection delivery period in ms ff Range: -8,192..8,192 ms resp. -15,624..15,624 ms

214, 219 Page(s):

22345 PostInjDelPeriod CR Level: 1 Current post-injection delivery period in °crank ff Range: -100..100 °crank

214, 219, 226 Page(s):



22347 PostInjDBBaseMap CR Level: 1 Post-injection begin from base map Range: -100..100 °crank Page(s): 214, 217

22348 PostInjDBToMainInj CR Level: 1 Resulting distance of post-injection begin from main

injection


22349 PostInjDBOffsetCoolT CR Level: 1 Offset of post-injection begin from correction of cool-

ant temperature


22350 PostInjFuelQBaseMap CR Level: 1 Post-injection fuel quantity from base map Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 215, 219

22351 PostInjFuelQCTCorr CR Level: 1 Offset der post-injection fuel quantity from correction

of coolant temperature


22360 PostPostInjectActive CR Level: 1 Indication that post-post-injection is active Range: 0..1 Page(s): 221, 223, 226

22361 PostPostFuelQuantity CR Level: 1 Current post-post-injection fuel quantity Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 194, 221, 224, 226

22362 PostPostDeliveryBeg CR Level: 1 Current post-post-injection in °BTDC Range: -100..100 °BTDC Page(s): 221, 224

22363 PostPostDelTime CR Level: 1 Current post-post-injection delivery period in ms ff Range: -8,192..8,192 ms resp. -15,624..15,624 ms Page(s): 221, 226

22365 PostPostDelPeriod CR Level: 1 Current post-post-injection delivery period in °crank ff Range: -100..100 °crank

221 Page(s):

22367 PostPostDBBaseMap CR Level: 1 Post-post-injection from base map Range: -100..100 °crank

221, 224 Page(s):

22368 PostPostDBToMainInj CR Level: 1 Resulting distance of post-post-injection to main injec-

tion

Range: -100..100 °crank 221, 224 Page(s):



22369 PostPostDBOffsetCT CR Level: 1 Offset of post-post-injections from correction of coolant

temperature


22370 PostPostFuelQBaseMap CR Level: 1 Post-post-injection fuel quantity from base map Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 221, 226

22371 PostPostFuelQCTCorr CR Level: 1 Offset of post-post-injection fuel quantity from correc-

tion of coolant temperature


22400 DelPerPrePreInjX CR Level: 3 Delivery period of pre-pre-injection at cylinder X ff Range: -100..100 °crank Page(s): 201, 207, 208

22420 DelBegPrePreInjX CR Level: 3 Delivery begin of pre-pre-injection at cylinder X ff Range: -100..100 °BTDC Page(s): 208, 210, 214

22440 DelPerPreInjX CR Level: 3 Delivery period of pre-injection at cylinder X ff Range: -100..100 °crank Page(s): 202, 207

22460 DelBegPreInjX CR Level: 3 Delivery begin of pre-injection at cylinder X ff Range: -100..100 °BTDC Page(s): 202, 206

22480 DelPerPostInjX CR Level: 3 Delivery period of post-injection at cylinder X ff Range: -100..100 °crank Page(s): 215, 221

22500 DelBegPostInjX CR Level: 3 Delivery begin of post-injection at cylinder X ff Range: -100..100 °BTDC Page(s): 215, 217

22520 DelPerPostPostInjX CR Level: 3 Delivery period of post-post-injection at cylinder X ff Range: -100..100 °crank Page(s): 221

22540 DelBegPostPostInjX CR Level: 3 Delivery begin of post-post-injection at cylinder X ff Range: -100..100 °BTDC Page(s): 222, 224

HZM CAN Customer Module Manual DG 05007-d DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d Modbus Manual DG 05 002-d

23700 ErrorState(x)

ff

Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex Page(s):

Collection of error bits from 3001 to 30951300 to 1309523000 to 23095



HZM CAN Customer Module Manual DG 05007-d CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d Device NetManual DG 06 003-d Modbus Manual DG 05 002-d

23720 BitCollection(x)

ff

Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex Page(s):

Collection of bit states according to definition in 29900ff BitCollParamSet(x)

CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23750 CanOp:Init Level: 1 Range: 0..1

CANopen state: init

CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23751 CanOp: PreOperational Level: 1 Range: 0..1

CANopen state: preoperational

CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23752 CanOp: Operational Level: 1 Range: 0..1

CANopen state: operational

CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23753 CanOp: Stopped Level: 1 Range: 0..1

CANopen state: stopped

CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23754 CanOp:HBeatConsumer Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Heartbeat consumer activated

CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23755 CanOp:HBeatProducer Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Heartbeat producer is enabled

CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23756 CanOp:LifeGuarding Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Life guarding is enabled

CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23757 CanOp:ErrLifeSign Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Life sign error

CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23758 CanOp:ErrRPDOTimeOut Level: 1 Range: 0..1

At least one RPDO has timed out

CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23759 CanOp:RxIRCount Level: 1 Range: 0..65535

Counter of receive interrupts (receive telegrams)

CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23760 CanOp:SwitchMask(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..FF Hex

Mask for receipt of switch functions as assigned in 20810ff Comm.. and 24810 ChanTyp.. x = 0: switch functions 8..1

ff

x = 1: switch functions 16..9 x = 2: switch functions 24..17 x = 3: switch functions 32..25



CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23764 CanOp:SensorMask(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..FF Hex

Mask for receipt of sensorsas assigned in 900ff Assign.. and 4900 ChanTyp.. x = 0: sensors 8..1 x = 1: sensors 12..9

ff

CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23770 CanOp:RPDOTelLen(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..8

Expected telegram length of RPDOs x = 0..3

ff

CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 23774 CanOp:TPDOTelLen(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..8

Expected telegram length of TPDOs x = 0..15

ff

DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d 23850 DNet:LED_Green Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Current value of green LED

DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d 23851 DNet:LED_Red Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Current value of red LED

DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d 23852 DNet:Flag Level: 1 Range: 0..FF Hex

State flag

DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d 23853 DNet:Status Level: 1 Range: 0..FF Hex

Indication of state

DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d 23860 DNet:NoOfPollParams Level: 4 Range: 0..100

Number of sending parameters via polled message

DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d 23861 DNet:Baudrate Level: 4 Range: 125,250,500

Current baud rate

DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d 23862 DNet:RxBinary(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..FF Hex

Received values for switching functions ff

DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d 23864 DNet:RxSensor(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..65535

Received sensor values ff

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23900 J1939:Online Level: 1 Range: 0..1

General state SAE J1939

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23903 J1939:TSC1RxBufOvfl Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Overflow of receiving buffer for TSC1 messages

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23904 J1939:RxBufOvfl Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Overflow of general receiving buffer



SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23905 J1939:TxBufOvfl Level: 1 Range: 0..1

Overflow of source buffer

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23906 J1939:RxTimeout Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex

Indication of timed out receipt telegrams

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23907 J1939:MsgStatus Level: 1 Range: 0..FFFF Hex

Indication of receipt telegrams in ok state

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23910 J1939:TorqueMode Level: 4 Range: 0..15

Torque mode

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23911 J1939:TorqueSetpoint Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Current torque setpoint related to the maximum value of torque limitation

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23912 J1939:TorqueLimitMax Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Current torque related to the maximum value of torque limitation

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23913 J1939:PercentLoad Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Load in percent at current speedl

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23914 J1939:TorqueFriction Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Nominal torque friction

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23920 J1939:RxTSC1Status Level: 4 Range: 0..0F

Activity state of TSC1 telegrams

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23921 J1939:RxTSC1GovMode Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Governor mode resulting from TSC1 telegrams

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23922 J1939:RxTSC1SpeedSet Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Speed setpoint resulting from TSC1 telegrams

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23923 J1939:RxTSC1SpeedLim Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Speed limitation resulting from TSC1 telegrams

SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 23924 J1939:RxTSC1FuelLim Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Fuel limitation resulting from TSC1 telegrams



30.1 List 3: Functions

4000 MeasWheelBoreOrTeeth Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 151

Sensing gear (pickup wheel) with bores and teeth

4001 PickUp1AtCamOrCrank Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 151

Pickup 1 at camshaft or crankshaft

4002 PickUp2On Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 47

Activation of pickup 2

4003 PickUp2AtCamOrCrank Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 151

Pickup 2 at camshaft or crankshaft

4005 CamIndexOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of camshaft index sensor

152

4006 CamIndexBoreOrTeeth Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 152

Camshaft index sensor with bore or pin

4007 CheckGapToIndexDist Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 155, 346

Activation of monitoring of distance between crank-shaft synchronizing mark to camshaft index sensor

4008 TryToFindGapOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 49, 154

Activation of test procedure in case of failure of cam-shaft index sensor

4015 CheckPickUpDirection Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 49, 155, 340

Activation of monitoring of the preferred direction of magnetization for the pickups

4016 CheckIndexDirection Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 49, 155, 341

Activation of monitoring of the preferred direction of magnetization for camshaft index sensor

4020 SpeedSetpPCOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 53, 117, 121

Activation of speed setpoint via PC

4028 SpeedGradientDT1On Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of DT1 factor for speed jump recognition

82



4029 PowerGradientDT1On Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 82

Activation of DT1 factor for load jump recognition

4060 SpeedMinTempOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 67

Activation of temperature dependent idle speed

4100 PIDMapOn Level: 3 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 75

Activation of PID-map

4101 PIDMapSpGovPowOrFuel Level: 3 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 75

Stability map of speed governor 0: speed and fuel quantity dependant 1: speed and power dependant

4110 StaticCorrOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 80

Activation of PID correction for static operation

4120 DroopOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 71

Activation of droop

4121 DroopPowerOrFuel Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 71

Calculation of droop on the basis of power measure-ment (1) or fuel reference (0)

4130 IMGovernorOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 108

Activation of idle/maximum speed control

4131 IMFuelRampOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 111

Activation fuel ramp for idle/maximum speed control

4132 IMDriveMapOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 109

Activation of speed map

4160 PIDTempOn Level: 3 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 79

Activation of temperature dependent PID correction

4230 SpeedRampOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 68, 69

Activation of speed ramp

4232 SectionalOrFixedRamp Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 68, 69

Selection of speed ramp 0 = simple speed ramp 1 = sectional speed ramp



4240 StartSpeedRampOn Level: 3 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 44

Activation of additional speed ramp for engine start

4300 DeliveryTimeMapOn CR

DeliveryPeriodMapOn PLD Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 178, 181, 196, 198

Activation of delivery time map

4301 DPCorrCylinderOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 182, 199

Activation of delivery period correction for individual cylinders

4310 DeliveryBeginMapOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 167, 170, 184, 187

Activation of delivery begin map

4311 DBCorrCylinderOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 191, 174191

Activation of delivery begin correction for individual cylinders

4315 DBBaseMapForStartOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 170, 187

Activation of delivery begin map for engine start

4316 DBCorrCoolantTempOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 171, 190

Activation of coolant temperature dependent delivery begin correction

4317 DBCorrChargeAirTmpOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 173, 190

Activation of charge air temperature dependent delivery begin correction

4318 DBCorrFuelTempOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 173, 190

Activation of fuel temperature dependent delivery begin correction

4319 DBCorrAmbPressOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 173, 190

Activation of ambient pressure dependent delivery be-gin correction

4400 CanCommDCOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 322

HZM-CAN: activation of node type DC

4401 CanCommGCOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 322, 325

HZM-CAN: activation of node type GC



4402 CanCommPEOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 322

HZM-CAN: activation of node type PE

4406 CanCommCMOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 322

HZM-CAN: activation of node type CM

4416 CanxSegmentOrBaud Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 321

HZM-CAN x: selection of baud rate parameterization 0: directly set baud rate 1: baud rate set via segment settings

4417

4440 PEActPosSetpointOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 326

HZM-CAN: telegram sending rate for transmission of actuators setpoint to the periphery module

4450

4490

4441 PEDigOutOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 327

HZM-CAN: telegram sending rate for transmission of digital output values to the periphery module

4451

4491

4442 PEAnalogOutOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 327

HZM-CAN: telegram sending rate for transmission of analogue output values to the periphery module

4452

4492

4443 PEPWMOutOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 328

HZM-CAN: telegram sending rate for transmission of PWM output values to the periphery module

4453

4493

4444 PEErrorResetOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 326

HZM-CAN: activation of transmission of error clearing commands to the periphery module

4454

4494

4445 PEAutoResetOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 326

HZM-CAN: activation of transmission of auto-reset commands to the periphery module

4455

4495

4447 PEMeasurementsOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

HZM-CAN: activation of transmission of measured values to the periphery module

4457

4497

4460 PEDigOutx:Logic Level: 6 Range: 0..FF Hex Page(s): 327

HZM-CAN: logical link for multiple assignment to digital outputs of periphery module

ff



4480 PEDigOutx:Prior Level: 6 Range: 0..7F Hex Page(s): 327

HZM-CAN: priority for multiple assignment to digital outputs of periphery module

ff

4500 OilPressWarnCurveOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 104

Activation of oil pressure monitoring curve with oil pressure warning

4501 OilPressEcyCurveOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 105

Activation of oil pressure monitoring curve with engine stop

4505 CoolPressSupviseOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 105

Activation of coolant pressure monitoring

4506 CoolP1Lim1RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 106

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 1 for coolant pres-sure monitoring

4507 CoolP1Lim1EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 106

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 1 of coolant pressure moni-toring

4508 CoolP1Lim2RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 106

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 2 for coolant pres-sure monitoring

4509 CoolP1Lim2EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 106

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 2 of coolant pressure moni-toring

4520 RailPress1SupviseOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 100

Activation of supervision of rail pressure sensor 1

4521 RailP1Lim1RiseOrFall CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 100

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 1 of rail pressure1-Überwachung

4522 RailP1Lim1EcyOrWarn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 100

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 1 of rail pressure 1 monitor-ing


Rising or falling monitoring of limit 2 of rail pressure 1 monitoring





4525 RailPress2SupviseOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 100

Activation of supervision of rail pressure sensor 2









4530 RailLeakageDetectOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of rail leakage detection monitoring

4550 CoolantTempSupviseOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 97

Activation of coolant temperature monitoring

4551 CoolTLim1RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 97

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 1 for coolant tem-perature monitoring

4552 CoolTLim1EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 97

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 1 for coolant temperature monitoring

4553 CoolTLim2RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 97

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 2 for coolant tem-perature monitoring

4554 CoolTLim2EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 97

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 2 for coolant temperature monitoring

4555 ChAirTempSupviseOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 98

Activation of charge air temperature monitoring



4556 ChAirTLim1RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 98

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 1 of charge air temperature monitoring

4557 ChAirTLim1EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 98

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 1 of charge air temperature monitoring

4558 ChAirTLim2RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 98

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 2 of charge air temperature monitoring

4559 ChAirTLim2EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 98

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 2 of charge air temperature monitoring

4560 OilTempSupviseOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 95

Activation of oil temperature monitoring

4561 OilTLim1RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 95

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 1 of oil tempera-ture monitoring

4562 OilTLim1EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 95

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 1 of oil temperature monitor-ing

4563 OilTLim2RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 95

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 2 of oil tempera-ture monitoring

4564 OilTLim2EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 95

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 2 of oil temperature monitor-ing

4565 FuelTempSupviseOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 99

Activation of fuel temperature monitoring

4566 FuelTLim1RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 99

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 1 of fuel tempera-ture monitoring

4567 FuelTLim1EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 99

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 1 of fuel temperature moni-toring

4568 FuelTLim2RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 99

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 2 of fuel tempera-ture monitoring



4569 FuelTLim2EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 99

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 2 of fuel temperature moni-toring

4570 ExhTempSupviseOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 98

Activation of exhaust gas temperature monitoring

4571 ExhTLim1RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 98

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 1 of exhaust gas temperature monitoring

4572 ExhTLim1EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 98

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 1 of exhaust gas temperature monitoring

4573 ExhTLim2RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 98

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 2 of exhaust gas temperature monitoring

4574 ExhTLim2EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 98

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 2 of exhaust gas temperature monitoring

4575 TurbOilTempSupviseOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 101

Activation of turbocharger oil temperature monitoring

4576 TuOilTLim1RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 101

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 1 of turbocharger oil temperature monitoring

4577 TuOilTLim1EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 101

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 1 of turbocharger oil tem-perature monitoring

4578 TuOilTLim2RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 101

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 2 of turbocharger oil temperature monitoring

4579 TuOilTLim2EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 101

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 2 of turbocharger oil tem-perature monitoring

4580 FuelPressSupviseOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 101

Activation of monitoring of fuel pressure

4581 FuelPLim1RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 101

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 1 of fuel pressure monitoring



4582 FuelPLim1EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 101

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 1 of fuel pressure monitoring

4583 FuelPLim2RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 102

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 2 of fuel pressure monitoring

4584 FuelPLim2EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 102

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 2 of fuel pressure monitoring

4585 OilLevelSupviseOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 102

Activation of oil level monitoring

4586 OilLevLim1RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 102

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 1 of oil level moni-toring

4587 OilLevLim1EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 102

Emergency shutdown or warning when level rises abo-ve or falls below limit 1 of oil level monitoring

4588 OilLevLim2RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 102

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 2 of oil level moni-toring

4589 OilLevLim2EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 102

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 2 of oil level monitoring

4590 TrOilPressSupviseOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 103

Activation of transmission oil pressure monitoring

4591 TrOilPLim1RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 103

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 1 of transmission oil pressure monitoring

4592 TrOilPLim1EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 103

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 1 of transmission oil pressure monitoring

4593 TrOilPLim2RiseOrFall Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 103

Rising or falling monitoring of limit 2 of transmission oil pressure monitoring

4594 TrOilPLim2EcyOrWarn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 103

Emergency shutdown or warning when pressure rises above or falls below limit 2 of transmission oil pressure monitoring



4600 ExcitationControlOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 115

Activation of excitation control in locomotive operation

4601 ExcitGovOrControl Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 115

Selection between excitation control/excitation govern-ing

0 = excitation control 1 = excitation governing

4610 ExcitControlRampOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of ramp for excitation control in locomotive operation

117

4620 DigSlideExcitCntrlOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 126

Activation of slide protection via excitation control by digital sliding signal in locomotive operation

4621 AnaSlideExcitCntrlOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 126

Activation of slide protection via excitation control by analogue sliding signal in locomotive operation

4630 ExcitGovPICurveOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 121

Activation of PI-curve for excitation governing in lo-comotive operation

4635 ExcitationSetpPCOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 117, 121

Activation of excitation setpoint via PC in locomotive operation

4640 ExcitGovFuelRampOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 120

Activation of fuel ramp in locomotive operation

4650 ExcitTempLimitOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 123

Activation of temperature dependent lowering of fuel setpoint in locomotive operation

4655 ExcitBoostLimitOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 123

Activation of boost pressure dependent limitation of fuel setpoint in locomotive operation

4656 ExcitSpeedLimitOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 124

Activation of speed dependent limitation of fuel set-point in locomotive operation

4700 SpeedLimitOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of speed dependent fuel limitation

86



4706 FuelRedCoolTempOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 88

Activation of coolant temperature dependent fuel reduc-tion

4707 FuelRedChAirTempOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 89

Activation of charge air temperature dependent fuel reduction

4708 FuelRedFuelTempOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 89

Activation of fuel temperature dependent fuel reduction

4709 FuelRedAmbPressOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 90

Activation of ambient pressure dependent fuel reduction

4710 BoostLimitOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 90

Activation of boost pressure dependent fuel limitation

4750 FuelTempCorrOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 145

Activation of fuel temperature dependent fuel correc-tion

4801 DigChannelXPWMOrDO Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 281, 286

Use digital output X as PWM output or digital output ff

4805 PWMOutXOrDigital OurY DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Configuration of PWMX/DOY-output ff 0 = digital output 1 = PWM output

4810 StopImpulseOrSwitch Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 55, 25755257

Selection of type of engine stop switch: 0 = Stop active only while stop command is applied 1 = Stop active by one single switch pulse until engine stops

4849 StartImpulseOrSwitch Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Selection of type of engine start switch Auswahl der Wirkungsweise des Motorstartschalters: 0 = Start active only while start command is appllied 1 = Start active by one single switch pulse until engine is running

4851 DigitalOutX_Logic Level: 6 Range: 00..7F Hex Page(s): 302302

Logical link for multiple assignment zu digital outputs ff

4880 DigitalOutx:Prior Level: 6 Range: 0..7F Hex Page(s): 303303

Priority for multiple assignment to digital outputs ff



4900 ChanTypSetpoint1Ext Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326, 249326

Configuration of input channel type for setpoint ad-juster 1

4901 ChanTypSetpoint2Ext Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for setpoint ad-juster 2

4902 ChanTypLoadCtrlInput Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for load setpoint

4903 ChanTypSyncInput Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s):

Configuration of input channel type for synchronization signal

326

4904 ChanTypBoostPress Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Selection of input channel type for boost pressure sen-sor

4905 ChanTypOilPress Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for oil pressure sensor

4906 ChanTypAmbPress DARDANOS MVC04-6 Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for ambient pres-sure sensor

4907 ChanTypCoolantTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for coolant sensor

4908 ChanTypChAirTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for charge air tem-perature sensor

4909 ChanTypOilTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for oil temperature sensor

4910 ChanTypFuelTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for fuel tempera-ture sensor



4911 ChanTypExhaustTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for exhaust gas temperature sensor

4914 ChanTypExcitReduct Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for reduction of excitation signal for slide protection

4915 ChanTypSpeedReduct Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for reduction of speed setpoint for slide protection

4916 ChanTypCoolPress Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for coolant pressure sensor

4917 ChanTypAsymmLoad Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s):

Configuration of input channel type for asymmetric load

4918 ChanTypMeasPower Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for measured po-wer

4919 ChanTypPowerSetp Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for power setpoint

4920 ChanTypTurboOilTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for turbocharger oil temperature

4921 ChanTypFuelPress Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s):

Configuration of input channel type for fuel pressure

326

4922 ChanTypOilLevel Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for oil level

4923 ChanTypFuelLimExterm Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for external injec-tion quantity limitation



4924 ChanTypTransOilPress Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 326

Configuration of input channel type for transmission oil pressure

4925 ChanTypAirMass Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s):

Configuration of input channel type for charge air mass sensor

4940 RelOrAbsBoostSensor Level: 1 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 248248

Selection of boost pressure sensor type (0 = absolute, 1 = relative)

4950 PEIxSetpoint1Ext Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for setpoint adjuster 1

4951 PEIxSetpoint2Ext Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for setpoint adjuster 2

4952 PEIxLoadCtrlInput Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for load setpoint signal

4953 PEIxSyncInput Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for synchronization signal

4954 PEIxBoostPress Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for boost pressure sensor

4955 PEIxOilPress Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for oil pressure sensor

4956 PEIxAmbPress DARDANOS MVC04-6 Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for ambient pressure sensor

4957 PEIxCoolantTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for coolant temperature sensor



4958 PEIxChAirTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for charge air temperature sensor

4959 PEIxOilTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for oil temperature sensor

4960 PEIxFuelTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for fuel temperature sensor

4961 PEIxExhaustTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for exhaust gas temperature sensor

4964 PEIxExcitReduct Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for reduction of excitation signal for slide protection

4965 PEIxSpeedReduct Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for reduction of speed setpoint for slide protection

4966 PEIxCoolPress Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for coolant pressure sensor

4967 PEIxAsymmLoad Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for asymmetric load

4968 PEIxMeasPower Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for measured power

4969 PEIxPowerSetp Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for power setpoint

4970 PEIxTurbOilTemp Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for turbocharger oil temperature



4971 PEIxFuelPress Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for fuel pressure

4972 PEIxOilLevel Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for oil level

4973 PEIxFuelLimExtern Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for external fuel limitation

4974 PEIxTransOilPress Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery module index for transmission oil pressure

5000 SubstOrLastSetp1Ext Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 252

Selection of substitute value for setpoint adjuster 1 in case of error

(0 = last valid value, 1 = substitute value)

5001 SubstOrLastSetp2Ext Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Selection of substitute value for setpoint adjuster 2 in case of error

252 (0 = last valid value, 1 = substitute value)

5002 SubstOrLastLoadInput Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 252

Selection of substitute value for load setpoint signal in case of error


5003 SubstOrLastSyncInput Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 252

Selection of substitute value for synchronizing signal in case of error


5004 SubstOrLastBoostPres Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 252

Selection of substitute value for boost pressure sensor in case of error


5005 SubstOrLastOilPress Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Selection of substitute value for oil pressure sensor in case of error


5006 SubstOrLastAmbPress Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 252

Selection of substitute value for ambient pressure sen-sor in case of error


5007 SubstOrLastCoolTemp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 252

Selection of substitute value for coolant temperature sensor in case of error




5008 SubstOrLastChAirTemp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 252

Selection of substitute value for charge air temperature sensor in case of error


5009 SubstOrLastOilTemp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 252

Selection of substitute value for oil temperature sensor in case of error


5010 SubstOrLastFuelTemp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 252

Selection of substitute value for fuel temperature sensor in case of error


5011 SubstOrLastExhstTemp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 252

Selection of substitute value for exhaust gas tempera-ture sensor in case of error


5012 SubstOrLastRailPres1 CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 252

Selection of substitute value for rail pressure sensor 1 in case of error


5013 SubstOrLastRailPres2 CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Selection of substitute value for rail pressure sensor 2 in case of error


5014 SubstOrLastExcitRed Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 252

Selection of substitute value for excitation signal reduc-tion for slide protection in case of error

(0 = last valid value, 1 = substitute value fixed 0 %)

5015 SubstOrLastSpeedRed Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 252

Selection of substitute value for speed setpoint reduc-tion for slide protection in case of error

(0 = last valid value, 1 = substitute value fixed 0 rpm)

5016 SubstOrLastCoolPress Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 253

Selection of substitute value for coolant pressure sensor in case of error


5017 SubstOrLastAsymmLoad Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Selection of substitute value for asymmetric load in case of error


5018 SubstOrLastMeasPower Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 253

Selection of substitute value for measured power in case of error


5019 SubstOrLastPowerSetp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 253

Selection of substitute value for power setpoint in case of error (0 = last valid value, 1 = substitute value)



5020 SubstOrLastTuOilTemp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 253

Selection of substitute value for turbocharger oil tem-perature in case of error


5021 SubstOrLastFuelPress Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 253

Selection of substitute value for fuel pressure in case of error


5022 SubstOrLastOilLevel Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 253

Selection of substitute value for oil level in case of error (0 = last valid value, 1 = substitute value)

5023 SubstOrLastFuelLimEx Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 253

Selection of substitute value for external injection quan-tity limitation in case of error


5024 SubstOrLastTransOilP Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 253

Selection of substitute value for transmission oil pres-sure in case of error


5025 SubstOrLastAirMass Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 253

Selection of substitute value for air mass in case of error (0 = last valid value, 1 = substitute value)

5040 HoldOrResetSetp1Ext Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 253

Selection whether error of setpoint adjuster 1 is to be held or automatically reset

(0 = automatic reset, 1 = error is held)

5041 HoldOrResetSetp2Ext Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of setpoint adjuster 2 is to be held or automatically reset


5042 HoldOrResetLoadInput Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of load setpoint is to be held or automatically reset


5043 HoldOrResetSyncInput Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of synchronizing signal is to be held or automatically reset


5044 HoldOrResetBoostPres Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Selection whether error of boost pressure sensor is to be held or automatically reset

254 (0 = automatic reset, 1 = error is held)

5045 HoldOrResetOilPress Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of oil pressure sensor is to be held or automatically reset




5046 HoldOrResetAmbPress Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of ambient pressure sensor is to be held or automatically reset


5047 HoldOrResetCoolTemp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of coolant temperature sensor is to be held or automatically reset


5048 HoldOrResetChAirTemp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of charge air temperature sensor is to be held or automatically reset


5049 HoldOrResetOilTemp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of oil temperature sensor is to be held or automatically reset


5050 HoldOrResetFuelTemp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of fuel temperature sensor is to be held or automatically reset


5051 HoldOrResetExhstTemp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of exhaust gas temperature sen-sor is to be held or automatically reset


5052 HoldOrResetRailPres1 CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of rail pressure sensor 1 is to be held or automatically reset


5053 HoldOrResetRailPres2 CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Selection whether error of rail pressure sensor 2 is to be held or automatically reset


5054 HoldOrResetExcitRed Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of reduction value of excitation signal is to be held or automatically reset


5055 HoldOrResetSpeedRed Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of reduction value for speed setpoint is to be held or automatically reset


5056 HoldOrResetCoolPress Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of coolant pressure sensor is to be held or automatically reset


5057 HoldOrResetAsymmLoad Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Selection whether error of asymmetric load is to be held or automatically reset




5058 HoldOrResetMeasPower Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of measured power is to be held or automatically reset


5059 HoldOrResetPowerSetp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error at power setpoint is to be held or automatically reset (0 = automatic reset, 1 = error is held)

5060 HoldOrResetTuOilTemp Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of turbocharger oil temperature value is to be held or automatically reset


5061 HoldOrResetFuelPress Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Selection whether error of fuel pressure value is to be held or automatically reset


5062 HoldOrResetOilLevel Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of oil level value is to be held or automatically reset


5063 HoldOrResetFuelLimEx Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of external injection fuel limita-tion value is to be held or automatically reset


5064 HoldOrResetTransOilP Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of transmission oil pressure value is to be held or automatically reset


5065 HoldOrResetAirMass Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Selection whether error of air mass value is to be held or automatically reset


5100 NoStoreSErrOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 337

Error saving is disabled until next reset

5101 CommAlarmWarnFlashOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 332

Selection whether common alarm flash shall be on if there are only warnings

5102 CommonAlarmResetOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 333

Selection of whether the common alarm indicator is to be reset briefly (edge change) if some new error occurrs

5103 CommonAlarmResetBoth Selection of whether slope is changed (5102 Com-monAlarmResetOn = 1), even when an error is deleted (generally with any error)

Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s):



5210 SyncAnalogOrDigital Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 129, 131

Selection of synchronization 0 = with digital potentiometer 1 = with analogue signal (e.g. SyG 02)

5230 LoadControlOrPot Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 132, 134, 136

Selection of load control 0 = with potentiometer 1 = with analogue signal (e.g. LMG 10)

5233 PowerGovernorOrLMG Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 132, 137

Selection of load control mode 0 = selection according to 5230 LoadControlOrPot 1 = integrated power governor

5234 FuelOrSpeedOffsMode Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 138

Selection of intervention type for integrated power gov-ernor 0 = speed offset for speed governor (isolated operation)1 = fuel offset (mains operation)

5235 PIDCurvePowerOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 138

Activation of PID-curve for integrated load governor

5239 SupvisePowerDiffOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 138

Activation of power difference monitoring in integrated load governor

5241 PowerSetpRampOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 137

Activation of power setpoint ramp in integrated load

governor

5243 PowerSetpPCOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 137

Activation of power setpoint for integrated load gover-nor via PC

5245 KnockControlOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 139

Activation of reduced power in integrated load gover-nor caused by knocking

5250 ShipSetp2DigiOrAna Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 64

Selection of setpoint adjuster 2 for marine operation 0 = analogue signal 1 = with digital potentiometer

Marine Operation Twin Engine 5251 TwinEngineEnable Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of master / slave mode in marine operation

5252 NoDigPotAtSetp1Err Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Deactivation of digital potentiometers automatic selec-tion while error of setpoint 1 occurs for marine opera-tion



5253 ShipSetp1LeverOrPot Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Selection of setpoint adjuster 1 for marine operation 1 = without assignment of direction (standard) 0 = with assignment of direction

5350 LocoSetpoint1Mode Level: 2 Range: 0..2 Page(s): 60

Selection of setpoint adjuster 1 for locomotive opera-tion

0 = speed notch 1 = analogue signal 2 = with digital potentiometer

5351 DigSlideSpeedSetpOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 127

Activation of slide protection on speed setpoint

5352 AnaSlideSpeedSetpOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 128

Activation of slide protection by analogue slide signal

5353 NotchAssignOrBinary Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 114

Selection whether speed notch corresponds directly to binary value or is derived from a table.

5360 CoolantTmpWarnIdleOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 107

Activation of forced idle speed by coolant temperature monitoring

5361 OilTempWarnIdleOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 107

Activation of forced idle speed by oil temperature monitoring

5362 CoolPressWarnIdleOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 107

Activation of forced idle speed by coolant pressure monitoring

5510 AnalogInX_Type DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Configuration of analogue input as voltage or current input

ff

5510 AIxWithSensorSupply Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 279, 284

Configuration whether power supply to analogue input uses supply voltage of the respective sensor

ff

5550 AI9VoltOrCurrent DARDANOS MVC03-8 Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 279

Configuration of analogue input 9 as voltage or current input

5550 TempInX_SensorType Level: 4 Range: 0..4 Page(s): 294

Selection of linearization curve for temperature sensor at temperature input X

ff



5600 AIX_SensorType Level: 4 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Selection of linearization curve for air mass sensor at analogue input X

ff

5900 CylinderMaskOn Activation of cylinder shutdown mask 1900 Cylinder-Mask via PC

Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 162

5905 ClickTestForceCylOn Level: 2 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Selection of cylinder for click test

5920 CylinderFaultEcyOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 165, 166, 345

Emergency shutdown in case of error at several cylin-ders

5950 BipCorrectionOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 159, 161

Activation of use of measured fly time for BIP correc-tion (only if 5951 BipSupervisingOn = 1)

5951 BipSupervisingOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 159, 161, 163, 349

Activation of fly time monitoring

5960 HighVoltage58VOr48V Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 157

Selection of control voltage

14550 ExhaustTempCorrOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 147

Activation of cylinder correction via cylinder tempera-ture

14900 ChanTypExhTempCylX Level: 6 Range: 0..2 Page(s):

Configuration of input channel type for cylinder tem-perature sensor X

14950 PEIxExhTempCylX Level: 6 Range: 0..4 Page(s):

Configuration of HZM-CAN periphery modul index for cylinder temperature sensor X

15000 SubstOrLastExTmpCylX Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Selection of substitute value for cylinder temperature sensor X in case of error

(0 = last valid value, 1 = substitute value

15040 HoldOrResetExTmpCylX Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 254

Selection whether error of cylinder temperature sensor X is to be held or automatically reset




15110 DOx_SupviseOn DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 304

Activation of supervision of digital output x ff

15110 DOPWMx_SupviseOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 298, 304

Activation of supervision of PWM or digital output x ff

15111 DOx_HoldOrReset DARDANOS MVC01-20 Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 305

Selection whether error of digital output x is to be held or automatically reset

ff


15111 DOPWMx_HoldOrReset Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 305

Selection whether error of PWM or digital output x is to be held or automatically reset

ff


15112 DOPWMx_SupCurrMinOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 299

Activation of supervision of minimum admissible cur-rent at PWM or digital output x

ff

15113 DOPWMx_SupCurrMaxOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 299

Activation of supervision of maximum admissible cur-rent at PWM or digital output x

ff

15115 DOPWMx_SupDeviatOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 299

Activation of supervision of maximum current devia-tion at PWM or digital output x

ff

15190 DOx_SupviseOn Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 298

Activation of supervision of digital output x ff

15191 DOx_HoldOrReset Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 305

Selection whether error of digital output x is to be held or automatically reset

ff


15240 FreqOut_SupviseOn DARDANOS MVC03-8 Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 282

Activation of supervision of frequency output

15241 FreqOut_HoldOrReset DARDANOS MVC03-8 Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 283

Selection whether error of frequency output is to be held or automatically reset


15250 CROutx_SupviseOn CR Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 240

Activation of supervision of current output x 15260



15251 CROutx_HoldOrReset CR Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 242

Selection whether error of current output x is to be held or automatically reset

15261


15252 CROutx_SupCurrMinOn CR Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 241

Activation of supervision of minimum admissible cur-rent at current output x

15262

15253 CROutx_SupCurrMaxOn CR Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 241

Activation of supervision of maximum admissible cur-rent at current output x

15263

15255 CROutx_SupDeviatOn CR Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 241

Activation of supervision of maximum admissible cur-rent deviation at current output x

15265

15257 CROutx_SupPWMMaxOn CR Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 242

Activation of supervision of maximum PWM ratio at current output x

15267

15258 CROutx_PWMMaxEcyOn CR Level: 6 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 242

Disable output in case of error due to PWM excess at current output x

15268

24000 CR_PressBaseMapOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 232, 234

Activation of base map to determine rail pressure set-point

24004 CR_PressCorrCoolTOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 235

Activation of coolant temperature dependent correction

24005 CR_PressCorrChargTOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 235

Activation of charge air temperature dependent correc-tion

24006 CR_PressCorrFuelTOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 235

Activation of fuel temperature dependent correction

24007 CR_PressCorrAmbPOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 237

Activation of ambient pressure dependent correction

24010 CR_PressRampUpOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 232, 234

Activation of upward ramp

24011 CR_PressRampDownOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 232, 234

Activation of downward ramp



24110 NumberOfRail2Or1 CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 230

Configuration indicating whether engine is equipped with one rail or two separate and independent rails

24200 CurrOutx_On CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 230

Aktivierung of regulated current output x 24210

24200 HighPressurePumpx_On DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 240

Activation of control of high-pressure pump x 24210

24250 CurrOut_PCSetpOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 238

Activation of current setpoint via PC

24250 HPR_DeliveryEndMapOn DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 243

Activation of delivery end map for high-pressure pump control

24300 PrePreInjectionOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 208

Activation of pre-pre-injection

24301 PrePreBeginMapOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 208, 210

Activation of delivery begin map for pre-pre-injection

24302 PrePreDBCorrCylOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of delivery begin correction for pre-pre-injection

208, 210

24303 PrePreDBCorrCoolTOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of speed and fueldependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of pre-pre-injection begin

208, 210

24304 PrePreDTSetpPCOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of delivery period setpoint for pre-pre-injection via PC

208, 212

24305 PrePreDQMapOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of speed and fuel dependent delivery quan-tity map for pre-pre-injection

208, 212

24306 PrePreDQCorrCylOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of delivery quantity correction of pre-pre-injection for each single cylinder

208, 214

24307 PrePreDQCorrCoolTOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of pre-pre-injection quantity

208, 212



24320 PreInjectionOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of pre-injection

202

24321 PreInjBeginMapOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of delivery begin map of pre-injection

202, 204

24322 PreInjDBCorrCylOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of cylinder-specific correction of pre-injection delivery begin

202, 206

24323 PreInjDBCorrCoolTOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of pre-injection begin

202, 204

24324 PreInjDTSetpPCOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of pre-injection delivery period setpoint via PC

202, 207

24325 PreInjDQMapOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of speed and fuel dependent delivery quan-tity map for pre-injection

202, 206

24326 PreInjDQCorrCylOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s):

Activation of cylinder-specific correction of pre-injection fuel quantity

202, 207

24327 PreInjDQCorrCoolTOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 202, 206

Activation of speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of pre-injection de-livery quantity

24340 PostInjectionOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 215

Activation of post-injection

24341 PostInjBeginMapOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 215, 217

Activation of delivery begin map for post-injection

24342 PostInjDBCorrCylOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 215, 217

Activation of cylinder-specific correction of post-injection delivery begin

24343 PostInjDBCorrCoolTOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 215, 217

Activation of speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction post-injection begin

24344 PostInjDTSetpPCOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 215, 219

Activation of post-injection delivery period setpoint via PC



24345 PostInjDQMapOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 215, 219

Activation of speed and fuel dependent delivery quan-tity map for post-injection

24346 PostInjDQCorrCylOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 215, 221

Activation of cylinder-specific correction of post-injection fuel quantity

24347 PostInjDQCorrCoolTOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 215, 219

Activation of speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of post-injection

24360 PostPostInjectionOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 222

Activation of post-post-injection

24361 PostPostBeginMapOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 222

Activation of post-post-injection delivery begin map

24362 PostPostDBCorrCylOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 222, 224

Activation of cylinder-specific correction of post-post-injection delivery begin

24363 PostPstDBCorrCoolTOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 222, 224

Activation of speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of post-post-injection

24364 PostPostDTSetpPCOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 222, 228

Activation of post-post-injection delivery period set-point via PC

24365 PostPostDQMapOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 222, 226

Activation of speed and fuel dependent delivery quan-tity map for post-post-injection

24366 PostPostDQCorrCylOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 222, 228

Activation of cylinder-specific correction of post-post-injection fuel quantity

24367 PostPstDQCorrCoolTOn CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1 Page(s): 222, 226

Activation of speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of post-post-injection

24810 ChanTypEngineStop Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s):

Configuration of module type for switching function "Engine stop" via communication modules (0..2: not used3 = customer CAN protocol4 = CA-Nopen5 = DeviceNet6 = Modbus7 = SAE J19398 = HZM-CAN Customer Module9 = HZM-CAN double module)

255, 259, 260



24811 ChanTypIdleSpeed Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s):

Configuration of module type for switch function "Idle speed" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

255, 259, 260

24812 ChanTypDroop2Or1 Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Droop 1/2" via communication modules

(assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24813 ChanTypForcedLimit Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255

Configuration of module type for switch function "Forced limitation" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24814 ChanTypSpeedRange2Or1 Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Speed range 1/2" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24815 ChanTypSpeedFix1 Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Fi-xed speed 1" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24816 ChanTypSpeedFix2 Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259

Configuration of module type for switch function "Fi-xed speed 2" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24817 ChanTypSpeedLimit2Or1 Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Speed limitation 1/2" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

Lokomotivbetrieb 24818 ChanTypSlide Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Slide Protection" in locomotive operation via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

Generatorbetrieb 24818 ChanTypKnock Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Knocking" in generator operation via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24819 ChanTypNotchx Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Speed notch x" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop) x = 3..0

ff



24823 ChanTypExcitLimit1 Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "First excitation signal limitation" via communication mod-ules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24824 ChanTypExcitLimit2 Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Sec-ond excitation signal limitation" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24825 ChanTypSpeedInc Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Speed increase" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24826 ChanTypSpeedDec Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Speed decrease" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24827 ChanTypSetpoint2Or1 Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259

Configuration of module type for switch function "Set-point adjuster 1/2" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24828 ChanTypErrorReset Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259

Configuration of module type for switch function "Re-set error" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24829 ChanTypFreezeSetpx Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Freeze setpoint x" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop) x = 1..2

ff

24831 ChanTypIMOrAllSpeed Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Gov-ernor mode" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24832 ChanTypCruiseControl Level: 1 Range: 0..9

Configuration of module type for switch function "Cruise control" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop) Page(s): 255, 259

24834 ChanTypSyncEnable Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Syn-chronization" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24835 ChanTypLoadEnable Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Load control enable" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)



24836 ChanTypAutoOrManual Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Change over generator operation" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24840 ChanTypExcitationOn Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Ex-citation signal" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

Locomotive operation 24841 ChanTypLowIdleOn Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260255259

Configuration of module type for switch function "Low idle speed" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

Marine Operation Twin Engin 24841 ChanTypMasterOrSlave Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259

Configuration of module type for switch function "Mas-ter or Slave" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

Generator 24842 ChanTypPID2Or1 Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259

Configuration of module type for switch function "PID parameter set 2 or 1" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

Marine Operation Twin Engin 24842 ChanTypLoadTransfer Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259

Configuration of module type for switch function "Load Transfer" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

Marine Operation Multiengine 24842 ChanTypCommand Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259

Configuration of module type for switch function "Command" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

Marine Operation Twin Engin 24843 ChanTypClutch Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259

Configuration of module type for switch function "Clutch" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

Marine Operation Multiengine 24843 ChanTypSynchro Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259

Configuration of module type for switch function "Syn-chro" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

Marine Operation Twin Engin 24844 ChanTypAsymLoadEnabl Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259

Configuration of module type for switch function "Asymmetric Load" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24845 ChanTypRailLeakDetec Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259

Configuration of module type for switch function "Rail Leakage" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)



24846 ChanTypGenBreaker Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259, 260

Configuration of module type for switch function "Con-tactor" via communication modules (assignment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

24848 ChanTypDelMaps2Or1 Level: 1 Range: 0..9

Configuration of module type for switch function "Map 1/2 for delivery begin and delivery quantity for pre- / post-injection“ via communication modules (assign-ment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

Page(s): 255, 259, 260

24849 ChanTypStartEngine Level: 6 Range: 0..9 Page(s): 255, 259

Configuration of module type for switch function “En-gine Start Request“ via communication modules (as-signment see 24810 ChanTypEngineStop)

see WAGO 25700 WagoCommOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of WAGO communication

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 25750 CanOpenOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of CANopen communication

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 25753 CanOp:EMCYOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of EMCY telegram sending

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 25770 CanOp:RPDOxOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of RPDO telegrams x = 1..4

ff

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 25774 CanOp:TPDOxOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of TPDO telegrams x = 1..16

ff

see DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d 25850 DeviceNetOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of DeviceNet communication

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25900 SAE_J1939On Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of SAE J1939 communication

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25901 J1939:RxMsgTSC1_xOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of received telegram „Torque/Speed Control #1: TSC1“ x = 1..4

ff

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25905 J1939:RxMsgEngTempOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of received telegrams „Engine Temperature“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25906 J1939:RxMsgEngFlOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of received telegrams „Engine Fluid Le-vel/Pressure“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25907 J1939:RxMsgTFluidsOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of received telegrams „Transmission Fluids“



see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25908 J1939:RxMsgInlExhOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of received telegrams „Inlet/Exhaust Condi-tions“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25915 J1939:RxMsgRequestOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of message request

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25930 J1939:TxMsgEEC1On Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of send telegrams „Electronic Engine Con-troller #1: EEC1“





see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25933 J1939:TxMsgEngTempOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of send telegrams „Engine Temperature“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25934 J1939:TxMsgFlLevelOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of send telegrams „Engine Fluid Le-vel/Pressure“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25935 J1939:TxMsgTFluidsOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of send telegrams „Transmission Fluids“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25936 J1939:TxMsgAmbientOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of send telegrams „Ambient Conditions“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25937 J1939:TxMsgInlExhOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of send telegrams „Inlet/Exhaust Condi-tions“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25938 J1939:TxMsgCCVehSpOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of send telegrams „Cruise Control/Vehicle Speed“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25939 J1939:TxMsgEngConfOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of send telegrams „Engine Configuration“

see SAE J1939, Manual DG 06 004-d 25940 J1939:TxMsgFuelEcoOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of send telegrams „Fuel Economy“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25945 J1939:TxMsgEngHourOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of send telegrams „Engine HoursRevolu-tions“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25946 J1939:TxMsgSoftwIdOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of send telegrams „Software Identification“



see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 25947 J1939:TxMsgDM1On Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of send telegrams „Active Diagnostic Trou-ble Codes DM1“


Activation of send telegrams „Previously Active Diag-nostic Trouble Codes DM2“


Activation of send telegrams „Freeze Frame Parameters DM4“

HZM CAN Customer Module Manual DG 05007-d 25960 CMTxTelxOn Level: 4 Range: 0..1

Activation of send telegrams x x = 20..52

ff



30.2 List 4: Characteristics and maps

6100 PIDMap:n(x) PIDMapSpGov:n(x)

When integrated power governor is available

Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 75

Speed supporting points for stability map of speed gov-ernors

ff

6150 PIDMap:f(x) PIDMapSpGov:f(x)

When integrated power governor is available

Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 75

Fuel supporting points for stability map of speed gover-nor

ff

6200 PIDMap:Corr(x)

When integrated power governor is available PIDMapSpGov:Corr(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..400 % Page(s): 75

Correction values of stability maps of speed governor ff

6300 PIDCrvPowGov:P(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 138

Power supporting points for PID curve of integrated load governor

ff

6310 PIDCrvPowGov:Corr(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..400 % Page(s): 138

Correction values for PID curve of integrated load gov-ernor

ff

6350 PIDMap:P(x)

PIDMapSpGov:P(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % rsp. 0..2500 kW Page(s): 75

Power supporting points for stability maps of speed governor

ff

6380 ExcitBoostLimit:p(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..5 bar Page(s): 123

Boost pressure supporting points for boost pressure dependent setpoint limitation in excitation control cir-cuit

ff

6390 ExcitBoostLimit:f(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 123

Fuel quantity values for boost pressure dependent set-point limitation in the excitation control circuit

ff

6400 BoostLimit:n(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 9090

Boost pressure support points for boost pressure de-pendent fuel limitation

ff

6410 BoostLimit:p_rel(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..5 bar Page(s): 90

Boost pressure support points for boost pressure de-pendent fuel limitation

ff



6420 BoostLimit:f(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 90

Fuel quantity values for boost pressure dependent fuel limitation

ff

6500 OilPressWarn:n(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 104

Speed support points for oil pressure warning curve ff

6520 OilPressWarn:p(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..10 bar Page(s): 104

Oil pressure values for oil pressure warning curve ff

6530 CoolPressLimity:n(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s):

Speed support points for coolant warning curve y 6580

ff 106

6540 CoolPressLimity:p(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..5 bar Page(s): 106

Coolant pressure values for coolant warning curve y 6590

ff

6550 OilPressEcy:n(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 104

Speed support points for oil pressure emergency shut-down curve

ff

6570 OilPressEcy:p(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..10 bar Page(s): 104

Öldruckwerte für die oil pressure emergency shutdown curve

ff

6600 ExcitControl:n(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 116, 118, 119, 121

Speed support points for excitation control ff

6620 ExcitControl:f(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 116, 117, 119, 121

Fuel values for excitation control ff

6640 ExcitControl:E(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 116, 117

Excitation signal setpoints for excitation control ff

6660 ExcitGovPI:f(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 120

Fuel values for stability curve of excitation governing in locomotive operation

ff

6680 ExcitGovPI:Corr(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..400 % Page(s): 120

Correction values for stability characteristic of excita-tion governing in locomotive operation

ff



6700 SpeedLimit1:n(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 86

Speed support points for speed dependent fuel limita-tion characteristic 1

ff

6750 SpeedLimit1:f(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 86

Fuel quantity values for speed dependent fuel limitation characteristic 1

ff

6800 SpeedLimit2:n(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s):

Speed support points for speed dependent fuel limita-tion characteristic 2

ff

86

6850 SpeedLimit2:f(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 86

Fuel quantity values for speed dependent fuel limitation characteristic 2

ff

6880 LocoNotchAssign(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..255 Page(s): 112

Notch values per bit combination ff

6900 LocoSpeedLevel(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 60

Speed values for locomotive operation ff (selection by way of speed notches)

6966 ExcitSpeedLim:n(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 124

Speed support points for speed dependent fuel limita-tion setpoint in the excitation control circuit

ff

6982 ExcitSpeedLim:E(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 124

Speed dependent limitation of excitation signal setpoint ff

7000 AmbPressRedMap:n(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 90

Speed support points for characteristic map for speed and ambient pressure dependent fuel quantity reduction

ff

7010 AmbPressRedMap:p(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 mbar Page(s): 90

Ambient pressure support points of characteristic map for speed and ambient pressure dependent fuel quantity reduction

ff

7020 AmbPressRedMap:F(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 90

Factors z of fuel quantity reduction for characteristic map of speed and ambient pressure dependent fuel quantity reduction (reduction by z %)

ff

7100 CoolTempReduce:T(x) Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 88

Coolant temperature support points of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent fuel quantity reduction

ff

7110 CoolTempReduce:F(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 88

Y-factors of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent fuel quantity reduction (reduction by y %)

ff



7120 ChAirTempReduce:T(x) Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 89

Charge air temperature support points of characteristic map for charge air temperature dependent fuel quantity reduction

ff

7130 ChAirTempReduce:F(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 89

Y-factors of characteristic map for charge air tempera-ture dependent fuel quantity reduction (reduction by y %)

ff

7140 FuelTempReduce:T(x) Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 89

Fuel temperature support points of characteristic map for fuel temperature dependent fuel quantity reduction

ff

7150 FuelTempReduce:F(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..100 % Page(s): 89

Y-factors of characteristic map for fuel temperature dependent fuel quantity reduction (reduction by y %)

ff

7500 FuelCorr:n(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 145

Speed support points for characteristic map for speed and fuel dependent correction der injection quantity

ff

7508 FuelCorr:f(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s):

Fuel quantity support points for characteristic map for speed and fuel dependent correction der injection quan-tity

ff

145

7516 FuelCorr:df(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..250 mm³/str Page(s):

Fuel offset values for characteristic map for speed and fuel dependent correction of injection quantity

ff

145

7580 FuelCorr:T(x) Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s):

Fuel temperature support points of characteristic map for fuel temperature dependent correction of injection quantity

ff

145

7590 FuelCorrFact:x(x) Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s):

X-factors of characteristic map for fuel temperature dependent correction of injection quantitythe offset is determined by x% of 7516 FuelCorr:dQ

ff

145

7700 AirMassLin:Volt(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..5 V Page(s):

Voltage value for air mass linearization curve ff

7720 AirMassLin:kg/h(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..1000 kg/h Page(s):

Air mass value for air mass linearization curve ff

7800 TempLiny:Ohm(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..60000 Ohm Page(s):

Resistence values for temperature linearization curve y ff

289, 294

7820 TempLiny:T(x) Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s):

Temperature values for temperature linearization curve y

ff

289



8100 IMDriveMap:n(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s):

Speed support points for drive map ff

109

8110 IMDriveMap:Setp(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..100 % Page(s):

Setpoint support points (accelerator pedal request) for drive map

ff

109

8120 IMDriveMap:f(x) Level: 2 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s):

Fuel values from drive map ff

109

8800 DigOuty:Param(x) Level: 6 Range: -29999..29999 Page(s): 302

Function assignment for multiple assignment to digital output y

ff

8801 DigitalOuty:Assign Level: 6 Range: -29999..29999 Page(s):

Function assignment to digital output y ff

8960 DigOuty:Mask(x) Level: 6 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s): 301

Masks for the selection of parameter value bits to assign to the digital output y

ff

9120 PEDigOuty:Param(x) Level: 6 Range: -29999..29999 Page(s):

HZM-CAN: function assignment for multiple assign-ment to the digital output y of the periphery module

ff

9200 PEDigOuty:Mask(x) Level: 6 Range: 0000..FFFF Hex Page(s):

HZM-CAN: masks for the selection of parameter value bits to assign to the digital output y

ff

9700 PEFuelOut:Assign Level: 6 Range: -29999..29999 Page(s):

HZM-CAN: assignment of fuel quantity setpoint of the periphery module

ff

9900 PIMap2:Corr PIMapSpGov2:Corr

If equipped with integrated load governor Level: 2 Range: 0..4000 Page(s):

Correction value of second stability map of speed gov-ernor, x- and y-values see 6100/6150, selection with 2842 SwitchPID2Or1

ff

16000 DelBegin1:n(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 169, 186

Speed support points of speed and fuel dependent de-livery begin base map 1

ff

16015 DelBegin1:f(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 169, 186

Fuel support points of speed and fuel dependent deliv-ery begin base map 1

ff



16030 DelBeginMap1:DB(x) Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °BTDC Page(s): 169, 186

Delivery begin values of speed and fuel dependent de-livery begin base map 1

ff

16255 DelBegin2:n(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 169, 186

Speed support points of speed and fuel dependent de-livery begin base map 2

ff

16270 DelBegin2:f(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 169, 186

Fuel support points of speed and fuel dependent deliv-ery begin base map 2

ff

16285 DelBeginMap2:DB(x) Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °BTDC Page(s): 169, 186

Delivery begin values of speed and fuel dependent de-livery begin base map 2

ff

16510 DBStart:n(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 170, 187

Speed support points of speed and fuel dependent de-livery begin map for engine start

ff

16515 DBStart:f(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 170, 187

Fuel support points of speed and fuel dependent deliv-ery begin map for engine start

ff

16520 DBStartMap:DB(x) Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °BTDC Page(s): 170, 187

Delivery begin values of speed and fuel dependent de-livery begin map for engine start

ff

16550 DBCorr:n(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 171, 188

Speed support points of speed and fuel dependent de-livery begin correction maps

ff

16558 DBCorr:f(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 171, 188

Fuel support points der speed and fuel dependent deliv-ery begin correction maps

ff

16566 DBCorrMax:DB(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..5 °crank Page(s): 171, 188

Maximum admissible speed and fuel dependent offset value for delivery begin correction

ff

16630 DBCorrCoolTmp:DB(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..5 °crank Page(s): 171, 190

Offset value for speed and fuel dependent delivery be-gin correction under coolant temperature influence

ff

16694 DBCorrCharTmp:DB(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..5 °crank Page(s): 173, 190

Offset value for speed and fuel dependent delivery be-gin correction under charge air temperature influence

ff

16758 DBCorrFuelTmp:DB(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..5 °crank Page(s): 173, 190

Offset value for speed and fuel dependent delivery be-gin correction under fuel temperature influence

ff



16822 DBCorrAmbPres:DB(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..5 °crank Page(s): 173, 190

Offset value for speed and fuel dependent delivery be-gin correction under ambient pressure influence

ff

16886 DBCorrCoolant:T(x) Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 190, 171

Coolant temperature support points of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 16630 DBCorrCoolTmp:DB

ff

16894 DBCorrCoolant:x(x) Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 190, 171

X-factors of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 16630 DBCorrCoolTmp:DB

ff

16902 DBCorrChargeAir:T(x) Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 190, 173

Charge air temperature support points of characteristic map for charge air temperature dependent correction of offset value from 16694 DBCorrCharTmp:DB

ff

16910 DBCorrChargeAir:x(x) Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 190, 173

X-factors of characteristic map for charge air tempera-ture dependent correction of offset value from 16694 DBCorrCharTmp:DB

ff

16918 DBCorrFuelTemp:T(x) Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 190, 173

Fuel temperature support points of characteristic map for fuel temperature dependent correction of offset value from 16758 DBCorrFuelTmp:DB

ff

16926 DBCorrFuelTemp:x(x) Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 190, 173

X-factors of characteristic map for fuel temperature dependent correction of offset value from 16758 DBCorrFuelTmp:DB

ff

16934 DBCorrAmbPress:p(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 mbar Page(s): 190, 173

Ambient pressure support points of characteristic map for ambient pressure dependent correction of offset value from 16822 DBCorrAmbPres:DB

ff

16942 DBCorrAmbPress:x(x) Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 190, 173

X-factors of characteristic map for ambient pressure dependent correction of offset value from 16822 DBCorrAmbPres:DB

ff

17000 DelTimeAlt:f(x) CR

DelPeriodAlt:f(x) PLD Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 181, 198

Injection quantity support points for determining injec-tion timewhen working without map

ff

17005 DelTimeAlt:DT(x) CR

DelPeriodAlt:DP(x) PLD Level: 4 Range: -2..8 ms

ff

-20..50 °crank

Injection time values for determining injection time when working without map

Page(s): 181, 198

17010 DelPeriod:DB(x) PLD Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °BTDC Page(s): 178

Delivery begin support points for delivery beginspeed and fuel dependent delivery time map

ff



17020 DelTime:p(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar Page(s): 178, 196

Rail pressure support points of fuel and rail pressure dependent delivery time base maps

ff

17020 DelPeriod:n(x) PLD Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 178, 196

Speed support points of delivery beginspeed and fuel dependent delivery time map

ff

17030 DelTime:f(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 178, 196

Fuel support points of fuel and rail pressure dependent delivery time base maps

ff

17030 DelPeriod:f(x) PLD Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 178

Fuel support points of delivery beginspeed and fuel dependent delivery time map

ff

17050 DelTime:DT(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -2..8 ms Page(s): 196

Delivery time values of fuel and rail pressure dependent delivery time base map

ff

17100 DelPeriod1[y]:DP(x) PLD Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °crank Page(s): 178

Delivery time values of delivery beginspeed and fuel dependent delivery time map y

ff

17500 DelBegTimeCorr:p(x) CR

DelBegPerCorr:n(x) PLD Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar

ff

0..4000 rpm

Rail pressure(CR)/speed (PLD) setpoint support points of characteristic maps for cylinder-specific delivery begin and delivery time correction

Page(s): 175, 182, 191, 199

17505 DelBegTimeCorr:f(x) CR

DelBegPerCorr:f(x) PLD Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 175, 182, 191, 199

Fuel support points of characteristic maps for cylinder-specific delivery begin and delivery time correction

ff

17510 DelBegCorrY:DB(x) Level: 4 Range: -5..5 °crank Page(s): 175, 191

Offset values of characteristic map for delivery begin correction at cylinder Y

ff

17590 DelTimeCorrY:DT(x) CR

DelPerCorrY:DP(x) PLD Level: 4 Range: -1..1 ms

ff

-5..5 °crank

Offset values of characteristic map for delivery time correction at cylinder Y

Page(s): 182, 199

18000 CR_PressSetp:n(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 234

Speed support points of speed and fuel dependent rail pressure setpoint map

ff



18008 CR_PressSetp:f(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 234

Fuel support points of speed and fuel dependent rail pressure setpoint map

ff

18016 CR_PressSetp:p(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar Page(s): 234

Rail pressure setpoints of speed and fuel dependent rail pressure setpoint map

ff

18080 CR_PressCorr:n(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 235

Speed support points of speed and fuel dependent rail pressure setpoint correction maps

ff

18088 CR_PressCorr:f(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 235

Fuel support points of speed and fuel dependent rail pressure setpoint correction maps

ff

18096 CR_CoolTCorr:p(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1000 bar Page(s): 235

Offset value for speed and fuel dependent rail pressure setpoint correction under coolant temperature influence

ff

18160 CR_ChAirTCorr:p(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1000 bar Page(s): 235

Offset value for speed and fuel dependent rail pressure setpoint correction under charge air temperature influ-ence

ff

18224 CR_FuelTCorr:p(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1000 bar Page(s):

Offset value for speed and fuel dependent rail pressure setpoint correction under fuel temperature influence

ff

235

18288 CR_AmbPCorr:p(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..1000 bar Page(s): 237

Offset value for speed and fuel dependent rail pressure setpoint correction under ambient pressure influence

ff

18400 CR_CorrCoolant:T(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 235

Coolant temperature support points of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 18096 CR_CoolTCorr:p

ff

18408 CR_CorrCoolant:x(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 235

X-factors of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 18096 CR_CoolTCorr:p

ff

18420 CR_CorrChargAir:T(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 235

Charge air temperature support points of characteristic map for charge air temperature dependent correction of offset value from 18160 CR_ChAirTCorr:p

ff

18428 CR_CorrChargAir:x(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 235

X-factors of characteristic map for charge air tempera-ture dependent correction of offset value from 18160 CR_ChAirTCorr:p

ff

18440 CR_CorrFuelTemp:T(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 235

Fuel temperature support points of characteristic map for fuel temperature dependent correction of offset va-lue from 18224 CR_FuelTCorr:p

ff



18448 CR_CorrFuelTemp:x(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 235

X-factors of characteristic map for fuel temperature dependent correction of offset value from 18224 CR_FuelTCorr:p

ff

18460 CR_CorrAmbPress:p(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 mbar Page(s): 237

Ambient pressure support points of characteristic map for ambient pressure dependent correction of offset value from 18288 CR_AmbPCorr:p

ff

18468 CR_CorrAmbPress:x(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 237

X-factors of characteristic map for ambient pressure dependent correction of offset value from 18288 CR_AmbPCorr:p

ff

18476 CR_PressRamp:f(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 234

Fuel support points for determining ramp steepness of rail pressure setpoint

ff

18484 CR_PressRampUp:p(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar/s Page(s): 234

Upward ramp values for determining ramp steepness of rail pressure setpoint

ff

18492 CR_PressRampDwn:p(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar/s Page(s): 234

Downward ramp values for determining ramp steepness of rail pressure setpoint

ff

18600 DelEnd:p(x) DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 4 Range: 0..2000 bar/s Page(s): 243

Rail pressure support points of fuel and rail pressure dependent delivery end map for control of the high-pressure pump

ff

18610 DelEnd:f(x) DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 243

Quantity support points of fuel and rail pressure de-pendent delivery end map for control of the high-pressure pump

ff

18620 DelEndMap:DE(x) DARDANOS MVC04-6 + CR + HPI Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °BTDC Page(s):

Delivery end values of fuel and rail pressure dependent delivery end map for control of the high-pressure pump

ff

243

26000 PrePreInjection:n(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 208

Speed support points for speed and fuel dependent de-livery begin and fuel quantity maps for pre-pre-injection

ff

26010 PrePreInjection:f(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 208

Fuel support points der speed and fuel dependent deliv-ery begin and fuel quantity maps for pre-pre-injection

ff

26020 PrePreDBMap1:DB(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °crank Page(s): 208

Pre-pre-injection delivery begin values of speed and fuel dependent delivery begin map 1 for pre-pre-injection

ff

26120 PrePreDQMap1:DQ(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 208

Pre-pre-injection fuel values of speed and fuel depend-ent delivery quantity map 1 for pre-pre-injection

ff



26220 PrePreDBMap2:DB(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °crank Page(s): 208

Pre-pre-injection delivery begin values of speed and fuel dependent delivery begin map 2 for pre-pre-injection

ff

26320 PrePreDQMap2:DQ(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 208

Pre-pre-injection delivery quantity values of speed and fuel dependent delivery quantity map 2 for pre-pre-injection

ff

26420 PrePreCorrCoolT:n(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 208

Speed support points for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction des pre-pre-injection delivery begin

ff

26430 PrePreCorrCoolT:f(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 208

Fuel support points for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of pre-pre-injection delivery begin

ff

26440 PrePreCTMap:DB(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -5..5 °crank Page(s): 208

Offset values for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of pre-pre-injection delivery begin

ff

26505 PrePreCTMap:DQ(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 208

Offset values for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of pre-pre-injection delivery quantity

ff

26570 PrePreCorrCoolT:T(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 209

Coolant temperature support points of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 26440 PrePreCTMap:DB26505 Pre-PreCTMap:DQ

ff

26580 PrePreDBCorrCT:x(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 209

X-factors of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 26440 Pre-PreCTMap:DB

ff

26590 PrePreDQCorrCT:x(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 209

X-factors of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 26505 Pre-PreCTMap:DQ

ff

26600 PreInjection:n(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 202

Speed support points of speed and fuel dependent de-livery begin and delivery quantity maps for pre-injection

ff

26610 PreInjection:f(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 202

Fuel support points of speed and fuel dependent deliv-ery begin and delivery quantity maps for pre-injection

ff

26620 PreInjDBMap1:DB(x) Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °crank Page(s): 202

Pre-injection delivery begin values of speed and fuel dependent delivery begin map 1 for pre-injection

ff



26720 PreInjDQMap1:DQ(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 202

Pre-injection delivery quantity of speed and fuel de-pendent delivery quantity map 1 for pre-injection

ff

26820 PreInjDBMap2:DB(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °crank Page(s): 202

Pre-injection delivery begin values of speed and fuel dependent delivery begin map 2 for pre-injection

ff

26920 PreInjDQMap2:DQ(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 202

Pre-injection delivery quantity of speed and fuel de-pendent delivery quantity map 2 for pre-injection

ff

27020 PreInjCorrCoolT:n(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 202, 208

Speed support points for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of pre-injection delivery begin

ff

27030 PreInjCorrCoolT:f(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 202

Fuel support points for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of pre-injection delivery begin

ff

27040 PreInjCTMap:DB(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -5..5 °crank Page(s): 202

Offset values for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of pre-injection delivery begin

ff

27105 PreInjCTMap:DQ(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 202

Offset values for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of pre-injection delivery quantity

ff

27170 PreInjCorrCoolT:T(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 202

Coolant temperature support points of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 27040 PreInjCTMap:DB27105 Pre-InjCTMap:DQ

ff

27180 PreInjDBCorrCT:x(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 202

X-factors of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 27040 Pre-InjCTMap:DB

ff

27190 PreInjDQCorrCT:x(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 203

X-factors of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 27105 Pre-InjCTMap:DQ

ff

27200 PostInjection:n(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 215

Speed support points for speed and fuel dependent de-livery begin and delivery quantity maps for post-injection

ff

27210 PostInjection:f(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 215

Fuel support points for speed and fuel dependent deliv-ery begin and delivery quantity maps for post-injection

ff



27220 PostInjDBMap1:DB(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °crank Page(s):

Post-injection delivery begin values of speed and fuel dependent delivery begin map 1 for post-injection

ff

215

27320 PostInjDQMap1:DQ(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s):

Post-injection delivery quantity of speed and fuel de-pendent delivery quantity map 1 for post-injection

ff

215

27420 PostInjDBMap2:DB(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °crank Page(s): 215

Post-injection delivery begin values of speed and fuel dependent delivery begin map 2 for post-injection

ff

27520 PostInjDQMap2:DQ(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 215

Post-injection delivery quantity of speed and fuel de-pendent delivery quantity map 2 for post-injection

ff

27620 PostInjCorrCT:n(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 215

Speed support points for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of post-injection delivery begin

ff

27630 PostInjCorrCT:f(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 215

Fuel support points for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of post-injection delivery begin

ff

27640 PostInjCTMap:DB(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -5..5 °crank Page(s): 215

Offset values for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of post-injection delivery begin

ff

27705 PostInjCTMap:DQ(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 216

Offset values for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of post-injection delivery quantity

ff

27770 PostInjCorrCT:T(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 216

Coolant temperature support points of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 27640 PostInjCTMap:DB27705 PostInjCTMap:DQ

ff

27780 PostInjDBCorrCT:x(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 216

X-factors of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 27640 PostInjCTMap:DB

ff

27790 PostInjDQCorrCT:x(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 216

X-factors of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 27705 PostInjCTMap:DQ

ff

27800 PostPostInj:n(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 222

Speed support points of speed and fuel dependent de-livery begin and delivery quantity maps for post-post-injection

ff



27810 PostPostInj:f(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 222

Fuel support points der speed and fuel dependent deliv-ery begin and delivery quantity maps for post-post-injection

ff

27820 PostPstDBMap1:DB(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °crank Page(s): 222

Post-post-injection delivery begin values of speed and fuel dependent delivery begin map 1 for post-post-injection

ff

27920 PostPstDQMap1:DQ(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 222

Post-post-injection delivery quantity of speed and fuel dependent delivery quantity map 1 for post-post-injection

ff

28020 PostPstDBMap2:DB(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -20..50 °crank Page(s): 222

Post-post-injection delivery begin values of speed and fuel dependent delivery begin map 2 for post-post-injection

ff

28120 PostPstDQMap2:DQ(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 222

Post-post-injection delivery quantity of speed and fuel dependent delivery quantity map 2 for post-post-injection

ff

28220 PostPostCorrCT:n(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm Page(s): 222

Speed support points for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of post-post-injection delivery begin

ff

28230 PostPostCorrCT:f(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 222

Fuel support points for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of post-post-injection delivery begin

ff

28240 PostPostCTMap:DB(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -5..5 °crank Page(s): 222

Offset values for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of post-post-injection delivery begin

ff

28305 PostPostCTMap:DQ(x) CR Level: 4 Range: 0..500 mm³/str Page(s): 222

Offset values for speed and fuel dependent map for coolant temperature dependent correction of post-post-injection delivery quantity

ff

28370 PostPostCorrCT:T(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..+1000 °C Page(s): 222

Coolant temperature support points of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 28240 PostPostCTMap:DB28305 PostPostCTMap:DQ

ff

28380 PostPstDBCorrCT:x(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 222

X-factors of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 28240 Post-PostCTMap:DB

ff

28390 PostPstDQCorrCT:x(x) CR Level: 4 Range: -100..100 % Page(s): 223

X-factors of characteristic map for coolant temperature dependent correction of offset value from 28305 Post-PostCTMap:DQ

ff



see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 29000 CanOp:RPDOEvtTim(x) Level: 6 Range: 0..50 s

Event time of RPDOs ff

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 29004 CanOp:TPDOTxType(x) Level: 6 Range: 0..255

Transmission type of TPDOs ff

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 29020 CanOp:TPDOEvtTim(x) Level: 6 Range: 0..50 s

Event time of TPDOs ff

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 29036 CanOp:TPDOInhTim(x) Level: 6 Range: 0..50 s

Inhibit time of TPDOs ff

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 29052 CanOp:TPDOyAssign(x) Level: 6 Range: 0..29999

Assignment of sending parameters to TPDOs y = 1..16

ff

see CANopen Manual DG 06 002-d 29116 CanOp:TPDOyHyst(x) Level: 6 Range: 0..100 %

Assignment of hysteresis values to sending parameters of TPDOs y = 1..16

ff

see DeviceNet Manual DG 06 003-d 29400 DNet:TxParamSet(x) Level: 6 Range: 0..29999

Assignment of sending parameters to polled message ff

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29600 J1939:RxTSC1_y:Src(x) Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Sender of receipt telegrams „Torque/Speed Control #1: TSC1“ y = 1..4

ff

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29601 J1939:RxTSC1_y:Scan Level: 4 Range: 0..10 s

Receiving rate of receipt telegrams „Torque/Speed Con-trol #1: TSC1“ y = 1..4

ff

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29608 J1939:RxEngTemp:Src Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Sender of receipt telegram „Engine Temperature“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29609 J1939:RxEngTemp:Scan Level: 4 Range: 0..10 s

Receiving rate of receipt telegram „Engine Tempera-ture“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29610 J1939:RxFlLevel:Src Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Sender of receipt telegram „Engine Fluid Le-vel/Pressure“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29611 J1939:RxFlLevel:Scan Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Receiving rate of receipt telegram „Engine Fluid Le-vel/Pressure“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29612 J1939:RxTFluids:Src Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Sender of receipt telegram „Transmission Fluids“



see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29613 J1939:RxTFluids:Scan Level: 4 Range: 0..10 s

Receiving rate of receipt telegram „Transmission Flu-ids“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29614 J1939:RxInltExh:Src Level: 4 Range: 0..255

Sender of receipt telegram „Inlet/Exhaust Conditions“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29615 J1939:RxInltExh:Scan Level: 4 Range: 0..10 s

Receiving rate of receipt telegram „Inlet/Exhaust Con-ditions“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29630 J1939:TxEEC1:Send Level: 4 Range: 0.. 10 s

Sending rate of send telegrams „Electronic Engine Con-troller #1: EEC1“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29631 J1939:TxEEC2:Send Level: 4 Range: 0..10 s


see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29632 J1939:TxEEC3:Send Level: 4 Range: 0.. 10 s


see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29633 J1939:TxEngTemp:Send Level: 4 Range: 0.. 10 s

Sending rate of send telegrams „Engine Temperature“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29634 J1939:TxFlLevel:Send Level: 4 Range: 0.. 10 s

Sending rate of send telegrams „Engine Fluid Le-vel/Pressure“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29635 J1939:TxTFluids:Send Level: 4 Range: 0.. 10 s

Sending rate of send telegrams „Transmission Fluids“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29636 J1939:TxAmbCond:Send Level: 4 Range: 0.. 10 s

Sending rate of send telegrams „Ambient Conditions“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29637 J1939:TxInlExh:Send Level: 4 Range: 0.. 10 s

Sending rate of send telegrams „Inlet/Exhaust Condi-tions“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29638 J1939:TxCCVehSp:Send Level: 4 Range: 0..10 s

Sending rate of send telegrams „Cruise Control/Vehicle Speed“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29639 J1939:TxEngConf:Send Level: 4 Range: 0..FFFF Hex

Sending rate of send telegrams „Engine Configuration“

see SAE J1939, Manual DG 06 004-d 29640 J1939:TxFuelEco:Send Level: 4 Range: 0..10 s

Sending rate of send telegrams „Fuel Economy“

see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d 29645 J1939:TxEngHour:Send Level: 4 Range: 0.. 10 s

Sending rate of send telegrams „Engine HoursRevolu-tions“




29646 J1939:TxSwId:Send see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d


Sending rate of send telegrams „Software Identifica-tion“

29647 J1939:TxDM1:Send see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d

Level: 4 Range: 0.. 10 s

Sending rate of send telegrams „Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes DM1“


Level: 4 Range: 0.. 10 s





29745 J1939:TorqFMap:n see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d

Level: 4 Range: 0..4000 rpm

Speed support points of nominal friction value map

29755 J1939:TorqFMap:T see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d

Level: 4 Range: -100..1000 °C

Coolant temperature support points of nominal friction value map

29760 J1939:TorqFMap:f see SAE J1939 Manual DG 06 004-d

Level: 4 Range: 0..100 %

Nominal friction values of nominal friction value map

29800 CMTel50ParamSet(x) HZM CAN Customer Module Manual DG 05007-d

ff Level: 4 Range: 0..29999

Assignment of sending parameters to send telegram 50 of HZM-CAN Customer Module







29900 BitCollParamSet(x) HZM CAN Customer Module Manual DG 05007-d CANopen GatewayManual DG 04 005-d DeviceNetManual DG 06 003-d ModbusManual DG 05 002-d

ff Level: 4 Range: -29999..29999

Assignment of bit parameters for compressed transmis-sion through the respective communication module

29950 ArgosLEDParamSet

ff Level: 4 Range: -29999..29999

Assignment of bit parameters to LEDs of ARGOS dis-play module

31 Index


31 Index

Activation of Functions 31

Actual Errors 337

Adjustment of PID parameters 74

Analogue inputs

Calibration 288

Error detection 291

Filtering 291

Reference values 288

Analogue Inputs 263

Assignment see Sensors

Calibration 264

Error Detection 267

Filtering 266

Reference Values 264

Units 263

Analogue Outputs 275

Assignment 275

Value Range 276, 277

Application 52

General application 53

Generator operation 62

Locomotive operation 59

Vehicle operation 57

Automatic Operation 140

BIP 159

Detection 159

Error Detection 163

Boost pressure dependent fuel limitation 90

Bootloader 361

Bus protocols 320

Cam driven systems 167

Camshaft index sensor 154

CAN bus protocol

CANopen 328

DeviceNet 328

HZM-CAN 320

SAE J1939 329

CAN-Bus

THESEUS 139

CANopen protocol 328

Characteristic dynamics values 75

Charge air temperature monitoring 97

Click test 35, 38, 161

Commissioning the Control 35

Common Alarm 332

Common rail system 8, 39, 153, 184

Rail pressure 229

Configuration

Hardware connections 262

Control circuit stability 74

Control Magnets 156

Click test 161

Current Path 156, 157

Error Detection 163, 245

Single Cylinder Skipping 162

Control unit

Identification 330

Reset 34

Serial number 330

Conventions 24

Coolant pressure monitoring 105

Coolant temperature monitoring 97

Correction of PID parameters 75

Current Output see Analogue Outputs

Data management 330

Data Storage 29

31 Index

DcDesk 2000 5, 29 Excitation control 115

Delivery Begin 167, 184 Excitation characteristics 117

Correction 173, 191 Excitation ramp 117

Delivery Period 176, 194 Fuel quantity offset 116, 120

Correction 181, 198 Fuel ramps 120

Default characteristic 180, 197 PID parameters 120

DeviceNet protocol 328 Excitation governing 119

Digital Generator Management 139 Excitation characteristic 121

Digital Inputs 262 Exhaust gas temperature monitoring 98

Assignment see Switching functions Flash-ROM 4

Digital output 280 Forced limitation 91

Digital Output Fuel pressure monitoring 101

Simple Allocation 301 Fuel quantity limitation 84

Digital outputs absolute 84

Multiple allocation 302 Boost pressure dependent 90

Digital Outputs 271 Indication parameters 85

Digital potentiometer Speed dependent 85

Generator Operation 130 Fuel reduction

Locomotive operation 60 Coolant temperature dependent reduction 88

Marine operation 66 Fuel temperature monitoring 99

Droop 71 Functions

offset 73 Activation 31

Emergency Alarm 332 Generator 131

Engine Generator Operation 129

current state 38, 55 Analogue Setpoint Adjustment 135

engine start 39 Automatic or Manual 140

Engine stop 55 Digital Setpoint Adjustment 136

Error Handling 331 Digital Synchronization 130

Clearing Error Memory 337 DT1-factor 81

Common Alarm 332 Integrated Power Governor 137

Configuration errors 335 Island Parallel Operation 134

Emergency Alarm 332 Knocking 138

Error Memory 337 Load Control 132

Error Parameter List 338 Load Control Enabled 132

Exception 333 Load Measuring Unit LMG 10 133


31 Index

Mains Parallel Operation 134 Controlling 109

Manual Operation 139 Fuel ramp 111

Rapid power-off 83 Fuel setpoint 109

Real Load Control 133, 134 On-load idle speed 111

Real Load Sharing 132 Speed map 109

Setpoint determination 62 Injection 156

Synchronization 129 Accuracy 148

THESEUS 139 Cam driven systems 167

Hall Sensor see Speed Pickup Common rail system 184

Hardware connections Correction of delivery begin 173

Configuration 262 Correction of delivery period 181

Hardware Inputs Correction of Delivery Period 198

Analogue Inputs 263 Delivery begin 167

Digital Inputs 262 Delivery Begin 184

PWM Input 269 Delivery Begin Correction 191

Hardware outputs Delivery Period 176, 194

Digital outputs 280 Enable 38

Injection begin see BIP Hardware Outputs

Analogue Outputs 275 Overlapping 156

Digital Outputs 271 Post-Injection 214

PWM Outputs 272 Post-post-injection 221

High-pressure pump 8 Pre-Injection 200

HZM-CAN Pre-pre-injection 207

Configuration 321 Single Cylinder Skipping 162

Customer module 328 Integrated Power Governor 137

Monitoring 322 Island Parallel Operation 134

Periphery module 325 Knocking 138

THESEUS 325 Level 27

HZM-CAN protocol 320 Limiting functions 44, 84

Identification Absolute limit 84

Communication programme 330 Boost pressure dependent fuel limitation 90

Control unit 330 Coolant temperature dependent reduction 88

Serial number 330 Forced limitation 91

Idle speed 67 Indication parameters 85

Idle/maximum speed governor 57, 108 Speed dependent injection limitation 85


31 Index

Starting quantity adjustment 38 Fuel pressure 101

Time delay on starting the engine 40 Fuel temperature 99

Load jumps Oil level 102

DT1 factor 81 oil pressure 103

Rapid power-off 83 Oil temperature 95

Load Measuring Unit LMG 10 133 Rail pressure 99

Locomotive operation Transmission oil pressure 103

Analogue slide signal 126, 127 Turbocharger oil temperature 100

Digital notch switches 60 Notch switches 60

Digital potentiometer 60 Oil level monitoring 102

Digital slide signal 125, 126 Oil pressure monitoring 103

Excitation control 115 Oil temperature monitoring 95

Excitation governing 119 Overspeed monitoring 50

Generator excitation 115 P band see Droop

Low idle speed 124 Parameter

Notch switches 60 Overview 369

Power limitation 121 Parameterdescription 369

Speed notches 112 Parameterization

Speed setpoint determination 59 Characteristics 32

Magnetic Valves see Control Magnets Check-Out 29

Mains Parallel Operation 134 DcDesk 2000 28

ManualOperation 140 EOL 29

Marine application 142 handheld programmer 28

Digital potentiometer 66 Maps 32

Father-son operation 142 Pre-Setting 28

Master-slave operation 142 Parameters 25

two engines on a single shaft 142 Injection 30

Measurement of Fly Time see BIP Level 27

Measuring methods for determining angle 148 Overview 25

Microprocessor 4 Storage 29

Monitoring functions Value Range 30

Charge air temperature 97 Phase 38

Coolant pressure monitoring 105 Pickup Wheel 148

Coolant temperature 97 Pickups

Exhaust gas temperature 98 Failure of camshaft index sensor 154


31 Index

Monitoring 48, 49, 257, 341 Assignment 272

Verification of sensor positions 155 Value Range 273, 274

PID parameters 74 Rail pressure 229

Adjustment of PID parameters 74 Rail pressure monitoring 99

Correction for static operation 80 Rapid power-off 83

Correction of PID parameters 75 Reset 34

DT1 factor in load jumps 81 ROM 4

Load-dependent correction 77 SAE J1939 protocol 329

PID Map 75 Safety instructions 1

Speed dependent correction 76 Normal operation 2

Stability map 78 Servicing and maintenance 2

Temperature-dependent correction 79 Sectional speed ramp 69

Pin assignment 306 Sensors 247

PNU-System 7, 167 Assignment 250

Post-Injection 214 Configuration 249

Post-post-injection 221 Measuring ranges 251

Power limitation Overview 247

Boost pressure dependent limitation 123 Sensor errors 252

externally activated 122 Serial number 330

Generator excitation 121 Set speed see Speed setpoint

Speed-dependent limitation 124 Setpoint adjusters 56

Temperature-dependent reduction 123 Seven Segment Display 333

PPN-System 6, 167 Seven-segment-display 49

Pre-Injection 200 Speed

Pre-pre-injection 207 Indication parameters 46

Publications 5 Overspeed monitoring 50

PWM Input 269 Pickup monitoring 48, 49, 257, 341

Assignment see Sensors Setpoint determination 52

Error Detection 270 Speed ramp for engine start 44

PWM inputs Speed sensing 47

Error detection 295 Speed switching point 50

PWM outputs Speed dependent coolant pressure monitoring 105

Assignment 296 Speed Dependent Injection Quantity Limitation 85

Value range 297, 298, 327 Speed dependent oil pressure monitoring 103

PWM Outputs 272 Speed map 109


31 Index


Speed notches 112

Determination 112

Speed pickup 35, 340

Monitoring 47

Mounting 148

Speed ramp 68

Fixed speed ramp 68

Sectional speed ramp 69

Speed setpoint

Adjustment via PC 53

Determination 52

Droop 71

Engine Start 40

Freezing the setpoint 57

General application 53

Generator operation 62

Locomotive operation 59

Maximum speed 56

Minimum speed 56

Parameters 55

Sectional speed ramp 69

Setpoint adjuster 55

Speed ramp 68

Speed ranges 55

Switching functions 53

Temperature dependent idle speed 67


Stability map 75, 78

Starting quantity adjustment 38

Fixed 39

Speed ramp 44

Temperature dependent 40, 42

Variable 40

Starting the engine 35

Switching functions 255

Assignment 258

Communication modules 259

Overview 255

Periphery module 259

Value determination 260

Synchronization

Tooth Gap 38, 148, 153

Synchronizing Unit SyG 02 131

Temperature dependent idle speed 67

Temperature-dependent correction of stability 79

THESEUS 139

Transmission oil pressure monitoring 103

Turbocharger oil temperature monitoring 100

Value Range 30


Freezing the setpoint 57

Idle/maximum speed governor 108

Setpoint determination 57

Speed map 109

Voltage Output see Analogue Outputs

Watchdog 363

basic information - ogan teknikogantek.com/photo/uploads/files/engine and turbine management... ·...

Documents